Aristotle Poetics 2

ed. Franciscus Ritter

Poetics. Aristotle. ed. Franciscus Ritter. Coloniae. 1839.

Current edition Experimental

Poetica Latine conversa (Franciscus Ritter, 1839) (OCR draft) (Latin) (Franz Ritter's Latin translation, corrected against OCR of the represented copy and aligned to the conventional Perseus chapter-and-subchapter sequence.)

Provisional text from uncorrected OCR; expect errors.

Editions (5)
Περὶ ποιητικῆς (OCR draft) (Aristotle, Poetics. Immanuel Bekker, editor, Aristotelis Opera, volume 2. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1837.) — 2 focus
Περὶ ποιητικῆς (OCR draft) Perseus (Aristotle, De arte poetica liber. Rudolf Kassel, editor. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1965. Reference edition for passage alignment.) — 2 focus
Poetics, Greek text (Ingram Bywater, 1909) (OCR draft) Experimental (Ingram Bywater's Greek text of Aristotle's Poetics, published in 1909.) — 2 focus
Poetics, Greek text (S. H. Butcher, 1911) (OCR draft) Experimental (S. H. Butcher's Greek text from Aristotle's Theory of Poetry and Fine Art, fourth edition, 1911.) — 1 focus
Poetics, Greek text (Franz Ritter, 1839) (OCR draft) Experimental (Franz Ritter's 1839 Greek edition, corrected against OCR of the represented copy and aligned to the conventional Perseus chapter-and-subchapter sequence.) — 2 focus
Translations (13)
Poetics (W. H. Fyfe) (OCR draft) Perseus (William Hamilton Fyfe's English translation of Aristotle's Poetics, Loeb Classical Library, 1939 printing.) — 2 focus
Arabic Poetics (Badawī edition, 1953) (OCR draft) (The ancient Arabic translation of Aristotle's Poetics in ʿAbd al-Raḥmān Badawī's 1953 edition.) — 2 focus
Poetics (S. H. Butcher, 1911) (OCR draft) Experimental (S. H. Butcher's English translation from Aristotle's Theory of Poetry and Fine Art, fourth edition, 1911.) — 2 focus
Aristotle on the Art of Poetry (Ingram Bywater, 1909) (OCR draft) Experimental (Ingram Bywater's English translation of Aristotle's Poetics, published in 1909.) — 2 focus
Poetics (Thomas Twining, 1789) (OCR draft) Experimental (Thomas Twining's English translation of Aristotle's Poetics, published in 1789 and aligned to the Kassel reference passage sequence.) — 2 focus
The Poetic of Aristotle (Henry James Pye, revised 1792) (OCR draft) Experimental (Henry James Pye's revised 1792 English translation, corrected against the 1788 first edition, aligned to the Kassel reference edition, and supplied with a selective apparatus of substantive 1788 readings.) — 2 focus
The Poetic of Aristotle (Theodore Alois Buckley) (OCR draft) Experimental (Theodore Alois Buckley's English translation, first published in 1850 and represented from the Henry G. Bohn 1857 printing; corrected against a second OCR and aligned to the Kassel reference passage sequence.) — 2 focus
La poëtique d'Aristote (André Dacier, 1692) (OCR draft) Experimental (André Dacier's French translation of Aristotle's Poetics, published in 1692.) — 2 focus
Poetica d'Aristotile (Bernardo Segni, 1549) (OCR draft) Experimental (Bernardo Segni's 1549 Florentine Italian translation, aligned to the Kassel reference passage sequence.) — 2 focus
De poetica (Antonio Riccobono, 1587) (OCR draft) Experimental (Antonio Riccobono's Latin translation, first published in 1587; text represented from Immanuel Bekker's 1831 edition.) — 2 focus
De arte poetica liber (William of Moerbeke, ca. 1277) (OCR draft) Experimental (William of Moerbeke's medieval Latin translation, represented by the 1953 Aristoteles Latinus edition.) — 2 focus
Arabic Poetics (Abū Bishr Mattā; Tkatsch edition) (OCR draft) Experimental (The Arabic translation attributed to Abū Bishr Mattā, edited by Jaroslaus Tkatsch in 1928 and aligned to the Kassel reference passage sequence.) — 2 focus
Arabic Poetics (Abū Bishr Mattā; Tkatsch edition, unaligned) (OCR draft) Experimental (Tkatsch's edition of the medieval Arabic translation in its original, unaligned segmentation.) — 2 focus

Commentary

Commentary on the Poetics (Ingram Bywater, 1909) (OCR draft) (Ingram Bywater's English commentary on Aristotle's Poetics.) focus

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-50

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-51

1448a1 μιμοῦνται οἱ μιμούμενοι πράττοντας : comp. 1, 1447 a 28 ; 3, 1448 a 27 ; 6, 1449 b 36 ; 1450 b 3 , 9; 1451 b 29 . This is to all appearance another reminiscence of Plato: Rep. 396 C
μιμούμενος τὸν ἀγαθὸν ἀσφαλῶς τε καὶ ἐμφρόνως πράττοντα
. — 603 C
πράττοντας, φαμέν, ἀνθρώπους μιμεῖται ἡ μιμητικὴ βιαίους ἢ ἑκουσίας πράξεις
.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-52

1448a2 ἢ σπουδαίους ἢ φαύλους is explained by what follows,
κακίᾳ γὰρ καὶ ἀρετῇ τὰ ἤθη διαφέρουσι πάντες
(comp. 5, 1449 a 32 ). This, Aristotle adds, is the primary and most universal distinction between man and man; nearly all other distinctions of character may be classed under this one common head. Pol. 5. 2, 1303 b 15
μεγίστη μὲν οὖν ἴσως διάστασις ἀρετὴ καὶ μοχθηρία
.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-53

1448a3 ἀκολουθεῖ : De part. an. 2. 1, 646 a 17
αἱ δ᾿ ἄλλαι διαφοραὶ ταύταις ἀκολουθοῦσιν
.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-54

1448a4 ἤτοι βελτίονας ... τοιούτους , scil. μιμοῦνται οἱ μιμούμενοι. We have been prepared for this distinction by the preceding
ἐπεὶ μιμοῦνται οἱ μιμούμενοι πράττοντας, ἀνάγκη δὲ τούτους ἢ σπουδαίους ἢ φαύλους εἶναι
; but the third possibility, that the personages represented may be on the same level as ourselves ( ἢ καὶ τοιούτους), is a new point, which is felt to require a word of proof. Aristotle accordingly reminds us of a similar fact in painting (a5): the personages in the works of Dionysius are just like ourselves ( ὁμοίους).

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-55

1448a5 ὥσπερ οἱ γραφεῖς Plutarch, who defines poetry as a μιμητική τέχνη καὶ δύναμις ἀντίστροφος τῇ ζωγραφίᾳ, quotes a saying, commonly attributed to Simonides,
ζωγραφίαν μὲν εἶναι φθεγγομένην τὴν ποίησιν, ποίησιν δὲ σιγῶσαν τὴν ζωγραφίαν
( De aud. poet. 17 F ). The comparison is of very frequent occurrence in Plato (v. Rep. 377 E , 597 E , 603 B , 605 A etc.).

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-56

γραφεῖς The Attic form γραφῆς has survived in the text of Meteor. 3. 2, 372 a 7 , and De sensu 3, 440 a 8 .
1448a6

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-57

Πολύγνωτος : comp. 6, 1450 a 27 .

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-58

Παύσων : Pol. 8. 5, 1340 a 36
δεῖ μὴ τὰ Παύσωνος θεωρεῖν τοὺς νέους, ἀλλὰ τὰ Πολυγνώτου κἂν εἴ τις ἄλλος τῶν γραφέων ἢ τῶν ἀγαλματοποιῶν ἐστιν ἠθικός
. If he was the same as the Pauson of Aristoph. Ach. 854 , he must have had a certain sort of affinity to our modern caricaturists; it will be seen also that Aristotle regards his work as the analogue of that of the parodists and comic poets in literature.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-59

Διονύσιος δὲ ὁμοίους εἴκαζεν ὁμοίους, as the context shows (comp. τοιούτους in a5), means 'like ourselves', neither better nor worse than the average man. εἰκάζειν (= to produce an εἰκών or portrait) is practically synonymous with μιμεῖσθαι, the word ordinarily used by Aristotle even of a painter. In 1, 1447 a 19 he has the more precise expression, μιμοῦνται ἀπεικάζοντες. The Dionysius meant is Dionysius of Colophon. The epithet ἀνθρωπογράφος ( Pliny N. H. 35. 113 ) would certainly seem peculiarly applicable to Aristotle's Dionysius, as a realistic painter, whose gods and heroes were too like ordinary men.
1448a8

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-60

ἕτερα is qualified and explained by the τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον that follows. The personages represented differ in the way just described, i. e. as being either better or worse than, or on the same level as, the ordinary man.
1448a9

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-61

ὀρχήσει : Plato Laws 814 E
δύο μὲν αὐτῆς (scil. ὀρχήσεως) εἴδη χρὴ νομίζειν εἶναι, τὴν μὲν τῶν καλλιόνων σωμάτων ἐπὶ τὸ σεμνὸν μιμουμένην, τὴν δὲ τῶν αἰσχιόνων ἐπὶ τὸ φαῦλον
(comp. also 655 C ; 798 D ). For the kind of dancing Aristotle has in mind here see on 1, 1447 a 27 .

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-62

αὐλήσει καὶ κιθαρίσει : see on 1, 1447 a 15 .
1448a10

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-63

τῷ περὶ τοὺς λόγους δὲ καὶ τὴν ψιλομετρίαν is a general expression for the group of purely literary imitative arts, which were described in 1, 1447 b 29 as using τοῖς λόγοις ψιλοῖς ἢ τοῖς μέτροις. Ψιλομετρία—a term misunderstood by later writers (v. Bernays, Heraklit. Briefe p. 116 )—means verse without music ( χωρὶς ἁρμονίας; see on 1447 a 29 ). The qualifying addition 'without music' might no doubt have been appended to τοὺς λόγους also ; but it is more wanted where it is, so as to distinguish the verse that was simply recited from the verse that was sung. From this point onward Aristotle ignores the prose imitations (the Mime and the Dialogue), and deals only with 'poetry', the versified forms of imitative literature ( μίμησις ἐν μέτροις; see on 1, 1447 b 23 ). τῷ περὶ τοὺς λόγους = ἐν τῷ περὶ τοὺς λόγους, the preposition being understood from the preceding context (comp. Bon. Ind. 63 b 40 ). The restoration of τῷ for τὸ in 25, 1461 a 33 admits of the same explanation. For τὸ περί τι in the sense of 'the class comprising' see Plato Soph. 221 B , Symp. 205 , Rep. 394 B .

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-64

1448a12 Κλεοφῶν In 22, 1458 a 20 his diction is said to be ταπεινή. Aristotle notes elsewhere the ludicrous effect his occasional attempts at fine language produced owing to the incongruity between the expression and the matter he dealt with: Rhet. 3. 7, 1408 a 10
τὸ δὲ πρέπον ἕξει ἡ λέξις, ἐὰν ᾖ ... τοῖς ὑποκειμένοις πράγμασιν ἀνάλογον. τὸ δ᾿ ἀνάλογόν ἐστιν ἐὰν μήτε περὶ εὐόγκων αὐτοκαβδάλως λέγηται μήτε περὶ εὐτελῶν σεμνῶς, μηδ᾿ ἐπὶ τῷ εὐτελεῖ ὀνόματι ἐπῇ κόσμος. εἰ δὲ μή, κωμῳδία φαίνεται, οἷον ποιεῖ Κλεοφῶν· ὁμοίως γὰρ ἔνια ἔλεγε καὶ εἰ εἶπειεν ἂν πότνια συκῆ
. In the present passage we are told that his personages were 'like ourselves' ( ὁμοίους), neither better than the ordinary man, like those in Homer, nor worse, like those in a parody. From the context as well as the company in which he is placed it is plain that he is to be regarded as a sort of epic poet. He is taken as the representative of the prosaic Epic—the Epic of the commonplace, as distinct from the noble Epic of Homer and the debased Epic known as parody. His work being put under the head of ψιλομετρία, 'verse without the accompaniment of song,' he cannot have been in Aristotle's view either a lyric or a dramatic poet. The notion that he was the writer of a dialogue entitled the 'Mandrobulus' is based on an erroneous interpretation of Soph. el. 15, 174 b 19 .

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-65

Ἡγήμων : see Brandt, Parodorum epicorum reliq., p. 37 , and Kock, CAF. 1, p. 700 . Parody was an element in the humour of the Old Comedy, as also of Epicharmus; and there were certainly others before Hegemon who travestied Homer. What Aristotle means, however, is that Hegemon was the first to take up parody as a special form of poetical literature. According to Athenaeus 699 A he was the first to present a parody in the poetical contests in the theatre:
πρῶτος εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τοὺς ἀγῶνας τοὺς θυμελικοὺς Ἡγήμων, καὶ παρ᾿ Ἀθηναίοις ἐνίκησεν ἄλλαις τε παρῳδίαις καὶ τῇ Γιγαντομαχία
.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-66

1448a13 παρῳδίας A παρῳδία, in Aristotle's sense of the word, is a mock epic, a poem on an ignoble theme in epic language and metre.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-67

Νικοχάρης : he may perhaps be the same as the comic poet of the same name ( Kock, CAF. 1 p. 770 ). We know nothing more of his work, and there is some uncertainty even as to its title. Δειλιάς (which is assonant to Ιλιάς) would mean, as Twining says, the 'Poltroniad'; Δηλιάς, either the 'Tale of Delos', or the 'Tale of Delium'; it is practically impossible to say which.
1448a15
ὥσπερ γᾶς κτἑ. It is important to bear in mind that in A the ὥσπερ here ends a line, and that the γᾶς stands at the beginning of another. The better apographs have either ὡς περγᾶς or ὡς πέργας. The reading ὡς Πέρσας καὶ Κύκλωπας was probably due to a corrector who knew of the Πέρσαι as a nome of Timotheus. Vahlen suggests that ὥσπερ γὰρ Κύκλωπας should be restored on the supposition (1) that Timotheus and Philoxenus may represent the ignoble Nome and Dithyramb, and (2) that instances of the opposite were not wanted, as the Nome and Dithyramb were so generally associated with noble subjects. Castelvetro was probably right in recognizing in γᾶς the second half of Ἀργᾶς, the name of one notorious in antiquity as the writer of a debased kind of nome. The text, when entire, may have given the name of another writer of nomes, who was put in contrast with Argas, and also the name of a common subject differently treated by the two poets ( ὥσπερ (-- καὶ Ἀργᾶς).

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-68

Κύκλωπας Polyphemus must have been a stock-subject in literature, as there were dramas with the title Κύκλωψ by Epicharmus, Aristias, and Antiphanes, as well as the existing play of Euripides. The plural here denotes not several Cyclopses, but Polyphemus as treated in different poems. For the Κύκλωψ ἢ Γαλάτεια of Philoxenus see Bergk, LG. 3 p. 609 . It seems to have been a covert satire on the elder Dionysius; we may suppose, then, that Philoxenus made his Cyclops an ignoble personage, χείρων ἢ καθ᾿ ἡμᾶς.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-69

ἐν ταύτῃ δὲ τῇ διαφορᾷ Vahlen retains the traditional ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ διαφορᾷ, taking it to mean 'in ipsa quam dico differentia'.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-70

1448a18 βούλεται : this is their general tendency and intention, though there may be exceptions to the rule. τῶν νῦν replaces the ἢ καθ᾿ ἡμᾶς in * 4 . Aristotle is thinking more especially of the chief personages in Tragedy, who belong in most instances to the heroic age.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-71

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-72

1448a19 τούτων τρίτη διαφορά : τούτων τῶν λεχθεισῶν μιμήσεων in a7 .

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-73

ἕκαστα τούτων : the objects with the possibilities of difference described in chap. 2. Though the objects of the poetic imitations are properly persons, the neuter is used as a more general way of designating them. It reappears in the formula (repeated from 1, 1447 a 17 ) ἐν οἷς τε καὶ ἃ καὶ ὥς in a 25 .
1448a20

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-74

τὰ αὐτὰ μιμεῖσθαι The subject understood with μιμεῖσθαι is τὸν μιμούμενον; and the participles which follow in 21-22 are in apposition to that. In a 23 , however, where Aristotle is dealing with the Drama, he has to put the participles in the plural ( ὡς πράττοντας), and the subject is definitely mentioned as τοὺς μιμουμένους.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-75

1448a21 ὁτὲ μὲν ἀπαγγέλλοντα κτέ. The amended reading (ἢ) ὁτὲ μὲν ἀπαγγέλλοντα ὁτὲ δὲ ἕτερόν τι γιγνόμενον is anticipated in Goulston's paraphrase. As Aristotle began by speaking of the objects imitated in the neuter, he describes the imitator as identifying himself with 'something else' ( ἕτερόν τι). The statement is on the same lines as that in Plato Rep. 392 D—394 D , which distinguishes between three forms of διήγησις: (1) simple narration, (2) imitative or dramatic narration, and (3) the mixed manner, which we see in Homer. Aristotle's ἀπαγγέλλοντα recalls Plato's δι᾿ ἀπαγγελίας αὐτοῦ τοῦ ποιητοῦ. Plato uses μιμεῖσθαι only for the dramatic mode, whereas Aristotle uses it in a much wider sense. Aristotle's general view of the Epic is that it comes under the head of narrative, as distinct from dramatic, imitation ( 5, 1449 b 11 ). Homer is said to reduce the element of narrative to a minimum, taking every opportunity of making his personages come forward and speak for themselves, just as though they were characters in a play.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-76

1448a22 ὡς τὸν αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ μεταβάλλοντα : another instance of parallelismus antitheticus (see on 1, 1447 a 18 ) ; it is the converse in sense of De caelo 2. 6, 288 a 31
εἴτε... ἀλλοιοῖτο καὶ μὴ διαμένοι τὸ αὐτό
. The antithesis is between what the poet says in propria persona and what he says in an assumed character.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-77

1448a23 ἢ πάντα ὡς πράττοντας καὶ ἐνεργοῦντας τοὺς μιμουμένους πάντα, the correction of Casaubon, is in apposition to the τὰ αὐτά in 20, and serves to distinguish the Drama from the Epic, which is at best only partially dramatic. If πάντας be retained, it has to be taken with τοὺς μιμουμένους as the object. However, τὰ αὐτά is too important logically to be ignored. In this third participial clause the participles are in the plural, and the grammatical subject ( τοὺς μιμουμένους) is expressed. The explanation is probably that Aristotle is thinking for the moment of the actors rather than of the poet himself. A play is conceived to be something which 'they act', i.e., with a plurality of imitators concerned in it: comp. 6, 1449 b 26
δρώντων
; b 31
πράττοντες ποιοῦνται τὴν μίμησιν
; 1450 a 21
πράττουσιν
. The use of the present of μιμεῖσθαι as a passive is not impossible, but there is no clear instance of it. In 15, 1454 b 26 , where Aristotle wants a present passive, he uses a periphrasis, ὁ τὴν μίμησιν παρέχων.
1448a24

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-78

ἐν τρισὶ δὴ ταύταις κτέ. Comp. 1, 1447 a 16
διαφέρουσι δὲ ἀλλήλων τρισίν κτέ.
. The preposition here denotes the sphere within which the poetic imitation works. ταύταις is the real subject and preparative to the enumeration ἐν οἷς τε καὶ ἃ καὶ ὡς.
1448a25

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-79

ὥστε τῇ μὲν κτἑ. is a sort of corollary to what was said in chap. 2 and the opening section of chap. 3. Aristotle is now viewing plays in their relation to the authors, and the actors are ignored. In chap. 6 there are several instances of his passing unconsciously from the one point of view to the other.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-80

1448a27 πράττοντας γὰρ μιμοῦνται The dramatic poet makes his personages appear on the stage and go through a semblance of action. The difference between Aristotle's language here and in 23 is to be noted: the dramatic poet μιμεῖται πράττοντας; the actor μιμεῖται ὡς πράττων.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-81

1448a28 δρῶντας This reminds Aristotle of a current explanation of the word drama, ὅτι μιμοῦνται δρώντας, and leads to a digression on the Dorian claim to the discovery of the Drama. They support this by an appeal to language, maintaining that κωμῳδία and the general term δράμα are of Dorian origin. This passage is the source of corresponding statements in the grammarians, such as Anon. De Comoedia
τὴν κωμῳδίαν ηὑρῆσθαί φασιν ὑπὸ Σουσαρίωνος
. — Diomedes 486 P.
Comoedia dicta ἀπὸ τῶν κωμῶν
.
1448a31

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-82

οἱ Μεγαρεῖς On the Megarian Comedy see Meineke, FCG. I p. 18 . The Megarian claim is noted by the anonymous commentator on Eth. N. 4. 6, 1123 a 24 . Aristotle says nothing about Susarion here or in chap. 5.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-83

1448a32 τῆς παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς δημοκρατίας Megara is said to have expelled the tyrant Theagenes about B.C. 600.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-84

1448a32 οἱ ἐκ Σικελίας , the Megarians of Megara Hyblaea—literally, the Megarians 'on the Sicilian side'. For this use of the preposition comp. Pol. 8. 7, 1341 a 28
οἱ ἐκ φιλοσοφίας
, 'those on the philosophic side'.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-85

1448a33 Ἐπίχαρμος In 5, 1449 b 6 he and Phormis are said to have been the first to discard the Comedy of personalities ; so that from this point of view he was the forerunner of the New Comedy, i. e. of what Aristotle regards as Comedy proper. Plato had already given him the premier place in Comedy: Theaet. 152 E
τῶν ποιητῶν οἱ ἄκροι τῆς ποιήσεως ἑκατέρας, κωμῳδίας μὲν Ἐπίχαρμος, τραγῳδίας δὲ Ὅμηρος
. The Sicilian origin of Comedy is often asserted by post-Aristotelian writers: Theocritus Ep. 17. 1
ὁ τὰν κωμῳδίαν εὑρὼν Ἐπίχαρμος
; Solinus 5. 13
Hic [scil. in Sicilia] primum inventa comoedia
; Themistius Or. 27, 406 Dind.
καὶ κωμῳδία τὸ παλαιὸν ἤρξατο μὲν ἀπὸ Σικελίας· ἐκεῖθεν γὰρ ἤστην Ἐπίχαρμός τε καὶ Φόρμις ... κάλλιον δὲ Ἀθήναζε συνηυξήθη
; Prol. de Comoedia 3 = Kaibel CGF. p. 7
Ἐπίχαρμος· οὗτος πρῶτος τὴν κωμῳδίαν διερριμμένην ἀνεκτήσατο πολλὰ προσφιλοτεχνήσας
; Suidas s.v. Ἐπίχαρμος
εὗρε τὴν κωμῳδίαν ἐν Συρακούσαις ἅμα Φόρμῳ
.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-86

1448a34 Χιωνίδου καὶ Μάγνητος From this mention of them here, as also from the allusion to them further on, in 5, 1449 b 3 , it is clear that Aristotle knows of no Attic writers of Comedy earlier than Chionides and Magnes ; and even these apparently are mere names to him. Magnes is expressly described by Suidas as a much younger man than Epicharmus:
ἐπιβάλλει δ᾿ Ἐπιχάρμῳ νέος πρεσβύτῃ
. Suidas' statement that Epicharmus was producing comedies at Syracuse six years before the Persian war (i. e. in B.C. 485) is of some importance, as showing that Epicharmus was conceived to be coeval with a generation at Athens anterior to Chionides and the regular drama which began with him. There is no very serious difference, therefore, between Suidas and Aristotle as to the priority of Epicharmus.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-87

καὶ τῆς τραγῳδίας = τῆς δὲ τραγῳδίας. Vahlen illustrates the change of construction by Soph. el. 11, 171 b 8
συλλογισμὸς ἐριστικὸς καὶ σοφιστικός ἐστιν εἷς μὲν ὁ φαινόμενος συλλογισμός ... καὶ ὅσοι μὴ ὄντες κτέ.
, where καὶ ὅσοι seems to stand for ἕτεροι δὲ ὅσοι.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-88

ἔνιοι , i. e. the Sicyonians: Herod. 5. 67
τά τε δὴ ἄλλα οἱ Σικυώνιοι ἐτίμων τὸν Ἀδρηστον καὶ δὴ πρὸς τὰ πάθεα αὐτοῦ τραγικοῖσι χοροῖσι ἐγέραιρον
. Themistius Or. 27, 406 Dind.
καὶ τραγῳδίας εὑρεταὶ μὲν Σικυώνιοι, τελεσιουργοὶ δὲ Ἀττικοὶ ποιηταί
. — Suidas s.v. Θέσπις
τραγικὸς ἑκκαιδέκατος ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου γενομένου τραγῳδιοποιοῦ ᾿Επιγένους τοῦ Σικυωνίου τιθέμενος
.
1448a36

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-89

περιοικίδας : Pol. 6. 5, 1320 b 6
ἀεὶ γάρ τινας ἐκπέμποντες τοῦ δήμου πρὸς τὰς περιοικίδας ποιοῦσιν εὐπόρους
. As understood at Athens the term κώμη meant a quarter of the city, as distinct from the outlying townships ( δῆμοι): Plato Laws 746 D
φρατρίας καὶ δήμους καὶ κώμας
. — Isocrates 149 A
διελόμενοι τὴν μὲν πόλιν κατὰ κώμας τὴν δὲ χώραν κατὰ δήμους
.

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-90

1448a37 κωμῳδούς ἀπὸ τοῦ κωμάζειν. The connexion is indirectly implied in the juxtaposition of the two words in the law cited in Demosthenes 21. 10
ἡ πομπὴ καὶ οἱ παῖδες καὶ ὁ κῶμος καὶ οἱ κωμῳδοὶ καὶ οἱ τραγῳδοί
.

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-91

1448b1 καὶ τὸ ποιεῖν κτέ. The argument comes practically to this: Plays confessessly represent actions: now if they had been originally an Athenian invention, one would expect them to have been called πράγματα rather than δράματα; πράττειν being the ordinary Athenian word for to act. That Aristotle does not accept this view of δρᾶν and πράττειν is indirectly shown by his own use of the words. He has just said (a27) πράττοντας καὶ δρῶντας, and in his definition of Tragedy ( 6, 1449 b 26 ) his word is δρώντων, though he might easily have said πραττόντων.
1448b3

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-92

τῆς μιμήσεως is the genitive after τῶν διαφορῶν. Vahlen illustrates the order by Plato, Phil. 17 C
ἐπειδὰν λάβῃς τὰ διαστήματα ὁπόσα ἐστὶ τὸν ἀριθμὸν τῆς φωνῆς
.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-93

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-94

1448b4 ἐοίκασι Setting aside the antiquarian questions raised in chap. 3, Aristotle asserts that the birth of poetry was due to large natural causes. The origin of poetry generally ( γεννῆσαι μὲν ὅλως) is attributable to the imitative instinct in all men. The origin of the two great kinds of poetry ( διεσπάσθη δὲ b24), of which Tragedy and Comedy were the ultimate developments, is attributable to the personal tendencies and differences of character in the individual poets ( τὰ οἰκεῖα ἤθη b24).

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-95

1448b5 αἰτίαι δύο The two causes are those mentioned in the immediate context, τὸ μιμεῖσθαι (b5) and τὸ χαίρειν τοῖς μιμήμασι (b8). These Aristotle regards as two distinguishable facts in human nature. τὸ χαίρειν τοῖς μιμήμασι, instead of coming in as a mere afterthought after τὸ μιμεῖσθαι, involves a different idea, and relates to a different class of persons—the public interested in works of art, as distinct from the artists who produce them.
1448b7
μιμητικώτατον : Probl. 30. 6, 956 a 14
Διὰ τί ἀνθρώπῳ πειστέον δὴ μᾶλλον ἢ ἄλλῳ ζῴῳ; ... ἢ ὅτι μιμητικώτατον;
. μανθάνειν γὰρ δύναται διὰ τοῦτο. Vahlen illustrates this use of the neuter singular by De somn. 3, 457 b 24
καταπίπτουσι ... οἱ ἄνθρωποι, μόνον γὰρ ὀρθὸν τῶν ζῴων
, and Pol. 1. 2, 1253 a 16
τοῦτο γὰρ πρὸς τἆλλα ζῷα τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἴδιον, τὸ μόνον ἀγαθοῦ καὶ κακοῦ ... αἴσθησιν ἔχειν
.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-96

1448b8 μαθήσεις : Quintilian 10. 2, 1
Neque enim dubitari potest quin artis pars magna contineatur imitatione. nam ut invenire primum fuit estque praecipuum, sic ea quae bene inventa sunt utile sequi
.
1448b9

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-97

σημεῖον A σημεῖον is that which proves or confirms a proposition; an αἴτιον, something that explains or gives a reason for it. Aristotle defines a σημεῖον in An. pr. 2. 27, 70 a 7
σημεῖον δὲ βούλεται εἶναι πρότασις ἀποδεικτικὴ ἀναγκαία ἢ ἔνδοξος
.

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-98

ἐπὶ τῶν ἔργων : 're ipsa'. τῶν ἔργων here is often rendered by 'works of art'.

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-99

1448b10 γὰρ αὐτὰ λυπηρῶς ὁρῶμεν : Rhet. 1. 11, 1371 b 4
ἐπεὶ δὲ τὸ μανθάνειν τε ἡδὺ καὶ τὸ θαυμάζειν, καὶ τὰ τοιάδε ἀνάγκη ἡδέα εἶναι οἷον τό τε μεμιμημένον ... καὶ πᾶν ὃ ἂν εὖ μεμιμημένον ᾖ, κἂν μὴ ἡδὺ αὐτὸ τὸ μεμιμημένον· οὐ γὰρ ἐπὶ τούτῳ χαίρει, ἀλλὰ συλλογισμός ἐστιν ὅτι τοῦτο ἐκεῖνο, ὥστε μανθάνειν τι συμβαίνει
. — De part. an. 1. 5, 645 a 11
καὶ γὰρ ἂν εἴη παράλογον καὶ ἄτοπον, εἰ τὰς μὲν εἰκόνας αὐτῶν [i.e. τῶν ζῴων τῶν μὴ κεχαρισμένων] θεωροῦντες χαίρομεν ὅτι τὴν δημιουργήσασαν τέχνην συνθεωροῦμεν
.

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-100

1448b12 ἀτιμοτάτων : De anima 1. 2, 404 b 3
ἐν ἅπασι γὰρ ὑπάρχειν αὐτὸν [i.e. νοῦν] τοῖς ζώοις, καὶ μεγάλοις καὶ μικροῖς καὶ τιμίοις καὶ ἀτιμοτέροις
. — De part. an. 1. 5, 645 a 15 .
1448b13

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-101

καὶ τοῦτο . For the conjunction comp. 13, 1453 a 17
σημεῖον δὲ καὶ τὸ γιγόμενον
. — De somno 3, 456 a 28
σημεῖον δὲ τούτων καὶ τὰ ὑπνωτικά
. — Meteor. 2. 8, 367 a 11
τεκμήριον δ᾿ ἐστὶ καὶ τὸ γιγνόμενον
.
1448b16

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-102

θεωροῦντας μανθάνειν : comp. Rhet. 1. c. , and Plato Rep. 475 D
οἱ ... φιλοθεάμονες πάντες ἔμοιγε δοκοῦσι τῷ καταμανθάνειν χαίροντες τοιοῦτοι εἶναι
. Our pleasure in the contemplation of a picture or other work of imitative art is explained here to be the natural concomitant of an intellectual act, the discovery or recognition on our part of the meaning of the picture.
1448b17

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-103

οὐχ ᾗ . οὐχὶ for οὐχ ᾗ is found in Kb in Eth. N. 8. 12, 1161 b 1, 18 and in D (the Marcianus) in An. post. 1. 23, 84 b 8 .
1448b20

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-104

κατὰ φύσιν δὲ ὄντος ἡμῖν τοῦ μιμεῖσθαι What Aristotle is now considering is the evolution of the poet ; and he tells us that the imitative aptitude of the poet is only a higher and more developed form of that natural aptitude for imitation which is common to all mankind.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-105

καὶ τῆς ἁρμονίας καὶ τοῦ ῥυθμοῦ seem to be added as an afterthought, in recognition of the historical connexion between music and poetry. Except in its lyric forms, however, poetry was now no longer combined with music ; in Aristotle's view, also, even metre is at the most only one of its accidents ( 1, 1447 b 11 ).

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-106

1448b22 ἐξ ἀρχῆς is much the same thing as ἐν ἀρχῇ. The antithesis between ἐξ ἀρχῆς πεφυκότες and προάγοντες will be not unlike that in Metaph. A 2, 982 b 13
ἐξ ἀρχῆς μὲν τὰ πρόχειρα τῶν ἀπόρων θαυμάσαντες, εἶτα κατὰ μικρὸν οὕτω προϊόντες
.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-107

αὐτά : loosely used for 'their work' or 'performances'; it anticipates what is termed in the next line 'their improvisations'. προάγειν is here (and again in 4, 1449 a 13 ) a transitive verb. The meaning of the word in the present context is to 'advance', or 'carry a stage further', as may be seen from the parallel in Soph. el. 33, 183 b
οἱ μὲν γὰρ τὰς ἀρχὰς εὑρόντες παντελῶς ἐπὶ μικρόν τι προήγαγον· οἱ δὲ νῦν εὐδοκιμοῦντες ... οὕτως ηὐξήκασιν
.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-108

1448b23 αὐτοσχεδιασμάτων On the verb αὐτοσχεδιάζειν = 'to speak off-hand, without premeditation or previous study'. The fact is described in the Homeric Hymn to Hermes 54
θεὸς δ᾿ ὑπὸ καλὸν ἄειδεν, ἐξ αὐτοσχεδίης πειρώμενος
. The phallic-song, in which Aristotle finds the germ of Comedy, was sometimes described as an ᾠδὴ αὐτοσχέδιος.
1448b24

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-109

διεσπάσθη δὲ corresponds with the γεννῆσαι μὲν ὅλως in b4. κατὰ τὰ οἰκεῖα ἤθη: comp. Plato Rep. 396 C sqq. .

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-110

1448b25 τὰς καλὰς ... πράξεις καὶ τὰς τῶν τοιούτων As Düntzer and Bernays have shown, this is not a tautology, as the actions of those who are καλοὶ (τῶν τοιούτων) are not always καλαὶ πράξεις; comp. Plato Rep. 396 C
μάλιστα μὲν μιμούμενος τὸν ἀγαθὸν ἀσφαλῶς τε καὶ ἐμφρόνως πράττοντα, ἐλάττω δὲ καὶ ἧττον ἢ ὑπὸ νόσων ἢ ὑπὸ ἐρώτων ἐσφαλμένον ἢ καὶ ὑπὸ μέθης ἢ τινος ἄλλης ξυμφορᾶς
.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-111

1448b27 ψόγους has the same same concrete sense of 'invectives' in Plato Laws 829 C
ἐγκώμιά τε καὶ ψόγους ποιεῖν
. The earliest, as well as the most eminent representative of this kind of literature, was Archilochus, the
ψογερὸς Ἀρχίλοχος βαρυλόγοις ἔχθεσιν πιαινόμενος
of Pindar ( Pyth. 2. 100 ).

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-112

ὕμνους καὶ ἐγκώμια : Plato Rep. 607 A
ὕμνους θεοῖς καὶ ἐγκώμια τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς
. — Etym. Gud. s. v. ὕμνος
Ὕμνος ἐγκωμίου διαφέρει καθὸ ὁ μὲν ὕμνος ἐπὶ θεοῦ λέγεται τὸ δὲ ἐγκώμιον ἐπὶ ἀνθρώπου
. On hymns and encomia as very primitive forms of Greek poetry see Bergk, Gr. Litt. 1 p. 423.
1448b29

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-113

εἰκὸς δὲ εἶναι πολλούς , scil. τοιούτους; comp. Goulston's version, 'verisimile autem est, qui talia condiderint, extitisse multos'. Aristotle says this because he thinks that even in those days the baser sort ( οἱ εὐτελέστεροι b26) were probably in a majority ; he has no romantic illusions as to the superiority of the men of an earlier age ( Pol. 2. 8, 1269 a 5 ). On the pre-Homeric poets, to whom Aristotle refers, comp. Sextus Emp. Adv. math. 1. 204
οὐχ ὑπὸ πάντων ὁμολογεῖται ποιητὴς ἀρχαιότατος εἶναι Ὅμηρος· ἔνιοι γὰρ Ησίοδον προήκειν τοῖς χρόνοις λέγουσιν, Λίνον τε καὶ Ὀρφέα καὶ Μουσαῖον καὶ ἄλλους παμπληθεῖς
: see also Bernhardy Gr. Litt. 1 p. 308. Aristotle, however, was quite aware that the writings which bore the names of these legendary poets were not really by them ( H. A. 6. 6, 563 a 18 ; see Bernays, Dialoge d. Aristot. p. 95).
1448b30

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-114

ἐκείνου ὁ Μαργίτης : Eustratius on Eth. N. 6. 7, 1141 a 14 (p. 320 30 Heylb.)
παράγει . . . καί τινα ποίησιν Μαργίτην ὀνομαζομένην Ὁμήρου. μνημονεύει δ᾿ αὐτῆς οὐ μόνον αὐτὸς Ἀριστοτέλης ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ Περὶ ποιητικῆς ἀλλὰ καὶ Ἀρχίλοχος καὶ Κρατίνος καὶ Καλλίμαχος ἐν τῷ ἐπιγράμματι καὶ μαρτυροῦσιν εἶναι Ὁμήρου τὸ ποίημα
. On the Margites, which Aristotle thus attributes to Homer, see Kinkel, EGF. p. 64. This statement in the Poetics does not throw any light on the question of the original form of the Margites, whether the iambic lines in it were a primitive part of the poem, or subsequently added by Pigres (see Goettling, Op. Acad. p. 167, and Hiller, N. Jahrb. f. Phil. 1887 p. 13 for a discussion of it) ; it stands in a parenthesis, and must not be taken in any direct connexion with the ἐν οἷς... ἰαμβεῖον ἦλθε μέτρον that follows.

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-115

καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα refers to writings more or less like the Margites by post-Homeric poets—not to other minor poems of a light order attributable to Homer himself, as Bergk (Gr. Litt. 1 p. 775) suggests.

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-116

ἐν οἷς = ἐν δὲ τούτοις, scil. τοῖς ψόγοις, the relative beginning a new sentence, as in 24, 1459 b 12
οἷς ἅπασιν
. — Phys. 8. 3, 253 b 12
πρὸς οὓς . . οὐ χαλεπὸν ἀπαντῆσαι
. — Metaph. Θ 3, 1046 b 33
οἷς τὰ συμβαίνοντα ἄτοπα οὐ χαλεπὸν ἰδεῖν
. — Λ 8, 1074 b 8
ὧν εἴ τις χωρίσας αὐτὸ λάβοι μόνον τὸ πρῶτον
.

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-117

1448b31 κατὰ τὸ ἁρμόττον : 17, 1455 b 10
κατὰ τὸ εἰκός
. — Rhet. 1. 1, 1355 a 22 and 9, 1367 b 12
κατὰ τὸ προσῆκον
(opposed to παρὰ τὸ προσῆκον). — Eth. N. 4. 6, 1123 a 20
παρὰ τὸ δέον
. The reading of the Aldine (and of Parisinus 2038), καὶ τὸ ἁρμόττον, has been accepted by Bon. Ind. 357 b 48 .

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-118

1448b32 ἦλθε : the verb has the same sense in Eth. N. 5. 8, 1133 a 20
ἐφ᾿ ὃ τὸ νόμισμα ἐλήλυθε
. — Pol. 1. 9, 1258 a 6
τὸ ἕτερον εἶδος τῆς χρηματιστικῆς διὰ τοῦτ᾿ ἐλήλυθεν
.

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-119

1448b33 ἰαμβεῖον καλεῖται : Strabo 422 Cas.
ὁ μὲν (scil. ὁ δάκτυλος) ὕμνοις ἐστὶν οἰκεῖος ὁ δ᾿ ἴαμβος κακισμοῖς
. — Proclus Chrestom. 7, p. 346 Gaisf.
τὸν ἴαμβον τάττεσθαι μὲν ἐπὶ λοιδορίας τὸ παλαιόν· καὶ γὰρ καὶ τὸ ἰαμβίζειν κατά τινα γλῶσσαν λοιδορεῖν ἔλεγον ... ἔοικε δὲ ὁ ἴαμβος τὸ μὲν παλαιὸν ἐπὶ τῶν εἰς ψόγον καὶ ἔπαινον γραφομένων ὁμοίως λέγεσθαι ἐπεὶ δέ τινες ἐπλεόνασαν ἐν ταῖς κακολογίαις τὸ μέτρον, ἐκεῖθεν τὸ ἰαμβίζειν εἰς τὸ ὑβρίζειν ὑπὸ τῆς συνηθείας ἐκπεσεῖν
. — Schol. Hephaest. 6, p. 182 Gaisf.
ἐκλήθη δὲ ἴαμβος, ἀφ᾿ οὗ τὸ μέτρον παρονομάζεται ἰαμβικόν, ἐπείπερ οἱ ὑβρίζειν καὶ λοιδορεῖν τινὰς βουλόμενοι τούτῳ ἐχρῶντο τῷ μέτρῳ· ἰαμβίζειν γὰρ ἔλεγον οἱ παλαιοὶ τὸ ὑβρίζειν
. — Suetonii Reliq. p. 19 Reiff.
Iambus est carmen maledicum appellatum est autem παρὰ τὸ ἰαμβίζειν, quod est maledicere
.
1448b34

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-120

τῶν παλαιῶν . The reference is apparently to Homer and Archilochus, as the first and greatest representatives of the two great directions in poetry; comp. Velleius Paterc. 1. 5
Neque quenquam alium, cuius operis primus auctor fuerit, in eo perfectissimum praeter Homerum et Archilochum reperiemus
. Dio Chrysost. Or. 33, p. 5 R.
δύο γὰρ ποιητῶν γεγονότων ἐξ ἅπαντος τοῦ αἰῶνος, οἷς οὐδένα τῶν ἄλλων συμβάλλειν ἄξιον, Ὁμήρου τε καὶ Ἀρχιλόχου, τούτων Ὅμηρος μὲν σχεδὸν πάντα ἐνεκωμίασε Ἀρχίλοχος δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν ἐναντίαν ἦκε [fort. ἠξε], τὸ ψέγειν
. Their pre-eminence is implied in the juxtaposition of the two names in Heraclitus fr. 119 (42 Diels)
τόν τε Ὅμηρον ἔφασκεν ἄξιον ἐκ τῶν ἀγώνων ἐκβάλλεσθαι καὶ ῥαπίζεσθαι καὶ Ἀρχίλοχον ὁμοίως
.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-121

τὰ σπουδαῖα : [no further note in snippet].

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-122

ποιητής : comp. Plato Apol. 18 B
τὰ μετέωρα φροντιστής
.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-123

1448b35 οὐχ ὅτι εὖ , scil. ἐποίησεν. Homer 'wrote well', as a master of the art of poetic expression (comp. 24, 1459 b 16 ; 1460 b 1 ) ; his poems are 'imitations', or pictures of human life, which distinguishes them from those of Empedocles and others (comp. 1, 1447 b 15 ) ; and they are moreover 'dramatic imitations', i. e. not unlike those in the Drama (comp. 24, 1460 a 5 ). In this way, then, Aristotle intimates that Homer not only dealt with the same kind of subject as Tragedy ( τὰ σπουδαία), but also anticipated the dramatic manner.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-124

1448b36 σχήματα . . . ὑπέδειξεν , 'marked out for us the great outlines of Comedy'. σχῆμα has the same sense in 5, 1449 b 3 , and in Plato Laws 5, 737 D
σχήματος ἕνεκα καὶ ὑπογραφῆς
. For the use of ὑπέδειξε comp. Rhet. 3. 2, 1404 b 25
ὅπερ Εὐριπίδης ποιεῖ καὶ ὑπέδειξε πρῶτος
. — Ath. Pol. 41
Ἀριστείδης μὲν ὑπέδειξεν, Ἐφιάλτης δὲ ἐπετέλεσεν
. — Isocrates 268 C
ταῦτα πράττοντες καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ὑποδεικνύοντες
.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-125

1448b37 οὐ ψόγον ἀλλὰ τὸ γελοῖον δραματοποιήσας The sense is that, when Homer passed from σπουδαία to φαῦλα, his treatment of the latter was more akin to that in the comic poets than to that in the ἰαμβοποιοί; Margites with him was only ridiculous—not vicious or held up to obloquy as vicious, as a writer of ψόγοι would have made him. A ψόγος dwells on some serious vice of character; whereas Comedy, as Aristotle conceives it, deals only with those lesser faults which we are able to laugh at (see on 5, 1449 a 33 ). This view of the Margites is not quite in harmony with that in 4, 1448 b 30 , where it is regarded as a ψόγος, the first known instance of the kind. With οὐ ψόγον Vahlen supplies ποιήσας from the δραματοποιήσας that follows. This is legitimate enough, but hardly necessary, as δραματοποιεῖν, 'to write, or describe, as a dramatist would' (see on 22, 1458 b 9 ) is just as applicable to ψόγον as it is to τὸ γελοῖον (comp. Tyrwhitt's rendering 'non vituperium sed ridiculum dramatice exprimens'). The meaning Aristotle attaches to it may be seen from μιμήσεις δραματικὰς ἐποίησεν in b35 (v. ad loc.).

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-126

1448b38 ὥσπερ Ἰλιὰς καὶ ἡ Ὀδύσσεια Vahlen illustrates this insertion of the article before Ὀδύσσεια by De resp. 17, 478 b 28
ἔστι δὲ θάνατος καὶ ἡ φθορὰ πᾶσιν ὁμοίως τοῖς μὴ ἀτελέσιν
, and Rhet. 3. 13, 1414 b 13
ἔσται οὖν ... διήγησις ἕτερον καὶ ἡ ἐπιδιήγησις καὶ προδιήγησις
, and a number of other passages in Aristotle (comp. also Riddell, Digest of Idioms § 240 G). On the other hand Spengel would restore the article before Ἰλιὰς on account of its appearance in the parallel in 26, 1462 b 8
ὥσπερ ἡ Ἰλιὰς ἔχει πολλὰ τοιαῦτα μέρη καὶ ἡ Ὀδύσσεια
(comp. also 24, 1459 b 14
ἡ μὲν Ἰλιὰς ... ἡ δὲ Οδύσσεια
). There is as a rule nothing exceptional or anomalous in Aristotle's usage in reference to the article with the titles of books. He is apt to omit it, just as Athenaeus does, when the title is given in the actual form which it would have as the heading of a MS. (comp. Apollonius Synt. 1, 26), after the preposition ἐν. The Poetics supply a number of examples of this usage, e.g. 16, 1455 a 2
ἐν Ἀλκίνου ἀπολόγῳ
. — 24, 1460 a 35
τὰ ἐν Ὀδυσσείᾳ ἄλογα
. — 14, 1454 a 1
ἐν Ἀντιγόνη
. — 16, 1455 a 4
ἐν Χοηφόροις
. — 24, 1460 a 31
ἐν Ἠλέκτρᾳ
. — 32
ἐν Μυσοῖς
. — 25, 1461 a 21
ἐν Ορέστῃ
. In 24, 1460 a 30 , however, the traditional text omits the article with a title in the nominative; for it is clear that Οἰδίπους in this place means the Oedipus Tyrannus, in the same way as with us 'Hamlet' may mean the play, not the person. In many places in which the article is omitted, the title is used in a general sense as a common noun; thus in Soph. el. 24, 180 a 21
δός μοι Ιλιάδα
means 'give me an Iliad' (i. e. a copy of the Iliad). Instances of this in the Poetics are 8, 1451 a 20
Ἡρακληίδα Θησηίδα
, 'a Heracleid, a Theseid'. — 24, 1459 b 15
Ὀδύσσειαν
, 'an Odyssey'. — 23, 1459 a 3
Ἰλιάδος καὶ ᾿Ὀδυσσείας
, 'a poem like the Iliad or Odyssey'. — b 4
Κυπρίων
, 'a poem like the Κύπρια'. I am inclined to think, therefore, that Spengel was right in suggesting ὥσπερ (ἡ) Ιλιάς in the present passage; and also that in 24, 1460 a 30 the true reading must be ὥσπερ (ὁ) Οἰδίπους.
1449a3

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-127

ἑκατέραν τὴν ποίησιν recalls the distinction drawn in 4, 1448 b 24 between the two great forms of poetry, the higher and the lower.

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-128

κατὰ τὴν οἰκείαν φύσιν : 4, 1448 b 24
κατὰ τὰ οἰκεῖα ἤθη
.

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-129

1449a4 ἀντὶ τῶν ἰάμβων κωμῳδοποιοὶ ἐγένοντο Vahlen compares De part. an. 2. 13, 657 b 34
ἀντὶ ταύτης τῆς φυλακῆς πάντα σκληρόφθαλμά ἐστιν
, and Herod. 7. 62
ἀντὶ τῶν πίλων μιτρηφόροι ἦσαν
.

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-130

1449a7 ἔχει... τοῖς εἶδεσιν ἱκανῶς Aristotle assumes that Tragedy has by this time attained to its natural form ( 15
ἔσχε τὴν αὐτῆς φύσιν
); but he declines to consider the question whether there is still a possibility of improvement in the treatment of its various formative constituents. The suggestion that the εἴδη here meant are the same as the μέρη distinguished in chap. 6 , from another point of view, is due to Madius. εἶδος in the sense of a formative constituent is perhaps unique in Aristotle, but there are certainly a few instances of it in Plato Rep. iv , where the three faculties in the soul are sometimes described as εἴδη ( 434 D , 439 E , 440 B ) and sometimes as μέρη ( 442 B, C ). The alternative interpretation is to take εἴδη in the logical sense of 'species'. This view, though not improbable in itself (comp. 18, 1455 b 32 ), is hardly reconcileable with the use of εἴδη in 6, 1450 a 13 as a designation for the μέρη with which the chapter is dealing.

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-131

αὐτό τε καθ᾿ αὑτὸ κρῖναι The conjunction serves to connect κρῖναι with ἐπισκοπεῖν, the second clause being complementary to the first (comp. 6, 1450 b 3 ). Similarly in De anima 3. 3, 427 b 15
φαντασία γὰρ ἕτερον καὶ αἰσθήσεως καὶ διανοίας· αὐτή τε οὐ γίγνεται ἄνευ αἰσθήσεως, καὶ ἄνευ ταύτης οὐκ ἔστιν ὑπόληψις
, the second clause ( αὐτή τε κτέ.) is explanatory of the first. κρῖναι has been taken as an infinitive of limitation by Vahlen, who quotes H. A. 9. 38, 622 a 20
τῶν δ᾿ ἐντόμων ἐργατικώτατον ζῴων ἐστί, σχεδὸν δὲ καὶ πρὸς τἆλλα συγκρίνεσθαι πάντα, τό τε τῶν μυρμήκων γένος καὶ τὸ τῶν μελιττῶν
. As far as I can see, an infinitive of limitation would not be quite in place in a passage like the present. For the antithesis between καθ᾿ αὑτὸ and πρὸς τὰ θέατρα comp. Top. 5. 1, 128 b 16
ἀποδίδοται δὲ τὸ ἴδιον ἢ καθ᾿ αὐτὰ καὶ ἀεὶ ἢ πρὸς ἕτερον καὶ ποτέ
. — Cat. 6, 5 b 16
οὐδὲν γὰρ αὐτὸ καθ᾿ αὑτὸ μέγα λέγεται ἢ μικρόν, ἀλλὰ τῷ πρὸς ἕτερον ἀναφέρεσθαι
. κρίνειν has an indirect question after it in Metaph. A 4, 984 b 31
τούτους μὲν οὖν πῶς χρὴ διανείμαι ἐξέστω κρίνειν ὕστερον
.
1449a9
γενομένης δ᾿ οὖν ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς αὐτοσχεδιαστικής =
γενομένη δ᾿ οὖν ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς αὐτοσχεδιαστική
. Having begun with γενομένης αὐτοσχεδιαστικῆς, scil. τῆς τραγῳδίας, Aristotle sees that the same is true of Comedy, and adds a parenthesis to show that; after which he says in 13
ηὐξήθη
, just as though γενομένη... αὐτοσχεδιαστική had begun the clause. For another instance of a gen. abs. in lieu of a nominative see 17, 1455 a 3 . A parenthetical addition of very similar form is found in 5, 1449 b 12 , and also in Metaph. Θ 10, 1051 b 11 . ἀπ᾿ ἀρχῆς is used adverbially in the same sense as ἐξ ἀρχῆς. Several of the recent editors and translators, however, take ἀρχῆς and αὐτοσχεδιαστικῆς together as meaning an 'improvisational beginning'. This certainly simplifies matters, but it may be doubted whether ἀρχὴ αὐτοσχεδιαστική would naturally bear that meaning.

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-132

1449a11 τῶν ἐξαρχόντων
ἐξάρχειν τὸν διθύραμβον, ἢ τὰ φαλλικά, dicebantur qui choro utrivis canendo praeiverunt; qui, ut verisimile est, ab initio poetae ipsi fuerunt
, says Tyrwhitt, quoting Archilochus ( fr. 77 Bergk
ὡς Διωνύσοι᾿ ἄνακτος καλὸν ἐξάρξαι μέλος οἶδα διθύραμβον
). By the ἐξάρχων here Aristotle means the poet-composer, who supplied both words and air, and taught them to the chorus—not as is sometimes supposed, the κορυφαῖος, who was only one of the chorus. ἐξάρχειν διθύραμβον is practically a synonym for διδάσκειν διθύραμβον, the expression in Herodotus i. 23. It is clear that Aristotle has in his own mind a general view of the historical development of early Greek poetry, but he tells us as little as possible about it. The intention of the Poetics is to give us a theory of the Epic and of the Drama, not a treatise on the history and archaeology of the Drama. Tragedy began when the author of the dithyramb came forward with an 'improvisation', i. e. with a ῥῆσις or spoken statement, which he improvised in the interval between the two halves of the song of the chorus. The allusion in τῶν ἐξαρχόντων in the text is probably to Thespis, whom he is known to have mentioned in a fragment preserved by Themistius Or. 26, 382 Dind.
οὐ προσέχομεν Ἀριστοτέλει ὅτι τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ὁ χορὸς εἰσιὼν ᾔδεν εἰς τοὺς θεούς, Θέσπις δὲ πρόλογόν τε καὶ ῥῆσιν ἐξεῦρεν;
. The 'prologue and speech' introduced by Thespis may be identified with the improvisations of the actor-poet, which transformed the Dithyramb into Tragedy.

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-133

1449a12 φαλλικά Photius Lex.
Φαλλικόν· ποίημα αὐτοσχέδιον ἐπὶ τῷ φαλλῷ ἀδόμενον
. — Hesychius
Φαλλικόν· ὄρχημά τι· οἱ δὲ μέλος· ἄλλοι ᾠδὴν αὐτοσχέδιον ἐπὶ τῷ φαλλῷ ἀδομένην
. In these phallus-songs Aristotle sees the origin of Comedy; it arose through the author of the song 'improvising' some scurrilous tale, and becoming in this way the forerunner of the single actor of the earliest form of Comedy.

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-134

1449a13 προαγόντων : see on 4, 1448 b 22 .
1449a14

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-135

μεταβολάς : 5, 1449 a 37
αἱ τῆς τραγῳδίας μεταβάσεις
.

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-136

1449a15 ἐπαύσατο For the tense of the participle comp. An. post. 2. 1, 89 b 27
εὑρόντες γὰρ ὅτι ἐκλείπει πεπαύμεθα
. — Meteor. 1. 3, 339 b 32
θεωρήσαντες ἂν τὰ νῦν δεικνύμενα ... ἴσως ἂν ἐπαύσαντο ταύτης τῆς παιδικῆς δόξης
.

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-137

φύσιν : Pol. 1. 2, 1252 b 32
ἡ δὲ φύσις τέλος ἐστίν· οἷον γὰρ ἕκαστόν ἐστι τῆς γενέσεως τελεσθείσης, ταύτην φαμὲν τὴν φύσιν εἶναι ἑκάστου, ὥσπερ ἀνθρώπου ἵππου οἰκίας
.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-138

καὶ τό τε τῶν ὑποκριτῶν πλῆθος There is no need to assume a lacuna here. Having shown how Tragedy began with a single actor, Aristotle proceeds to note the introduction of a second, and after that, of a third actor. The increasing prominence of the actor is in his view the most significant fact in the evolution of the Drama. The καί is explanatory, introducing a series of statements in support of the original assertion that Tragedy underwent many changes before attaining to its ultimate form.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-139

ὑποκριτῶν The actor is called a ὑποκριτής because he was the poet's spokesman, who interpreted his text to the public. The term must have acquired this sense at the time when the poet left the acting to others, instead of being himself the performer of his pieces, as he originally was according to Rhet. 3. 1, 1403 b 23 . The position of the ὑποκριτής was analogous to that of the ῥαψῳδός; they were both intermediaries who interpreted the words of a poet to the public. Plato in the Ion in one place terms him a ἑρμηνεύς and in another ὑποκριτής, apparently without any difference of meaning: Ion 530 C
τὸν γὰρ ῥαψῳδὸν ἑρμηνέα δεῖ τοῦ ποιητοῦ τῆς διανοίας γίγνεσθαι τοῖς ἀκούουσι
, and 535 E
οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ θεατὴς τῶν δακτυλίων ὁ ἔσχατος ... ὁ δὲ μέσος σὺ ὁ ῥαψῳδὸς καὶ ὑποκριτής, ὁ δὲ πρῶτος αὐτὸς ὁ ποιητής
.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-140

1449a16 Αἰσχύλος comp. the Aristotelian survey of the progress of the Drama in Themistius Or. 26 p. 382 Dind.
οὐ προσέχομεν Ἀριστοτέλει ὅτι τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ὁ χορὸς εἰσιὼν ᾔδεν εἰς τοὺς θεούς, Θέσπις δὲ πρόλογόν τε καὶ ῥῆσιν ἐξεῦρεν, Αἰσχύλος δὲ τρίτον ὑποκριτὴν καὶ ὀκρίβαντας, τὰ δὲ πλείω τούτων Σοφοκλέους ἀπελαύσαμεν καὶ Εὐριπίδου?
There is no doubt a discrepancy between this and the statement in the text about Aeschylus, but it need not disturb us, unless we assume Aristotle to have been incapable of a change of opinion even on a small matter of learned research. Ancient opinion was divided on the point: Vita Aeschyli (Dindorf, Poet. scen. prol. p. 3)
ἐχρήσατο δ᾿ ὑποκριτῇ πρώτῳ μὲν Κλεάνδρῳ, ἔπειτα καὶ τὸν δεύτερον αὐτῷ προσῆψε Μυννίσκον τὸν Χαλκιδέα τὸν δὲ τρίτον ὑποκριτὴν αὐτὸς ἐξεῦρεν, ὡς δὲ Δικαίαρχος ὁ Μεσσήνιος, Σοφοκλῆς
.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-141

1449a17 τὸν λόγον the portion recited or spoken, as opposed to τὰ τοῦ χοροῦ, the portion sung ( 18, 1456 a 28
τὰ ἀδόμενα
); comp. the use of λόγοι in 6, 1450 b 6, 9 in the sense of the speeches or ῥήσεις in a play. Λόγος is a word with a Protean variety of meanings even in the Poetics. In 1, 1447 a 22 it means 'language', as opposed to metre and music; in 6, 1450 b 15 'prose', as distinct from verse; in 22, 1459 a 13 an 'oration', as opposed to a poem; in 15, 1454 a 18 (comp. 19, 1456 a 37 ), the 'language', as distinct from the action, of the personages; in 17, 1455 b 17 (comp. 5, 1449 b 8 ), the 'story', as distinct from its setting in the actual poem. And in 20, 1457 a 23 it is one of the technical terms of Aristotelian logic or grammar.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-142

1449a18 πρωταγωνιστὴν παρεσκεύασεν 'made it assume the leading part in the play'. For this metaphorical use of πρωταγωνιστής comp. that of the derivative πρωταγωνιστεῖν in Pol. 8. 4, 1338 b 29
ὥστε τὸ καλὸν ἀλλ᾽ οὐ τὸ θηριῶδες δεῖ πρωταγωνιστεῖν· οὐ γὰρ λύκος οὐδὲ τῶν ἄλλων θηρίων τι ἀγωνίσαιτο ἂν οὐθένα καλὸν κίνδυνον, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός
. Instances of this extension of meaning (which is common enough in later Greek) will be found in HSt. s.v. πρωταγωνιστής . Aristotle is apt to use technical terms of theatrical origin in their popular sense (see on 14, 1453 b 8
χορηγίας
) even in a book like the Poetics.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-143

σκηνογραφίαν i. e. Sophocles was the first to have the screen behind the actors painted to represent the façade of a palace or a temple, or whatever else the play required as its background. The improvement here ascribed to Sophocles was sometimes attributed to Aeschylus ( Sommerbrodt, Scaenica p. 142 ; Haigh, Attic Th. p. 181 ).
1449a19

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-144

ἔτι δὲ τὸ μέγεθος so as to suggest an idea of the importance or dignity of the object: comp. Eth. N. 4. 4, 1122 b 32
μέγεθος ἔχει καὶ ἀξίωμα
. — Pol. 5, 10, 1313 a 7
τὸ μέγεθος καὶ τὸ ἀξίωμα τῆς ἀρχῆς
. The ἀπεσεμνύνθη in the next line shows this to be at any rate by implication the sense of μέγεθος in the present passage.
Aristotle evidently had in his own mind a clear and precise conception of the origin of Tragedy, though it is difficult for us to recover more than fragments of it from a statement so brief and allusive as that in the text. He merely tells us (1) that the most primitive tragedies dealt with short stories; (2) that the language of the primitive actor, instead of being serious and solemn, was sportive or jocose , and (3) in trochaics, not in iambics. By way of explanation of this last point, he adds that, as Tragedy was originally akin to the satyric drama, the language of the primitive tragic actor had still something of the rhythm of the dance about it. Aristotle's idea of the original tragic actor may possibly have been that he also was made up as a satyr. He certainly mentions one characteristic of the stage-satyr, his jesting language , and seems to imply another, viz. his dance-like movements.

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-145

ἐκ μικρῶν μύθων : such as might be told, for instance, in a single act. For the asyndeton comp. 5, 1449 b 12 ; De anima 3. 2, 426 b 24 ; De sensu 3, 440 a 8
οἷον ἐνίοτε οἱ γραφῆς ποιοῦσιν· ἑτέραν χρόαν ἐφ᾿ ἑτέραν ἐναργεστέραν ἐπαλείφουσιν
; Metaph. Θ 10, 1051 b 11 .

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-146

1449a20 ὀψὲ ἀπεσεμνύνθη The time meant is presumably the age of Phrynichus.

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-147

1449a21 ἐκ τετραμέτρου ἰαμβεῖον ἐγένετο : Rhet. 3. 1, 1404 a 30
οἱ τὰς τραγῳδίας ποιοῦντες ... ἐκ τῶν τετραμέτρων εἰς τὸ ἰαμβεῖον μετέβησαν διὰ τὸ τῷ λόγῳ τοῦτο τῶν μέτρων ὁμοιότατον εἶναι τῶν ἄλλων
.
1449a23

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-148

ὀρχηστικωτέραν : 24, 1459 b 37
τὸ δὲ ἰαμβεῖον καὶ τετράμετρον κινητικὰ καὶ τὸ μὲν ὀρχηστικὸν τὸ δὲ πρακτικόν
. — Rhet. 3. 8, 1408 b 32
τῶν δὲ ῥυθμῶν ὁ μὲν ἡρῷος σεμνὸς καὶ λεκτικῆς ἁρμονίας δεόμενος, ὁ δ᾿ ἴαμβος αὐτή ἐστιν ἡ λέξις ἡ τῶν πολλῶν διὸ μάλιστα πάντων τῶν μέτρων ἰαμβεῖα φθέγγονται λέγοντες. δεῖ δὲ σεμνότητα γενέσθαι καὶ ἐκστῆσαι. ὁ δὲ τροχαῖος κορδακικώτερος δηλοῖ δὲ τὰ τετράμετρα· ἔστι γὰρ ῥυθμὸς τροχαῖος τὰ τετράμετρα
. — Longinus 41. 1
μικροποιοῦν δ᾿ οὐδὲν οὕτως ἐν τοῖς ὑψηλοῖς ὡς ῥυθμὸς κεκλασμένος λόγου καὶ σεσοβημένος, οἷον δὴ πυρρίχιοι καὶ τροχαῖοι καὶ διχόρειοι, τέλεον εἰς ὀρχηστικὸν συνεκπίπτοντες
.
ὀρχηστικός in this connexion means practically μιμητικὸς ὀρχήσεως, just as ἠθικός in the Poetics means μιμητικὸς ἤθους. Similarly λεκτικός = μιμητικὸς λέξεως (comp. 21, 1459 a 12 ), πρακτικός = μιμητικὸς πράξεως, and παθητικός = μιμητικὸς πάθους.

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-149

λέξεως , 'speech' as opposed to song (comp. on 21, 1459 a 12 ).

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-150

1449a24 αὐτὴ ἡ φύσις : 24, 1460 a 4
αὐτὴ ἡ φύσις διδάσκει τὸ ἁρμόττον αὐτῇ αἱρεῖσθαι
. — De caelo 3. 8, 306 b 15
ἔοικεν ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ τοῦτο σημαίνειν ἡμῖν
. — Hippocrates 3 p. 606 K.
ἀνευρίσκει ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ ἑωυτῇ τὰς ἐφόδους οὐκ ἐκ διανοίας, οἷον τὸ σκαρδαμύσσειν καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα ὑπουργέει καὶ ὅσα ἄλλα τοιαῦτα· ἀπαίδευτος ἡ φύσις ἐοῦσα καὶ οὐ μαθοῦσα τὰ δέοντα ποιέει
.

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-151

1449a26 λεκτικὸν : 21, 1459 a 11
ἐν δὲ τοῖς ἰαμβείοις διὰ τὸ ὅτι μάλιστα λέξιν μιμεῖσθαι ταῦτα ἁρμόττει ὅσοις κἂν ἐν λόγοις τις χρήσαιτο
. Comp. also Rhet. 3. 1, 1404 a 30 , 3. 8, 1408 b 32 . The term is sufficiently explained by
πλεῖστα γὰρ ἰαμβεῖα λέγομεν ἐν τῇ διαλέκτῳ τῇ πρὸς ἀλλήλους
in 26
.

19. mvp-aristotle-comment-152

διαλέκτῳ , 'talk', 'converse', as in Plato Symp. 203 A
διὰ τούτου πᾶσά ἐστιν ἡ ὁμιλία καὶ ἡ διάλεκτος θεοῖς πρὸς ἀνθρώπους
: comp. Rhet. 3. 8, 1408 b 34
μάλιστα πάντων τῶν μέτρων ἰαμβεῖα φθέγγονται λέγοντες
, and 3. 2, 1404 b 34
πάντες γὰρ μεταφοραῖς διαλέγονται
. For the general meaning of διάλεκτος see on 22, 1458 b 32 . Horace's alternis aptus sermonibus (A. P. 81) is a distant echo of this statement of Aristotle's.
Cicero also observes that ordinary speech constantly falls into iambics: Orator 189
senarios vero et Hipponacteos effugere vix possumus; magnam enim partem ex iambis nostra constat oratio
.

19. mvp-aristotle-comment-153

1449a27 λεκτικῆς ἁρμονίας ἁρμονία here seems to mean 'pitch' ( τόνος) as in Rhet. 3. 1, 1403 b 31 . Aristoxenus recognizes a similar distinction between the musical and the conversational μέλος:
λέγεται γὰρ δὴ καὶ λογῶδές τι μέλος, τὸ συγκείμενον ἐκ τῶν προσῳδιῶν τῶν ἐν τοῖς ὀνόμασιν· φυσικὸν γὰρ τὸ ἐπιτείνειν καὶ ἀνιέναι ἐν τῷ διαλέγεσθαι
.

20. mvp-aristotle-comment-154

ἐπεισοδίων : see on 12, 1452 b 20 .

20. mvp-aristotle-comment-155

1449a30 ὡς ἕκαστα κοσμηθῆναι λέγεται is added to explain the main statement, τὰ ἄλλα . . . ἔστω εἰρημένα. For the general form of the sentence Vahlen compares Metaph. Γ 3, 1005 b 19
τὸ γὰρ αὐτὸ ἅμα ὑπάρχειν τε καὶ μὴ ὑπάρχειν ἀδύνατον τῷ αὐτῷ καὶ κατὰ τὸ αὐτό καὶ ὅσα ἄλλα προσδιορισαίμεθ᾿ ἄν, ἔστω προσδιωρισμένα
.

20. mvp-aristotle-comment-156

κοσμηθῆναι = ἐπικοσμηθῆναι. Certain elements in a play Aristotle dismisses as κόσμοι, decorative accessories rather than structural parts of the work. With this use of κοσμεῖν we may compare that of ἡδύνειν in 6, 1449 b 28 and 24, 1460 b 3 , to denote the addition of accessories designed to make the work agreeable to us.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-157

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-158

1449a32 ἡ δὲ κωμῳδία κτέ. The progress of Tragedy having been sketched, the next point to be considered is the progress of Comedy ( a 37 — b 8 ). The statement is introduced by a definition ( a 32-37 ) based on hints already given in preceding chapters as to the nature of Comedy. In 2, 1448 a 16 Comedy was said to deal with personages worse than the average man ( χείρους, = φαυλότεροι in the present passage) ; and in 4, 1448 b 36 its subject was assumed to be τὸ γελοῖον. These two points Aristotle reconciles and combines in a rough provisional definition before proceeding to the question more immediately before him, that of the μεταβάσεις of Comedy. It is not necessary, therefore, to suppose this defining clause to be out of place. If we try the experiment of transferring it to another place, it will be found that little or nothing is gained by this disturbance of the traditional order.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-159

1449a33 ὥσπερ εἴπομεν : in 2, 1448 a 17 and 4, 1448 b 37 .

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-160

πᾶσαν κακίαν : Plato Rep. 490 D
ὁρᾶν αὐτῶν τοὺς μὲν ἀχρήστους, τοὺς δὲ πολλοὺς κακοὺς πᾶσαν κακίαν
. — Demosthenes 18, 279
τὸ δὲ δὴ καὶ τοὺς πρὸς ἔμ᾿ αὐτὸν ἀγῶνας ἐάσαντα νῦν ἐπὶ τόνδ᾿ ἤκειν καὶ πᾶσαν ἔχει κακίαν
.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-161

1449a34 ἀλλὰ τοῦ αἰσχροῦ ἐστι τὸ γελοῖον μόριον a compressed statement, practically equivalent to οὐχ ἁπλῶς ἀλλὰ καθ᾿ ἕν τι εἶδος κακίας· τοῦ γὰρ αἰσχροῦ ἐστι τὸ γελοῖον μόριον. The personages in Comedy are worse than most men, but only in one particular respect, as presenting a certain harmless deformity or ugliness of character, which makes them ridiculous only—not objects for blame or aversion. It is, in Aristotle's view, the harmlessness of the evil in them that makes them fit objects of laughter.
τὸ γὰρ γελοῖον κτέ. Two kinds of possible objects of laughter are implied in the text. (1) An act is γελοῖον when it is of the nature of a harmless mistake or blunder ( ἁμάρτημα ἀνώδυνον) ; and (2) a person is γελοῖος when he presents some moral or physical deformity of the same harmless kind ( αἶσχος ἀνώδυνον). The negative element here is a very essential part of the definition. Plato also, who thinks that the spectacle of human ignorance is the true object of laughter in Comedy, explains that, to be laughable, the ignorance must be harmless ( ἀβλαβὴς τοῖς ἄλλοις). As γελοῖα are the basis of all Comedy, Aristotle must be assumed to have devoted a section of his theory of Comedy (in the lost Second Book) to the causes and conditions of laughter, in the same way as we find him analysing τὸ φοβερὸν καὶ ἐλεεινόν in chaps. 13-14 of the existing Poetics. It is not impossible that several traces of his theory survive in Cicero's discussion of the 'Ridiculous' in De Oratore 2, 58-59 , which seems to be on distinctly Aristotelian lines.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-162

ἁμάρτημα : see on 13, 1453 a 16 .

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-163

1449a35 αἶσχος (like the adj. αἰσχρός) includes moral as well as physical deformity. Though the illustration in 36 relates to physical ugliness, Aristotle is really thinking of the ugliness of character in the personages of Comedy, who have been described as being χείρους τῶν νῦν ( 2, 1448 a 17 ). Their visible ugliness is part of their ὄψις (see on 6, 1449 b 33 ), which lies outside the limits of the art of the poet himself.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-164

1449a36 τὸ γελοῖον πρόσωπον For the masks in Comedy see Pollux 4, 143 .

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-165

αἰσχρόν τι καὶ διεστραμμένον : Plato Rep. 506 C
βούλει οὖν αἰσχρὰ θεάσασθαι, τυφλά τε καὶ σκολιά, ἐξὸν παρ᾿ ἄλλων ἀκούειν φανά τε καὶ καλά;
.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-166

1449a37 ἀνώδυνον : comp.
ἄνευ ὀδύνης
in 37.
ὀδύνη
is a pain that one feels strongly.
Plato Crat. 419 C
ὀδύνη δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς ἐνδύσεως τῆς λύπης κεκλημένῃ ἔοικεν
.
The Stoic definition ( Diog. Laert. 7. 112 ) was ὀδύνη λύπη ἐπίπονος, translated by Cicero ( Tusc. 4. 8 ) by aerumna aegritudo laboriosa.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-167

εὐθὺς : 'to take the first instance that occurs'; in 10, 1452 a 36 it means suapte natura ( Bon. Ind. 296 a 13 ).
1449b1

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-168

κωμῳδῶν The word being intended to bear the sense of the comic actor, i. e. the actor-poet, since Aristotle is referring to the time when the actor was the poet himself. This sense of the word in the Greek of Aristotle's period has been contested by Mr. H. P. Richards; but I think he has carried his negation too far, more especially as we find the corresponding word τραγῳδοί in the sense of the tragic actors in 22, 1458 b 32 . The traditional doctrine of the grammarians was that κωμῳδοί was used for the actors as well as for the members of the chorus in Comedy: Ammonius π. διαφ. λέξ. p. 86 Valck.
Κωμῳδὸς καὶ Τραγῳδὸς λέγεται ὁ χορευτής καὶ ὑποκριτής
. That κωμῳδοί may refer to the actors even in strict Attic seems to be shown by Plato Phaedr. 236 C
ἵνα μὴ τὸ τῶν κωμῳδῶν φορτικὸν πρᾶγμα ἀναγκαζώμεθα ποιεῖν
.
For Aristotle's time, however, the use seems to be pretty clearly established by the language of his contemporary, Chares of Mytilene:
ὑπεκρίθησαν δὲ τραγῳδοὶ μὲν Θεσσαλὸς καὶ Ἀθηνόδωρος καὶ Ἀριστόκριτος, κωμῳδοὶ δὲ Λύκων καὶ Φορμίων καὶ Ἀρίστων
. And half a century after Aristotle this was the normal sense of the term, as is proved by inscriptions of the period.
The history of the word, therefore, runs parallel with that of the comic chorus. Whatever its form may have been, it was no longer a very important part of a comedy. And if that was the fact, the gradual restriction of the term κωμῳδός to the actor would be the natural result of the absence or diminished importance of the chorus in the Comedy of the period.

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-169

1449b2 ὀψέ ποτε Aristotle seems to have had a definite date in his mind. He conceives the history of Attic Comedy to begin with Chionides, who is said to have exhibited as early as B.C. 487; but the formal recognition of it by the state must have come later, probably about B.C. 465.

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-170

ἐθελονταὶ ἦσαν
Intelligi potest de Choro, sed etiam de poetis... ἐκαλοῦντο δὲ καὶ ἐθελονταὶ διδάσκαλοι, δραμάτων δηλαδή, ὅτε τις μὴ λαβὼν χορὸν μηδὲ χορηγητὴν ἔχων ἑαυτῷ τὰ πάντα παρεῖχε
. Hinc enim poetarum, nascente Comoedia, conditio difficilis maxime apparet, quod non modo Chorum docere sed etiam conducere, nutrire, vestibus alioque omni apparatu instruere necesse haberent (Tyrwhitt).
A somewhat similar use of the term seems to have survived at Thebes, where ἐθελοντής is said to have been the name for the actor in a rude species of burlesque. The alternative to Tyrwhitt's interpretation is to suppose the reference to be either to volunteer χορηγοί ( Demosth. 21. 13
ὑπεσχόμην ἐγὼ χορηγήσειν ἐθελοντής
), or to volunteer actors and chorus-singers.
σχήματα : comp. 4, 1448 b 36 and Bon. Ind. 740 a 24 . It has been thought that the form of expression here may imply some slowness to grant the name ποιητής to a comedian.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-171

1449b3 μνημονεύονται As soon as Comedy became a state institution, an official record of the successful poets must have been kept in the public archives.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-172

ἀπέδωκεν : De sensu 2, 438 b 17
ἀποδιδόναι καὶ προσάπτειν ἕκαστον τῶν αἰσθητηρίων ἑνὶ τῶν στοιχείων
. In Plato Laws 2, 669 C
ἀποδοῦναι
and προσαρμόττειν are treated as synonyms.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-173

προλόγους The term is defined in 12, 1452 b 19 . The introduction of a 'prologue' in Tragedy was sometimes said to have been due to Thespis: Themist. Or. 26 p. 382 Dind.
Θέσπις δὲ πρόλογον καὶ ῥῆσιν ἐξεῦρεν
.
It was obviously a significant moment in the history of the Drama when the play, instead of beginning with a choral song, opened with a statement spoken by an actor.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-174

1449b4 πλήθη : comp. the use of πλήθη in 4, 1449 a 28 and 21, 1458 a 13 . The plural is in keeping with that in προλόγους and μύθους in the context.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-175

μύθους : see on b 9 .

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-176

1449b6 Ἐπίχαρμος καὶ Φόρμις These words cannot be retained where they stand. No appropriate verb can be supplied with them; for though Aristotle might have said μύθους ἀπέδωκε, he could hardly have meant to say μύθους ποιεῖν ἀπέδωκε. And even if ἀπέδωκε is to be understood, there is an awkward asyndeton in τὸ μὲν ἐξ ἀρχῆς. which on this assumption should surely be τὸ μὲν 〈οὖν〉 ἐξ ἀρχῆς, as is actually read in certain of the apographs. From the reminiscence of this passage (comp. Welcker, Kl. Scr. I p. 330 ) in Themistius Or. 27 p. 406 Dind.
καὶ κωμῳδία τὸ παλαιὸν ἤρξατο μὲν ἐκ Σικελίας (ἐκεῖθεν γὰρ ἤστην Ἐπίχαρμός τε καὶ Φόρμος), κάλλιον δὲ Ἀθήναζε συνηυξήθη
, it would seem that the words Ἐπίχαρμος καὶ Φόρμις were originally part of a clause which came in after ἐκ Σικελίας ἦλθεν, and that what Aristotle wrote was something like this:
τὸ δὲ μύθους ποιεῖν τὸ μὲν ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἐκ Σικελίας ἦλθεν (ἦσαν γὰρ Ἐπίχαρμος καὶ Φόρμις ἐκεῖθεν), τῶν δὲ Ἀθήνησιν Κράτης κτέ.
(v. J. of Phil. 5 p. 118 )
1449b7

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-177

Κράτης : his 'floruit' may be put about B. C. 450. For the fragments of his comedies see Kock, CAF. 1 p. 130 ; Meineke, FCG. 1 p. 58 .

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-178

1449b8 ἀφέμενος τῆς ἰαμβικῆς ἰδέας
Ac mihi quidem hoc Aristoteles significare voluisse videtur, cum Cratinus ceterique antiquiores comici certos quosdam homines in fabulis suis exagitassent populoque ridendos propinassent, Cratetem primum apud Athenienses extitisse qui Epicharmi exemplo comicae poesios materiam a singulorum hominum irrisione ad generales morum notationes rerumque descriptiones traduceret. Quod autem lacessendi consuetudinem omisisse Crates ab Aristotele dicitur, id plane fragmenta fabularum confirmant, in quibus nihil prorsus reperias ex quo certos quosdam homines eum carpsisse intellegatur
Meineke l. c. p. 59
.
The 'iambic form' of Comedy is the Old Comedy, which, from the personal nature of its satire, was only one remove from the 'invective' of Archilochus and the Iambographers ( 4, 1449 a 4 ). It is thus characterized in Horace Sat. 1. 4. 1
Eupolis atque Cratinus Aristophanesque poetae Alque alii, quorum comoedia prisca virorum est, Si quis erat dignus describi, quod malus aut fur, Quod moechus forel aut sicarius aut alioqui Famosus, multa cum libertate notabant
.

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-179

καθόλου ποιεῖν λόγους is the opposite of περὶ τὸν καθ᾿ ἕκαστον ποιεῖν (see 9, 1451 b 14 ). The implied antithesis is between a story about some particular person, e. g. Alcibiades, and one about (for instance) 'a man', or 'a man of such and such a type' ( ὁ τοιόσδε, Rhet. 1. 2, 1355 b 30 ), i. e. as we should say, 'a character', the representative of a possible class. A 'character' is a coherent group of qualities disengaged from the various accidents which coexist with it in the concrete individual; it is therefore in the nature of things something general and attributable to several, whereas the individual as such is unique. Aristotle's view is that the personages in Crates, as in all the higher forms of poetry, are 'characters', i. e. more or less idealized personages, not real men as in History, the ψόγος, and the Old Comedy. How these abstracts of human personality come to get proper names attached to them in the Drama is a point which Aristotle considers at some length in 9, 1451 b 13-22 (comp. 17, 1455 b 12 ).

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-180

1449b9 μύθους : i.e. his stories were as imaginary as his personages. μῦθος according to Plato Rep. 377 A is a λόγος ψευδής (either taken from legend or invented by the poet himself), though there may be some element of truth in it.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-181

ἡ μὲν οὖν ἐποποιία κτέ. At this point, the evolution of the Drama having been sketched, Aristotle inserts a provisional note on the points of agreement and difference between Tragedy and epic poetry, which anticipates to a certain extent the longer statement in chaps. 23-24 . The two points of agreement had been already intimated, the first in 4, 1448 b 34 , and the second in 5, 1449 a 20 .

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-182

1449b10 μέχρι μὲν τοῦ ... εἶναι : 7, 1451 a 10
μέχρι τοῦ σύνδηλος εἶναι
. — Top. 8. 1, 155 b 7
μέχρι μὲν οὖν τοῦ εὑρεῖν τὸν τόπον ὁμοίως τοῦ φιλοσόφου καὶ τοῦ διαλεκτικοῦ ἡ σκέψις
. The construction συνακολουθεῖν μέχρι occurs in Phys. 1. 5, 188 b 26
μέχρι μὲν οὖν τούτου σχεδὸν συνηκολουθήκασι καὶ τῶν ἄλλων οἱ πλεῖστοι
—where also συνακολουθεῖν, just like ἀκολουθεῖν here, is the opposite of διαφέρειν ( 188 b 30 : comp. Bon. Ind. 26 a 23 ). In these and similar instances the preposition μέχρι is to be understood as inclusive of that which is mentioned as the limit (comp. Eucken, Sprachgebr. p. 17 ).
A difficulty has been found in ἠκολούθησεν (by Thurot and Spengel), on the ground that it would be more natural to speak of Tragedy following the Epic than of the Epic following Tragedy. This view assumes that ἀκολουθεῖν must mean to 'follow after' in order of time, whereas the word may very well mean 'go with' (comp. Rhet. 1. 6, 1362 b 29 ), i. e. 'agree with'. The aorist seems to imply that the fact has been already recognized. With the traditional reading μόνου (retained by Vahlen) the infinitive εἶναι which follows is out of construction.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-183

1449b10 διὰ μέτρου μεγάλου For the preposition comp. 1, 1447 a 27
διὰ τῶν σχηματιζομένων ῥυθμῶν
. — 4, 1449 a 11
διὰ τριμέτρων
. — 4, 1449 a 16
διὰ τῶν μέτρων
. — 6, 1449 b 30
διὰ μέτρων
. As here used, μέτρον μέγα seems to mean a large kind of verse, one fitted for a large subject (comp. 4, 1449 a 6
μείζονα σχήματα
).
The hexameter is a metre of this description ( 24, 1460 a 3 ); and Aristotle may be presumed, I think, to have taken the same view of the tragic iambic as corresponding to the μέγεθος of the tragic stories, and the gravity of the tragic diction (comp. 4, 1449 a 19 ). Vahlen, retaining the manuscript reading μέχρι μόνου μέτρου μεγάλου, takes μέτρον μέγα to mean
spatium magnum sive fines ampli
; this, however, is hardly probable with τὸ μέτρον in the sense of 'metre' in the very next line (comp. Gomperz, Zu Aristoteles' Poetik 1 p. 25 ).
The following are some of the attempts at emending this passage: μέχρι μόνου μέτρου μετὰ λόγου (the Aldine, and corr. Parisinus 2038); μέχρι μὲν τοῦ μέτρῳ [μετὰ λόγου] (Tyrwhitt); μέχρι μόνου τοῦ διὰ λόγου ἐμμέτρου μεγάλου (Ueberweg); μέχρι μὲν τοῦ [μέτρου μεγάλου] (Christ).

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-184

μίμησις . . . σπουδαίων : as was said in 4, 1448 b 34.
σπουδαίων
is presumably neuter (comp. 4, 1448 b 34 , and the note on 3, 1448 a 19 ).

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-185

1449b11 τῷ δὲ τὸ μέτρον ἁπλοῦν ἔχειν scil. τὴν ἐποποιίαν. ἁπλοῦν is the opposite of ποικίλον (comp. Bon. Ind. 76 b 12 ) ; the contrast is between the one metre of the Epic (v. 24, 1459 b 32 ) and the variety of metres in Tragedy.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-186

ταύτῃ In illustration of the construction Vahlen quotes 23, 1459 a 30
ταύτῃ θεσπέσιος ἂν φανείη τῷ μηδὲ τὸν πόλεμον ἐπιχειρῆσαι ποιεῖν ὅλον
. — Pol. 7. 15, 1334 a 41
οὐ ταύτῃ διαφέρουσι τῶν ἄλλων, τῷ μὴ νομίζειν
. — Plato Rep. 605 C
τῷ πρὸς ἕτερον τοιοῦτον ὁμιλεῖν ταύτῃ ὡμοίωται
.
1449b12

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-187

ἔτι δὲ τῷ μήκει scil. διαφέρει ἡ ἐποποιία. Having laid this down, however, Aristotle remembers that the difference did not always exist; he accordingly repeats his original proposition by a resumptive καὶ τούτῳ διαφέρει (comp. Kühner, Gr. Gr. 2. 1 p. 660 ), in order to introduce a qualifying clause, καίτοι τὸ πρῶτον κτέ.. The clause marked as a parenthesis is equivalent to ἡ μὲ γὰρ κτέ. (actually found in some apographs), and is similar in form to that in 4, 1449 a 19 (v. ad loc.). Aristotle is thinking of a very obvious fact, viz. that an epic (the Iliad or Odyssey, for instance) runs to several thousand lines, whereas a tragedy rarely exceeds some 1,600. This difference he never loses sight of; he notes it in 17, 1455 b 16 , and (in a context just like the present) in 24, 1459 b 17
διαφέρει δὲ κατά τε τῆς συστάσεως τὸ μήκος ἡ ἐποποιία καὶ τὸ μέτρον
; and he returns to it in his concluding chapter ( 26, 1462 a 18 ) where the comparative merits of the two forms of poetry are under discussion.
These parallels, as Teichmüller has seen, are enough to show that μῆκος must denote here not the ambitus actionis, the imaginary duration of the action of the poem, as is often supposed, but rather the real length of the work itself, a length to be measured by the number of lines the work would take up in a book, or the hours it would need for recitation. It has the same sense in 7, 1451 a 6 and in 24, 1459 b 18 . A reason for this difference of length, one quite sufficient for Aristotle's purpose, is given in the parenthesis, ἡ μὲν ὅτι μάλιστα κτέ.. He regards it as the natural consequence of another kind of difference, viz. the fact that the action in a Greek tragedy is as a rule kept within a limit of some 24 hours, whereas that in an epic may extend over weeks, or even years. There being this difference, therefore, in the extent of the action, the quantum of matter to be included in the story, it is only natural that there should be a corresponding difference in the length of the literary statement in the two instances, and that an epic poem accordingly should be of greater length than a tragedy. A certain correspondence between the length and the quantum of matter in a poem is recognized in 26, 1462 b 2 . Assuming this correspondence, Aristotle explains the great length of an epic, as compared with a tragedy, as due to the great length of time over which the epic action extends. In other words, he passes from the idea of the actual length, the actual time required for the recitation, to that of the imaginary time covered by the action of the poem; and he does this on the tacit assumption that the two things are so closely connected that the one may serve to explain the other (comp. Ueberweg, Aristoteles über Dichtkunst p. 57 ). Teichmüller's theory, that Aristotle is referring in the parenthesis to the time of the actual recitation or performance, and thinking of the series of dramas (a trilogy or tetralogy) presented on the stage in a single day, may be set aside at once, not only on archaeological grounds, but also because it assumes an impossible sense for ὑπὸ μίαν περίοδον ἡλίου.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-188

1449b13 πειρᾶται means much the same thing as βούλεται in 2, 1448 a 18 . The same anxiety to avoid overstatement is to be seen in ὅτι μάλιστα and ἢ μικρὸν ἐξαλλάττειν in the context.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-189

μίαν περίοδον ἡλίου cannot be, as Teichmüller imagines, a way of describing the natural day of 12 hours or so ; the periphrasis is deliberately chosen in order to make it clear that the solar day of 24 hours is meant. A περίοδος of the sun is not its half-circuit, but its circuit, i. e. the time it takes to come round again to an assumed starting-point. For other Aristotelian instances of this sense of the word see Bon. Ind. 582 b 29 . The statement in the text was often quoted in former times as evidence for the assertion that the so-called 'Unity of Time' was one of Aristotle's rules for the Drama. 'The stage', says Sydney in his Apology for Poetry (p. 63 Arber), 'should always represent but one place; and the uttermost time presupposed in it should be, both by Aristotle's precept and common sense, but one day'. What Aristotle actually says is not a precept, but only an incidental recognition of a fact in the practice of the theatre in his age. The same is true also of the 'Unity of Place', which was believed to be implied as a rule in 24, 1459 b 25 . The 'Unity of Action', however, is very emphatically asserted in chaps. 8–11 and elsewhere.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-190

μικρὸν ἐξαλλάττειν = 'to vary, or depart, from that only a little', i. e. 'to exceed that limit only a little'. The reference is not to variation within the limit, but to variation beyond it.
1449b15

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-191

τὸ πρῶτον In the earliest drama, says Aristotle, the Unity of Time was not observed with strictness, any more than it is in epic poetry. This passage has been discussed by M. Maurice Croiset ( Rev. des Études grecques p. 373; comp. Heimsoeth, De tragoediae graecae trilogiis p. iv ), who suggests that Aristotle may be referring to the period anterior to the institution of the trilogy, when a long tragic story, instead of being dealt with in three tragedies, may be supposed to have been told in one. It is clear that the action in such a play would be very like that of an epic, and cover a longer time than 24 hours. One may ask how in the absence of some device like the modern curtain the lapse of time between act and act could be sufficiently indicated; and one may also ask whether there was the same chorus throughout the performance. These are difficulties which we have now no means of answering.

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-192

ἐν ταῖς τραγῳδίαις The preposition shows that Aristotle is thinking not of the time of the performance, but of something within the play, the imaginary time of the action in it ( Ribbeck, Rh. Mus. 24, 135 ); comp. 13, 1453 a 25
τοῦτο δρᾷ ἐν ταῖς τραγῳδίαις
.
1449b16

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-193

μέρη : i.e. the constituents enumerated and distinguished in 6, 1449 b 31 sqq. . The parts peculiar to Tragedy are melody and 'spectacle' ( 24, 1459 b 10 ).
1449b17

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-194

διόπερ κτέ. Similarly in chaps. 23–24, before explaining the differences between epic poetry and Tragedy, Aristotle is at some pains to show that a good epic will have much the same structure as a good tragedy, and that in most respects the same canons of construction are applicable to it ( 23, 1459 a 17 — 24, 1459 b 17 ). The corollary ends at ἐπῶν; what follows ( μὲν γὰρ κτέ.) is a reason in support of the main statement (b 16).

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-195

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-196

1449b21 περὶ . . . τῆς ἐν ἑξαμέτροις μιμητικῆς : in chaps. 23–24 .

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-197

περὶ κωμῳδίας : in the lost Second Book of the Poetics.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-198

1449b23 ἀναλαβόντες : Top. 6. 14, 151 b 19
καλῶς εἰρημένον ὅρον ἀναλαβεῖν
. — Meteor. 1. 3, 339 a 33
ἀναλαβόντες οὖν τὰς ἐξ ἀρχῆς θέσεις . . λέγωμεν
. — 1. 8, 345 b 31
ἡμεῖς δὲ λέγωμεν ἀναλαβόντες τὴν ὑποκειμένην ἀρχὴν ἡμῖν
. — Rhet. 1. 13, 1373 b 27
ἀναλαβόντες τί ἐστι τὸ ἀδικεῖσθαι λέγωμεν
.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-199

ὅρον τῆς οὐσίας : the definition of its essence, or essential nature; comp. Metaph. Z 13, 1039 a 19
δοκεῖ γε πᾶσι καὶ ἐλέχθη πάλαι ἢ μόνον εἶναι οὐσίας ὅρον ἢ μάλιστα
. — De part. an. 1. 1, 642 a 26
ὁρίσασθαι τὴν οὐσίαν
. — 4. 5, 678 a 34
τῷ λόγῳ... τῷ ὁρίζοντι τὴν οὐσίαν αὐτῶν
.
1449b24

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-200

ἔστιν οὖν τραγῳδία κτέ. The definition, which is in logical form, per genus et differentias, professes to be a summary of points already established; and in its principal elements it is that. (1) That Tragedy is a μίμησις was said in 1, 1447 a 13 ; and that it is a μίμησις πράξεως is implied in 1, 1447 a 28 . (2) σπουδαίας, which differentiates Tragedy from Comedy, recalls chap. 2 and 4, 1448 b 34 — καὶ τελείας μέγεθος ἐχούσης being added in recognition apparently of the point indicated in 4, 1449 a 19 . (3) The means in Tragedy were noted in 1, 1447 b 24–28 ; and (4) the dramatic manner of its imitation in 3, 1448 a 23–28 . But for the concluding clause, on the effect of Tragedy on the emotions, we have not been prepared by anything in the earlier chapters. Aristotle no doubt regarded one part of it, δι᾽ ἐλέου καὶ φόβου, as self-evident, but the rest is presumably an anticipation of a point worked out at length in the lost Second Book of the Poetics. In just the same way we find him using the term προαιρετική in the definition of virtue in Eth. N. 2. 6, 1106 b 36 , and reserving the formal explanation of προαίρεσις for 3. 4, 1111 b 4 . This concluding clause is an integral part of the definition, since the end of the thing to be defined cannot be ignored in any logically complete statement of its nature ( De anima 1. 1, 403 a 25 ; Metaph. H 2, 1043 a 14 ).

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-201

1449b25 τελείας μέγεθος ἐχούσης The point is considered in chap. 7, where 'completeness' is said to imply a whole of some magnitude ( 7, 1450 b 24 ). We have not yet been told that the action in Tragedy must be a τελεία πρᾶξις, but from the explanatory μέγεθος ἐχούσης Aristotle would seem to regard the point as the natural consequence of the μέγεθος mentioned already in 4, 1449 a 19 as one of the characteristics of Tragedy proper. In that case the term distinguishes Tragedy proper with its complete and self-contained stories from the rudimentary Drama of an earlier period.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-202

ἡδυσμένῳ : Plato Rep. 607 A
εἰ δὲ τὴν ἡδυσμένην μοῦσαν παραδέξῃ ἐν μέλεσιν ἢ ἔπεσιν, ἡδονή σοι καὶ λύπη ἐν τῇ πόλει βασιλεύσετον
. The word is taken from cookery (comp. De sensu 4, 442 a 10 ). The nature of the metaphor may be seen, in the case of the substantive ἥδυσμα, from Aristotle's criticism of the style of Alcidamas in Rhet. 3. 3, 1406 a 19
οὐ γὰρ ἡδύσματι χρῆται ἀλλ᾿ ὡς ἐδέσματι τοῖς ἐπιθέτοις
('the sauce with him is the dish').
Said of language ἡδυσμένος implies the accession of something (here metre and music) to make it agreeable, just as κοσμηθῆναι in 4, 1449 a 29 meant the accession of something to make the work beautiful. An echo of this passage (comp. 6, 1450 b 11 ) may perhaps be recognized in Plutarch Erot. 769 C
λόγῳ ποίησις ἡδύσματα (τὰ) μέλη καὶ μέτρα καὶ ῥυθμοὺς ἐφαρμόσασα
, and also in Strabo 818 Cas.
φλυαροῦσιν ὥσπερ μέλος ἢ ῥυθμὸν [ἢ] ἥδυσμά τι τῷ λόγῳ τὴν τερατείαν προσφέροντες
. The metaphor reappears in Shakespeare, Hamlet 2. 2
I remember one said there were no sallets in the lines to make the matter savoury
.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-203

ἑκάστῳ τῶν εἰδῶν scil. τῶν ἡδυσμάτων, understood from ἡδυσμένῳ. Similarly in Isocrates 190 D
περὶ τούτων δηλῶσαι μὴ μόνον τοῖς τεταγμένοις ὀνόμασιν, ἀλλὰ τὰ μὲν ξένοις τὰ δὲ καινοῖς τὰ δὲ μεταφοραῖς, καὶ μηδὲν παραλιπεῖν ἀλλὰ πᾶσι τοῖς εἶδεσι διαποικίλαι τὴν ποίησιν
one may supply τῶν ὀνομάτων with εἶδεσι. For another instance of this allusive use of εἶδος see 25, 1461 b 22 . In what follows (b 29) ἑκάστῳ τῶν εἰδῶν is replaced by τοῖς εἶδεσι ; the reading of the MS., ἑκάστου, seems to have arisen through χωρίς having been mistaken for a preposition.
The juxtaposition of χωρίς and ἑκάστῳ is just like that in Pol. 7. 1, 1323 b 41
καὶ χωρὶς ἑκάστῳ καὶ κοινῇ ταῖς πόλεσιν
(comp.
χωρὶς ἕκαστον
in De caelo 2. 12, 292 a 13 , b 27) . The implied antithesis in the present passage is between 'each separately' ( χωρίς), and 'all together, and at once' ( ἅμα: comp. De gen. et corr. 1. 5, 322 a 13 , and Metaph. E 4, 1027 b 23 ). Tragedy (unlike the Dithyramb etc.) has the ἥδυσμα of metre in the dialogue, and that of melody only in the choral parts (see on 1, 1447 b 28 ). ἑκάστῳ, therefore, is loosely put for ἑκατέρῳ (comp. Pol. 3. 12, 1282 b 38 , and HSt. s. v. ).

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-204

1449b26 δρώντων scil. τῶν μιμουμένων , the subject being omitted as it is in 13, 1450 a 10 , 21, b 31, and 26, 1461 b 29 . Other Aristotelian instances of this ellipse with a gen. absolute may be seen in Bon. Ind. 149 b 29 . Tyrwhitt, with less probability, as it seems to me, supplies μίμησις with δρώντων, comparing 3, 1448 a 29
μιμοῦνται δρῶντας
.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-205

οὐ δι᾿ ἀπαγγελίας scil. μιμουμένων.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-206

1449b27 δι᾽ ἐλέου καὶ φόβου means practically δι᾿ ἐλεεινῶν καὶ φοβερῶν, 'by piteous and alarming scenes'; comp. Goulston's paraphrase ,
'per misericordiam metumque factis expressum'
. The more abstract form of expression is adopted in order to prepare the way for τῶν τοιούτων παθημάτων. For the use of the preposition in this connexion comp.
διὰ μέτρων περαίνεσθαι
in b 30
. — De part. an. 3. 4, 666 a 15
περαίνονται [scil. αἱ κινήσεις] διὰ τοῦ ἕλκειν καὶ ἀνιέναι
. — Plato Gorg. 450 D
διὰ λόγου πᾶν περαίνουσι
. — Rep. 392 D
δι᾿ ἀμφοτέρων περαίνουσιν
(v. Bernays, Zwei Abhandl. p. 85 ).
This excitement of pity and fear is, as far as the poet is concerned, the end of Tragedy, but it is in truth only a means to its ultimate end, its κάθαρσις of such emotions.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-207

τὴν τῶν τοιούτων παθημάτων κάθαρσιν 'its catharsis of such emotions' , just as ποιεῖσθαι τὴν μίμησιν ( 1, 1447 a 22 ; 6, 1449 b 31 ) means 'to make their imitation', and ποιεῖν τὴν ἡδονήν ( 4, 1448 b 18 ), 'to produce its pleasure' (comp. 4, 1448 b 7 , and Kühner, Gr. Gr. 2. 1 p. 593 ). The article, in fact, is not so otiose as is usually supposed. This interpretation of the article removes more than one of the preliminary difficulties in this much debated passage, the implication being that a cathartic effect is not peculiar to Tragedy; so that the text is seen at once to stand in close relation to the passage in Pol. 8. 7 (v. Fr. V), in which the existence of several forms of catharsis is affirmed. Aristotle recognizes there a catharsis of 'enthusiasm' effected by certain kinds of music, as well as a catharsis of pity and fear effected by Tragedy ; and there is reason to think that a catharsis of laughter also must have been similarly posited as the effect and ultimate justification of Comedy in the lost Second Book of the Poetics. τῶν τοιούτων παθημάτων, therefore, is a general expression for this whole group of disturbing emotions (enthusiasm, pity, fear, etc.), instead of being, as is so often thought, either limited to the two emotions (pity and fear) which appear in the context, or applying to the emotions in general. The great difficulty, however, in this formula is as to the interpretation of κάθαρσις. Is the term to be understood as a physiological metaphor, in the sense of 'purging', or 'clearing away' ; or as a metaphor from the religious rite of lustration, in the sense of 'purification'? The ancient evidence, in Aristotle and elsewhere, is to my mind very decidedly in favour of the first interpretation. I. This, the pathological interpretation, as it may be called, is now generally associated with the names of Weil (1848) and Bernays (1857), who each independently arrived at a very similar conclusion. It is in reality much older; all its essential points in fact are to be found in Tyrwhitt's note on the present passage :
'Satis apparet, Aristotelem hic regulam de tragoedia tragica instituisse, qua scilicet probaret affectus misericordiae et metus, qui in tragoediis vehementissime excitantur, non ex eo nutriri et validiores effici, quod Plato criminabatur, sed contra levari et exhauriri; et proinde affectuum horum purgationem opus esse proprium et quasi finem Tragoediae; cum caeterae Poesis species vel ad doctrinam, vel ad delectationem magis aptae sint.'
.
To understand Aristotle's position we have to go back to Plato's condemnation of the Drama in the Tenth Book of the Republic. One of Plato's points is, that the Drama appeals mainly to two of the inferior elements in the soul, our faculty for grief ( τὸ θρηνῶδες, τὸ ἐλεεινόν) and our faculty for laughter ; and that its effect is to gratify these at the expense of the reason, and ultimately to weaken or nullify the self-control prescribed by reason ( Rep. 605 c-606 c ). As a view like this, supported by so great a name, could hardly be ignored by Aristotle in an Art of Poetry based throughout on the assumption of the legitimacy of the Drama, and of the emotional effects it aims at, his catharsis theory may very well be supposed to have been intended as his answer to the Platonic indictment. Though the formal exposition of the theory, as it was to be read in the complete Poetics, is no longer before us, it is still possible to recover some idea of it from the two statements in the Politics on the 'cathartic' effect of certain kinds of music. In Pol. 8. 6, 1341 a 21 , as a reason for leaving the flute to professionals, instead of making it part of a liberal education for all, Aristotle explains that the flute, instead of having an 'ethical' effect, is simply orgiastic or exciting, and to be kept for the times when the hearing of music is a 'catharsis' rather than a form of instruction:
οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ αὐλὸς ἠθικὸν ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον ὀργιαστικόν, ὥστε πρὸς τοὺς τοιούτους αὐτῷ καιροὺς χρηστέον ἐν οἷς ἡ θεωρία κάθαρσιν μᾶλλον δύναται ἢ μάθησιν
. It will be seen that a sharp distinction is drawn here between the emotional effect of the flute, and the 'ethical' effect of certain other kinds of music ; and that κάθαρσις is in Aristotle's view connected with the former rather than with the latter.
A much more important passage, however, is that in Pol. 8. 7, 1341 b 32 , which will be found in extenso among the Fragments of the Poetics (Fr. V). It begins by assuming a current division of 'airs' into ἠθικά, πρακτικά, καὶ ἐνθουσιαστικὰ μέλη, and a similar classification of 'harmonies' or modes. The distinction here is between (1) the music that imitates character, and has thus a reflex influence on the character of the hearer (comp. Pol. 8. 5, 1340 b ); (2) that which imitates action (comp. Plato Rep. 399 A ), and moves us to it ; and (3) that which imitates, and so arouses in us, the orgy of emotion termed by the Greeks 'enthusiasm'. The most 'ethical' harmonies may be practised by all, as a regular part of their lives; whereas the other two kinds are to be left to professionals. This tolerance of the 'enthusiastic harmonies' in a well-ordered state Aristotle justifies by showing that they stand in much the same position as Tragedy. There are certain emotions, he tells us, which arise in some degree in every man's soul, and in a disquieting degree ( ἰσχυρῶς) in certain of us, e.g. pity and fear. Enthusiasm is one of these disturbing emotions. Experience, however, shows that the enthusiastic music (that of the hymns of Olympus, for instance) has a salutary effect on those subject to accesses ( κατοκώχιμοι) of enthusiasm, restoring them to a normal condition of calm and peace ( καθισταμένους: comp. Bon. Ind. 356 a 35 and 375 a 8 ), just as though they had undergone a cure or catharsis at the hands of a physician ( ὥσπερ ἰατρείας τυχόντας καὶ καθάρσεως). The same sort of treatment ( πάσχειν) is required by other emotional natures also, e.g. by those liable to accesses of pity and fear, and by the rest of mankind likewise, in so far as they have a share in these feelings ; all want a certain catharsis, a pleasurable relief ( κουφίζεσθαι) from emotion. And it is in just the same way (i.e. by the relief they bring) that the cathartic airs give a harmless delight to mankind. The sense of κάθαρσις in the Politics is well explained by Sepulveda in his note on 8. 6, 1341 a 23 :
'Purgatio intelligitur expulsio cuiuspiam affectus'
; and again in that on 8. 7, 1342 a 6 ( τῷ δὲ ἧττον διαφέρει καὶ τῷ μᾶλλον):
'Itaque plus et minus, tamen omnes moventur affectibus, a quibus iucunde per musicam sanantur et quasi medicamento quodam adhibito purgantur'
(comp. J. of Phil. 27 p. 269 ).
The term in fact is a metaphor from medicine, as Aristotle intimates by making it a synonym for ἰατρεία ( ὥσπερ ἰατρείας τυχόντας καὶ καθάρσεως), in a context too which presents a whole series of words which either have, or may have, a medical meaning ( πάθος, πάσχειν, ἰσχυρῶς, κίνησις, κατοκώχιμοι, καθισταμένους, κουφίζεσθαι, καθαρτικά). In Greek physiology and pathology κάθαρσις is a very general term for a physical clearance or discharge, the removal by art or an effort of nature of some bodily product (some περίττωμα, as Aristotle would call it), which, if allowed to remain, would cause discomfort or harm. The κάθαρσις of the soul as described in the Politics is a similar process in reference to certain emotions ( πάθη)—the tacit assumption being apparently that the emotions in question are analogous to those peccant humours in the body which, according to the ancient humoral theory of medicine, have to be expelled from the system by the appropriate κάθαρσις. With some adaptation of the statements and hints in Pol. 8. 7 , as thus interpreted, it is not difficult to recover the outlines at any rate of the Aristotelian theory of the cathartic effect of Tragedy: Pity and fear are elements in human nature, and in some men ( τοὺς ἐλεήμονας καὶ τοὺς φοβητικούς) they are present in a disquieting degree ( ἰσχυρῶς). With these latter the tragic excitement is a necessity ( ἀναγκαῖον πάσχειν) ; but it is also in a certain sense good for all. It serves as a sort of medicine, producing a catharsis to lighten and relieve the soul ( κουφίζεσθαι) of the accumulated emotion within it ; and as the relief is wanted, there is always a harmless pleasure attending the process of relief. This, then, may be taken as Aristotle's answer to the Platonic argument in the Republic ; it shows that the pleasure we derive from the moving scenes in Tragedy is not, as Plato had maintained, a demoralizing, but on the contrary a harmless pleasure, ( χαρὰ ἀβλαβής). The legitimacy of this pleasure is assumed throughout the Poetics (see especially 14, 1453 b 11 ), but its precise nature is not explained, either in the existing book or elsewhere, by Aristotle. It falls naturally enough, however, into its place in the classification of pleasures in the Nicomachean Ethics, which recognizes the existence of a class of things as pleasurable not directly and in themselves, but through their effect, as being of the nature of cures or remedies ( ἰατρεῖαι) to remove the disquietude arising from an unsatisfied want, and restore us to a normal condition of body or mind ( Eth. N. 7. 13, 1152 b 34 ; 7. 15, 1154 b 17 ). The tragic excitement, which in the language of the Politics, acts as an ἰατρεία or κάθαρσις, is clearly a pleasure of this kind, one of those described by Aristotle as ἰατρεύοντα ἡδέα. A further point in his idea of κάθαρσις may perhaps be noticed, as suggested at any rate by his use of the term to express the effect of Tragedy on the mind. A catharsis in the medical sense of the word is an ἰατρεία, and only for occasional use ; and its analogue, the παθημάτων κάθαρσις, may very well be presumed to resemble it in this respect. In assuming Tragedy, therefore, to have a cathartic rather than a permanent moral effect, Aristotle would seem to have been mindful of the position of the Drama in Greek life, and to have seen that the dramatic performances in the theatre were not sufficiently frequent or continuous to generate a moral habit, or make a lasting impression for good or evil on character—a point overlooked not only by Plato but also by Lessing and most of the modern interpreters of the Aristotelian theory of Tragedy (comp. E. Müller, Theorie der Kunst bei den Alten 2 p. 378 ). In the phrase παθημάτων κάθαρσις the genitive after κάθαρσις, denoting the object purged away or removed, is a construction not uncommon in Aristotle's physiological writings (v. Bon. Ind. 354 b 22 ); and it is found also in other authors, e.g. Hippocrates 1 p. 104 K.
πτυέλων καθάρσεις
. — p. 654
καθάρσεις τοῦ θερμοῦ ἐκ τοῦ σώματος
. — 3 p. 502
τῶν ἀπὸ πλευμόνων καθάρσεις
. — Thucydides 2. 49
ἀποκαθάρσεις χολῆς
. — Demosthenes 64. 12
κάθαρσις αἵματος
. — Polybius 5. 100. 6
ἀνακάθαρσις πτώματος
.
The same construction is found with κάθαρσις (etc.) in its metaphorical application to the analogous process in the mind: Plato Phaed. 69 B
κάθαρσίς τις τῶν τοιούτων πάντων
, 'a purging away of all such things' (Jowett), where the object purged away or removed is shown by the context to be certain affections of the soul ( ἡδονῶν καὶ φόβων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων πάντων τῶν τοιούτων). — Plutarch De cap. ex inimicis utilit. 91 F
τῶν παθῶν τούτων ποιούμενος εἰς τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ἀποκαθάρσεις
. — Iamblichus De myst. 1. 12
κάθαρσις παθῶν
. — Hierocles in Aur. carm. p. 124 (Needham)
ἡ τῶν λυμαινομένων παθῶν ἐκκάθαρσις
. — p. 134
κάθαρσις τῆς οἰήσεως
. — p. 194
ἀποκάθαρσις νείκους
. Aristotle's τὴν τῶν τοιούτων παθημάτων κάθαρσιν may perhaps be an unconscious reminiscence of the phrase in Plato.
The idea of κάθαρσις, in the sense of a working-off of emotion brought about by something that excites emotion, was not unknown in late Greek literature ; it is recognized in reference to music by Plutarch and Aristides Quintilianus, and in reference to the Drama by Iamblichus and Proclus. The theories reproduced by these writers are clearly of Peripatetic origin, and on exactly the same lines as the Aristotelian justification of the emotional forms of music and of the Drama in the brief statement in the Politics. (1) In his very curious chapter on the ἀκροθώρακες, on whom wine is said to have a sedative effect, Plutarch illustrates the paradox ( Qu. conv. 3. 8, 657 A ) by a parallel instance, that of the sad airs at funerals, which, while exciting the grief of the mourners, at the same time work off their sorrow:—
ὥσπερ γὰρ ἡ θρηνῳδία καὶ ὁ ἐπικήδειος αὐλὸς ἐν ἀρχῇ πάθος κινεῖ καὶ δάκρυον ἐκβάλλει [ἐκκαλεῖ Emperius], προάγων δὲ τὴν ψυχὴν εἰς οἶκτον οὕτω κατὰ μικρὸν ἐξαιρεῖ [ἐξερᾶ Bernays] καὶ ἀναλίσκει τὸ λυπητικόν· ὁμοίως ἴδοις ἂν καὶ τὸν οἶνον, ὅταν σφόδρα ταράξῃ καὶ παροξύνῃ τὸ ἀκμαῖον καὶ θυμοειδές, αὖθις καταδύοντα [? καταλύοντα], καὶ καθιστάντα τὴν διάνοιαν ὡς πορρωτέρω μέθης προϊοῦσαν ἡσυχάζειν
.
(2) The language in Aristides Quintilianus De Musica 3. 25 (p. 13 Jahn) , on the cathartic effect of the music and dancing in the Bacchic and other mysteries, has a more distinctly Aristotelian imprint on it:—
διὸ καὶ τὰς Βακχικὰς τελετὰς καὶ ὅσαι ταύταις παραπλήσιοι λόγου τινὸς ἔχεσθαί φασιν, ὅπως ἂν ἡ τῶν ἀμαθεστέρων πτοίησις διὰ βίον ἢ τύχην ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν ταύταις μελῳδιῶν τε καὶ ὀρχήσεων ἅμα παιδιαῖς ἐκκαθαίρηται
.
(3) There are two passages in Iamblichus, which may serve to illustrate the Aristotelian idea of κάθαρσις. In De myst. 3. 9 (ed. Parthey) , writing as a Neoplatonic occultist against the naturalistic explanation of enthusiasm, he insists that it is an error to regard the effect of the enthusiastic music as being of the nature of a mere ἀποκάθαρσις, a working-off or evacuation ( ἀπέρασις) of some morbid product within the soul :—
ἀπέρασιν δὲ καὶ ἀποκάθαρσιν ἰατρείαν τε οὐδαμῶς αὐτὸ κλητέον, οὐδὲ γὰρ κατὰ νόσημά τι ἢ πλεονασμὸν ἢ περίττωμα πρώτως ἐν ἡμῖν ἐμφύεται, θεία δε αὐτοῦ συνίσταται ἡ πᾶσα ἄνωθεν ἀρχὴ καὶ καταβολή
.
There is reason to think that the theory thus set aside was that of Theophrastus, and, through him, of Aristotle. And it will be seen how completely the language of the above passage harmonizes with the pathological interpretation of the formula, ὥσπερ ἰατρείας τυχόντας καὶ καθάρσεως in the Politics. The second passage is in De myst. 1. 11 :—
αἱ δυνάμεις τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων παθημάτων τῶν ἐν ἡμῖν πάντῃ μὲν εἰργόμεναι καθίστανται σφοδρότεραι, εἰς ἐνέργειαν δὲ βραχεῖαν [so Bernay's; βραχεῖς vulg.] καὶ ἄχρι τοῦ συμμέτρου προαγόμενοι χαίρουσι μετρίως καὶ ἀποπληροῦνται, καὶ ἐντεῦθεν ἀποκαθαιρόμεναι πειθοῖ καὶ οὐ πρὸς βίαν ἀναπαύονται. διὰ δὴ τοῦτο ἔν τε κωμῳδίᾳ καὶ τραγῳδίᾳ ἀλλότρια πάθη θεωροῦντες ἵσταμεν τὰ οἰκεῖα πάθη καὶ μετριώτερα ἀπεργαζόμεθα καὶ ἀποκαθαίρομεν
.
The theory Iamblichus is accepting for the moment is that the passions cannot be suppressed for any length of time with impunity ; that they require an occasional outlet (comp. ἀποκαθαιρόμεναι) to keep them quiet ; and that the secret of our interest in the Drama is that it serves to work off emotion ( τὰ οἰκεῖα πάθη ἀποκαθαίρομεν). It is clear that Iamblichus must have had a pathological explanation of the effect of the Drama before him. But he has taken the edge off the Aristotelian theory by giving it an ethical turn; it will be seen that he makes the catharsis of passions mean the same thing as the moderation of them ( μετριώτερα ἀπεργαζόμεθα καὶ ἀποκαθαίρομεν), thus anticipating by many centuries the interpretation of παθημάτων κάθαρσις now usually associated with the names of Heinsius and Lessing. (4) The cathartic effect of the Drama is one of the many controversial points discussed by Proclus in his commentary on Plato's Republic. The passages bearing on it will be found quoted under Fr. V. According to Proclus the Aristotelian answer to Plato was that the Drama serves a useful purpose as an outlet for emotions which would disturb the peace of the soul, if their just claims were not recognized and from time to time duly satisfied by means of some such gratification as is supplied in the theatre. This view of the effect of the Drama Proclus attributes to Aristotle ; his reference, however, to other apologists for the Drama may make one hesitate to believe him to have found it for himself in the now lost Second Book of the Poetics. The statement in its existing form seems rather to have been taken from some follower of Aristotle, possibly from Theophrastus, its phraseology representing the sense rather than the words of the Aristotelian original. Disengaged from its Neoplatonic surroundings in Iamblichus and Proclus, the catharsis theory before them may be thus reconstructed in outline: The Drama has a therapeutic (comp. Proclus τὸ πεπονηκὸς αὐτῶν θεραπεύσαντας) rather than a directly moral effect ; and the excitement it supplies is required by us at times (comp. Proclus δεόμενα δέ τινος ἐν καιρῷ κινήσεως) to carry off (comp. παθῶν ἀπεράσεις in both Iamblichus and Proclus) or purge away (comp. Iamblichus πάθη ἀποκαθαίρομεν) certain emotions, and relieve the soul of the disquietude they would cause (comp. Proclus ἀνενοχλήτους ἡμᾶς ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν ... ποιεῖν), if defrauded of the satisfaction naturally due to them (comp. Proclus πρὸς ἀφοσίωσιν τῶν παθῶν). The whole theory in fact is simply a fuller and more complete version of that we still have in brief in the Politics, with ἀποκάθαρσις or ἀπέρασις in place of the primitive Aristotelian term, κάθαρσις. II. Notwithstanding the arguments of Weil and Bernays, the old interpretation of παθημάτων κάθαρσις, which makes it mean the 'purification' of certain passions, is far from being extinct even in our own day. Κάθαρσις is supposed to be a metaphor from the religious rite of purification, whereby the hand or soul was cleansed from some pollution or stain of sin. Understood in this sense, therefore, the term would naturally imply that certain passions require 'purification' from something, i.e. from something more or less of the nature of an impurity. What this element of impurity is, and in what sense the emotions in question are supposed to become 'pure', are points on which there is no slight divergence of opinion among the upholders of this interpretation of κάθαρσις. The principal explanations which have been propounded may be roughly distinguished and classified as follows: (1) Tragedy is said to purify pity and fear, because the frequent excitement of these emotions in the theatre has a tendency to weaken their force, and thus moderate and reduce them to just measure (Heinsius, Milton, Lessing, etc.). (2) The lessons and examples in Tragedy have a purifying and moderating effect on pity, fear, and other evil passions (Victorius, etc.). (3) The tragic pity and fear are regarded as pure, because they are aroused not by real suffering, but only by the imaginary woes of the theatre; so that there is no admixture of pain in them (Batteux, etc.). (4) They are regarded as pure, because, as aroused by Tragedy, they are disinterested emotions, with no self-regarding element in them (Brandis, Susemihl). (5) They are pure, because the sublimity of Tragedy exalts pity and fear into high and noble forms of feeling (Hermann). The first of these, the only view that calls for serious consideration, has an especial interest for us owing to the fact that in the eighteenth century it found a very distinguished exponent in Lessing. It must be admitted, however, that Lessing himself did little more than expand the old idea of 'moderating' the passions, and translate it back into the language of the Nicomachean Ethics. 'The tragic purification of the passions,' he says, 'consists merely in the conversion of pity and fear into virtuous habits of mind'.
'Da nämlich, es kurz zu sagen, diese Reinigung in nichts anderm beruht, als in der Verwandlung der Leidenschaften in tugendhafte Fertigkeiten, bei jeder Tugend aber, nach unserm Philosophen, sich dies diesseits und jenseits ein Extrem findet, zwischen welchem sie inne steht: so muss die Tragödie, wenn sie unser Mitleid in Tugend verwandeln soll, uns von beiden Extremen des Mitleids zu reinigen vermögend sein; welches auch von der Furcht zu verstehen'
( Hamb. Dram. St. 78 ). As Heinsius had said something very like this long before him, Lessing's originality here is not so marked as his power of statement.
The whole theory, as stated even by Lessing, is open to many and very grave objections. (1) It confuses two distinct things, the purification of a feeling and the purification of the soul from a feeling. (2) It confuses the ideas of 'pure' and 'moderate', though there is no direct logical or other relation between them; excess or defect in certain matters may be a fault, but they cannot be termed 'impurities'. (3) It rests on a false hypothesis as to the position of Tragedy in the social life of ancient Greece; the performance of Tragedy was too occasional to have a marked and abiding effect on the moral character of the hearers. (4) Even if the tragic excitement of emotion be supposed to have been sufficiently frequent to produce a habit, it does not follow that the resulting habit would be one of moderation in the matter of feeling; we have no right to suppose that the habitual indulgence of strong emotion (e.g. pity and fear) will weaken its force or reduce it to just measure. Habits according to Aristotle arise from corresponding activities, Eth. N. 2. 1 p. 1103 b 21
ἐκ τῶν ὁμοίων ἐνεργειῶν αἱ ἕξεις γίνονται
. We should expect, therefore, that the strong emotion aroused by Tragedy would, if habitualized by repetition, end in a habit of strong emotion, not in a habit of subdued or moderate emotion, not in that mean state of feeling which Aristotle identifies with virtue.
The primary error, however, in this and similar interpretations of παθημάτων κάθαρσις is that it reads a directly moral meaning into the term, as though the theatre were a school, and the tragic poet a teacher, of morality. That, however, is not Aristotle's theory; the great function of the tragic poet, he thinks, is to excite certain emotions, and procure us the pleasure that must accompany such excitement ( Poet. 14, 1453 b 11 ). This pleasurable excitement of emotion, in fact, is with him the end and aim of Tragedy, so far as the poet himself is concerned. The statesman, however, viewing human nature and society as a whole, is able to look beyond all this, and see the ultimate justification of the existence of Tragedy. In the Politics, accordingly, Aristotle recognizes the usefulness of Tragedy, explaining that it supplies a natural want, as a sort of catharsis of emotion, which as emotional creatures men require from time to time to keep their souls in health and quietude. This is a reasonable apology for Tragedy, and a sufficient answer to Plato's criticism. One may perhaps also say of it, that it is more consonant with fact and experience than the moral or disciplinary purpose which many still profess to regard as the true raison d'étre of the theatre.
1449b29

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-208

ἁρμονίαν καὶ μέλος The και is explanatory, μέλος being added as a synonym to explain ἁρμονία (v. on 1, 1447 a 22 ).
1449b30

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-209

διὰ μέτρων is opposed to διὰ μέλους: comp. Probl. 19. 31, 920 b 12
διὰ τὸ πολλαπλάσια εἶναι τότε τὰ μέλη ἐν ταῖς τραγῳδίαις τῶν μέτρων
. — Plato Symp. 187 D
μέλεσί τε καὶ μέτροις
. — Lysis 205 A
οὗ τι τῶν μέτρων δέομαι ἀκοῦσαι οὐδὲ μέλος
. — Isocrates 191 B
ταῖς ᾠδαῖς καὶ τοῖς μέτροις
.
1449b31

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-210

πράττοντες ποιοῦνται τὴν μίμησιν scil. οἱ μιμούμενοι. Aristotle is thinking not of the poet but of the performers, who tell the story by acting it on the stage (v. on 3, 1448 a 23 ). πράττοντες recalls the idea of the δρώντων in the preceding definition of Tragedy.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-211

1449b33 ὁ τῆς ὄψεως κόσμος ὄψις is usually rendered by 'spectaculum,' 'apparatus,' 'scenery,' or mise en scène; according to Twining it comprehends 'scenery, dresses—the whole visible apparatus of the theatre'. This explanation is too wide; the reference is merely to the visible appearance of the actors when got up in character by the σκευοποιός or costumier (see on 6, 1450 b 20 ). Aristotle accordingly more than once uses the word in a concrete sense in the plural, because each of the characters would require a special and distinctive make-up. The formula ὁ τῆς ὄψεως κόσμος implies that the visible make-up of the actors is of the nature of a decorative adjunct (v. on 4, 1449 a 29 ), a mere accessory to the poet's work (v. 6, 1450 b 16 ), on which he, as an artist, has no right to rely for his effects (v. 14, 1453 b 7 ). The term ὄψις like many other technical words in the Poetics was probably already familiar in this sense in the language of the theatre (comp. Festschrift Theodor Gomperz dargebracht p. 166 ).

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-212

μελοποιία (properly the making of μέλη) replaces the original term μέλος as a synonym for it; comp. 6, 1450 b 16 , and Pol. 8. 7, 1341 b 23
τὴν μουσικὴν ὁρῶμεν διὰ μελοποιίας καὶ ῥυθμῶν οὖσαν
.
1449b34

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-213

λέγω δὲ λέξιν μὲν ταύτην is to be compared with
λέγω γὰρ μῦθον τοῦτον
in 6, 1450 a 4 (v. ad loc.).
A definition is given because λέξις is a term with several meanings (v. on 21, 1459 a 12 ). The present definition describes the λέξις in a play in reference to the poet, as the 'composition of the verses'; that which comes later on, in 6, 1450 b 13 , views it rather from the side of the dramatic personages, as the 'expression of their thought in words'.

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-214

1449b35 μέτρων has the concrete sense of 'verses', like τοῖς μέτροις in 1, 1447 b 29 (comp. on b 30 ).

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-215

1449b36 πᾶσαν πᾶσιν, the emendation of Madius, may perhaps seem to be supported by the fragment of Democritus ( fr. 165 Diels ),
ἄνθρωπός ἐστιν ὃ πάντες ἴσμεν
. But no change is really wanted; instead of defining μελοποιία Aristotle thinks it enough to say that its whole nature is too obvious to require explanation.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-216

ἐπεὶ δὲ πράξεώς ἐστι κτέ. Comp. μίμησις πράξεως in the preceding definition. Having spoken of the externals of a tragedy, its ὄψις, λέξις and μελοποιία, Aristotle passes on to elements of another kind, those which constitute its internal content. The subject in a tragedy is an action with the personages concerned therein as agents. The μῦθος, the fable or plot of the play, represents the action as such; the ἦθος and διάνοια manifested in the language of the dramatis personae represent the personality of the agents. Oedipus, for instance, is in a poem only a name for a certain group of qualities, moral and intellectual, which his actions and the language put into his mouth reveal to us (comp. 9, 1451 b 7 ).

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-217

ποιούς τινας εἶναι κατά τε τὸ ἦθος καὶ τὴν διάνοιαν Intellectual as well as moral states are included under ποιότητες ( Cat. 8, 8 b 29 ). A little further on, however, in 1450 a 5 , Aristotle uses the term ποιούς τινας as though it naturally referred rather to the ἦθος or moral character. For the antithesis between ἦθος and διάνοια comp. Pol. 8. 1, 1337 a 38
οὐδὲ φανερὸν πότερον πρὸς τὴν διάνοιαν πρέπει μᾶλλον ἢ πρὸς τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς ἦθος
, and the distinction assumed throughout the Nicomachean Ethics and elsewhere between the ἠθικαί and the διανοητικαὶ ἀρεταί.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-218

1450a1 πέφυκεν begins the apodosis. There are thus in the natural order of things, says Aristotle, two distinguishable factors in the action of the individual agent, his ἦθος and his διάνοια; these are the inner causes of men's actions, and of the success or failure of their lives. πέφυκεν is, like the Platonic φύσιν ἔχει ( Rep. 473 C , 489 B ), impersonal. Vahlen illustrates this usage from Pol. 2. 2, 1261 b 7
οὔτε πέφυκε μίαν οὕτως εἶναι τὴν πόλιν
. — 4. 12, 1296 b 26
ἐνταῦθα πέφυκεν εἶναι δημοκρατίαν
, and Demosthenes 14, 30
τὰς κρήνας καὶ τὰ φρέατα ἐπιλείπειν πέφυκεν
.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-219

1450a2 κατὰ ταύτας =
κατὰ τὰς πράξεις
; comp. a 19
κατὰ δὲ τὰς πράξεις εὐδαίμονες ἢ τοὐναντίον
.
1450a3

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-220

τῆς μὲν πράξεως ὁ μῦθος ἡ μίμησις To complete the statement Aristotle might very well have added a clause like
τῶν δὲ πραττόντων τὰ ἤθη καὶ αἱ διάνοιαι
; and it has been suggested ( J. of Phil. 5 p. 119 ) that these words or something equivalent must have dropped out.
In a context like the present, however, this second point may have been left to be mentally supplied by the reader (comp. Vahlen ad loc.), as the emphatic mention of the first point ( τῆς μὲν πράξεως κτέ.) is enough to suggest it (comp. De interpr. 14, 23 b 30 , and Waitz ad loc.). For this use of μέν solitarium comp. 26, 1462 b 5 , and Waitz on An. pr. 2. 11, 61 b 19 .

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-221

1450a4 τοῦτον (= τοῦτο) is preparative and explained by τὴν σύνθεσιν τῶν πραγμάτων. The assimilation of gender has been a stumbling-block to Madius and others, though found again in 22, 1458 a 26
αἰνίγματός τε γὰρ ἰδέα αὕτη ἐστί, τὸ λέγοντα ὑπάρχοντα ἀδύνατα συνάψαι
(comp. Kühner, Gr. Gr. 2. 1 p. 74 ).

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-222

1450a6 διάνοιαν scil. εἶναι λέγω. Instead of attempting a definition, Aristotle evades the difficulty by saying that διάνοια is manifested in the argumentative and reflective utterances of the dramatis personae (comp. infra b 11 ). The statement here is merely provisional, as one may see by comparing the fuller exposition in 19, 1456 a 34 — b 8 —where we are told among other things that the διάνοια of a personage may be shown in his actions as well as in his words. Διάνοια in the sense it bears in the Poetics is, like ἦθος, an element in the personality of the dramatis personae. It is their intellectual capacity, as evinced in their language (or it may be, in their actions), and it is to be seen whenever they argue or make an appeal to the feelings of their hearers, in other words, when they reason or plead with one of the other dramatis personae in the same sort of way as a rhetor might do. Hence it is that the general theory of the διάνοια in a play is said ( 19, 1456 a 34 ) to belong to Rhetoric rather than Poetry; and a speech with a great display of διάνοια in it is a rhetorical speech (v. on b 6 ). The term answering to Aristotle's διάνοια in Isocrates is ἐνθυμήματα, 'arguments': Isocr. 191 B
μετὰ μέτρων καὶ ῥυθμῶν ἅπαντα ποιοῦσιν . . . τοσαύτην ἔχει χάριν, ὥστ᾿ ἂν καὶ τῇ λέξει καὶ τοῖς ἐνθυμήμασιν . . . ἔχῃ κακῶς, ὅμως αὐταῖς ταῖς εὐρυθμίαις καὶ ταῖς συμμετρίαις ψυχαγωγοῦσι τοὺς ἀκούοντας
. — 319 D
καὶ γὰρ τῇ λέξει ποιητικωτέρᾳ καὶ ποικιλωτέρᾳ τὰς πράξεις δηλοῦσι, καὶ τοῖς ἐνθυμήμασιν ὀγκωδεστέροις καὶ καινοτέροις χρῆσθαι ζητοῦσιν
.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-223

λέγοντες : comp. b 6
ἐπὶ τῶν λόγων
, and b 7
πολιτικῶς ἐποίουν λέγοντας
. Aristotle is thinking more immediately of the ῥήσεις in a tragedy, and of the intellectual, i. e. the rhetorical or argumentative, capacity they may reveal in the personages.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-224

1450a7 ἀποδεικνύασίν τι :
ἀποδεικνύουσί τι ὡς ἔστιν ἢ ὡς οὐκ ἔστιν
. — 19, 1456 a 37
τό τε ἀποδεικνύναι καὶ τὸ λύειν
. — Rhet. 1. 1, 1355 a 5
ἡ δὲ πίστις ἀπόδειξίς τις· τότε γὰρ πιστεύομεν μάλιστα ὅταν ἀποδεδεῖχθαι ὑπολάβωμεν
.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-225

ἢ καὶ ἀποφαίνονται γνώμην The equivalent in b 12 is the more general expression,
καθόλου τι ἀποφαίνονται
, but it is hardly worth while to bring the two passages into unison by restoring here (with Bernays, Zwei Abhandl. p. 155 ) ἢ καθόλου ἀποφαίνονται, on the assumption that γνώμην may have come in as a gloss.
A γνώμη as defined in the Rhetoric is a maxim, or general proposition relating to the conduct of life: Rhet. 2. 21, 1394 a 21
ἔστι δὲ γνώμη ἀπόφανσις, οὐ μέντοι περὶ τῶν καθ᾿ ἕκαστον, οἷον ποιός τις Ιφικράτης, ἀλλὰ καθόλου· καὶ οὐ περὶ πάντων καθόλου, οἷον ὅτι τὸ εὐθὺ τῷ καμπύλῳ ἐναντίον, ἀλλὰ περὶ ὅσων αἱ πράξεις εἰσί, καὶ αἱρετὰ ἢ φευκτά ἐστι πρὸς τὸ πράττειν
.
The corresponding Latin term was sententia: Quintilian 8. 5. 3
Antiquissimae sunt quae proprie . . . sententiae vocantur, quas Graeci γνώμας appellant: utrumque autem nomen ex eo acceperunt, quod similes sunt consiliis aut decretis
.
1450a8

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-226

μέρη εἶναι ἕξ An answer to the question announced in 1, 1447 a 10
ἐκ πόσων καὶ ποίων ἐστὶ μορίων
.

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-227

καθ᾿ ὃ ποιά τις ἐστὶν ἡ τραγῳδία The word μέρος being ambiguous ( Metaph. Δ 25, 1023 b 12 ; Ζ 10, 1034 b 32 ), this clause had to be added to mark the distinction between the 'parts' at present under consideration and those to be enumerated hereafter in chap. 12. The parts here described are the formative constituents of a tragedy; whereas those defined in chap. 12 are the sections into which it is divided. It is through these various formative constituents that we are able to speak of a tragedy as ποία τις—as good or bad, as ἠθική or πεπλεγμένη or παθητική, or whatever else it may be said to be, when we come to judge of its quality.
1450a12

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-228

οὐκ ὀλίγοι αὐτῶν =
οὐκ ὀλίγοι τῶν ποιητῶν
. The ὡς εἰπεῖν which follows should perhaps be transposed and inserted after πᾶν in the next line.
Of the many emendations that have been propounded the simplest certainly is that of Bursian, οὐκ ὀλίγοι αὐτῶν 〈ἀλλὰ πάντες〉, on which that formerly suggested by myself, ὀλίγου αὐτῶν 〈ἅπαντες〉 ( J. of Phil. 14 p. 44 ), was based. οὐκ ὀλίγοι αὐτῶν, however, has on it a certain stamp of genuineness. The sense seems to be this: The six parts are in the nature of things possible elements in every tragedy, so to say; and due use has been made of them by not a few of the poets. The statement may be compared with those in a 25 , 36, and 18, 1456 a 3 , where the existence is recognized of plays weak or deficient in some of the parts. For the sense of ἔχει in this passage (='admits of', 'has in it the possibility of') comp. 2, 1448 a 7 ; and for the distinction between it and κέχρηνται, Eth. N. 7. 4, 1146 b 32
ὁ ἔχων μὲν οὐ χρώμενος δὲ τῇ ἐπιστήμῃ
. — 1147 a 1
ἔχοντα μὲν ἀμφοτέρας [scil. τὰς προτάσεις] οὐδὲν κωλύει πράττειν παρὰ τὴν ἐπιστήμην, χρώμενον μέντοι τῇ καθόλου ἀλλὰ μὴ τῇ κατὰ μέρος
(comp. Bon. Ind. 854 b 37 ).

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-229

1450a13 εἴδεσι : see on 4, 1449 a 7 .

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-230

ὄψεις : see on 6, 1449 b 33 .

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-231

πᾶν , i. e. every play; comp. 12, 1452 a 18
ἁπάντων
. — 18, 1456 a 31
ἐξ ἄλλου εἰς ἄλλο
.
1450a15

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-232

μέγιστον κτέ. Aristotle proceeds at this point to arrange the six elements in the order of their relative importances; and he begins by asserting, with an abundance of reasons which seems to imply that it was a subject of controversy at the time, the supreme importance of the μῦθος. As it is the first duty of a tragedy to represent an action, the μῦθος or story of action in it must be the first and most essential element in its construction. The characters, i.e. the personal agents, are mainly required in order to work out the story, and as means to that end; so that this element is to be deemed of secondary and subordinate significance as compared with the μῦθος. The paramount importance of plot in Drama has been re-asserted with equal emphasis in our own time by an eminent living dramatist: 'The idea, the plot, always comes first. The plot, in a sense, is nine-tenths of a play' ( H. A. Jones, Strand Magazine 34 p. 379 ).

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-233

ἡ τῶν πραγμάτων σύστασις = ὁ μῦθος. As the action in a tragedy is a whole of some magnitude (comp. 4, 1449 a 19 ; 6, 1449 b 25 ), it must have a plurality of incidents ( πράγματα) embodied in it. What Aristotle means by a combination of incidents may be seen from his synopses of the Iphigenia and Odyssey in 17, 1455 b 2 sqq. .

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-234

1450a17 βίου : Plato Laws 817 B
ἡμεῖς ἐσμὲν τραγῳδίας αὐτοὶ ποιηταὶ κατὰ δύναμιν ὅτι καλλίστης ἅμα καὶ ἀρίστης· πᾶσα οὖν [? γοῦν] ἡμῖν ἡ πολιτεία ξυνέστηκε μίμησις τοῦ καλλίστου καὶ ἀρίστου βίου, ὃ δή φαμεν ἡμεῖς γε ὄντως εἶναι τραγῳδίαν τὴν ἀληθεστάτην
. — Lycurgus in Leocr. 102
οἱ ποιηταὶ μιμούμενοι τὸν ἀνθρώπινον βίον
. Alcidamas described the Odyssey as a
καλὸν ἀνθρωπίνου βίου κάτοπτρον
( Aristot. Rhet. 3. 3, 1406 b 12 ). Of Menander also it was said:
Μένανδρε καὶ βίε, πότερος ἄρ᾿ ὑμῶν πότερον ἀπεμιμήσατο;
( Nauck, Aristophanis Byz. Fragm. p. 249 ).

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-235

καὶ εὐδαιμονίας : Plato Rep. 603 C
πράττοντας, φαμέν, ἀνθρώπους μιμεῖται ἡ μιμητικὴ βιαίους ἢ ἑκουσίας πράξεις καὶ ἐκ τοῦ πράττειν ἢ εὖ οἰομένους ἢ κακῶς πεπραγέναι
.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-236

1450a18 ἐν πράξει According to the definition in Eth. N. 1. 6, 1098 a 16 happiness is a certain kind of activity, a
ψυχῆς ἐνέργεια κατ᾿ ἀρετήν
. Comp. Phys. 2. 6, 197 b 4
ἡ δὲ εὐδαιμονία πρᾶξίς τις· εὐπραξία γάρ
. — Pol. 7. 3, 1325 a 32
ἡ γὰρ εὐδαιμονία πρᾶξίς ἐστιν
(also Eth. N. 1. 8, 1098 b 21 ; Rhet. 1. 5, 1360 b 14 ).

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-237

τὸ τέλος : Eth. N. 1. 8, 1098 b 18
πράξεις τινὲς λέγονται καὶ ἐνέργειαι τὸ τέλος
.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-238

οὐ ποιότης : Eth. N. 10. 2, 1173 a 14
οὐδὲ γὰρ αἱ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐνέργειαι ποιότητές εἰσιν, οὐδ᾿ ἡ εὐδαιμονία
.
1450a21

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-239

πράττουσι scil. οἱ μιμούμενοι. The reference is to the actors (see on 3, 1448 a 23 ) rather than the poets.

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-240

συμπεριλαμβάνουσιν scil. ἐν τῇ μιμήσει, 'they include in the representation'; συμπεριλαμβάνειν in this sense is not infrequent in later Greek (v. HSt. s. v. ). It is hardly necessary, therefore, to reject it for the reading of one of the apographs, συμπαραλαμβάνουσιν, though it is no doubt quite true that manuscripts are apt to confuse the two prepositions.

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-241

1450a22 διὰ τὰς πράξεις διά in this connexion must mean 'with a view to', 'for the sake of', as in Thuc. 2. 89. 4
διὰ τὴν σφετέραν δόξαν
.

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-242

καὶ ὁ μῦθος The καί is explanatory, 'that is to say'.

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-243

1450a23 τὸ δὲ τέλος μέγιστον ἁπάντων modelled on the proverb in Plato Rep. 377 A
ἀρχὴ παντὸς ἔργου μέγιστον
, which reappears in Aristotle Soph. el. 33, 183 b 22
μέγιστον γὰρ ἴσως ἀρχὴ παντός, ὥσπερ λέγεται
. — Probl. 10. 13, 892 a 29
ἡ μὲν γὰρ ἀρχὴ παντὸς ἔργου μέγιστον· ἥμισυ γάρ
.
1450a25

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-244

τῶν νέων As it is clear from 14, 1453 b 28 that Euripides is not classed among the old poets ( οἱ παλαιοί), οἱ νέοι, 'the moderns,' must mean the poets from Euripides downwards. It is to be observed also that, when Aristotle a little further on in this chapter distinguishes between οἱ ἀρχαῖοι and οἱ νῦν, the point noted as characteristic of 'the moderns' ( ῥητορικῶς ποιοῦσι λέγοντας) is manifestly true of Euripides, and was recognized as true of him by the ancients themselves (see on ῥητορικῶς, b 8 ).

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-245

ἀήθεις : 24, 1460 a 11
οὐδέν᾿ ἀήθη ἀλλ᾿ ἔχοντα ἤθη
. ἀήθης is, like other compounds of α privativum ( De anima 2. 10, 427 a 26 ; Metaph. Δ 22, 1022 b 32 ), an ambiguous word, as it may mean either 'destitute of character', or merely 'deficient in character'.
Aristotle must be using it in this latter sense, since a play with personages wholly destitute of character is hardly conceivable. The language in the illustration which follows from painting,
οὐδὲν ἔχει ἦθος
, is an instance of a common form of exaggeration, just like that in the saying of Pope,
Most women have no characters at all
.

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-246

1450a26 τοιοῦτοι i. e. ἀήθεις.

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-247

οἷον καὶ τῶν γραφέων Ζεῦξις πρὸς Πολύγνωτον πέπονθεν : De gen. an. 5. 3, 783 a 6
ἔστι δ᾿ ἔνια τῶν ζῴων . . . μαλακὴν μὲν ἔχει τὴν τρίχα ἧττον δὲ λεπτήν, οἷον τὸ τῶν δασυπόδων πρὸς τὸ τῶν προβάτων πέπονθεν
. — Rhet. 3. 2, 1404 b 22
οἷον ἡ Θεοδώρου φωνὴ πέπονθε πρὸς τὴν τῶν ἄλλων ὑποκριτῶν
.

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-248

γραφέων For other illustrations from painting see on 2, 1448 a 5 .

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-249

1450a27 Πολύγνωτον The same view of him, as one who knew how to indicate character in painting, is implied in Pol. 8. 5, 1340 a 37
τὰ Πολυγνώτου κἂν εἴ τις ἄλλος τῶν γραφέων ἢ τῶν ἀγαλματοποιῶν ἐστιν ἠθικός
.

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-250

1450a28 Ζεύξιδος This taken in connexion with what is said of him later on, in 25, 1461 b 12 , would seem to show that, in Aristotle's view, Zeuxis sacrificed expression to beauty.
1450a29

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-251

ῥήσεις i. e. the speeches put into the mouths of the personages in a play or poem (comp. 15, 1454 a 31 ; 18, 1450 b 31 ). The word had been already used in this technical sense by both Plato and Aristophanes.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-252

ἠθικάς In the Rhetoric the ἠθικὸς λόγος is one designed to create a favourable idea of the speaker's ἦθος, in contradistinction to the παθητικὸς λόγος, which addresses the feelings, and the ἀποδεικτικὸς λόγος, which addresses the reason of his audience. In matters of imitative art, however, the usual meaning of ἠθικός is μιμητικὸς ἤθους, 'expressive of character' (comp. Bon. Ind. 315 b 21 )—which is the sense the word has in the present and other passages in the Poetics. Thus in 18, 1456 a 1 a certain kind of tragedy is termed the ἠθική τραγῳδία, 'the tragedy of character', because its main interest is as a portraiture of character; in 23, 1459 b 16 the Odyssey is described as ἠθική, because it is more of a portraiture of character than the Iliad; in 24, 1460 b 3 certain passages in a poem are termed ἠθικά μέρη, as serving to bring out the ἦθος of the personages in the story.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-253

λέξει καὶ διανοίᾳ εὖ πεποιημένας , 'made perfect in the matter of language and thought'. The same use of the dative is found in a 36
τῇ λέξει καὶ τοῖς ἤθεσιν ἀκριβοῦν
. — 24, 1460 b 2
τῇ δὲ λέξει δεῖ διαπονεῖν
; and in Alcidamas De soph. 12
οἱ τοῖς ὀνόμασιν ἀκριβῶς ἐξειργασμένοι [scil. λόγοι].

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-254

1450a30 οὔπω ποιήσει ὃ ἦν τῆς τραγῳδίας ἔργον : Rhet. 3. 2, 1404 b 2
ὁ λόγος, ἐὰν μὴ δηλοῖ, οὐ ποιήσει τὸ ἑαυτοῦ ἔργον
. The Arabic version seems to suggest οὔπω (see on 9, 1451 b 13 ) rather than οὐ. For the fut. with οὔπω comp. Eth. N. 5. 10, 1135 a 22
ὥστε ἔσται τι ἄδικον μὲν ἀδίκημα δὲ οὔπω, ἐὰν μὴ τὸ ἑκούσιον προσῇ
. — 6. 13, 1144 a 35
ὥστε τὴν μὲν ἤδη τὴν δ᾿ οὔπω εἰληφὼς ἔσται
.
The imperfect in ἦν τῆς τραγῳδίας ἔργον implies that the point has been already settled in the preceding discussion (comp. Bon. Ind. 754 a 40 ), the reference being presumably to 6, 1449 b 36 , where Tragedy is said to be a μίμησις πράξεως.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-255

1450a31 ἀλλὰ πολὺ μᾶλλον scil. ποιήσει, as in Eth. N. 6. 8, 1141 b 18
εἰ γὰρ εἰδείη ὅτι τὰ κοῦφα εὔπεπτα κρέα καὶ ὑγιεινά, ποῖα δὲ κοῦφα ἀγνοοῖ, οὐ ποιήσει ὑγίειαν, ἀλλ᾿ ὁ εἰδὼς ὅτι τὰ ὀρνίθεια [κοῦφα καὶ] ὑγιεινὰ ποιήσει μᾶλλον
. For the form of antithesis comp. De caelo 2. 3, 286 a 5
πόρρω δ᾿ οὐχ οὕτω τῷ τόπῳ, πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον τῷ ... ὀλίγην ἔχειν αἴσθησιν
, and the instances collected by Vahlen (ad loc.) and Schwab (Schanz's Beiträge 4. 1, p. 66).

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-256

τούτοις refers back to the ῥήσεις ἠθικαὶ καὶ λέξει καὶ διανοίᾳ εὖ πεποιημέναι of 29. Aristotle's point is, that the dramatic effectiveness of a tragedy depends before all else on its plot, and that no literary or rhetorical brilliancy will make up for a weak plot.
1450a33

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-257

ψυχαγωγεῖ comp. b 17
ψυχαγωγικόν
. Said of a work of art the word means no more than to 'move' or 'rivet the attention', and is thus the equivalent of our word 'attract' or (as people now sometimes say) 'fascinate'.
This sense of ψυχαγωγεῖν is as old as Xenophon: Mem. 3. 10. 6
ὃ δὲ μάλιστα ψυχαγωγεῖ διὰ τῆς ὄψεως τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, τὸ ζωτικὸν φαίνεσθαι, πῶς τοῦτο ἐνεργάζῃ τοῖς ἀνδριασιν;
. It is found more than once in Isocrates: 24 D
δέδεικται τοῖς ἐπιθυμοῦσι τοὺς ἀκροωμένους ψυχαγωγεῖν ὅτι τοῦ μὲν νουθετεῖν καὶ συμβουλεύειν ἀφεκτέον, τὰ δὲ τοιαῦτα λεκτέον οἷς ὁρῶσι τοὺς ὄχλους μάλιστα χαίροντας
. — 191 A
τοσαύτην ἔχει χάριν, ὥστ᾿ ἂν καὶ τῇ λέξει καὶ τοῖς ἐνθυμήμασιν ἔχῃ κακῶς, ὅμως αὐταῖς ταῖς εὐρυθμίαις καὶ ταῖς συμμετρίαις ψυχαγωγοῦσι τοὺς ἀκούοντας
. Later writers also often use the word in the sense of to 'attract' or 'please'; comp. the Antiatticista in Bekker's Anecdota 116
ψυχαγωγεῖν: τὸ τέρπειν
, and Vahlen, Symb. Phil. Bonn. p. 168.

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-258

1450a34 αἵ τε περιπέτειαι καὶ ἀναγνωρίσεις These are considered later on in chap. 11 . It will be observed that Aristotle uses the two terms without explanation, as though they were already part of the established language of the theatre. The appositional clause comes in as an afterthought, at some distance from the words it illustrates (comp. Kühner, Gr. Gr. 2. 1 p. 282 ).
1450a37

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-259

συνίστασθαι is apparently a middle in 24, 1460 a 34 also (v. ad loc.).

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-260

οἷον καὶ introduces not an instance but a parallel from a different class of things just like ὥσπερ καὶ, from which it is often hardly distinguishable in sense (comp. Top. 6. 9, 148 a 4 ; Eth. N. 9. 1, 1164 a 15 ; Rhet. 3. 11, 1412 a 11 ; 3. 12, 1413 b 25 ) . In De mem. 1, 450 b 20 and in Plato Phaedr. 255 C
οἷον
is so completely equivalent to ὥσπερ as to have a οὕτως as its antecedent. In Poet. 25, 1460 b 33
οἷον ... ταύτῃ
is practically the same thing as ὥσπερ ... οὕτως.
1450a38

19. mvp-aristotle-comment-261

ἀρχὴ A little before this the μῦθος was said to be the τέλος τῆς τραγῳδίας (a 22). From one point of view it is the ἀρχή, as being the necessary basis of every tragedy; from another it is the τέλος, because it is this much more than the characters that Tragedy
μίμησις πράξεως
has to represent.

19. mvp-aristotle-comment-262

ψυχὴ : Isocrates 142 B
ἔστι γὰρ ψυχὴ πόλεως οὐδὲν ἕτερον ἢ πολιτεία
. — 261 B
πᾶσα πολιτεία ψυχὴ πόλεώς ἐστιν
. — [Demosthenes] 60. 23
ἡ τῶνδε τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἀρετὴ τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἦν ψυχὴ τἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν
— Martianus Capella 3, 268
Est accentus, ut quidam putaverunt, anima vocis
.
1450a39

20. mvp-aristotle-comment-263

παραπλήσιον κτέ. This clause Castelvetro and others would transpose and insert after σύστασιν πραγμάτων in 33. It comes in, however, naturally enough where it stands, as an afterthought to illustrate the secondary position ( δεύτερον δὲ τὰ ἤθη) of the element of character in a play. So also in the sister art of painting, says Aristotle, the colouring is of subordinate importance in comparison with the design which makes the work to mean something and be like something; a portrait is a portrait, and will give us the pleasure of one, even though executed in mere whites and greys; whereas a medley of much more beautiful colours without a design to give them meaning will not produce the same pleasure, because we cannot see that it represents anything. The nature of the pleasure found in a work of imitative art was explained in 4, 1448 b 13 .

20. mvp-aristotle-comment-264

1450b1 εἰ γάρ τις ἐναλείψειε κτέ. The sense is thus given by Goulston:
'si quis tabulam, pigmentis licet pulcherrimis, temere fusimque illeverit; non perinde spectantem oblectet, ac si, albo licet colore, imaginem delinearet certam: pari modo in tragoediis absque constitutione rerum minus valent mores quam morum expers fabula.'
.
The object left to be understood with ἐναλείψειε is τὸν πίνακα, the 'panel' or 'canvas', as we should say; ἀλείφειν and ἐπαλείφειν are used in just the same way, in the sense of covering a surface with colour. ἐναλείφειν, it is to be observed, has apparently a different kind of object in De gen. an. 2. 6, 743 b 23
οἱ γραφεῖς ὑπογράψαντες ταῖς γραμμαῖς οὕτως ἐναλείφουσι τοῖς χρώμασι τὸ ζῷον
('painters first sketch the outline of the figure before proceeding to work it out in colour'). χύδην means 'without system or order', i.e. without a design to give form and sense to the whole.
The direct opposite of this unmeaning medley of the most beautiful colours ( εἴ τις ἐναλείψειε τοῖς καλλίστοις φαρμάκοις χύδην) is a portrait in plain whites and greys ( λευκογραφήσας εἰκόνα); in what follows, therefore, εἰκόνα serves as an antithesis to χύδην (comp. Vahlen, Symb. Phil. Bonn. p. 166) and λευκογραφήσας to τοῖς καλλίστοις φαρμάκοις. λευκογραφεῖν, as a derivative from λευκογράφος (a word no longer to be found), is to 'paint monochromes in white', i.e. in shades of white and grey (it would seem) on a dark ground. Zeuxis, whom Aristotle has just mentioned in 27, was among other things a painter of monochromes in white—
pinxit et monochromata ex albo
( Pliny N. H. 35. 64 ; comp. Brunn, Gr. Künstler 2 p. 55 ).
A portrait, however, even though it be a mere monochrome in whites (comp. λευκογραφήσας εἰκόνα), will have a meaning, and give the mind the intellectual pleasure which accompanies the recognition of the meaning (comp. 4, 1448 b 15 ); whereas a medley of beautiful colours has no meaning, and the pleasure it gives the beholder is of a wholly different order (comp. 4, 1448 b 18
οὐχ ᾗ μίμημα ποιήσει τὴν ἡδονὴν ἀλλὰ διὰ ... τὴν χροιάν
). The antithesis, therefore, is simply between beautiful colours without an εἰκών, and an εἰκών without any beauty of colour.
Vahlen's view of the import of these words is somewhat different. He thinks that λευκογραφήσας may denote the preliminary sketch (like ὑπογράφειν in the above-quoted passage in the De gen. an.) in white, which is afterwards filled in with colour, when the picture comes to be finished; so that the clause may be taken to describe two stages in the process of painting, (1) λευκογραφεῖν εἰκόνα, and (2) ἐναλείφειν φαρμάκοις, and serves to illustrate the order of procedure in Tragedy, where the μῦθος is said to come first, as the ἀρχὴ τῆς τραγῳδίας, and the ἤθη second:
'orationis formam sic accipio, εἴ τις ἐναλείψειε τοῖς καλλίστοις φαρμάκοις χύδην, οὐκ ἂν ὁμοίως εὐφράνειεν καὶ λευκογραφήσας εἰκόνα εἰ ἐναλείψειε φαρμάκοις', ut χύδην, h. e. nulla ante delineatione facta, et λευκογραφήσας εἰκόνα inter se opponantur'
. This very subtle interpretation seems to me to read more into Aristotle's words than is required for the argument. Aristotle would perhaps have said: οὐκ ἂν ὁμοίως εὐφράνειε καὶ εἰ λευκογραφήσας εἰκόνα οὕτως ἐναλείψειε τοῖς φαρμάκοις.
1450b3

21. mvp-aristotle-comment-265

ἔστιν τε μίμησις πράξεως κτέ. supports the statement (38-39) before the parenthesis by recalling the general fact on which it is based (v. 20-23).
1450b4

22. mvp-aristotle-comment-266

τρίτον δὲ ἡ διάνοια As the intellectual quality of the dramatis personae comes out mainly in what they are made to say, διάνοια is provisionally explained (see on 6) as a power of making the best of one's case or of saying the right thing.

22. mvp-aristotle-comment-267

1450b5 τὰ ἐνόντα scil. ἐν τοῖς πράγμασιν, as in Isocr. 292 E
ὑπισχνοῦνται τοιούτους ῥήτορας τοὺς συνόντας ποιήσειν ὥστε μηδὲν τῶν ἐνόντων ἐν τοῖς πράγμασι παραλιπεῖν
(comp. Bon. Ind. 250 a 56 ). The whole expression τὰ ἐνόντα καὶ τὰ ἁρμόττοντα covers the same ground as that in Rhet. 2. 22, 1396 b 5
τὰ ἐνδεχόμενα καὶ τὰ ἐπικαιρότατα
.

22. mvp-aristotle-comment-268

1450b6 ἐπὶ τῶν λόγων has been taken to mean 'in soluta oratione' (Paccius), and 'in orationibus' (Valla) or 'in eloquentia', 'bei der Beredsamkeit' (Vahlen). The explanation, however, in the context, ἐποίουν λέγοντας (57), is enough to show that the λόγοι Aristotle has in mind are the λόγοι in a play, i.e. the ῥήσεις put into the mouths of the personages. This is apparently the sense the word bears in the next sentence also,
τῶν λόγων ἐν οἷς μηδ᾿ ὅλως ἔστιν τι προαιρεῖται ἢ φεύγει ὁ λέγων
(b 9).

22. mvp-aristotle-comment-269

τῆς πολιτικῆς καὶ ῥητορικῆς ἔργον Aristotle seems to be thinking of what is said in a play by the chief personages (e. g. the tragic hero), and of the kind of intellectual capacity ( διάνοια) revealed in their statements. One has to remember that the chief personages in ancient Tragedy are not ordinary men, and that the tragic hero is expressly said by Aristotle ( 13, 1453 a 10-21 ) to be always in the best tragedies a man of great position and lineage. In a play, therefore, such personages might very well be made to speak πολιτικῶς, 'like statesmen', and to show a statesmanlike power of saying what is appropriate to the situation before them ( τὰ ἁρμόττοντα). But it would also be possible to make them speak ῥητορικῶς, 'like rhetors', with something of the rhetor's cleverness in seizing on the various possible points that may be urged on the occasion ( τὰ ἐνόντα, i.e. τὰ ἐνδεχόμενα). Though ῥητορική stands in a certain relation to πολιτική ( Rhet. 1. 2, 1356 a 27 ), the distinction between them is a very real one with Aristotle; πολιτική is with him the practical wisdom of the statesman ( Eth. N. 6. 8, 1141 b 23 ), and ῥητορική only a form of the art of argumentation—a
δύναμις τοῦ πορίσαι λόγους
( Rhet. 1. 2, 1356 a 33 ), or
δύναμις περὶ ἑκάστου τοῦ θεωρῆσαι τὸ ἐνδεχόμενον πιθανόν
( Rhet. 1. 2, 1355 b 26 ). There is no reference to πολιτική in chap. 19 . Aristotle may perhaps have felt that the practice of the later dramatists ( οἱ νῦν) was too firmly established to admit of change, and that the tragic personages accordingly must still be allowed to speak ῥητορικῶς, as they did in the Tragedy of his time.
1450b7

23. mvp-aristotle-comment-270

ἀρχαῖοι : the dramatists anterior to Euripides (see on 6, 1450 a 25 ).

23. mvp-aristotle-comment-271

πολιτικῶς . ... λέγοντας which Valla rendered by 'civiliter dicentes', is often taken to mean 'to speak the language of civil life', like ordinary citizens, as distinct from the professional orator. But as the context shows that the ability to speak πολιτικῶς implies something of πολιτική in the speaker (comp. Newman on Pol. 2. 11, 1273 b 12 ), πολιτικῶς would seem rather to mean 'like a πολιτικός'—the statesman being assumed to say that which is befitting ( τὰ ἁρμόττοντα) without any ostentation of rhetorical cleverness (comp. HSt. s. v. πολιτικός ). Vahlen (Symb. phil. Bonn. p. 175) supposes the expression to coincide in sense with the ἠθικῶς λέγειν of Rhet. 3. 17, 1418 b 38 which means ἀπὸ προαιρέσεως λέγειν, as opposed to ἀπὸ διανοίας λέγειν ( Rhet. 3. 16, 1417 a 23 ). The objection to this interpretation is twofold. (1) Aristotle is to all appearance not contrasting διάνοια with ἦθος, but distinguishing between the two forms it may assume in the dramatic ῥήσεις. (2) πολιτικῶς λέγειν can hardly be identical with ἠθικῶς λέγειν; the personages in Comedy speak ἠθικῶς, but it would be a paradox to say of them that they speak πολιτικῶς, in the sense of there being something of πολιτική in their utterances.

23. mvp-aristotle-comment-272

1450b8 ῥητορικῶς Euripides is termed by Aristophanes ( Pax 534 ) a
ποιητὴς ῥηματίων δικανικῶν
. Quintilian also (10. 1, 68) thinks the study of his plays one of the best preparations for the bar:
'Illud quidem nemo non fateatur necesse est, iis qui se ad agendum comparant utiliorem longe fore Euripidem. namque is et sermone magis accedit oratorio generi et sententiis densus et in iis quae a sapientibus tradita sunt paene ipsis par, et dicendo ac respondendo cuilibet eorum qui fuerunt in foro diserti comparandus.'
.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-273

ἦθος A statement is said to have ἦθος in it when it reveals the moral purpose of the speaker, the kind of thing that he purposes to do or not to do. ἦθος is an element in oratory also, as the credibility of the orator often depends on the impression one forms of his character. The language in the text may be compared with that in Rhet. 2. 21, 1395 b 13
ἦθος δ᾿ ἔχουσιν οἱ λόγοι ἐν ὅσοις δήλη ἡ προαίρεσις· αἱ δὲ γνῶμαι πᾶσαι τοῦτο ποιοῦσι διὰ τὸ ἀποφαίνεσθαι τὸν τὴν γνώμην λέγοντα καθόλου περὶ τῶν προαιρετῶν, ὥστ᾿ ἂν χρησταὶ ὦσιν αἱ γνῶμαι, καὶ χρηστοήθη φαίνεσθαι ποιοῦσι τὸν λέγοντα
. — 3. 16, 1417 a 16
ἠθικὴν δὲ χρὴ τὴν διήγησιν εἶναι. ἔσται δὲ τοῦτο ἂν εἰδῶμεν τί ἦθος ποιεῖ. ἓν μὲν δὴ τὸ προαίρεσιν δηλοῦν, ποιὸν δὲ τὸ ἦθος τῷ ποιὰν ταύτην· ἡ δὲ προαίρεσις ποιὰ τῷ τέλει. διὰ τοῦτο οὐκ ἔχουσιν οἱ μαθηματικοὶ λόγοι ἤθη, ὅτι οὐδὲ προαίρεσιν· τὸ γὰρ οὗ ἕνεκα οὐκ ἔχουσιν. ἀλλ᾿ οἱ Σωκρατικοί· περὶ τοιούτων γὰρ λέγουσιν.
.

24. mvp-aristotle-comment-274

1450b09 ὁποῖά τις. This (the reading of o) is very rightly retained by Vahlen, who translates the clause by
quod aperiat voluntatem, qualia quis in quibus apertum non est aut appetat aut fugiat
; the explanation is added to show that προαίρεσις is to be taken in a wide sense, which may include aversion as well as desire. For an explanatory clause of this form comp. 16, 1455b10
συνελογίσαντο τὴν εἱμαρμένην ὅτι ἐν τούτῳ εἵμαρτο ἀποθανεῖν
, and Plato Rep. 535 A
μέμνησαι οὖν τὴν προτέραν ἐκλογὴν τῶν ἀρχόντων, οἷους ἐξελέξαμεν ;
ἐν οἷς οὐκ ἔστι δῆλον is added because there are situations in which the moral purpose of the agent is too obvious to require to be revealed in an 'ethical' speech; see 19, 1456 b7 for a parallel statement on the subject of διάνοια.

24. mvp-aristotle-comment-275

1450b9_2 προαιρεῖται. Though the usual opposite of φεύγειν is the simple verb αἱρεῖσθαι ( Bon. Ind. 18b3 ), there is a certain propriety in προαιρεῖται in a clause explanatory of προαίρεσις. The word is found in a similar antithesis in Eth. N. 10. 1, 1172b25
τὰ μὲν γὰρ ἡδέα προαιροῦνται, τὰ δὲ λυπηρὰ φεύγουσιν.

24. mvp-aristotle-comment-276

1450b11 διόπερ κτέ. In the Rhetoric we are told that a mathematical argument does not admit of any colouring of character, because the facts with which it deals are indifferent to us—not objects of either desire or aversion: Rhet. 3. 16, 1417b9
διὰ τοῦτο οὐκ ἔχουσιν οἱ μαθηματικοὶ λόγοι ἤθη, ὅτι οὐδὲ προαίρεσιν· τὸ γὰρ οὗ ἕνεκα οὐκ ἔχουσιν.
In like manner a speech in a play may be on a subject wholly indifferent to the speaker, and in that case there is no room for any infusion of ἦθος into his statement.
1450b12

25. mvp-aristotle-comment-277

καθόλου τι ἀποφαίνονται replaces the ἀποφαίνονται γνώμην in 7 ( v. ad loc.).
1450b13

26. mvp-aristotle-comment-278

τέταρτον δὲ τῶν ἐν λόγῳ κτέ. On the reading which I have ventured to introduce into the text see the J. of Phil. 5 p. 1191. It is clear that the four elements in a tragedy, the μύθος ἤθη διάνοια and λέξις, belong to it as a work of literature, and that the music and 'spectacle' are accessories, which attach to it only when it comes to be acted on the stage. Apart from these accessories, a tragedy is, like an epic ( comp. 23, 1459 b10 ), a μίμησις ἐν λόγῳ (see on 1, 1447 29 ), and all the elements which constitute it are ἐν λόγῳ. τὰ ἐν λόγῳ, therefore, is a comprehensive designation for the four literary elements, as distinct from the non-literary elements ( τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν b 15), the music and 'spectacle', with which the enumeration concludes. If τῶν μὲν λόγων be retained, the genitive 1 has to be taken as an objective gen. after λέξις. Valla renders the words by
orationum dictio
, Paccius by
sermonum dictio
, and Goulston by
ipsarum orationum elocutio
. The main difficulty, however, is in the particle, which has never been satisfactorily explained. Vahlen formerly ( Symb. Phil. Bonn. p. 181 ) connected the clause with that which follows in 615 τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν κτέ., supposing the sense to be 'viertens für die Dialoge ( τῶν λόγων) die sprachliche Form; für das übrige ( τῶν λοιπῶν) die Melopöie'. His later view (1885) is that the μέν in τῶν μὲν λόγων may be an instance of μέν solitarium, and that Aristotle may have meant at first to append something about the τῶν δὲ μελῶν... Such a division of the fourth part, it seems to me, is wholly inconsistent with the general scheme of the six parts, which is throughout this chapter so clearly before Aristotle's mind, as well as with the express mention of the μελοποιία in its proper place in the next sentence.

26. mvp-aristotle-comment-279

1450b13_2 ὥσπερ πρότερον εἴρηται. If the reference is to 6, 1449 b 34 , where the λέξις is defined as ἡ τῶν μέτρων σύνθεσις, Aristotle must have forgotten the exact terms of his previous formula. The point, however, is practically the same in both instances; λέξις is to be understood in the sense of 'diction' or 'expression in language', and not in any of the other senses which the word might bear (see on 23, 1459 12 ).

26. mvp-aristotle-comment-280

1450b14 διὰ τῆς ὀνομασίας διὰ τῶν ὀνομάτων, i. e. by means of the words or language of the speaker. As the ὄνομα, which includes the verb and the adverb as well as the noun, is the directly significant part of all language, ὀνομασία means practically the same thing as vocabulary or language.

26. mvp-aristotle-comment-281

1450b14_2 ἑρμηνείαν, 'communication', 'expression'; the Latin equivalent for it is interpretatio. After ἑρμηνείαν we may supply τῶν ἐν τῇ διανοίᾳ, the spoken word being the outward sign or expression of a thought in the mind: De interpr. 1, 16ª3
ἔστι μὲν οὖν τὰ ἐν τῇ φωνῇ τῶν ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ παθημάτων σύμβολα.
On the meaning of ἑρμηνεία in Aristotle see Waitz, Organon 1 p. 323 , and Steinthal, Gesch. der Sprachwissenschaft 1 p. 235.

26. mvp-aristotle-comment-282

1450b15 ἔχει τὴν αὐτὴν δύναμιν ταὐτὸ δύναται, 'is practically the same thing' (see on 1, 1447ª8 ).

27. mvp-aristotle-comment-283

1450b16 πέντε Similar instances of an intrusive numeral will be found in Rhet. 1. 2, 1356 21 , and 1. 13, 1373 b3 ( v. Roemer ad loc.). Vahlen accepts the correction πέμπτον, in the sense of quinto loco: 'reliquarum autem partium (h. e. quae post illas quattuor iam reliquae sunt duae) quinto loco μελοποιία gravissimum est condimentum, ὄψις autem ad poeticam artem omnino non pertinet'.
1450b16_2

27. mvp-aristotle-comment-284

μέγιστον τῶν ἡδυσμάτων: see on 6, 1449 b 25 ( ἡδυσμένῳ). For the pleasure given by music comp. Pol. 8. 5, 1339 b 20
τὴν δὲ μουσικὴν πάντες εἶναί φαμεν τῶν ἡδίστων.
— 1340 a 2
δεῖ μὴ μόνον τῆς κοινῆς ἡδονῆς μετέχειν ἀπ᾿ αὐτῆς, ἧς ἔχουσι πάντες αἴσθησιν· ἔχει γὰρ ἡ μουσικὴ τὴν ἡδονὴν φυσικήν, διὸ πάσαις ἡλικίαις καὶ πᾶσιν ἤθεσιν ἡ χρῆσις αὐτῆς ἐστι προσφιλής.
—
οἱ μὲν γὰρ νέοι διὰ τὴν ἡλικίαν ἀνήδυντον οὐδὲν ὑπομένουσιν ἑκόντες, ἡ δὲ μουσικὴ φύσει τῶν ἡδυσμένων [ἡδυσμάτων] ἐστίν.
Bernays ( Zwei Abhandl. p. 157) supposed that a further statement on the subject of music, like that in the Anonymus De Comedy ( Kaibel, CGF. 1 p. 52 ),
μέλος τῆς μουσικῆς ἐστιν ἴδιον, ὅθεν ἀπ᾿ ἐκείνης τὰς αὐτοτελεῖς ἀφορμὰς δεήσει λαμβάνειν
, may have dropped out after ἡδυσμάτων.
1450b17

28. mvp-aristotle-comment-285

ψυχαγωγικόν: see on 33.

28. mvp-aristotle-comment-286

1450b17_2 ἀτεχνότατον: 13, 1453 67
τὸ δὲ διὰ τῆς ὄψεως τοῦτο παρασκευάζειν ἀτεχνότερον καὶ χορηγίας δεόμενόν ἐστιν.
ἄτεχνος is frequently used in the sense of 'depending on means outside the art itself'; comp. Rhet. 3. 16, 1416 b 18
σύγκειται γὰρ ἔχων ὁ λόγος τὸ μὲν ἄτεχνον, οὐθὲν γὰρ αἴτιος ὁ λέγων τῶν πράξεων, τὸ δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς τέχνης.
The opposite of it in this sense is ἔντεχνος ( Bon. Ind. 11964 ).

28. mvp-aristotle-comment-287

1450b18 ἡ γὰρ τῆς τραγῳδίας δύναμις κτέ. The tragic effect may be produced by a good tragedy even without any actual performance of it on a stage, i. e. as a mere work of literature ( comp. 14, 1453b4 , and 26, 1462ª11 ). The reading of A o here, ὡς γὰρ, is defended by Vahlen, who translates it by quia enim (wenn nämlich), on the assumption that the apodosis is omitted in the same way as in Eth. N. 8. 6, 1157 3
οἱ δ᾽ ἀγαθοὶ δι᾽ αὐτοὺς φίλοι· ᾗ γὰρ ἀγαθοί
[scil. φίλοι εἰσίν].— 8. 10, 1159 10
οἱ χρήσιμοι δὲ καὶ ἡδεῖς ἐπὶ πλεῖον διαμένουσιν ἕως γὰρ ἂν πορίζωσιν ἡδονὰς ἢ ὠφελείας ἀλλήλοις
[scil. διαμένουσιν], and certain more or less similar passages. The present passage (with the reading ὡς γὰρ) does not seem to me to be a genuine parallel. On behalf of the amended reading ( ἡ γὰρ) it has to be remembered that a confusion between ἡ and the compendium for ὡς is not so uncommon in MSS. of a certain date ( Bast, Comm. Palaeogr. p. 780 ).

28. mvp-aristotle-comment-288

1450b18_2 ἄνευ ἀγῶνος. ἀγών is generally rendered by certamen or 'contest', but it is not clear that that is the sense Aristotle attaches to it in the present and other places ( 7, 1451b ; 13, 1453ª27 ) of the Poetics. It seems to mean rather little more than a 'public performance'. Similarly ἀγωνίζεσθαι in 7, 1451ª8 and 24, 146089 means apparently 'to perform in public', συναγωνίζεσθαι in 18, 1456ª26 'to take part in such a performance'; and ἀγώνισμα in 9, 1451b37 a 'work to be performed in public'. The word ἀγωνιστής, likewise, in Pol. 8. 7, 1342=18 and Probl. 19. 15, 918b 28 , means no more than a 'public' or 'professional performer' ( comp. πρωταγωνιστής etc.). In Rhet. 3. 12, 1413b4
ἀγωνιστικὴ λέξις
means the style allowable in public speaking, as distinct from the γραφικὴ λέξις, the more formal style required for a purely literary work. The idea of contest or competition, there- fore, is not always a recognizable element in the meaning of this group of words ( comp. Nitzsch, De historia Homeri 2 p. 113 ).

28. mvp-aristotle-comment-289

1450b18_3 ἀγῶνος καὶ ὑποκριτῶν: 13, 1453ª27
ἐπὶ τῶν σκηνῶν καὶ τῶν ἀγώνων.
— Probl. 19. 15, 918 28
ὁ μὲν γὰρ ὑποκριτὴς ἀγωνιστής.
— Rhet. 3. 12, 141358
ἔστι δὲ λέξις γραφικὴ μὲν ἡ ἀκριβεστάτη, ἀγωνιστικὴ δὲ ἡ ὑποκριτικωτάτη κτέ.
The present clause shows that the ὄψις is ἥκιστα οἰκεῖον τῆς ποιητικῆς; the next, that it is ἀτεχνότατον.

28. mvp-aristotle-comment-290

1450b18_4 ὄψεων: for the plural see on 6, 1449b 33 .

28. mvp-aristotle-comment-291

1450b18_5 σκευοποιοῦ, the theatrical costumier, who enabled the actors to appear in character by supplying the masks, dresses, and other paraphernalia of their make-up; comp. Aristophanes Eq. 230
καὶ μὴ δέδιθ· οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἐξῃκασμένος. ὑπὸ τοῦ δέους γὰρ αὐτὸν οὐδεὶς ἤθελε τῶν σκευοποιῶν εἰκάσαι
(v. Schol. ad loc.). — Aelian V. H. 2. 13
οἱ σκευοποιοὶ ἔπλασαν αὐτὸν ὡς ὅτι μάλιστα ἐξεικάσαντες.
— Pollux 4. 115
σκευὴ μὲν ἡ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν στολή . . . σκευοποιός δὲ ὁ προσωποποιός.
— 2. 47
ἡ δὲ νέα κωμῳδία καὶ προσωποποιὸν εἴρηκεν ὃν ἡ ἀρχαία σκευοποιὸν ἐκάλει
(ν. Meineke, FCG. 4 p. 680). For σκευή in the sense of the make-up of actors see Eurip. Suppl. 1054 , Aristoph. Ran. 108 , Plato Rep. 577 b.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-292

1450b20

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-293

κεῖται: as has been stated in the definition of Tragedy in 6, 1449b 25 ( comp. Bon. Ind. 380b 43 ).

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-294

1450b24 τελείας καὶ ὅλης. Although there is strictly speaking a certain distinction between the idea of 'complete' ( τέλειος: . Metaph. Δ 16, 1021 b12) and that of 'whole' ( ὅλος: ν. Metaph. Δ 26, 1023 b 26), the two terms are so closely allied in sense as to be all but synonymous: Phys. 3. 6, 207ª13
ἄπειρον μὲν οὖν ἐστιν οὗ κατὰ ποσὸν λαμβάνουσιν αἰεί τι λαβεῖν ἔστιν ἔξω.
οὗ δὲ μηδὲν ἔξω, τοῦτ᾽ ἐστὶ τέλειον καὶ ὅλον οὕτω γὰρ ὁριζόμεθα τὸ ὅλον, οὗ μηθέν ἄπεστιν ὅλον δὲ καὶ τέλειον ἢ τὸ αὐτὸ πάμπαν ἢ σύνεγγυς τὴν φύσιν ἐστίν.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-295

ἐχούσης τι μέγεθος: see on 4, 1449 19 and 6, 1449 b 25 .

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-296

1450b25 μηδὲν ἔχον μέγεθος 'of no size,' as we say, means the same thing as πάμμικρον in b 37 (Sauppe ap. Teichmüller, Aristot. Forsch. p. 54 ), just as in 6, 1450 a 28
οὐδὲν ἔχει ἦθος
means practically 'has but very little character' in it.
1450b27

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-297

μὴ ἐξ ἀνάγκης By a 'beginning' Aristotle does not mean something without antecedents, but only something that may be detached as it were from its antecedents, and viewed apart from them as the first term in a new series of events.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-298

1450b28 μετ᾿ ἐκεῖνο δ᾿ comp. 6, 1450 a 30
μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο
. — b 31
καὶ μετ᾿ ἐκεῖνο
. An. pr. 1. 4, 25 b 35
καλῶ δὲ μέσον μὲν καὶ αὐτὸ ἐν ἄλλῳ καὶ ἄλλο ἐν τούτῳ ἐστίν
.
1450b34

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-299

ἰδέαις ἰδέα, 'form,' 'sort,' or 'kind,' is frequently used, just like εἶδος, which has much the same sense, without any genitive to explain it. Instances of this allusive, or rather evasive, use will be found in 5, 1449 b 8 , in 19, 1456 b 3 , and in 22, 1458 b 18 . It is a favourite term with Isocrates also: 24 c
ἀμφοτέραις ταῖς ἰδέαις ταύταις κατεχρήσαντο
. — 36 A
χρὴ δὲ δοκιμάζειν τὰς ἀρετὰς οὐκ ἐν ταῖς αὐταῖς ἰδέαις ἁπάσας, ἀλλὰ τὴν μὲν δικαιοσύνην ἐν ταῖς ἀπορίαις, τὴν δὲ σωφροσύνην ἐν ταῖς δυναστείαις κτέ.
— 319 D
ταῖς ἄλλαις ἰδέαις ἐπιφανεστέραις καὶ πλείοσιν ὅλον τὸν λόγον διοικοῦσιν
. — De perm. § 183
τὰς ἰδέας ἁπάσας, αἷς ὁ λόγος τυγχάνει χρώμενος, διεξέρχονται τοῖς μαθηταῖς
. For instances from other authors see Campbell's Essay on Plato's use of language, Rep. of Plato 2. p. 301 .

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-300

τὸ καλὸν κτέ. Having just laid it down that the μῦθος must be a complete whole, Aristotle assumes that it must also be a beautiful whole, and proceeds to show that, if it is to be that, it must be of a certain magnitude, neither too long nor too short. Beauty, he says, depends on two conditions: the beautiful object must be (1) large enough to allow of our seeing the orderly arrangement of its parts, and (2) not so large as to be incapable of being taken in as a whole in one coup d'œil. With this we may compare Metaph. M 3, 1078 a 36
τοῦ δὲ καλοῦ μέγιστα εἴδη τάξις καὶ συμμετρία καὶ τὸ ὡρισμένον
—where τάξις corresponds with the first, and τὸ ὡρισμένον with the second of the two conditions in the present passage. For the form of the opening statement comp. De long. vitae 5, 466 a 26
τὰ μεγάλα καὶ ζῷα καὶ φυτά
.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-301

ζῷον : 23, 1459 a 20
ἵν᾿ ὥσπερ ζῷον ἓν ὅλον ποιῇ τὴν οἰκείαν ἡδονήν
. The analogy between a literary whole and a living organism is postulated in Plato Phaedr. 264 c
ἀλλὰ τόδε γε οἶμαί σε φάναι ἄν, δεῖν πάντα λόγον ὥσπερ ζῷον συνεστάναι σῶμά τι ἔχοντα αὐτὸν αὐτοῦ, ὥστε μήτε ἀκέφαλον εἶναι μήτε ἄπουν, ἀλλὰ μέσα τε ἔχειν καὶ ἄκρα, πρέποντ᾿ ἀλλήλοις καὶ τῷ ὅλῳ γεγραμμένα
. It seems to mean here a living, as distinct from an artificial, whole, as it clearly does in Top. 1. 15, 106 a 20
τῷ καλῷ τῷ μὲν ἐπὶ τοῦ ζῴου τὸ αἰσχρόν, τῷ δ᾿ ἐπὶ τῆς οἰκίας τὸ μοχθηρόν
.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-302

ταῦτα = τὰ μέρη implied in συνέστηκεν ἐκ τινῶν.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-303

1450b35 πρᾶγμα a 'thing': Top. 1. 5, 102 a 18
ἴδιον δ᾿ ἐστὶν μὴ δηλοῖ μὲν τὸ τί ἦν εἶναι, μόνῳ δ᾿ ὑπάρχει καὶ ἀντικατηγορεῖται τοῦ πράγματος
. — De anima 3. 8, 432 a 3
πρᾶγμα οὐθέν ἐστι παρὰ τὰ μεγέθη, ὡς δοκεῖ, τὰ αἰσθητὰ κεχωρισμένον
.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-304

1450b36 μέγεθος ὑπάρχειν μὴ τὸ τυχόν : De gen. an. 2. 6, 745 a 5
ἔστι γάρ τι πᾶσι τοῖς ζώοις πέρας τοῦ μεγέθους
. — Pol. 7. 4, 1326 a 35
ἔστι τι καὶ πόλεσι μεγέθους μέτρον, ὥσπερ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων πάντων, ζῴων φυτῶν ὀργάνων
.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-305

1450b37 μεγέθει : Eth. N. 4. 7, 1123 b 6
ἐν μεγέθει γὰρ ἡ μεγαλοψυχία, ὥσπερ καὶ τὸ κάλλος ἐν μεγάλῳ σώματι, οἱ μικροὶ δ᾿ ἀστεῖοι καὶ σύμμετροι, καλοὶ δ᾿ οὐ
.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-306

τάξει According to Top. 3. 1, 116 b 21 , beauty is thought to consist in συμμετρία (
τὸ δὲ κάλλος τῶν μελῶν τις συμμετρία δοκεῖ εἶναι
); and according to Metaph. M 3, 1078 a 36 in τάξις καὶ συμμετρία καὶ τὸ ὡρισμένον. In the beauty of a μῦθος, however, there is no room for the idea of συμμετρία.
1450b38

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-307

συγχεῖται The reason for our not seeing any beauty in a very minute creature is that we perceive it as a whole too quickly to discern the parts and the order and symmetry there may be in them. συγχεῖται = 'becomes blurred, or indistinct', as in H. A. 7. 5, 585 a 34
συγκεχυμένον μέλαν
.

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-308

1450b39 θεωρία 'sight' or 'view' (comp. Bon. Ind. 329 a 31 ).

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-309

ἀναισθήτου χρόνου There is no necessity to bracket χρόνου (with Bonitz). The time a thing takes to be seen may be of perceptible or of imperceptible duration; and in the latter case it may very well be described as an ἀναίσθητος χρόνος, a time too short for one to be conscious of its duration. This expression appears in the definition of the 'sudden' in Phys. 4. 13, 222 a 15
τὸ δ᾿ ἐξαίφνης τὸ ἐν ἀναισθήτῳ χρόνῳ διὰ μικρότητα ἐκστάν
.

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-310

1451a1 οὔτε παμμέγεθες comp. the rule for the size of the πόλις in Pol. 5. 2, 1302 b 35 and 7. 4, 1326 a 35 .
1451a3

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-311

ὥστε marks the apodosis (comp. 9, 1452 a 10 and Bon. Ind. 873 a 31 ).

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-312

καθάπερ ἐπὶ τῶν συστημάτων The argument proceeds on the assumption of an analogy between a beautiful whole that addresses the eye, and one that addresses the mind; and the conclusion is that as the one is εὐσύνοπτον, so the other must be εὐμνημόνευτον. At this point Aristotle changes his construction, repeating his original statement ( 1450 b 34 ) in the form required for an argument from analogy, καθάπερ ἐπὶ τῶν συστημάτων καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ζῴων . . . οὕτω καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν μύθων, with συστημάτων as a short equivalent for the foregoing ἅπαν πρᾶγμα ὃ συνέστηκεν ἐκ τινῶν. A σύστημα is a product of combination, something that comes into being through a union, natural or artificial, of parts into a whole; a state, for instance, is a σύστημα ( Eth. N. 9. 8, 1168 b 32 ) as being due to a combination of classes or individuals, and a ζῷον is a σύστημα ( De gen. an. 2. 4, 740 a 20 ), as being an organized whole of parts. The present passage, however, implies a more restricted sense of σύστημα, as though the term were properly applicable only to a whole that is made, as distinct from an organic whole, which grows to be what it is. This or some similar sense is suggested by the passage also in Eth. N. 9. 8, 1168 b 32
ὥσπερ δὲ καὶ πόλις τὸ κυριώτατον μάλιστ᾽ εἶναι δοκεῖ καὶ πᾶν ἄλλο σύστημα, οὕτω καὶ ἄνθρωπος
—where the implication is that a man is not a σύστημα proper, though his composite nature gives him a certain resemblance to one.
The difficulty in the manuscript reading σωμάτων is that the word would have to be understood in one of two senses, either in that of ‘material substances’, or in that of ‘living bodies’. The first interpretation is out of the question, since beauty is in the τάξις or συμμετρία τῶν μερῶν, and, therefore, in the form, not in the matter, of things. The second, which makes ἐπὶ τῶν σωμάτων and ἐπὶ τῶν ζῴων mere synonyms, leaves us without any equivalent for the ἅπαν πρᾶγμα ὃ συνέστηκεν ἐκ τινῶν of his original statement ( 1450 b 34 ), which was, if I am not mistaken, far too important for Aristotle's argument to be ignored in any résumé of it (comp. J. of Phil. 5 p. 120 ).
1451a4 ἐπὶ τῶν ζῴων see on 1450 b 36 .

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-313

εὐσύνοπτον 'easily taken in as a whole by the eye', as opposed το εὐμνημόνευτον (a 5), 'easily taken in as a whole by the memory'. The word, however, is metaphorically used as equivalent to εὐμνημόνευτος in 23, 1459 a 33 , as also in Rhet. 3. 9, 1409 b 35
λέγω δὲ περίοδον λέξιν ἔχουσαν ἀρχὴν καὶ τελευτὴν αὐτὴν καθ᾿ αὑτὴν καὶ μέγεθος εὐσύνοπτον
.
ἡδεῖα δ᾿ ἡ τοιαύτη καὶ εὐμαθής .. εὐμαθὴς δὲ ὅτι εὐμνημόνευτος
.
1451a6

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-314

ὅρος ὁ μὲν πρὸς τοὺς ἀγῶνας the limit in practice, in contradistinction to the theoretic limit of length, ὁ κατ᾿ αὐτὴν τὴν φύσιν τοῦ πράγματος ὅρος (a 9) . In actual practice the length of the play is determined by the conditions of the public performances ( ἀγῶνες) in which it will be presented on the stage; the time it is to occupy there is fixed by custom and convention rather than theory.

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-315

1451a7 τὴν αἴσθησιν scil. ">τῶν θεατῶν (see on 15, 1454 b 15 ); comp. 4, 1449 a 8
πρὸς τὰ θέατρα
.
The language here, though quite general, seems to refer more especially to the power of attention in the audiences.

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-316

1451a8 ἑκατὸν τραγῳδίας ἀγωνίζεσθαι an extreme instance like the μυρίων σταδίων ζῷον in a 2. The subject of ἀγωνίζεσθαι, if expressed, would be 'the performers', ἀγωνίζεσθαί τι in stage matters being synonymous with ὑποκρίνεσθαί τι; comp. Demosth. 19, 246
τοῦτο δὲ τὸ δρᾶμα Μόλων ἠγωνίζετο
. — 250
ἃ ἡγωνίσω καὶ ἀκριβῶς ἐξηπίστασο
. — 337
τὰ Θυέστου... ἠγωνίζετο
(see on 6, 1450 b 18 ).
In the sense of 'contend', as said of the dramatic poet, it would require an instrumental dative ( τραγῳδίαις) after it. The personification implied in Tyrwhitt's rendering, 'si centum tragoedias in theatro certare oporteret', is (I think) questionable in Aristotle. Goulston takes ἀγωνίζεσθαι as a passive (= agi) as it certainly sometimes is.

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-317

πρὸς κλεψύδρας For the preposition comp. fr. 468 Teubn.
μέτρον τί ἐστιν ὕδατος πρὸς μεμετρημένον ἡμέρας διάστημα ῥέον ... πρὸς δὴ τοῦτο ἠγωνίζοντο οἱ μέγιστοι καὶ περὶ τῶν μεγίστων ἀγῶνες
.

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-318

1451a8-9 ὥσπερ ποτὲ καὶ ἄλλοτέ †φασιν† The idea of tragedies having been at some date or other timed by the clepsydra is to my mind highly improbable, and there is no hint of such a thing elsewhere. The language also here is not free from difficulties. Tyrwhitt translates it by 'quemadmodum aliquando alias etiam factum esse perhibent'; and Vahlen (Berlin Academy, Sitzungsberichte 1897 p. 639) by 'wie man sagt, dass sie auch sonst gespielt haben'. To get this out of the words, and make them relate to Tragedy, or rather the past history of Tragedy, it becomes necessary to supply (with Vahlen) an aorist infinitive, ἀγωνίσασθαι, from the preceding imperfect ἠγωνίζοντο, and also to make ποτὲ καὶ ἄλλοτε mean simply 'once' or 'formerly', though its natural meaning would be 'at a certain other time'. Two instances have been pointed out of ποτὲ καὶ ἄλλοτε: Xenophon Anab. 6. 4. 12
ὑμᾶς δεῖ παρασκευάζεσθαι ὡς μαχουμένους εἴ ποτε καὶ ἄλλοτε
[= 'si unquam alias']; Lucian Hermot. 24
ἤδη γάρ ποτε καὶ ἄλλοτε
[= 'alias quondam']
πρεσβύτου ἀνδρὸς ἤκουσα διεξιόντος
.
These, however, are not enough to show that ποτὲ καὶ ἄλλοτε can only refer to an indefinite past or future; with a verb in the present it may very well refer to the indefinite present also, and have the sense of 'at certain other times', just in the same way as ποτέ, with a present, means 'at certain times' in Soph. el. 16, 175 a 27
συμβαίνει δέ ποτε καθάπερ ἐν τοῖς διαγράμμασιν
, and in the familiar antithesis of ποτέ and ἀεί.
M. Schmidt's correction, εἰώθασιν (for φασιν), though perhaps too bold, yields an unimpeachable sense, 'as is regularly done at certain other times', i. e. by another class of ἀγωνισταί, the pleaders in the law-courts. As a variation on it, to make the sense clearer, I would suggest ὥσπερ ποτὲ καὶ ἄλλοι εἰώθασιν.
1451a10

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-319

ὁ δὲ ... ὅρος is appositional to what follows.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-320

ὁ μείζων scil. μῦθος; comp. Tyrwhitt's rendering 'quo maior est fabula'.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-321

σύνδηλος is explained in the reference to this passage in 24, 1459 b 18
τοῦ μὲν οὖν μήκους ὅρος ἱκανὸς ὁ εἰρημένος· δύνασθαι γὰρ δεῖ συνορᾶσθαι τὴν ἀρχὴν καὶ τὸ τέλος
.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-322

1451a12 ἐν ὅσῳ μεγέθει κτέ. A reminiscence apparently of the language of Plato Rep. 423 B
Οὐκοῦν, ἦν δ᾿ ἐγώ, οὗτος ἂν εἴη καὶ κάλλιστος ὅρος τοῖς ἡμετέροις ἄρχουσιν, ὅσην δεῖ τὸ μέγεθος τὴν πόλιν ποιεῖσθαι... Τίς, ἔφη, ὅρος; Οἶμαι μέν, ἦν δ᾿ ἐγώ, τόνδε· μέχρι οὗ ἂν ἐθέλῃ αὐξανομένη εἶναι μία, μέχρι τούτου αὔξειν, πέρα δὲ μή.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-323

κατὰ τὸ εἰκὸς ἢ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον ἐφεξῆς γιγνομένων scil. τῶν πραγμάτων (see on 6, 1449 b 26 ). The consequents must be always the natural or necessary effect of the antecedents. A well-constructed μῦθος is a consecutive whole, not a mere series of incidents which happen to follow one after the other in actual order of time (comp. 10, 1452 a 19 ); and it is this that differentiates it from a history or a biography (comp. 9, 1451 a 36 ), which records everything that may have befallen a community or an individual, however loose and separate the various incidents were in themselves (comp. 23, 1459 a 23 ). The poetic story in fact must satisfy our sense of logic, incident following after incident as its necessary and inevitable, or as its probable and natural consequence. The technical meaning of the terms εἰκός and ἀναγκαῖον in Aristotle may be seen from An. post. 2. 27, 70 a 4
τὸ μὲν εἰκός ἐστι πρότασις ἔνδοξος· ὃ γὰρ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ ἴσασιν οὕτω γινόμενον ἢ μὴ γινόμενον, ἢ ὂν ἢ μὴ ὄν, τοῦτ᾿ ἐστὶν εἰκός, οἷον τὸ μισεῖν τοὺς φθονοῦντας ἢ τὸ φιλεῖν τοὺς ἐρωμένους
. — Rhet. 1. 2, 1357 a 34
τὸ μὲν γὰρ εἰκός ἐστιν [τὸ] ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ γινόμενον ... τὸ περὶ τὰ ἐνδεχόμενα ἄλλως ἔχειν
. — Metaph. Γ 5, 1010 b 28
τὸ ἀναγκαῖον οὐκ ἐνδέχεται ἄλλως καὶ ἄλλως ἔχειν
. — Δ 5, 1015 a 34
τὸ μὴ ἐνδεχόμενον ἄλλως ἔχειν ἀναγκαῖόν φαμεν οὕτως ἔχειν
.
The distinction between the two terms had been already recognized by Plato: Theaet. 149 C
εἰκός τε καὶ ἀναγκαῖον
. — Tim. 40 E
ἄνευ τε εἰκότων καὶ ἀναγκαίων ἀποδείξεων λέγουσιν
.
They were, it would seem, already established in the rhetorical terminology of the sophists (Stallbaum on Tim. 40 E).

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-324

1451a13 εἰς εὐτυχίαν κτἑ. This is obviously meant to apply only to the tragic hero, not to the secondary personages in the play, about whom Aristotle has very little to say. Though he acknowledges the legitimacy of a transition from misery to happiness as a dramatic motive — it will be remembered that it is the motive in the Iphigenia in Tauris (comp. 17, 1455 a 12
καὶ ἐντεῦθεν ἡ σωτηρία
) — he does not think it so distinctively tragic or so effective in Tragedy as the opposite kind of transition, that from happiness to misery ( 13, 1453 a 14 sqq. ).

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-325

1451a14 μεταβάλλειν The synonym for this in 13, 1453 a 2 is μεταπίπτειν. The implied subject of μεταβάλλειν is 'the tragic hero'; comp. 13, 1452 b 34
οὔτε τοὺς ἐπιεικεῖς ἄνδρας δεῖ μεταβάλλοντας φαίνεσθαι ἐξ εὐτυχίας εἰς δυστυχίαν
, and 14, 1453 a 1
οὐδ᾿ αὖ τὸν σφόδρα πονηρὸν ἐξ εὐτυχίας εἰς δυστυχίαν μεταπίπτειν
.

Remarques sur la poëtique d'Aristote (André Dacier, 1692) (OCR draft) (André Dacier's French commentary on Aristotle's Poetics.) focus

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-38

2.1 Omme tous ceux qui imitent, imitent des actions.] 1

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-39

2.1 Car les mœurs ne peuvent être diftinguées que par ces deux qualitez.] 2

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-40

2.1 Ou meilleurs par rapport à nous, ou plus méchans, ou ſemblables.] 3

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-41

2.2 Polygnotus peignoit les hommes meilleurs.] 4

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-42

2.2 Pauſon les peignoit plus méchans.] 5

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-43

2.4 Les mèmes differences ſe trouvent auſſi dans la danſe, dans les airs de flute, dans les pieces de lyre, &c.] 6

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-44

2.4 Dans tous les ouvrages en profe, ou en vers.] 7

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-45

2.5 Par exemple, Homere a fait les hommes meilleurs.] 8

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-46

2.5 Cleophon les a fait tels qu'ils font.) 9

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-47

2.5 Hegemon de Thaſos qui a été l'Inventeur des parodies.] 10

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-48

2.5 Parodies.] 11

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-49

2.5 Nicochares Auteur de la Deliade.) 12

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-50

2.6 Il en est de mème des Poëtes qui ont compoſe des Dithyrambes & des Nomes.) 13

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-51

2.6 C'est ainsi que Timothée & que Philoxene ont imité les Perſes & les Cyclopes.] 14

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-52

2.6 Philoxene.] 15

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-53

2.7 Et c'est cela même qui conſtitue la difference, qui eft entre la Tragedie & la Comedie.] 16

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-54

2.7 Car la premiere repreſente les hommes meilleurs.] 17

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-55

2.7 Et l'autre plus méchans.] 18

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-56

3.1 A troisième difference conſiſte en la manière dont on fait ces imitations.] 19

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-57

3.2 Soit en faiſant un récit, ou en joüant ſoy-même quelqu'autre perſonnage.] 20

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-58

3.4 Que j'expliqueray par ces trois mots avec quoy, quoy & comment.] 21

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-59

3.4 De ſorte qu'au ſecond égard Sophocle reſſemble à Homere dans ſon imitation.] 22

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-60

3.4 Et au troiſième il reſſemble à Ariſtophane.] 23

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-61

3.4 C'eſt pourquoy on a ſoûtenu que les pieces de theatre ont été appellées dramatiques, du mot drame, qui ſignifie action.] 24

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-62

3.5 Car les Megariens de ce pays.] 25

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-63

3.5 Soûtenant qu'elle eſt née dans leur état populaire.] 26

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-64

3.5 Les Megariens de Sicile l'ont auſſi revendiquée.] 27

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-65

3.5 Parce que le Poëte Epicharmus plus ancien que Chionides, & que Magnes étoit Sicilien.] 28

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-66

3.5 Et quelques Doriens du Peloponeſe.] 29

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-67

3.6 Ce qui prouve, diſent-ils, que la Comedie n'a pas été ainſi appellée du mot Comazein, comme le prétendent les Atheniens.] 30

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-68

3.6 Parce que les premiers Comediens, n'étant pas receus dans la Ville.] 31

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-69

3.7 Ils ſoûtiennent auſſi qu'au lieu que les Atheniens diſent Prattein, pour dire, faire, ils diſent chez eux Dran.] 32

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-70

3.7 Cela ſuffit pour les differences de l'imitation, leur nombre & leur nature.] 33

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-71

4.1 L y a deux cauſes principales, & toutes deux fort naturelles, qui ſemblent avoir produit la Poësie.] 34

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-72

4.2 Car ils different des autres animaux, en ce qu'ils ſont tous très-portez à l'imitation.] 35

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-73

4.2 Que par ſon moyen ils apprenent les premiers élemens des Sciences.] 36

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-74

4.2 Et que toutes les imitations leur donnent un ſingulier plaiſir.] 37

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-75

4.4 C'eſt que les Philoſophes ne ſont pas les ſeuls qui aiment à apprendre, & que cette paſſion eſt égalemeut naturelle à tous les autres hommes.] 38

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-76

4.4 Quoyqu'ils n'apprenent pas tous également.] 39

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-77

4.6 Le plaiſir qu'ils ont alors, ne vient pas de la beauté del'imitation, mais de celle de l'art ou du mélange, & de la vivacité des couleurs, &c.] 40

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-78

4.7 Si l'imitation nous eſt naturelle, le nombre & l'harmonie ne le font pas moins.] 41

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-79

4.7 Sous le mot de nombre, je comprens auſſi les vers qui évidemment en font partie.] 42

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-80

4.7 Car ceux qui ſe trouverent le plus de talent pour l'une & pour l'autre.] 43

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-81

4.7 Luy donnerent peu à peu la naiſſance par des eſſais faits ſur le champ.] 44

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-82

4.8 Mais elle changea bien-tôt de forme ſelon le different naturel des Poëtes.] 45

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-83

4.9 Il ne nous reſte aucun Poëme de cette ſorte.] 46

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-84

4.10 Par exemple, ſon Margites.] 47

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-85

4.10 Où l'on a auſſi employé le vers ïambe, comme le plus propre pour les railleries.] 48

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-86

4.10 C'eſt pourquoy on appelle preſentement ces Poëmes du nom de ce vers.) 49

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-87

4.10 Parce que ce n'eſt que des invectives continuelles.] 50

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-88

4.11 Et comme Homere a tenu ſans contredit le premier rang dans le Poëme heroïque & tragique.) 51

19. mvp-aristotle-comment-89

4.12 C'eſt le ſeul qui merite le nom de Poëte, non ſeulement parce qu'il a bien écrit.] 52

20. mvp-aristotle-comment-90

4.12 Mais encore parce qu'il a fait des imitations dramatiques.] 53

21. mvp-aristotle-comment-91

4.12 Il a été auſſi le premier qui a donné, comme un crayon de la Comedie, en changeant en plaiſanteries les railleries piquantes des premiers Poëtes.] 54

22. mvp-aristotle-comment-92

4.12 En effet ſon Margites a avec la Comedie le même rapport que ſon Iliade & ſon Odyßée ont avec la Tragedie.] 55

23. mvp-aristotle-comment-93

4.13 Les autres Poëtes qui vinrent après luy, & qui étoient naturellement portez à l'un ou à l'autre de ces deux genres de Poëſie, ſelon qu'ils avoient plus ou moins de force.] 56

24. mvp-aristotle-comment-94

4.13 Au lieu de faire des ïambes.] 57

25. mvp-aristotle-comment-95

4.13 Quitterent les vers heroïques.] 58

26. mvp-aristotle-comment-96

4.13 Ces deux dernieres ſortes d'ouvrages leur ayant paru plus nobles.] 59

27. mvp-aristotle-comment-97

4.14 Or d'examiner preſentement ſi la Tragedie eſt dans ſa perfection & ſi elle a receu la forme qui luy convient.] 60

28. mvp-aristotle-comment-98

4.14 Et par rapport à elle, & par rapport au theatre.] 61

29. mvp-aristotle-comment-99

4.15 La Tragedie donc & la Comedie, étant nées des impromptu dont j'ay parle.] 62

30. mvp-aristotle-comment-100

4.15 Et l'autre à ces chanſons obſcenes.] 63

31. mvp-aristotle-comment-101

4.15 Qui autoriſées par la Coûtume & par les Loix, ſe chantent encore de notre temps dans pluſieurs Villes.] 64

32. mvp-aristotle-comment-102

4.15 Chacun ajoutant quelque choſe à leur beauté à meſure qu'on découvroit ce qui convenoit à leur caractere.] 65

33. mvp-aristotle-comment-103

4.16 Pour la Tragedie aprés beaucoup de changemens.] 66

34. mvp-aristotle-comment-104

4.16 Quand elle eut tout ce qui luy étoit propre.) 67

35. mvp-aristotle-comment-105

4.16 Eſchyle fut le premier qui mit deux Acteurs ſur la Scene, Car il n'y en avoit qu'un avant luy.] 68

36. mvp-aristotle-comment-106

4.16 Il diminua les chants du chœur.] 69

37. mvp-aristotle-comment-107

4.16 Il inventa l'idée d'un principal perſonnage.] 70

38. mvp-aristotle-comment-108

4.16 Sophocle ajoûta un troiſième Acteur aux deux d'Eſchyle.] 71

39. mvp-aristotle-comment-109

4.16 Orna la Scene de belles décorations.) 72

40. mvp-aristotle-comment-110

4.17 Enfin elle ne receut que fort tard la grandeur & la gravité qui luy étoient convenables.] 73

41. mvp-aristotle-comment-111

4.17 Qu'elle avoit retenu de ces pieces ſatyriques d'où elle ſortoit] 74

42. mvp-aristotle-comment-112

4.18 Le vers ïambe trimetre ſucceda au vers tetrametre dont elle s'étoit toujours ſervie, parce qu'elle étoit toute ſatyrique, & pleine de danſes, & de mouvement.] 75

43. mvp-aristotle-comment-113

4.19 Mais aprés que la diction qui luy étoit propre fut établie.] 76

44. mvp-aristotle-comment-114

4.19 Car l'iambe eſt de tous les vers le plus propre pour la converſation.] 77

45. mvp-aristotle-comment-115

4.19 Et tres rarement des hexametres, qui ne nous échapent jamais, que lorſque nous franchiſſons les bornes du diſcours ordinaire, & que nous changeons d'harmonie & de ton.] 78

46. mvp-aristotle-comment-116

4.20 Le nombre des Epiſodes s'augmenta auſſi avec le temps.] 79

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-117

5.1 La Comedie eſt, comme je l'ay deja dit, une imitation des plus méchans hommes. Quand je dis méchans, ce n'eſt pas dans toutes ſortes de vices, mais ſeulement dans le ridicule.] 80

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-118

5.2 2. Car le ridicule eſt proprement un défaut, une difformité ſans douleur, & qui ne va point à la deſtruction du ſujet où il ſe trouve.] 81

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-119

5.2 3. Nous appellons un viſage ridicule.] 82

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-120

5.3 4. Mais la Comedie a été inconnuë, parce qu'elle ne fut pas cultivée dès le commencement, comme la Tragedie.] 83

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-121

5.3 5. Car le Magiſtrat ne commença que fort tard à donner des chœurs comiques. 84

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-122

5.3 6. Ceux qui joüoient alors étoient des Acteurs libres & volontaires.] 85

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-123

5.4 7. Mais depuis que la Comedie eut commencé à prendre quelque forme, on ſçait les Poëtes qui y ont travaillé.] 86

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-124

5.4 8. On ignore ceux qui ont employé les premiers les maſques, fait des prologues, & augmenté le nombre des Acteurs.] 87

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-125

5.4 9. Fait des prologues.) 88

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-126

5.5 10. Epicharmus & Phormys s'aviſerent les premiers de former des ſujets.] 89

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-127

5.5 11. Et par conſequent cette manière vint de Sicile.] 90

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-128

5.6 12. Crates fut le premier des Atheniens qui le ſuivit, en renonçant aux railleries groſſieres qui regnoient auparavant.] 91

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-129

5.6 13. En renonçant aux railleries groſſieres qui regnoient auparavant.] 92

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-130

5.6 14. Aux railleries groſſieres.) 93

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-131

5.7 15. L'Epopée a cela de commun avec la Tragedie.] 94

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-132

5.7 16. En ce qu'elle eſt un diſcours en vers.] 95

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-133

5.7 17. Et une imitation des actions des plus grands perſonnages.] 96

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-134

5.8 18. Et elle eſt differente en ce qu'elle n'employe qu'une ſeule & mème ſorte de vers.] 97

19. mvp-aristotle-comment-135

5.8 19. Qu'elle eſt une pure narration.) 98

20. mvp-aristotle-comment-136

5.8 20. Et qu'elle a plus d'étendue.] 99

21. mvp-aristotle-comment-137

5.8 21. Car la Tragedie tâche autant qu'il eſt poſſible de ſe renfermer dans le tour d'un Soleil, ou de changer peu ce temps.] 100

22. mvp-aristotle-comment-138

5.8 22. Au lieu qu'il n'y a point de temps preſcrit à l'Epopée.] 101

23. mvp-aristotle-comment-139

5.9 23. Mais il faut dire qu'il n'y en avoit pas non plus pour la Tragedie dans ſes commencemens.] 102

24. mvp-aristotle-comment-140

5.11 24. Celuy qui jugera bien d'une Tragedie, & qui connoîtra bien ſeurement ſi elle eſt bonne ou mauvaiſe, pourra auſſi juger d'une Epopée.] 103

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-141

6.2 1. La Tragedie eſt donc une imitation d'une action grave.] 104

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-142

6.2 2. Entiere.] 105

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-143

6.2 3. Et qui a une juſte grandeur.] 106

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-144

6.2 4. Dont le ſtyle eſt agreablement aſſaiſonné.] 107

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-145

6.2 5. Et qui ſans le ſecours de la narration, par le moyen de la compaſſion & de la terreur, acheve de purger en nous ces fortes de paſſions, & toutes les autres ſemblables.] 108

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-146

6.2 6. Et qui ſans le ſecours de la narration.] 109

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-147

6.2 7. Par le moyen de la terreur & de la compaſſion.] 110

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-148

6.2 8. Acheve de purger en nous ces fortes de paſſions & autres ſemblables.] 111

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-149

6.3 9. F'appelle, un ſtyle agreablement aſſaiſonné, un ſtyle qui a le nombre, le vers, & l'harmonie.] 112

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-150

6.4 10. Et j'ajoûte, mais differemment dans toutes ſes parties, because que le vers regne ſeul dans les unes, & le nombre & l'harmonie dans les autres.] 113

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-151

6.5 11. Cette imitation étant faite par des gens qui agiſſent, il s'enfuit de là neceſſairement, que la décoration de la Scene eſt en quelque ſorte une partie de la Tragedie.] 114

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-152

6.6 12. Comme la mélodie & le diſcours avec quoy on fait cette imitation. F'appelle diſcours, la compoſition même des vers, & mélodie la muſique, dont toute la force eſt connue.] 115

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-153

6.7 13. Comme c'eſt une imitation de quelque action.] 116

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-154

6.7 14. Et que ceux qui agiſſent ſont neceſſairement tels par les mœurs & par les ſentimens.] 117

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-155

6.7 15. N'y ayant point d'autre caractere qui puiſſe diſtinguer les actions.] 118

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-156

6.7 16. Et que ce ſont les deux cauſes du bonheur & du malheur des hommes.] 119

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-157

6.8 17. Car j'appelle icy Fable, la compoſition des choſes.] 120

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-158

6.8 18. Les mœurs ſont ce qui marque les qualitez de ceux qui agiſſent.] 121

19. mvp-aristotle-comment-159

6.8 19. Et les ſentimens ſont les diſcours, par leſquels ils font connoître quelque action, ou découvrent leur penſée.] 122

20. mvp-aristotle-comment-160

6.10 20. De ces ſix il y en a deux qui regardent le moyen.] 123

21. mvp-aristotle-comment-161

6.10 21. Une qui regarde la maniére.] 124

22. mvp-aristotle-comment-162

6.10 22. Et trois qui regardent le ſujet.] 125

23. mvp-aristotle-comment-163

6.11 23. Il n'y a preſque point de Poëte, pour ainſi dire, qui n'employe ces ſix parties dans ſes pieces tragiques.] 126

24. mvp-aristotle-comment-164

6.11 24. Il eſt vray auſſi qu'elles ſe trouvent toutes, dans toutes ſortes de ſujets.] 127

25. mvp-aristotle-comment-165

6.12 25. Mais la plus conſiderable, c'eſt la fable ou la compoſition des choſes.] 128

26. mvp-aristotle-comment-166

6.12 26. Car la Tragedie eſt une imitation, non pas des hommes, mais de leurs actions.] 129

27. mvp-aristotle-comment-167

6.12 27. De leur vie & de leur bonheur ou de leur malheur.] 130

28. mvp-aristotle-comment-168

6.12 28. Qui conſiſtent dans l'action.] 131

29. mvp-aristotle-comment-169

6.12 29. La fin même que les hommes ſe propoſent eſt toûjours une action, & non pas une qualité.] 132

30. mvp-aristotle-comment-170

6.12 30. On a telles ou telles qualitez par les mœurs.] 133

31. mvp-aristotle-comment-171

6.12 31. Et l'on eſt heureux ou malheureux par les actions.] 134

32. mvp-aristotle-comment-172

6.13 32. Mais ils ajoûtent les mœurs à cauſe des actions.] 135

33. mvp-aristotle-comment-173

6.13 33. De ſorte que les actions & la fable ſont la fin de la Tragedie.] 136

34. mvp-aristotle-comment-174

6.13 34. Or en toutes choſes, la fin eſt ce qu'il y a de plus impor-tant.] 137

35. mvp-aristotle-comment-175

6.14 35. Ajoutez à cette verité, qu'il ne sçauroit y avoir de Tra-gedie ſans action, & qu'il y en peut avoir ſans mœurs.] 138

36. mvp-aristotle-comment-176

6.15 36. En effet il n'y a point de mœurs dans les pieces de la plupart des Poëtes Modernes.] 139

37. mvp-aristotle-comment-177

6.15 37. On peut dire même en general, que l'on trouve preſque entre tous nos Poëtes, la même difference qui eſt entre les Peintres Zeuxis & Polygnote.] 140

38. mvp-aristotle-comment-178

6.15 38. Ce dernier exprimoit parfaitement les mœurs.] 141

39. mvp-aristotle-comment-179

6.15 39. Et on n'en trouve aucun indice dans les ouvrages de l'autre.] 142

40. mvp-aristotle-comment-180

6.16 40. D'ailleurs ſi quelqu'un s'aviſoit de faire une piece, où il y eût de ſuite pluſieurs discours, dans leſquels les mœurs ſeroient parfaitement exprimées, & où il y eût encore une belle diction & de beaux ſentimens.] 143

41. mvp-aristotle-comment-181

6.16 41. On peut aſſeurer qu'il n'auroit pas encore attrapé ce qui eſt le propre de la Tragedie.] 144

42. mvp-aristotle-comment-182

6.16 42. Et qui auroit un ſujet bien conſtitué & bien conduit.] 145

43. mvp-aristotle-comment-183

6.17 43. C'eſt que les moyens les plus efficaces, dont la Tragedie ſe ſert pour toucher & pour plaire, ce ſont les peripeties & les reconnoiſſances.] 146

44. mvp-aristotle-comment-184

6.18 44. Ceux qui entreprenent de faire une Tragedie, trouvent bien plus de facilité à réuſſir dans le ſtyle & dans les mœurs, qu'à bien bâtir le ſujet.] 147

45. mvp-aristotle-comment-185

6.18 45. Et c'eſt une experience que preſque tous les anciens Poëtes ont faite.] 148

46. mvp-aristotle-comment-186

6.20 46. Les mœurs viennent enſuite.] 149

47. mvp-aristotle-comment-187

6.20 47. Car ſi quelqu'un jettoit confuſement & pêle-mêle, les plus belles couleurs ſur une toile, il ne feroit pas le même plaiſir que le ſimple crayon d'un portrait.] 150

48. mvp-aristotle-comment-188

6.20 48. En un mot, la Tragedie eſt une imitation d'une action, & par conſequent elle eſt principalement une imitation de perſonnes qui agiſſent.] 151

49. mvp-aristotle-comment-189

6.21 49. Après les mœurs viennent les ſentimens, c'eſt-à-dire, la faculté d'exprimer les choſes qui ſont du ſujet.] 152

50. mvp-aristotle-comment-190

6.21 50. Les choſes qui ſont du ſujet, & celles qui luy conviennent.] 153

51. mvp-aristotle-comment-191

6.22 51. Or tout ce qui regarde le diſcours, dépend de la Rhetorique & de l'uſage commun.] 154

52. mvp-aristotle-comment-192

6.23 52. Les anciens Orateurs parloient communement & ſimplement.] 155

53. mvp-aristotle-comment-193

6.24 53. Les mœurs ſont ce qui découvre l'inclination de celuy qui parle, & le parti qu'il prendra.] 156

54. mvp-aristotle-comment-194

6.24 54. Dans les choſes où il ne ſeroit pas aiſé de reconnoître ce qu'il veut ſuivre ou éviter.] 157

55. mvp-aristotle-comment-195

6.24 55. C'eſt pourquoy tous les diſcours, qui ne font pas ſentir d'abord à quoy ſe reſoudra celuy qui parle, ſont ſans mœurs.] 158

56. mvp-aristotle-comment-196

6.25 56. Les ſentimens ſont ce qui explique ce qui eſt, ou ce qui n'eſt pas.] 159

57. mvp-aristotle-comment-197

6.26 57. La quatriéme choſe, & qui regarde uniquement le diſcours, c'eſt la diction.] 160

58. mvp-aristotle-comment-198

6.26 58. Et qui a autant de force dans la proſe que dans les vers.] 161

59. mvp-aristotle-comment-199

6.27 59. Aprés la diction vient la muſique, qui eſt le plus grand de tous les agrémens que la Tragedie puiſſe employer.] 162

60. mvp-aristotle-comment-200

6.28 60. La décoration eſt auſſi fort divertiſſante.] 163

61. mvp-aristotle-comment-201

6.28 61. Mais elle ne regarde pas proprement l'art du Poëte, & ne fait point partie de la Poësie.] 164

62. mvp-aristotle-comment-202

6.28 62. Et d'ailleurs tout ce qui regarde la décoration eſt bien plus du reſſort des Ouvriers & des ingenieurs, que de celuy des Poëtes.] 165

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-203

7.2 1. Car il y a telle choſe qui fait un tout & qui cependant n'a pas une juſte étenduë.] 166

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-204

7.3 2. F'appelle donc un tout, ce qui a un commencement, un milieu, & une fin.] 167

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-205

7.4 3. Le commencement, c'eſt ce qui ne ſuppoſe rien neceſſairement avant ſoy.] 168

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-206

7.4 4. Et qui exige aprés ſoy quelque choſe qui eſt, ou qui doit être.] 169

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-207

7.5 5. La fin eſt tout le contraire.] 170

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-208

7.6 6. Et le milieu, c'eſt ce qui ſuppoſe quelque choſe qui doit préceder, & qui exige quelque choſe qui doit ſuivre.] 171

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-209

7.7 7. Ceux donc qui veulent bien dreſſer un ſujet, ne peuvent ny commencer ny finir par tout où il leur plaît.] 172

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-210

7.8 8. Ajoûtez à cela que tout ce qu'il y a de beau parmy les animaux, & parmy les autres Êtres, ſi il eſt compoſé de parties, doit avoir non ſeulement un ordre, mais encore une grandeur juſte & raiſonnable.] 173

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-211

7.8 9. S'il eſt compoſé de parties.] 174

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-212

7.9 10. C'eſt pourquoy rien de fort petit ne peut être beau.] 175

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-213

7.9 11. Parce que la veuë ſe confond dans un objet qu'on voit en un moment preſque inſenſible.] 176

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-214

7.10 12. Rien de trop grand ne peut être beau non plus.] 177

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-215

7.10 13. De même il faut que les ſujets dramatiques, ayent une étenduë que la memoire puiſſe retenir ſans peine.] 178

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-216

7.11 14. Or la meſure préciſe de cette grandeur, pour ce qui regarde la durée de la repreſentation, & de l'attention du ſpectateur, ne peut être decidée par des regles certaines & fixes.] 179

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-217

7.11 15. Car s'il falloit joüer, par exemple, cent Tragedies dans un jour, il faudroit meſurer le temps de chacune à la Clepſydre.] 180

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-218

7.11 16. Comme on dit que cela ſe pratiquoit autrefois.] 181

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-219

7.12 17. Et aſſeurer que plus une piece aura d'étenduë, plus elle ſera belle dans ſa grandeur; pourvu qu'elle ne croiſſe que juſqu'à ce que le ſujet puiſſe être vû tout enſemble, ſans que la veuë s'égare ny ſe confonde.] 182

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-220

7.12 18. C'eſt-à-dire, qu'une piece pour avoir ſa juſte étenduë, doit occuper autant de temps qu'il en faut neceſſairement, ou vray-ſemblablement, pour bien amener tous les incidens.] 183

Commentary on the Poetics (Thomas Twining, 1789) (OCR draft) (Thomas Twining's notes on Aristotle's Poetics, aligned to the Kassel reference edition.) focus

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-12

NOTE 12.

2.2 P. 68. POLYGNOTUS—PAUSON—DIONYSIUS.
Polygnotus and Pauson are also mentioned by Aristotle in his 8th book De Rep. cap. v. where, speaking of Painting with a view to education, he says, that
"young men should not be permitted to contemplate the works of PAUSON, but those only of POLYGNOTUS, and of other artists who excelled in moral expression."
1 It seems probable, from this passage, that the pictures of Pauson were not only of a ludicrous, but also of a licentiousness cast. To what a degree the abuse of this art was carried in Aristotle's time, appears from another passage, [ Rep. lib. vii. cap. xvii. ] in which he says, the magistrate should suffer no
"licentious and indecent paintings or statues,"
such as would endanger the morals of youth: but the exception that follows is curious;—
"Unless,"
he adds,
"in the temples of some DEITIES OF THAT CHARACTER, whose legal and established worship consists in ludicrous and wanton rites."
2
While I am upon this subject, I cannot forbear adding a singular passage of Euripides , where Hippolytus , vindicating himself, and asserting his chastity, says, with a naïveté that, I fear, would hardly be received with decent gravity by a modern audience;—
Λεχους γαρ, ἐις τοδ᾽ ἡμερας, ἁγνον δεμας. Ουκ οἰδα ΠΡΑΞΙΝ ΤΗΝΔΕ, πλην λόγῳ κλύων, ΓΡΑΦΗΙ ΤΕ ΛΕΥΣΣΩΝ· οὐδε ταυτα γαρ σκοπειν Προθυμα ειμι, ΠΑΡΘΕΝΟΝ ΨΥΧΗΝ ἐχων
Hippol. v. 1003.
I am a stranger to the couch of love;
Nor know I of its rites more than the tale
May have informed me, or the Painter's pencil
Presented to mine eye; yet on such picture
Dwells not mine eye delighted, for my mind
Is as a virgin's pure.—
[Mr. Potter's Translation, v. 1060.]
The Pauson mentioned by Aristotle was probably the same painter, whose poverty only is recorded by Suidas , and of whose wit we have a curious specimen in Ælian . 3
OF DIONYSIUs, too, very little is known. That he excelled in natural representation and exact resemblance—in exhibiting men, such as he saw them, without ideal grace on the one hand, or exaggerated deformity on the other is known, I believe, only from this passage of Aristotle. Dacier says this account is confirmed by Ælian ; but I think he is mistaken. It appears to me, that the
μεγεθα
of which Ælian speaks, as the only difference between the paintings of Polygnotus and those of Dionysius, is literal, not figurative, magnitude. 4 He says only, that the pictures of Dionysius, except, that they were on a small scale, were exact imitations of Polygnotus, in the expression of passions and manners, the attitudes of the figures, the lightness and transparency of the draperies, and every other circumstance. 5 It is not easy to see how Dionysius could copy so exactly,
ἐἰς ἀκριβειαν
, the expre- sion, and the forms, or attitudes, of Polygnotus, without copying, at the same time, his greatness of manner, and his improvement of that nature which he imitated; 6 for these seem entirely to depend upon those two circumstances, the expression of the countenance, and the airs and attitudes of the figures.
It seems, therefore, doubtful, whether Aristotle and Ælian speak of the same person. There must, in all probability, have been more painters than one, of that name; which was so common, that the writers so called, alone, furnished Meursius with matter for a whole book.—The pictures of Dionysius the Colophonion are mentioned by Plutarch as being painted with considerable strength of pencil, [
ίσχυν ἐχοντα και τονον
,] but in a manner which appeared forced and laboured, [
εκβεβιασμενον
,] and which he opposes to the freedom and facility of Nicomachus , who seems to have been the Fà Presto of the ancient painters. 7 This fault, so likely to be that of the artist who aims at an exact and scrupulous resemblance of the nature that is before his eyes, may, perhaps, afford some presumption, that Plutarch and Aristotle speak of the same painter.
What Aristotle says of these three styles of picturesque imitation, is easily applied to modern times. The productions, indeed, of these ancient artists, were perishable and of short duration;—
At "genus immortale manet:"
these specific characters have subsisted, and probably will subsist, in every period of the art. For the name of Polygnotus , it is obvious enough to substitute that of RAPHAEL , or other masters of the higher Italian schools.
"When a man,"
says Mr. Richardson , with that simplicity of enthusiasm, which gives so amusing a singularity to his writings 8 —
"When a man enters into that awful gallery at Hampton-court, 9 he finds himself amongst a sort of people superior to what he has ever seen, and very probably to what those really were."
10 This is exactly the
βελτιονας καθ ἡμας
of Aristotle.
"Michael Angelo,"
says the same author,
"no where saw such living figures as he cut in marble."
—The Flemish and Dutch schools will supply plenty of substitutes for the Dionysii of ancient painting—those, who, like Protogenes ,
"in picturâ verum esse, non verisimile, volunt."
11 Rembrandt must occur to every body. Even Rubens
"took his figures too much from the people before him."
12
As for the Pausons, the buffoons of the art, they are to be seen in the windows of every print-shop. We must not, however, confound with these
"Tom Browns of the mob,"
as Mr. Walpole calls them, the moral humour of Hogarth , or the sportive, but harmless, exaggerations of Mr. Bunbury . Hogarth , indeed, in general, and in his greatest works, seems rather to belong to the highest class of the exact imitators of vulgar nature—
των ΦΑΥΛΩΝ
. His Country-dance, however, may be mentioned as an example, and an admirable one, of exaggerated comic imitation, in which men are made, in some degree at least,
"worse than they are"
—
XEΙΡΟΥΣ ἐκαζε
. And if any man can look at this print, or at the Family-piece, the Coffee-house Patriots, or the Long Story, of Mr. Bunbury , without feeling a high degree of that pleasure which arises from the perception of strong humour, he must, I think, be still more unprovided with a sense of the ridiculous, than even that Crassus , who is recorded to have laughed once, though once only, in his life. 13

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-13

NOTE 13.

2.4 P. 68. WITH THE MUSIC OF THE FLUTE AND OF THE LYRE.
Thus PLATO , in the very language of Aristotle,—
τα περι της ρυθμες και πασαν μεσικην ἐσι τροπων μιμηματα ΒΕΛΤΙΟΝΩΝ και ΧΕΙΡΟΝΩΝ ΑΝΘΡΩΠΩΝ
. A modern reader, that is, a person who reads an antient author with modern ideas, might be inclined to to ask, how men are to be represented as better, or worse, than they are, or how, indeed, represented at all, in a harpsichord lesson, or a solo for a German flute? But the same reader, supposing him in any degree conversant with music, would surely be at no loss to conceive, that it admits of the difference of serious and comic expression; and admits of it in various degrees, from the highest elevation and dignity of style, down to the coarse and vulgar jollity of the gavot, or the hornpipe. Now the meaning of Aristotle, put into modern musical language, amounts, I apprehend, to no more than that. Suppose, then, the music, in these different styles, to be accompanied by words, relating the actions, or imitating the speech, of low, or elevated characters; we might say, that the music was expressive of such actions, or characters; the antients would have said, that it imitated them. On the contrary, suppose this music merely instrumental, we should, in general, only say, that it was grand, and sublime, or comic, mean, vulgar, &c. But the antients, from the close, and almost inseparable connection of their Music with Poetry, and particularly with the most imitative sort of Poetry, the Dramatic 14 ; and partly, also, from the nature of their Music itself, would, in this case likewise, have retained much the same language, and would have considered this Music as imitative of the manners and passions of exalted, or vulgar characters, or even as representing those characters themselves.—But the different ideas, or rather, the different language, of the antients and the moderns on this subject, I have considered more fully, and endeavoured to account for, in the Second Dissertation . 15

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-14

NOTE 14.

2.5 P. 68. CLEOPHON, AS THEY ARE.—
It may be worth while to remark, that the character Aristotle gives of the diction of Cleophon—that it was of the common and familiar kind, without Poetic elevation 16 —corresponds with the account here given of the general object of his Poetry, the exact delineation of common nature and common life. He who means to represent men as they are, will also, of course, represent their language nearly as it is.
The only Poet of this name, of whom, I believe, any account is given, is recorded as a Tragic Poet 17 : but Aristotle undoubtedly alludes here to a Poem of the narrative kind. In another part of his works he mentions a Poem of Cleophon, called MANDRABULUS. 18 From the proverbial expression—
ἐπι Μανδραβέλε χωρει το πραγμα
(
"worse and worse, like the affairs of Mandrabulus"—
) in Lucian , 19 and the account of its origin in Suidas , 20 and Hesychius , it seems very improbable that the Poem was a Tragedy. We may rather conclude it to have been of a comic cast; and it seems no unreasonable conjecture, to suppose, that it might be of the narrative kind; modelled, perhaps, in some respects, upon the MARGITES of Homer . At least, the two heroes seem to have been of kindred characters.

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-15

NOTE 15.

2.5 P. 68. HEGEMON INVENTOR OF PARODIES.
See Athenæus, p. 698, 699 , and 406, 407 . And Fabric. Biblioth. Gr. lib. ii. cap. vii. —The Athenians were delighted with this sort of fun—of all expedients to raise a laugh, the cheapest, and, at the same time, the most infallible. HOMER was the great and inexhaustible resource of these Parodists. The best and most considerable specimen remaining, of this kind of Poem, seems to be the Homeric description of an Attic supper by Matron, a great Parodist, and a great eater, in Athenæus, lib. iv. cap. v. Isaac Casaubon calls it,
"Carmen ingeniosum, et leporis ac venustatis plenissimum."
The first three lines may serve as a specimen:—
Δείπνα μοι ἐννεπε, Μεσα, πολυτροφα και μάλα πολλα 21 , Ἃ Ξενοκλης ῥητωρ ἐν Αθηναις δενπνισεν ἡμας, Ηλθον γαρ κέμκεισε, πολυς δε μοι ἐσπετο λιμα. 22
The Poem, it must be confessed, has some pleasantry, and much dexterity of comical perversion. We cannot wonder at its effect upon a people, who had all Homer in their memories. It is easy to conceive the roar of the Athenian upper gallery, when, in the description of the cook, bringing in the supper, they heard this line:
Τῳ δ' αρα τεσσερακοντα μελαιναι ΧΥΤΡΑΙ ἑποντος. 23
Sometimes the Parody depended on a pun; of which Athenæus gives, with great complacence, a curious example, in a scrap from a Parody of Eubæus , describing a quarrel between a barber and a potter. The barber, whose wife, it seems, the other attempts to force from him, addresses the potter in the language of Nestor:—
Μητε συ τονδ , ἀγαθα περ ἐων, ἀποαιρεο ΚΟΥΡΗΝ, Μητε συ, ΠΗΛΕΙΔΗ.
See IL. L. 275, &c.
—where the joke depends on the allusion to
ΠΗΛΟΣ
, mud, or clay; and, probably, to the trade of the speaker, in the word
κερην
; or, perhaps, to the instrument of his art, which we may suppose the actor of the Parody to have brandished at his adversary.—But I do not mean to take to myself the honour of this illustration of an Attic joke. It is to be found in the Poetics of J. C. Scaliger .—See Athen. p. 699. B.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-16

NOTE 16.

2.5 P. 68. THE DELIAD.—
The conjecture of Castelvetro ,
την ΔΕΙλιαδα
, (which might be rendered,
The Poltroniad
,) was certainly ingenious, but, I think, unnecessary. Dacier's account is probably right; and both his idea, and the common reading, seem to receive some support from the similar national titles that are preserved of other pieces of this Poet; such as,
Κρητες
,
Λάκωνες
,
Λημνιαι
.—See Suidas and Fabricius .

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-17

NOTE 17.

2.6 P. 68. SO, AGAIN, WITH RESPECT TO DITHYRAMBICS AND NOMES.
The expression, in this passage, is too general, and too little is known of the examples mentioned in it, to admit of perfect satisfaction, with respect to any thing farther than its general meaning; i. e. that both Dithyrambic and Nomic Poetry admitted the same differences in the objects of their imitation. For so, I think, the sense requires us to understand 24 ; not, that the imitation of heroic characters was appropriated to the one, and that of light characters to the other. Both these species of Poetry were hymns; and though the Dithyrambic, or hymn to Bacchus, might, indeed, from its wild and free character, be privileged with a greater latitude and variety of imitation, yet I know of no authority that will warrant our going so far, as to suppose, that they were essentially distinguished from each other in this respect, like Tragedy and Comedy.
The construction of the Greek I understand to be this:—
μιμησαιτο ἂν τις, ὡς Τιμοθεού και Φιλοξενο [sc. ἐμιμησαντο] Περσας και Κυκλωπας
. I am astonished, that any commentators should have taken either of the compositions here mentioned for dramas; an idea totally repugnant to the plain sense of the whole passage, and to the evident purpose for which these examples are cited. With respect to the
Περσαι
, the passage of Pausanias may be regarded as decisive;—
Πυλαδε ἀδοντο Τιμόθεει ΝΟΜΟΝ, τε Μιλησία, ΠΕΡΣΑΣ
Paus. Arcad.
—And the Poem began with an hexameter verse which is there quoted. Yet Fabricius calls it a Tragedy. The Poem of Philoxenus here meant must, clearly, have been either a Nome, or a Dithyrambic Poem; most probably, the latter. Philoxenus is recorded as a Dithyrambic Poet; and Aristotle's illustration will be more complete, if we understand him to exemplify in each of the kinds of Poetry in question. It is by no means certain, that the Cyclops of Philoxenus mentioned by Athenæus , Ælian , and others, is the piece here alluded to: and, if it were, which, undoubtedly, appears rather probable, I know of no sufficient proof that it was a Drama, as it has been repeatedly called. If Ælian is to be regarded, it certainly was not; for he calls it
μελος
—a term appropriated to Lyric Poetry.—
του ΚΥΚΛΩΠΑ ἐργασατο, των ἑαυτε ΜΕΛΩΝ το καλλισον
. 25
I mentioned, in the conclusion of NOTE 1 . a problem of Aristotle, from which it appears, that the Dithyrambic Poetry was not originally imitative, but became so by degrees. It is the 15th of the Harmonic Problems, Sect. 19. It is there said, that the Dithyrambs, after they became imitative, laid aside the antistrophical form, (i. e. the division into corresponding stanzas 26 ,) in which, before, they had been composed. 27 And the reason assigned for this is, that, originally, these Dithyrambic hymns were performed by chorusses of gentlemen, [
ἐλευθερο
] who could not sing in the style of artists, and professors: [
ἀγωνιστικως οἶδειν
:] the words were, therefore, set to the simplest kind of melody, 28 such as that, in which the same air is repeated to similar stanzas, as in our ballads. 29 But afterwards, it seems, the performance of these hymns, like that of the Nomes, was left to professed musicians, the
ἀγωνισαι
, or masters of the art, who contended with each other in trials of skill, and who were, of course, to exert all their imitative powers. The symmetry of strophe and antistrophe, and the simplicity of air regularly repeated, were ill adapted to this purpose, which required length, variety, and frequent changes of metre, melody, rhythm, mode, genus, &c. 30 in conformity to the various subjects of imitation, and transitions of expression. 31 This account, which affords some little glimpse of curious information, with respect both to the Nomic and Dithyrambic hymn, is confirmed, as far as the latter is concerned, by Dionysius Halicarn. De Structura Orat. Sect. 19 . He there traces the progress of all this Lyric corruption, and names TIMOTHEUS and PHILOXENUS as the principal authors of these licentious and wicked innovations—
"for, in the time of the old Poets,"
he says,
"the Dithyrambic ode was an orderly and regular composition."
32
Plutarch , too, in the Dialogue Περι Μεσικης , speaks exactly the same language. Timotheus and Philoxenus are there repeatedly stigmatized as corrupters of the good old music; and the
ладаρειο
and
Σιμονίδειο τροπο
, is opposed to the
Φιλοξενεις
, 33 with a zeal similar to that, with which, in modern music, we sometimes hear the style of Corelli and Geminiani opposed and preferred to the heterodox novelties of Haydn and Boccherini . 34
The manner, in which Aristotle, in this Problem, speaks of the Nomes, when compared with his expressions relative to the Dithyrambics, rather leads one to suppose, that the former were not, even originally, composed in the antistrophic form 35 : the least, however, that can be inferred from it, is, that they discarded that form, and, consequently, became complicated, artificial, and imitative, long before a similar revolution took place in the Dithyrambic Poetry and Music. I may, also, observe that the variety of imitation, and changes of expression, clearly attributed by Aristotle to the Nomes, seem to confirm what I said above—that they did not exclude the same variety, in the objects of their imitation, which the Dithyrambic Poem confessedly admitted.
I will just add, that this Problem of Aristotle throws light upon a passage in his Rhetoric , which has embarrassed his commentators. He there [ lib. iii. cap. 9. ] compares the diction that is divided into periods, to the Antistrophic Odes
"of the old Poets:"
but, the
λεξις ειρομενη
, in which the sentence has no other unity than that which copulatives give it 36 , nor any other measure than the completion of the sense, and the necessity of taking breath 37 , or, as Cicero , in few words, so admirably describes it,
"illa sine intervallis loquacitas perennis et profluens"
38 —this Aristotle compares to what he calls the
αναβολαι
in Dithyrambic Poetry; meaning, I think, evidently, the long, irregular, protracted Odes of the more modern Dithyrambic Poets; such as those, of which he speaks in the Problem. For the word,
Αναβολη
, here, does not, I believe, signify exordium, proæmium, as usually understood, but was, probably, the name by which these
ὠδαι μακραι και πολυειδεις
were distinguished, and opposed to the old and simple Dithyrambic in stanzas.

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-18

NOTE 18.

3.2 P. 68. EITHER IN NARRATION, AND THAT, AGAIN, EITHER, &C.
It may safely be pronounced, that the original here, either is not as Aristotle left it, or, was carelessly and ambiguously written. As the ambiguity, however, does not affect the general sense of the passage, it is scarcely worth while to engage in a minute discussion of the comparative merits of the two different constructions, which have been adopted by different commentators and translators. The learned reader knows, or may see, what has been said on both sides. I have preferred that construction, which has always appeared to me to result most obviously and naturally from the words of the original.—
ἐν τοις αυτοις, και τα αυτα μιμεισθαι ἐσιν, ότε μεν ΑΠΑΓΓΕΛΛΟΝΤΑ ( ἑτερον τι γιγνομενον, ώσπερ Ομηρου ποιει, ὡς τον αυτον, και μη μεταβαλλοντα,) η παντας ὡς ΠΡΑΤΤΟΝΤΑΣ και ἐνεργεντας τις μιμεμένες
.
In the other, and most usual way of taking this passage, the mixture of mere narration, and dramatic imitation, in the Epic species, is expressed by the words,
ότε μεν ἀπαγγελλοντα, ἕτερον τε γιγνομενον
. But it seems not likely, that Aristotle would thus oppose the word
ἀπαγγελλοντα
, to
ἕτερον τε γιγνομενον
; because the term,
ἀπαγγελια
, is constantly applied by him, throughout the treatise, to the narrative species in general: it is opposed, not to the dramatic part of the Epic, but to the drama itself.
Απαγγελια
and
διηγησις
, are used by him as synonymous terms, and are both applied to the whole of the Homeric, or dramatic, Epic Poem. 39 On the other hand, the words—
ΕΤΕΡΟΝ τι γιγνομενου
—seem evidently opposed to
ὡς ΤΟΝ ΑΥΤΟΝ και μη μεταβαλλοντα
, and should, therefore, be joined with them, not with
ἀπαγγελλοντα
.—Lastly, in this way of understanding the passage, Aristotle divides the different manners of imitation, as he might naturally be expected to divide them, into those which characterize the two great and principal species, of which he means to treat—the NARRATIVE and the DRAMATIC. The two different modes of the former, i, e. the pure narrative, and the dramatic narrative, are, with more propriety than in the other construction, (in bis view of the subject, at least,) flung into a subdivision.
In either construction, however, Aristotle agrees with Plato in enumerating three kinds of Poetry, the purely dramatic, the purely narrative, and the mixed. 40 But the generality of the commentators seem, too hastily, to have taken it for granted, that Aristotle must therefore necessarily enumerate them in the same manner; and they have, accordingly, moulded the flexible and ambiguous construction of this passage, exactly upon the division of Plato . 41
I was glad to find myself supported here by the judgment of the accurate Piccolomini , whose version coincides with mine.—
In UN MODO, per via di narratione, e questo, ò ponendo se steslo alle volte il Poeta in persona d'altri, come få Homero, over conservando sempre la propria persona non mutata mai. Nel ALTRO MODO poi, introducendo persone à trattare et negotiare, come se le stesse persone che sono imitate, fuffero.
With respect to the imitation here expressly allowed by Aristotle to subsist even in mere narration, without the intermixture of any thing dramatic, see Diff. I. p. 26 . I agree perfectly with Mr. Winstanley , that his emendations are not necessary.

19. mvp-aristotle-comment-19

NOTE 19.

3.4 P. 69. ELEVATED CHARACTERS
Gr. ΣΠΟΥΔΑΙΟΥΣ. The adjective
Σπουδαιοι
, and its opposite,
Φαυλος
, are words of considerable latitude. They, each of them, comprehend a number of different, though related, ideas, for which we have not, that I know of, any common word. Propriety itself, therefore, requires of a translator that, which, at first view, seems contrary to propriety—that he should render each of those words differently in different places. To have translated
σπεδαίες
here,
"good,"
or
"virtuous,"
as it may generally be translated, would only have been giving an English word with a Greek idea, which none but readers of Greek would have affixed to it.
The Greeks appear to have applied the word,
ΣΠΟΥΔΑΙΟΝ
, to whatever was, on any account,
ἀξιων σπεδης
—whatever was respectable, important, admirable, serious, valuable, &c. as opposed to
ΦΑΥΛΟΝ
, which was applied, not to vice only, but to whatever was contemptible, trifling, light, ordinary, ridiculous—or, as we say in familiar English, good for nothing. 42 Hence the various senses of both these words in the Greek writers, according as they were applied to persons, and things, that were the objects of esteem, or contempt, on different accounts. Sometimes, therefore,
σπεδαίο
may be rendered by
"good;"
sometimes by
"serious, earnest,"
&c.—Sometimes, as in this passage, and in the definition of Tragedy, by
"elevated,"
"important,"
&c. 43
Some kind of virtue, in the extended sense given to the word
ΑΡΕΤΗ
by the ancient writers on morals, was, indeed, always implied in the epithet
Σπεδαι
; but it included such good qualities, and endowments, as we do not usually call virtues; or, at least, such as we never include in our idea of a virtuous man: as, wisdom, courage, eloquence, &c. 44 —Thus Aristotle himself;
το δε ΣΠΟΥΔΑΙΟΝ είναι, εστι το ΤΑΣ ΑΡΕΤΑΣ ἐχειν
. 45 And what are these virtues?—they are
"all laudable habits."
—
των ἐξεων τας ΕΠΑΙΝΕΤΑΣ, ΑΡΕΤΑΣ λεγομεν
. 46
The subject of Criticism is necessarily connected, in some degree, with that of Ethics; and unless we understand well the moral language of any writer, we cannot be competent judges of his criticism.

20. mvp-aristotle-comment-20

NOTE 20.

3.5 P. 69. IN SUPPORT OF THESE CLAIMS THEY ARGUE FROM THE WORDS THEMSELVES.
Ποιεμενοι τα ὀνοματα σημειον
.—The participle,
ποιεμενοι
, should be applied, I think, to all the Dorians—not confined, as in Dacier's translation, to those of Peloponnesus. See Goulston's version, which appears to me to be right.
Aristotle begins by saying expressly, that the Dorians, in general, laid claim to both Tragedy and Comedy, on account of the term
ΔΡΑΜΑ
, which was a Doric word:—
∆ΙΟ
(i. e. from the term
Δραματα
, just before mentioned,)
ἀντιποιενται της τε Τραγωδίας και της Κωμωδίας ΟΙ ΔΩΡΙΕΙΣ
—He then mentions the peculiar claims of the Megarians to Comedy, and of the Dorians of Peloponnesus to Tragedy; throwing in, parenthetically, some other arguments on which the former also founded their title to the invention of Comedy: after which, he returns, at the word
ποιεμένοι
, to shew, how these people concurred in arguing from the etymology of the words themselves; all of them, from the word
δραμα
, as it was common to Tragedy and Comedy, and they, who laid claim to Comedy, both from that, and also from the derivation of the word
Κωμωδια
.
The construction, in this way, is, I confess, somewhat parenthetical and embarrassed; but the reader, who is accustomed to the style of Aristotle, will not, I believe, consider this as affording alone any sufficient presumption against the explanation here given.

21. mvp-aristotle-comment-21

NOTE 21.

4.3 P. 70. THE FIGURES OF THE MEANEST AND MOST DISGUSTING ANIMALS.
Θηρίων τε μορφας των ΑΤΙΜΟΤΑΤΩΝ
.—This reading is strongly supported by the arguments of Victorius, the authority of MSS, and the sense and purport of the passage itself, which seems to require instances of mean, or disgusting, rather than of terrible, objects. Thus too Plutarch , in the passages referred to by Victorius, which undoubtedly allude to this of Aristotle.—
Γεγραμμένην ΣΑΥΡΑΝ η ΠΙΘΗΚΟΝ, ἰδοντες ήδομεθα και θαυμαζομεν, ουχ ὡς καλον, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ὁμοιον ἐσιᾳ γαρ ἐ δυναται καλον γενέσθαι ΤΟ ΑΙΣΧΡΟΝ
κ. τ. αλ. And presently after—
και ΝΟΣΩΔΗ μεν ΑΝΘΡΩΠΟΝ, και ΥΠΟΥΛΟΝ,
ὡς ἀτερπες θεαμα, φευγομεν
κ. τ. αλ.—See also his Sympos. Problems. lib. v. Prob. 1.

22. mvp-aristotle-comment-22

NOTE 22.

4.4 P. 70. TO LEARN IS A NATURAL PLEASURE.
To the same purpose, in his Rhetoric, lib. i. cap. xi. p. 537. Ed. Duval.
"Επει δε το ΜΑΝΘΑΝΕΙΝ τε ήδυ, και το θαυμάζειν, και τα τοιαυτα, ἀναγκη ήδεα ειναι, το τε μεμιμημενον, ώσπερ ΓΡΑΦΙΚΗ, και ΑΝΔΡΙΑΝΤΟΠΟΙΪΑ, και ΠΟΙΗΤΙΚΗ, και παν ὁ ἀν ἐυ μεμιμημενον , καν μη ή ήδὺ το μιμημα γαρ ἐπι τετῳ χαιρει, άλλα συλλογισμού ἐστι, ὅτι ΤΟΥΤΟ ΕΚΕΙΝΟ· ώστε ΜΑΝΘΑΝΕΙΝ τι συμβαινει."
47
"And as it is by nature delightful to LEARN, to ADMIRE, and the like, hence we necessarily receive pleasure from imitative arts, as PAINTING, SCULPTURE, and POETRY, and from whatever is well imitated, even though the original may be disagreeable; for our pleasure does not arise from the beauty of the thing itself, but from the inference the discovery, that 'THIS IS THAT,' &c. so that we seem to LEARN something."
—
Μανθανειν
to learn, to know, i. e. merely to recognize, discover, &c. See Harris, On Music, Painting, &c. ch. iv. note (b) . The meaning is sufficiently explained by what follows. Dryden , who scarce ever mentions Aristotle without discovering that he had looked only at the wrong side of the tapestry, says—
"Aristotle tells us, that imitation pleases because it affords matter for a rea-
48
soner to enquire into the truth or falsehood of imitation,"
&c. 49 But Aristotle is not here speaking of reasoners, or inquiry; but, on the contrary, of the vulgar, the generality of mankind, whom he expressly opposes to philosophers, or reasoners: and his
συλλογίζεσθαι
is no more than that rapid, habitual, and imperceptible act of the mind, that
"raisonnement aussi prompt que le coup d'œil,"
(as it is well paraphrased by M. Batteux ,) by which we collect, or infer, from a comparison of the picture with the image of the original in our minds, that it was intended to represent that original.
The fullest illustration of this passage is to be found in another work of Aristotle, his Rhetoric, lib. iii. cap. x. , 50 where he applies the same principle to metaphorical language, and resolves the pleasure we receive from such language, into that which arises from the
μαθησις ΤΑΧEIA
—the exercise of our understandings in discovering the meaning, by a quick and easy perception of some quality or qualities common to the thing expressed, and the thing intended—to a mirror, for example, and to the theatre, when the latter is is called metaphorically,
"The mirror of human life."
51
In the Problems, Sect. 19, Prob. V. the same principle is applied to Music. The Problem is, Why we are more pleased with singing when we are acquainted with the air that is sung, than when it is new to us?—And one of the answers is,
ὅτι ἡδυ το μανθανειν
. i. e. to say, this is such a tune, or song, &c. And indeed the pleasure afforded by recognition, is no where, perhaps, more visibly illustrated, than in the raptures and rhythmical agitation of a popular audience, at the return of the leading air, in that species of infallible ear-trap, the RONDEAU.
I must add, as somewhat amusing, that Plato makes use of this principle to prove a dog to be a philosophical animal:
"for, (he argues,)
το φιλομαθες και φιλοσοφον, τ'αυτον
, the love of knowing, and the love of wisdom, are one and the same thing. Now dogs are delighted with knowing, simply, and disinterestedly; they fawn upon every one whom they know, and bark at the approach of every stranger; 52 and that, without having ever experienced good from the one, or harm from the other."
53
The philosophy of Aristotle here, though undoubtedly true, as far as it goes, will, I am afraid, to those who examine it, hardly appear to be perfectly satisfactory, or to reach the bottom of the subject. It is however to be considered, that what he has said, seems applicable chiefly to rude and unskilful spectators, and should, perhaps, be considered as a description of the effect of a picture or a statue upon children, and the multitude, who are little accustomed to view works of imitative art. And even with respect to them, the principle seems scarcely applicable but to portraits, and individual resemblances, such as may not be instantly recognized. When we look at a picture of that kind, we may not discover, till after a comparison of, at least, a few moments, that it is an imitation of this or that person; but, that it is an imitation of a man, we see at once and where there is not even a momentary ignorance, or doubt, I do not see how any information can be said to be acquired by the spectator, nor how, on the philosopher's own principles, (if I rightly understand him,) the pleasure conveyed by the imitation, can, in any sense, be resolved into that, which the mind receives from the exertion of its own powers in inferring, or discovering, the resemblance.
I say, on Aristotle's own principles, because, in the passage above referred to, where he explains himself more fully in applying the principle to metaphor, he expressly allows, that this pleasure of recognition, is not afforded by proper or common words, since they instantly suggest their meaning and cannot be mistaken. 54 Now a painting, considered as an imitation of a man, a horse, a house, in general, obviously answers in this respect, unless the imitation be grossly imperfect, to the common and familiar word; the one suggesting its original, as readily and immediately, as the other suggests its idea. 55
Among Aristotle's illustrations of this physical principle of the pleasure of self-information, as it might be called, there are two short passages, in particular, which seem to be so explicit with regard to the nature of that pleasure, that I will venture to add to the length of this note by a transcript and translation of them both. They will, I think, satisfy the learned reader that I have not, in the foregoing remarks, misrepresented the philosopher's meaning. After having applied the principle to metaphor, he applies it in like manner to the enthymemes, or arguments, of the orator.
"Διο ἐτε τα ἐπιπολαια των ἐνθυμηματων ευδοκιμει (ἐπιπολαια γαρ λέγομεν τα παντι δηλα, και ῾Α ΜΗΔΕΝ ΔΕΙ ΖΗΤΗΣΑΙ·) ἐτε όσα ειρημενα ἀγνοκμενα ἐστι᾿ ἀλλ᾿ ὅσων, ἡ ἁμα λεγομενων ἡ γνωσις γινεται, και ει μη προτερον ὑπηρχεν, μικρον ύστερίζει ἡ διανοια γίνεται γαρ ῾ΟΙΟΝ ΜΑΘΗΣΙΣ· ἐκεινως δε, οὐδετερον."
56
"For the same reason, we are pleased, neither with superficial arguments, (by which we mean such as are obvious to every one, and require no thought or search in the hearer;) nor with such as we do not understand when we have heard them; but, with those, which the mind apprehends, either while we hear them, (though not at first,) or in the moment after they are delivered:—for by these, we, in a manner, LEARN something: by the others, we learn nothing in either of these ways."
The other passage, in which the nature of the pleasure that Aristotle means is still more expressly marked, is this:
"Παντων δε των συλλογισμων θορυβειται μαλιστα τα τοιαυτα όσα ἀρχομενα ΠΡΟΟΡΩΣΙ, μη τῳ ἐπιπολης ἐἶναι ἁμα γαρ και ΑΥΤΟΙ ΕΦ ΕΑΥΤΟΙΣ ΧΑΙΡΟΥΣΙ προαισθανομενοι και ὅσων τοσετον ὑστεριζεσιν, ὡσθ άμα ειρημενων γνωρίζειν."
"Of all arguments, those are most applauded 57 , of which the audience have no sooner heard the beginning, than they foresee the conclusion;—not, however, from their being trite and obvious; for they are pleased, [not only with the ingenuity of the speaker, but] at the same time, WITH THEMSELVES and their own sagacity. Those arguments, also, afford pleasure, which, the moment after they are delivered, we are no longer at a loss to apprehend."

23. mvp-aristotle-comment-23

NOTE 23.

4.4 P. 70. IN A MORE TRANSIENT AND COMPENDIOUS MANNER.
Επι βραχυ
:—literally,
"for a short time."
AS PLATO , Rep. iii. p. 396 ,
κατα βραχυ
, for a moment—
en passant
. Dacier's explanation—
Quoi qu'ils ne soient pas tous egalement propres à apprendre,
—is, surely, wide of Aristotle's purpose. None of the versions, that I have seen, seem to give the exact idea, except that of Heinsius :—
"Quamquam minor BREVIORQUE ad hos perveniat voluptas."

24. mvp-aristotle-comment-24

NOTE 24.

4.6 P. 70. FROM THE WORKMANSHIP.—
Δια την ΑΠΕΡΓΑΣΙΑΝ
—
"neatness"—"finishing,"
&c. In the following passages of PLATO , it is opposed to a slight sketch:—
και αυτων τετων [sc. δικαιοσυνης, σωφροσυνης, &c.] ἐχ ΥΠΟΓΡΑΦΗΝ δει, ώσπερ νυν θεασασθαι, άλλα την τελεωτάτην ΑΠΕΡΓΑΣΙΑΝ μη παριέναι
Rep. vi. p. 504 . So again, lib. viii. p. 548 , the verb,
ἀπεργαζεσθαι
, is opposed to
ὑπογραφειν
.

25. mvp-aristotle-comment-25

NOTE 25.

4.7 P. 70. METRE—A SPECIES OF RHYTHM.
Μορια
—parts. The following passage will ascertain the sense of the word in this place, and justify my version. Explaining the different senses in which the word
Mep
was used, Aristotle says,
ἔτι, εις το διαιρεθειη ἀν, ἄνευ τε Ποσε, και ταυτα ΜΟΡΙΑ λεγεται τετε διο τα ΕΙΔΗ, το ΓΕΝΟΥΣ φασιν είναι ΜΟΡΙΑ
.— Metaphys. lib. v. cap. 25. So, in this treatise, cap. 5. —
τε Αισχρε ἐστι το Γελοιον ΜΟΡΙΟΝ
—
"a part, or species, of the ridiculous."

26. mvp-aristotle-comment-26

NOTE 26.

4.7 P. 70. THOSE PERSONS, IN WHOM, ORIGINALLY, THESE PROPENSITIES WERE THE STRONGEST, &c.
It is obvious to remark here, that Aristotle, in this deduction of the art from the mimetic and musical instincts, includes verse in his idea of Poetry, which he, at least, considered as imperfect without it. All that he drops, elsewhere, to the disparagement of metre, must be understood only comparatively... An eminent writer has adjusted this matter... in his Dissertation On the idea of Universal Poetry . 58 What is there said, of
"the origin and first application of Poetry among all nations,"
will furnish the best comment I can give, upon the passage which is the subject of this note.
"Poetry is every where of the most early growth, preceding every other sort of composition; and being destined for the ear, that is, to be either sung, or at least recited, it adapts itself, even in its first rude essays, to that sense of measure, and proportion in sounds, which is so natural to us. The hearer's attention is the sooner gained by this means, his entertainment quickened, and his admiration of the performer's art excited. Men are ambi-
tious of pleasing, and ingenious in refining upon what they observe will please. So that musical cadences and harmonious sounds, which nature dictated, are farther softened and improved by art, till Poetry become as ravishing to the ear, as the images, it presents, are to the imagination. In process of time, what was at first the extemporaneous production of genius or passion, under the conduct of a natural ear, becomes the labour of the closet, and is conducted by artificial rules; yet still, with a secret reference to the sense of hearing, and to that acceptation which melodious sounds meet with in the recital of expressive words."

27. mvp-aristotle-comment-27

NOTE 27.

4.10 P. 71. MARGITES.
The scraps that have been preserved of this Poem, the Dunciad of HOMER , are so few, and so short, that it may be worth while, for the convenience of the reader, to collect them.—
Μεσαων θεράπων και ἐκηβολε Απολλωνα,
59
—a line as likely to be found in one kind of Poem as in another... The other fragments are a little more interesting, as they give some idea of the hero of the Poem.
ΤΟΝΔ᾽ ἐτ᾿ ἀν σκαπτηρα θεοι θεσαν, ἐτ᾿ ἀροτηρα, Ουτ᾿ ἄλλως τι σοφον πασης δ ήμαρτανε τέχνης.
Preserved by Aristotle, Eth. lib. vi. cap. 7
Πολλ᾿ ἡπιστατο ἐργα, κακως δ ήπιστατο παντα.
Plato, Alcib. Secund. p. 147. Ed. Serrani.

28. mvp-aristotle-comment-28

NOTE 28.

4.12 P. 71. HIS MARGITES BEARS THE SAME ANALOGY TO COMEDY, AS HIS ILIAD AND ODYSSEY TO TRAGEDY.
Whenever Aristotle speaks of
COMEDY
, we must remember, that he speaks of the Old, or Middle Comedy, which was no other than what we should call farce, and to which his definition of Comedy was adapted:
μιμησις φαυλοτέρων
; that is, as he explains himself,
"an imitation of RIDICULOUS characters."
60 —This remark is necessary to explain what is here said of the Margites.
A Poem, which, as far we can form any idea of it, celebrated the blunders and absurdities of an idiot, cannot well be conceived to have been analogous to any thing, that would now be denominated a Comedy. It seems to verge to the very bottom of the dramatic scale;
"jusq' au bouffon; celui-ci sera l'extrême de la Comedie, le
plus bas degré de l'echelle, opposé au terrible qui est à l'autre bout."
61 The Bourgeois Gentilhomme of Moliere is certainly farce, however excellent in its way. But Mons. Jourdain is a very Ulysses, compared with Margites.

29. mvp-aristotle-comment-29

NOTE 29.

4.14 P. 72. BY SUCH SUCCESSIVE IMPROVEMENTS AS WERE MOST OBVIOUS.
Ὅσον ἐγινετο φανερον αυτης
—literally,
"so much of it as was manifest."
I doubt of the reading: but, taking it as it stands, I have given what appears to me to offer itself as the most natural and simple meaning of the expression, if not the only one that it will reasonably bear.

30. mvp-aristotle-comment-30

NOTE 30.

4.16 P. 72. ÆSCHYLUS-----ABRIDGED THE CHORAL PART.
The words are,
ΤΑ το χορό
. Aristotle would hardly have expressed himself thus, had he meant, as Madius , Bayle , and others, have understood, a retrenchment in the number of choral performers.
ΤΑ τε χορε
, the choral part, is opposed to
ΤΑ άπο σκηνης
, the dialogue, Prob. xv. of Sect. 19. It is singular, that Stanley should misunderstand this passage; and still more singular, that he should cite Philostratus , who is directly against him: for his words are,
συνεστειλε τες χορός, ΑΠΟΤΑΔΗΝ ΟΝΤΑΣ
:
"he contracted the chorusses, which were immoderately long."
62
This is confirmed by one of Aristotle's Problems, referred to by Victorius. The Problem is,
Δια τι οι περι Φρυνίχον ἦσαν μαλλον μελοποιοι
; (meaning, I suppose, more Musicians than the dramatic Poets of his own time:) The answer is,
ή, δια το πολλαπλασια είναι τοτε τα μέλη ἐν ταις των μετρων τραγωδίαις
; 63 I believe the passage may be rectified by transposition—
πολλ. είναι τοτε τα μέλη των μέτρων ἐν τ. Τ.
Perhaps, too, we should read,
των ΤΡΙΜΕΤΡΩΝ
. But, even taking it as it stands, it may sufficiently answer our purpose, as it shews clearly enough how much the Lyric parts of Tragedy, before the time of Æschylus, wanted contraction.
The prolixity of the Tragic Chorus, we know, was sometimes trying to the patience of an Athenian audience. This is pleasantly glanced at by Aristophanes in his Ορνιθες: where the Chorus of birds, descanting on the convenience of wings, tell the spectators, that if they had wings, whenever, in the Theatre, they
"found themselves hungry, and were tired with the Tragic Chorus, they might fly home and eat their dinners, and fly back again, when the Chorus was over."
ΧΟΡ. Ουδεν ἐς᾿ ἀμεινον, ἐδ᾽ ἡδιον, φυσαι πτερα. Αυτιχ, ύμων των θεατων ἐι τις ὴν ὑποπτερο, Ειτα, πανων, τοις χοροισι των Τραγῳδων ήχθετο, Εκπετομενοι ἐν ἑτα ἠρισησεν, ἐλθων ὀικαδε, Κατ᾿ ἀν, ἐμπλησθεις, ἐφ ἡμας ἀυθις κατεπτατο.
v. 786.

31. mvp-aristotle-comment-31

NOTE 31.

4.16 P. 72. AND MADE THE DIALOGUE THE PRINCIPAL PART OF TRAGEDY.
—
Και τον λογον πρωταγωνισην παρεσκευασε.
Victorius, and others, have supposed Aristotle to mean the Prologue. But it seems to be a sufficient objection to this sense, that no example has been produced of the word
πρωταγωνισην
, used as merely synonymous to
πρωτο
; as signifying first only, not principal. Nor is it easy to discover any reason, why Aristotle should have recourse here to an unusual and ambiguous expression, when, presently after, in speaking of the improvements of Comedy [ cap. v. ], he makes use of the proper and established term,
προλογ
. There seem to be no words in the Greek language, of which the sense is more clearly fixed, than that of
πρωταγωνισης—πρωταγωνιζειν
. They occur frequently, and always, as far as I know, in the same sense, of principal—
primas agere
, &c. To this sense, therefore, I thought it necessary to adhere.
But I confess I cannot be satisfied with either of the explanations which have been given of the word
ΛΟΓΟΣ
. It appears strange to say, that Æschylus first introduced two actors, and then to add, as a distinct improvement, that he also first introduced a principal part or character:—unless we are to understand, what seems not very probable, that the two actors even of Æschylus himself were, at first, personages of equal dignity and importance in the drama... and that, afterwards, he was the first who corrected this error... and reduced the drama to unity of action by a proper subordination of characters. But, admitting this sense to be without difficulty, the expression of it, I think, is not.
Λόγος
, for a part in the drama,
role, personnage
, (as Dacier ,) character, &c. seems harsh, and unusual. At least, I know no example of it.
The difficulties which attend both the expression and the sense, in each of these interpretations, have almost convinced me, that the very construction of the words has been mistaken; and that the meaning is,
"he made the discourse, or dialogue, the principal part of Tragedy."
This is well connected with what precedes, and agreeable to the known history of the Tragic drama, in which, originally, the Chorus was the essential, and the Episodes, or dra- matic part, only the accessory. But Æschylus
"abridged the Chorus, and made the Episodic part the principal."
Λόγος
, here, may well be understood to mean what Aristotle elsewhere calls
λεξις
; the speaking, or recitative, part of Tragedy, whether delivered by one or more actors, as opposed to the
μέλη
, or Lyric part. 64
Παρεσκευασε
,
reddidit, effecit
, &c. as...
ευσεβεστερες τε και σωφρονεςέρες της συνοντας παρεσκευασεν
"magis pios et temperatos reddidit."
65 And thus Aristotle himself, cap. xix.
ὅταν ἡ ἐλεεινα δεινα δεη παρασκευαζαν.
i. e. to make things piteous, terrible, &c. as in Goulston's version; and that of the accurate Piccolomini :—
"Quando occorre d'havere à far parere le cose, à miserabili, atroci,"
&c. 66 If the use of
πρωταγωνισης
as an adjective be an objection, it is one to which the other explanations are equally liable. On the whole, I have not scrupled to prefer this sense in my version.

32. mvp-aristotle-comment-32

NOTE 32.

4.16 P. 72. SOPHOCLES ADDED THE DECORATION OF PAINTED SCENERY.
To adjust exactly the rival claims of Æschylus and Sophocles with respect to the
oψις
, or decoration, of the Tragic stage, would be a desperate undertaking. Some accounts are so liberal to Æschylus, as scarce to leave his successors any room for farther improvements. They give him
"paintings, machinery, altars, tombs, trumpets, ghosts, and furies:"
—to which others add a very sin- gular species of Tragic improvement, the
"exhibition of drunken men."
—
την δε σκηνην ἐκοσμησε, και την όψιν των θεωμενων κατεπληξε τη λαμπρότητι - ΓΡΑΦΑΙΣ και μηχαναίς, βωμοις τε και τάφοις, σαλπιγξιν, ειδωλοις, ἔριννυσι.
67 —And Athenæus says,
πρωτου ἐκεινΘ----παρηγαγε την των ΜΕΘΥΟΝΤΩΝ ΟΨΙΝ ἐς τραγωδιαν.
p. 428. He adds an example. In the Tragedy called Καβειροι, he introduced
"Jason and his retinue drunk!"
The passage given by Dacier from Vitruvius is very general; it says only,
"scenam fecit."
68 This may, or may not, include painting; which, indeed, rather seems to be implied, in what follows, about the improvements of Democritus and Anaxagoras , where the
"imagines ædificiorum in scenarum picturis"
are mentioned. But all this is far outweighed by the testimony of Aristotle, who here explicitly attributes the introduction of painted Scenery to Sophocles.

33. mvp-aristotle-comment-33

NOTE 33.

4.17 P. 72. IT WAS LATE BEFORE TRAGEDY----ATTAINED ITS PROPER DIGNITY.
—
Οιψε ἀπεσεμνωθη
:—and to
"late,"
we might add, imperfectly. For, what Horace says of the Roman Tragedy, is, in some measure, though perhaps not equally, applicable to the Greek:
in longum tamen ævum Manferunt, hodieque manent veftigia ruris.
Ep. ad Aug. v. 160.
Prejudice aside, it cannot surely be said, that the Greek Tragedy, in the hands, at least, of Æschylus, Sophocles, or Euripides, ever attained its proper dignity. I do not speak of modern dignity; of that uniform, unremitting strut of pomp and solemnity, which is now required in Tragedy. This was equally unknown to the manners, and to the Poetry, of the antients. I speak only of such a degree of dignity as excludes, not simplicity, but meanness—the familiar, the jocose, the coarse, the comic. Now it cannot, I think, be said, with any truth, that these are thoroughly excluded in any of the Greek Tragedies that are extant: in some of them they are admitted to a very considerable degree.
In particular, something of this sort—of what the French call
mesquin
—is almost constantly to be found in the short dialogue of the Greek Tragedies; in that part, I mean, which the eye, when we turn over any Tragedy, easily distinguishes from the rest, by its being carried on in a regular alternation of single verses. In this
"close fighting"
of the dialogue, as Dryden calls it, 69 which seems to have retained something of the spirit of the old satyric diverbia, where...
VERSIBUS ALTERNIS opprobria rustica fundunt,
HOR. —in this part of the dialogue, we generally find... somewhat more than what Brumoy calls
"un petit vernis de familiarité ;"
70 especially when these scenes are, as they often are, scenes of altercation and angry repartee. 71 In the Iphigenia in Aulide of Euripides , Menelaus, in the struggle with the old messenger for the letter, threatens to break his head with his sceptre,
Σκηπτρῳ ταχ άρα σον καθαιμάξω καρα.
v. 311.
Fairly rendered by Mr. Potter's verse—
"Soon shall thy head this sceptre stain with blood."
Unfairly dignified by Brumoy's prose—
"Prends garde qu'une mort prompte ne punisse ton audace."
Even Sophocles, who gave the Tragic tone, in general, its proper pitch, between the
ογκος
of Æfchylus, and the
ίσχνοτης
of Euripides, 72 is by no means free from some mixture of this alloy in the language of his short dialogue. For example: in the scene between Ulysses and Neoptolemus in the Philoctetes, [v. 1250,] when Neoptolemus declares his resolution of restoring to Philoctetes his bow and arrows, at which Ulysses expresses his surprise by a repetition of the question,
Τι φης; τιν ειρηκας λογον;
—Neoptolemus replies,
"Would you have me tell you the same thing two or three times over?"
Δις τ'αυτα βέλει και τρις ἀναπολειν μ ἐπη;
v. 1238 [Oxford turn v. 1267].
In another scene... between Teucer and Menelaus, after a long altercation about the interment of Ajax, Menelaus says—
ὧν σοι φρασω τονδ᾽ ἐστιν ἐχι θαπτεον.
—to which Teucer replies—
Συ δ' ἀντακεσον τετον ὡς τεθαψεται.
Ajax, v. 1140 [Oxford turn v. 1159].
In plain English, but no plainer than the Greek—
"M. One thing I'll tell you—he shall not be buried. T. And I'll tell another thing—he shall be buried."
—Certainly this approaches very nearly to the language of a contest between two washer-women. 73
These may be reckoned among the passages, in which the spirit of Sophocles, according to the observation of a great critic,
σβεννυται άλογως πολλακις, και πίπτει άτυχεστατα
. 74 In the Antigone there is a scene of altercation between Creon, Ismene, and Antigone, in which, when Ismene, pleading for her sister, asks Creon whether he will put her to death, who was to become the wife of his son, his answer is—
ΑΡΩΣΙΜΟΙ γαρ χάτερων εισιν ΓΥΑΙ.
v. 569 [Oxford turn v. 576].
The prejudiced admirers of the antients are very angry at the least insinuation that they had any idea of our barbarous Tragi-Comedy. But after all, it cannot be dissembled, that, if they had not the name, they had the thing, or something very nearly approaching to it. If that be Tragi-Comedy, which is partly serious and partly comical, I do not know why we should scruple to say, that the Alcestis of Euripides is, to all intents and purposes, a Tragi-Comedy. I have not the least doubt, that it had upon an Athenian audience the proper effect of Tragi-Comedy; that is, that in some places it made them cry, and in others, laugh. And the best thing we have to hope, for the credit of Euripides , is, that he intended to produce this effect. For though he may be an unskilful Poet, who purposes to write Tragi-Comedy, he surely is a more unskilful Poet, who writes one without knowing it.
The learned reader will understand me to allude particularly to the scene, in which the domestic describes the behaviour of Hercules ; and to the speech of Hercules himself, which follows. 75 Nothing can well be of a more comic cast than the servant's complaint. He describes the hero as the most greedy 76 and ill- mannered guest he had ever attended, under his master's hospitable roof; calling about him, eating, drinking, and singing, in a room by himself, while the master and all the family were in the height of funereal lamentation. He was not contented with such refreshments as had been set before him;
ἐτι σωφρονως ἔδεξατο Τα προστυχοντα ξενια Αλλ ἐι τι μη φερομεν, ΩΤΡΥΝΕΝ φερεια
Then he drinks—
Ἕως ἐθερμην᾿ ἀυτον ἀμφιβασα φλοξ
—crowns himself with myrtle, and sings,
ΑΜΟΥΣ ΥΛΑΚΤΩΝ
—and all this, alone.
"Cette description,"
says Fontenelle ,
"est si burlesque, qu'on diroit d'un crocheteur qui est de confrairie ."
77 A censure somewhat justified by Euripides himself, who makes the servant take Hercules for a thief:—
πανέργον ΚΛΩΠΑ και ΛΗΙΣΤΗΝ τινα.
The speech of Hercules ,
φιλοσοφεντου ἐν μεθῃ
, as the scholiast observes, (v. 776,)
"philosophizing in his cups,"
is still more curious. It is, indeed, full of the
φλοξ όνε
, and completely justifies the attendant's description. Nothing can be more jolly. It is in the true spirit of a modern drinking song; recommending it to the servant to uncloud his brow, enjoy the present hour, think nothing of the morrow, and drown his cares in love and wine:
ΟΥΤΟΣ τι σεμνον και πεφροντικού βλέπεις; 78 Ου χρη σκυθρωπον, κ. τ. αλ. ΔΕΥΡ ΕΛΘ᾽, ὅπως ἀν και σοφωτέρου γενη. Τα θνητα πραγματ οἰδας ἦν ἐχει φυσιν; ΟΙΜΑΙ μεν ΟΥ· ΠΟΘΕΝ ΓΑΡ; –ἀλλ᾿ ἀκει με. Βροτοις άπασι κατθανειν ὀφειλεται, Κεκ ἐστι θνητων όστις ἐξεπισταται Την άυριον μελλεσαν ἐι βιωσεται. Ευφραινε σαυτον ΠΙΝΕ! –τον καθ ήμεραν Βιον λογίζε σον, τα δ' άλλα, της τυχης. Τιμα δε και την πλειστον ήδιστην θεων ΚΥΠΡΙΝ βροτοισιν κ. τ. λ.
v. 773-812 [Oxford turn v. 783-812].
If any man can read this, without supposing it to have set the audience in a roar, I certainly cannot demonstrate that he is mistaken. I can only say, that I think he must be a very grave man himself, and must forget that the Athenians were not a very grave people. The zeal of Pere Brumoy in defending this Tragedy, betrays him into a little indiscretion. He says,
"tout cela à fait penser à quelques critiques modernes que cette piece etoit une Tragicomedie; chimere inconnu aux anciens. Cette piece est du gout des autres Tragedies antiques."
79 Indeed they, who call this play a Tragi-Comedy, give it rather a favourable name; for, in the scenes alluded to, it is, in fact, of a lower species than our Tragi-Comedy: it is, rather, burlesque Tragedy; what Demetrius calls
τραγωδια παίζεσα
. 80 Much of the comic cast prevails in other scenes; though mixed with those genuine strokes of simple and universal nature, which abound in this Poet, and which I should be sorry to exchange for that monotonous and unaffecting level of Tragic dignity, which never falls, and never rises.
I will only mention one more instance of this Tragi-comic mixture, and that from Sophocles . The dialogue between Minerva and Ulysses , in the first scene of the Ajax, from v. 74 to 88 , is perfectly ludicrous. The cowardice of Ulysses is almost as comic as the cowardice of Falstaff . In spite of the presence of Minerva, and her previous assurance, that she would effectually guard him from all danger by rendering him invisible, when she calls Ajax out, Ulysses, in the utmost trepidation, exclaims—
Τι δρας, Αθανα; μηδαμως σφ' ἐξω καλει. 81
Minerva answers—
Ου σιγ άνεξη, μηδε δείλιαν ἀρεις; 82
But Ulysses cannot conquer his fears:—
ΜΗ, ΠΡΟΣ ΘΕΩΝ-ἀλλ᾽ ἐνδον ἀρκειτω μένων. 83
And in this tone the conversation continues; till, upon Minerva's repeating her promise that Ajax should not see him, he consents to stay; but in a line of most comical reluctance, and with an afide, that is in the true spirit of Sancho Pança :—
Μενοιμ᾿ ἀν ΗΘΕΛΟΝ Δ᾽ ΑΝ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΩΝ ΤΥΧΕΙΝ.
v. 88.
No unprejudiced person, I think, can read this scene without being convinced, not only, that it must have actually produced, but that it must have been intended to produce, the effect of Comedy. 84
It appears, indeed, to me, that we may plainly trace in the Greek Tragedy, with all its improvements, and all its beauties, pretty strong marks of its popular and Tragi-comic origin. For,
Τρα-
γῳδια
, we are told, was, originally, the only dramatic appellation 85 ; and when, afterwards, the ludicrous was separated from the serious, and distinguished by its appropriated name of Comedy, the separation seems to have been imperfectly made, and Tragedy, distinctively so called, seems still to have retained a tincture of its original merriment. Nor will this appear strange, if we consider the popular nature of the Greek spectacles. The people, it is probable, would still require, even in the midst of their Tragic emotion, a little dash of their old satyric fun, and Poets were obliged to comply, in some degree, with their taste. 86
When we speak of the Greek Tragedies as correct and perfect models, we seem merely to conform to the established language of prejudice, and content ourselves with echoing, without reflection or examination, what has been said before us. Lord Shaftsbury , for example, talks of Tragedy's being
"raised to its height by Sophocles and Euripides, and no room left for further excellence or emulation."
87 I should be sorry to be ranked in the class of those critics, who prefer that Poetry which has the fewest faults, to that which has the greatest beauties. 88 I mean only to combat that conventional and hearsay kind of praise, which has so often held out the Tragedies of the Greek Poets, as elaborate and perfect models, such as had received the last polish of art and meditation. The true praise of Æschylus, Sophocles, and Euripides, is, (in kind at least, though not in degree,) the praise of Shakspeare; that of strong, but irregular, unequal, and hasty genius. Every thing, which this genius and the feeling of the moment could produce... these writers possess in great abundance: what meditation, and
"the labour and delay of the file"
only can effect, they too often want. Of Shakspeare, however, compared with the Greek Poets, it may justly, I think, be pronounced, that he has much more, both of this want, and of that abundance.

34. mvp-aristotle-comment-34

NOTE 34.

4.18 P. 72. ORIGINALLY, THE TROCHAIC TETRAMETER WAS MADE USE OF, &c.
As the Trochaic measure was still occasionally admitted, even in the improved and serious Greek Tragedy, and, in particular, occurs very frequently in the Tragedies of Euripides, it is natural to suppose, that a still more frequent use of it would be one of the characteristics of the fatyric drama, which seems to have been only a sort of revival, in an improved and regular form, of the old Trochaic Tragedy with its chorus of dancing fatyrs. It seems therefore somewhat remarkable, though I have not seen it noticed, that in the only fatyric drama extant, the CYCLOPS, and that written by Euripides, who has made so much use of this measure in his Tragedies, not a single Trochaic tetrameter is to be found.

35. mvp-aristotle-comment-35

NOTE 35.

4.19 P. 73. THE IAMBIC IS, OF ALL METRES, THE MOST COLLOQUIAL, &c.
Compare Rhet. lib. iii. cap. i. and cap. viii. Ed. Duval. And Demet. Περι Ἑρμ. Sect. 43.

36. mvp-aristotle-comment-36

NOTE 36.

4.19 P. 73. ----SELDOM INTO HEXAMETER, AND ONLY WHEN WE DEPART FROM THE USUAL MELODY OF SPEECH.
It has been thought strange, that Aristotle should introduce here the mention of hexameters, when he has been speaking only of Trochaic and Iambic verse, and is accounting for the adoption of the latter, in preference, not to the hexameter, but to the Trochaic tetrameter: and it has, therefore, been doubted, whether we should not read
τετραμετρα
89 . But the established reading, I believe, is right. The Trochaic tetrameter, Aristotle has, both here, and in his Rhetoric, characterized as
σατυρικον - τροχερον όρχης ικωτερον
and even
κορδακικωτερον
90 . He did not, I apprehend, consider it as being, in any degree,
λεκτικóν
. It was therefore entirely out of the question, when a metre proper for the general dialogue of Tragedy was to be sought for: but the bexameter was not so; and it might, without absurdity, be asked by an objector, as Castelvetro and Piccolomini have observed, why that species of verse was not adopted; especially as the Tragic Poets were the successors of the Epic, or Heroic, and Homer, according to Plato, was "the first of Tragic Poets" 91 . As its character was grave and stately, it might seem, on that account, well adapted to Tragedy, where, indeed, we actually find it occasionally introduced. But Aristotle objects to it as less proper, because, though
σεμνον
, it was at the same time, least
λεκτικον
. He allows, however, that it was not so remote from the rhythm of common speech, but that it might be casually produced, like the Iambic, though it rarely happened. He even goes so far, as to allow, in his concluding chapter, that Tragedy "might adopt the Epic metre." 92 —All this seems to afford sufficient support to the common reading. The Heroic and Iambic feet are, in the same manner, considered together, Rhet. iii. 8.
By
λεκτικη άρμονια
, Aristotle means what Aristoxenus calls
ΜΕΛΟΣ λογωδες
93 . We must not suppose him to use the word
ἁρμονια
here, in that lax and general sense, in which we commonly apply it to the rhythm of speech, when we talk of the harmony of a verse or a period. He speaks with his usual accuracy. Speech, as well as Music, has its melody and its rhythm; and these, in speech animated by passion, are so modified, as to approach, more or less perceptibly, to musical melody and rhythm. 94 And what Aristotle here asserts, I think, is, that the Greeks seldom, or never, departed so far from the usual rhythm of speech, as to run into hexameter verse, except when they were led, by the same cause, to depart equally from its usual melody or tones.

37. mvp-aristotle-comment-37

NOTE 37.

4.20 P. 73. THE EPISODES WERE MULTIPLIED.
The mistakes, into which some commentators have been led by annexing to the term
Επεισοδιον
, as applied by Aristotle to Tragedy, the modern and Epic idea of a digression, "hors-d'œuvre, intermede, morceau d'attache", have been well pointed out by Le Bossu, Tr. du Poeme Ep. liv. ii. ch. iv. v. vi. . But he appears to me to have gone too far, and to have fallen into the opposite error, by extending the word even to the most essential parts of the general action, to which he will not allow the
ἐπεισοδια
to be, in any sense, added, united, &c.-but insists that they constitute that action, "comme les membres font la matiere des corps." With this idea, he had, indeed, some reason to call the word
ἐπασοδιον
, "terme trompeur;" for, in this application of it, all sight of its etymological sense is lost. By all that I can gather from an attentive comparison of all the passages in which Aristotle uses the word, there appears to me no reason to suppose, that he any where meant to apply it indiscriminately to all the incidents of a fable; and it is for this reason that I have no where ventured to render it by the word incident, which would have been too general. Le Bossu's definition is," Les Episodes sont les parties necessaires de l'action etendues avec des circonstances vraisemblables." -The death of Cato, for example, in the Tragedy of Addison, answers to this definition. But would Aristotle have called that an Episode? I can scarce think it. The most I can conceive is, that he might have applied the term
ἐπεισοδια
to the particular circumstances and detail of the action, which were the additions of the Poet's fancy. Le Bossu mentions, as an instance, the escape of Orestes by means of the ablution, in the Iphig. in Taur. of Euripides; which, he says, Aristotle calls an Episode. But, it is not the escape of Orestes, (
ἡ σωτηρια
) that Aristotle so denominates; this was an essential circumstance, and is expressly included by him in that general sketch of the plot, into which the
ἐπεισοδια
were afterwards to be worked: and one of these Episodes was the detail of the manner in which the escape was effected,
δια της καθάρσεως
. - See NOTE 143 .
The word
ἐπεισοδιον
is, I think, used by Aristotle only in two senses: 1. The technical sense, in which it is clearly defined to mean, all that part, or, rather, those parts, of a Tragedy, that are included between entire choral odes. 95 2. It is evidently applied, in other passages, to the particular parts, subordinate actions, circumstances, or incidents, of the fable; but only, I think, to such, as were not essential parts of the Poet's plan or story, though they might be, and indeed ought to be, closely connected with it:-such, as, however important in the action, by contributing to promote the catastrophe, were yet no way necessitated by history, or popular tradition, or, in subjects of pure invention, by the Poet's general and determined plan, but depended on the invention or the choice of the Poet, who might, without any alteration in the
καθόλε λογώ
, as Aristotle calls it, of his drama, have conducted the action to its catastrophe by different means.
The word
ἐπεισοδιον
, then, appears to me never to be used by Aristotle but in its proper and derivative sense, of something more or less adventitious or accessory-something inserted, superadded, introduced, at pleasure, by the Poet. But the Epic Poem, from its extent of plan, and the variety requisite to its purpose, admits, and requires, subordinate actions of greater length and slighter relation to the principal action of the fable, than is consistent with the shorter compass, closer unity, and different end, of Tragedy. As the Episodes of Epic Poetry, therefore, had more distinctness, entireness, and projection from the subject, if I may so express myself, than those of Tragedy, this, as it was the most obvious, became in time almost the only, application of the term; till, at length, from the frequent abuse of this Epic privilege of variety, and the
μεταβαλλαν τον ἀκεοντα
, scarce any other idea was annexed to the word Episode, than that of digression, bors-d'œuvre, something foreign to the subject, or connected with it only by the slightest thread. Hence, too, in modern language, the word, I think, is applied only to entire actions of this additional, or digressive kind; not to the minuter circumstances or incidents which form the detail of an action. Thus, we call the whole story of Dido, in the Aneid, an Episode; but we should not give that name to any of the incidents by which the death of Turnus (an action essential to the fable,) is circumstantiated, though equally introduced and supplied by the Poet, and therefore equally, in Aristotle's sense,
ἐπεισοδια
. And so much, as to his use of this term, in general. Whether these remarks are well or ill founded, will best appear, when we come to apply them to the particular passages in which the word occurs. In that now before us, it is used, I think, in the second of the two senses I mentioned; and its best comment seems to be another passage, cap. xxiv. where the critic observes the advantage which the Epic Poem has in the variety of its Episodes, and assigns the want of that variety, as one common cause of ill success in Tragic writing: –
το γαρ ΟΜΟΙΟΝ ταχυ πληρεν ἐκπιπτειν ποια τας τραγωδίας
.

38. mvp-aristotle-comment-38

NOTE 38.

5.1 P. 73. THE RIDICULOUS-A SPECIES OF TURPITUDE OR DEFORMITY; SINCE IT MAY BE DEFINED, &C.
It has been asserted by some writers of eminence, that Aristotle here speaks, not of what is laughable or ludicrous, in general, but only of the ridiculous, in that particular sense of the word, in which it is distinguished from the merely risible, and implies laughter mixed with disapprobation or contempt. This, however, is certainly not what Aristotle has said; for the word
γελοιον
, which he uses, is as general as possible, and answers exactly to our word laughable. And it is in this general sense, justified, I think, by common usage, that I have used the word ridiculous in my version. For though in a philosophical speculation the distinction above-mentioned may be necessary for clearness, and is undoubtedly well founded, yet, in common language, the word ridiculous is never used with this nice appropriation, but applied, like its Latin original, to whatever excites laughter.
But it is objected, that, if Aristotle means the laughable in general, his account of the matter is false; because "men laugh at that, in which there is neither fault nor turpitude of any kind." 96 I answer, that this is true in English, but not true in Greek. Our word, turpitude, is confined, I think, to a moral sense, and I suppose is here so used by Dr. Beattie; and it is certainly true, that we laugh at many things that have in them no turpitude of that kind-nothing morally wrong. But the Greek word,
ΑΙΣΧΡΟΝ
, was a word of wide extent, and seems manifestly used here by Aristotle in its utmost latitude; comprehending every thing that is, in any degree, ugly or deformed, from atrocious villainy, the highest moral ugliness, to a ridiculous cast of features in an ugly face. It is the opposite to
ΚΑΛΟΝ
, which was used in a correspondent latitude of application. - The objections, which have been made to this passage, have chiefly, I think, been owing to this, that the objectors have not been sufficiently aware of the extensive signification in which the Greeks used the words,
καλον, αισχρον, –ἀρετη, κακια σπεδαιον, φαυλον-άμαρτημα
, &c. We trans- late the words of antient authors by words to which we annex different ideas, and then raise objections and difficulties from our own mistakes. The consequence of taking
αισχρον
here in the restrained sense of moral turpitude, has been, that those writers, who have so taken it, have been obliged to deny, that
γελοιον
means laughable, because the laughable in general could not truly be defined, "a species of moral turpitude."
It plainly was not Aristotle's design here to enter into an accurate inquiry about the nature of laughter, and the distinction of risible and ridiculous objects. This he had perhaps done, in that part of this mutilated treatise, which related to Comedy, and to which he himself refers in his Rhetoric. 97 His purpose, here, seems to have been, merely to support and explain his account of Comedy; i. e. that it was
μιμησις φαυλοτερων
, "an imitation of bad characters;" that is, as he immediately limits the sense of the general term
φαυλον
, of ridiculous, or laughable, characters. Such, he continues, are properly denominated
φαυλοι, κακοι
, bad, &c. because the laughable (
γελοιον
) is one species of the
αισχρον
, taken in its most general sense. "But to what species, or class," it was obvious to ask, "does it belong?"-To that class, it is answered, of things
αισχρα
, which are neither destructive nor painful: for these, exciting terror or pity, are the property of Tragedy. And he asserts, I think, plainly, that the laughable in general,
το γελοιον
, i. e. every thing that excites laughter, is
ἁμαρτημα ΤΙ και αισχα ἀνωδυνον και φθαρτικον
-is, in some respect or other, faulty, wrong, deformed, but neither painful nor pernicious. What follows, about a ridiculous face, is, I think, clearly, not an illustration merely, as Dr. Campbell understands it to be, but an instance. 98 This seems evident from Aristotle's using the very word
αισχρον
; (
προσωπον αισχρον
) which he would hardly have done, had he just before used the words
αισχρον
and
αισχ
, as Dr. Campbell and Dr. Beattie contend that he bas used them, in a moral sense only.
But it is objected "We can never suppose that Aristotle would have called distorted features 'a certain fault or slip.'" To call them a slip, would indeed found strangely; because that expression conveys the idea of something morally wrong. But when we say, that a very long nose, or a wide mouth, is a fault in a face, we use a very common expression; the word fault having, I think, the same latitude of application as the Greek word
ἀμαρτημα
.
It must be observed, however, that all Aristotle says is, that these two characters, deformity of some sort, and the absence of pain, or hurt, are to be found in every object of laughter: he neither says, nor implies, the converse that every thing so qualified is laughable. With respect to one of these characters the absence of pain or harm-there can be no doubt. It is only saying that we cannot laugh at that which shocks us. As to the other general character, deformity, ugliness, something wrong, &c. (
ἁμαρτημα ΤΙ και αισχα
) it seems to me, that these expressions, taken in that large sense, in which Aristotle plainly means to use them, amount to much the same as those used by modern philosophers to characterize the risible in general; such as, "incongruity, incongruous association, striking unsuitableness," "disproportion, inconsistence and dissonance of circumstances in the same object" 99 . With respect to works both of nature, and of art," says the ingenious and philosophical author of the Elements of Criticism, "none of them are risible but what are out of rule, some remarkable defect or excess; a very long visage, for example, or a very short one. Hence nothing just, proper, decent, beautiful, proportioned, or grand, is risible." 100 This appears to me to be exactly the meaning, and to approach very near to the language, of Aristotle. For, of whatever may be thus characterized it surely may be said, that it has some species of fault, deformity, or distortion: in Aristotle's words,
ἁμαρτημα Τι και -αισχρον ΤΙ και ΔΙΕΣΤΡΑΜΜΕΝΟΝ
.
Aristotle's account, then, of the
γελοíον
, appears to be right, as far as it goes. It might, indeed, be objected to, as too general, had he given it as the result of an exact and particular analysis of the subject. But this, as I have already observed, was not his purpose in this place.
It is farther objected by Dr. Campbell, that to speak of laughter in general, "would have been foreign to Aristotle's purpose:" because, "laughter is not his theme, but Comedy; and laughter only so far as Comedy is concerned with it. Now the concern of Comedy reaches no farther than that kind of ridicule which relates to manners." 101 —Undoubtedly it was this kind of ridicule that Aristotle had principally in view. But I apprehend, that the Comedy here in question was concerned with the ridiculous or laughable in general. For Aristotle's notion of Comedy, as an excellent writer has observed, "was taken from the state and practice of the Athenian stage that is, from the old or middle Comedy, which answers to his description. The great revolution which the introduction of the new Comedy made in the drama, did not happen till afterwards." 102 Now the old and middle Comedy, as I have before observed, were no other than what we should call Farce. To raise a laugh was so eminently their object, that the ridiculous (
το γελοιον
) is frequently used by Plato, as synonymous to Comedy, and substituted for it; as pity is also for Tragedy. 103 Nor was it even very "foreign to Aristotle's purpose" to instance in a ridiculous face; for that this also was an established source of fun in the Greek theatre, is well known from the curious account of the comic masks in Jul. Pollux; who says, particularly of those of the old Comedy, that they were ridiculous caricaturas of the persons represented:—
ἐπι το γελοιοτερον ἐσχηματισο
. 104 The Athenians were certainly not more delicate than Cicero, who thought, we know, that bodily deformities were "satis bella materies ad jocandum." 105 He, also, agrees perfectly with Aristotle, or rather follows him, in his account of the ridiculous: "Locus autem et regio quasi ridiculi TURPITUDINE ET DEFORMITATE QUADAM continetur."

39. mvp-aristotle-comment-39

NOTE 39.

5.4 P. 73. ITS POETS HAVE BEEN RECORDED.
The original is,
δι ΛΕΓΟΜΕΝΟΙ αυτης ποιηται μνημονευονται
: the only fair translation of which, I think, is,
"they who are called its Poets."
But as it seems not easy to find any reasonable meaning for this, I have not translated the word at all. The text is probably corrupt. Castelvetro conjectured, very ingeniously,
ΟΛΙΓΟΙ ΜΕΝ ΟΙ ΑΥΤΗΣ ποιηται
.—But this Greek,
όλιγοι οι ποιηται
, is, I fear, what the critics call,
πονηρκ κομματα
. I will venture to mention another conjecture that has occurred to me. The learned reader will dispose of it as he pleases. It seems not improbable that Aristotle wrote,
Ηδη δε σχηματα τινα αυτης ἐχεσης ΟΙΑ ΛΕΓΟΜΕΝ, ΟΙ αυτης, &c.
i. e.
"When it had acquired a certain form, such as we say,"
alluding to what he had said of Homer's suggesting, by his Margites, the true form, or idea, of Comedy, in which the ridiculous was substituted for the mere invective of the old Iambic, or Satyric form.
Τα της κωμωδίας ΣΧΗΜΑΤΑ πρωτο ὑπεδειξεν, ἐ ψογον, άλλα ΤΟ ΓΕΛΟΙΟΝ δραματοποιησας,
[cap. iv.]
See, also, what he says immediately after, of the forms (
σχηματα
) of Tragedy and Comedy being
ἐντιμοτερα
, in higher credit and esteem, than those of the old satirical and encomiastic poems which preceded them: for this seems to accord with what he here says, that Comedy was neglected till it attained something of this its proper form, and aimed at its proper object, the ridiculous. The reader will see the connection :
Ἡ δε κωμῳδια, δια το ΜΗ ΣΠΟΥΔΑΖΕΣΘΑΙ ἐξ ἀρχης, ἐλαθεν. ——ΗΔΗ ΔΕ ΣΧΗΜΑΤΑ τίνα αυτης ἐχεσης ὉΙΑ ΛΕΓΟΜΕΝ, ΟΙ αυτης ποιηται μνημονευονται
.—This differs from the present reading only by the insertion of a single letter,
Δ
, which might easily have been omitted, from its resemblance to the
Α
that follows.

40. mvp-aristotle-comment-40

NOTE 40.

5.4 P. 73. PROLOGUES.
We are not, I think, to look for a sense of the word
Προλογο
, as here applied to Comedy, different from that, in which it is applied, ch. xii.
[Transl. Part II. Sect. 10.]
to Tragedy. In both, it was that introductory part of the drama, the business of which was, to give the spectator, either directly, in its very outlet, or, more obliquely, in the course of it, so much information relative to the subject of the piece, as would enable him to follow the action without confusion. 106 This we learn clearly from the following passage in that part of Aristotle's Rhetoric , where he explains and illustrates the oratorical exordium, by a comparison of it with that of the Epic Poem, and with the prologue of a drama. After giving, as examples, the openings of the Iliad and Odyssey, he goes on:—
και οι Τραγικοι δηλεσι περι το δραμα, καν μη ευθυς, ώσπερ Ευριπίδης, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ΤΩΙ ΠΡΟΛΟΓΩ γε ΠΟΥ δηλοι, ώσπερ και Σοφοκλης ---ΚΑΙ Ἡ ΚΩΜΩΔΙΑ ΩΣΑΥΤΩΣ
[Rhet. iii. 14.]
. 107 —This clearly excludes the separate prologue, such as that of the Roman Comedy; and it is, also, irreconcilable with Dacier's idea, that by the prologue, in the passage we are considering, Aristotle meant what was afterwards called the Parabasis ; for this was merely an address from the Poet to the audience, through the mouth of the Chorus, occurring indifferently in any part of the play, and even, sometimes, at the end of it. 108 It seems to differ from the prologue of the Roman Comedy, and of the modern drama, only in its being delivered by the Chorus, and in the body of the piece.
Tragedy, according to the usual account of it, seems to have consisted, at first, only of two parts, the
Χορικον
, and
Επεισοδίον
, and to have begun and ended with those choral songs, which were then esteemed the essential part of Tragedy. But, afterwards, these scanty fables,
μικροι μυθοι
, as Aristotle calls them, were drawn out to their proper size , not only by introducing a greater variety of episodic incidents , but by prefixing to the first choral song, (or to the first speech of the entire chorus, according to Aristotle's account of the Parode, cap. xii.) the introductory part called
Προλογού
, and adding, after the last, the concluding part called
Έξοδος
. The case was probably the same with Comedy. The Phallic songs, from which it received its birth, were, I suppose, regarded originally as the essential part of the Comic drama, in the same manner as the Bacchic hymns were of the Tragic. Aristotle plainly speaks of Comedy, as having gradually received similar additions and improvements to those of Tragedy ; and, among these, that of the
Προλογά
. That such an introductory part, or act, which should be, as Aristotle expresses it,
δειγμα λογε
, and
ὁδοποιησις τῳ ἐπιοντι
, was indeed still more necessary to Comedy than to Tragedy, is obvious from the very nature of the former drama.
The nature and office of the Greek prologue, and its two different manners, are, I observe, very exactly expressed by Terence in the conclusion of his separate prologue to the Adelphi ; as they are also very well exemplified in the two first scenes. Dehinc, ne expectetis argumenta fabulæ. Senes qui primi venient, hi, partem aperient, In agendo partem oftendent. That is, as I understand it, part of the plot they will open to you in the way of direct narration, like the prologues of Euripides, (as, in the soliloquy of Mitio,) and part they will discover in a more oblique and dramatic way, in the scene of action and dialogue that follows:
"In agendo partem oftendent."
I ventured, in a former note, to say, that the Greek Tragedy appeared to me to have retained, with all its improvements, some traces of its origin. Something of this may be perceived, I think, in the very opening of many of the Greek dramas: but especially in those of Euripides , whose inartificial prologues of explanatory narration, addressed directly to the spectators, remind us of the state of Tragedy previous to the introduction of the dialogue ; when it consisted only of a story told between the acts, (if I may so speak,) of the Dithyrambic Chorus, which was then the main body and substance of the entertainment. When I read the opening of the Hecuba:
ΗΚΩ, νεκρων κευθμωνα και σκοτε πύλας Διπων, ἐν᾿ Αδης χωρις ᾠκισται θεων, ΠΟΛΥΔΩΡΟΣ, Εκαβης παις γεγως της Κίσσέως Πριαμέτε πατρα κ. τ. αλ.
Hec. v. 1.
109 —that of the Perfe of Æschylus :—
ΤΑΔΕ μεν Περσων των διχομενων Ελλαδ᾽ ἐις άναν πιστα καλείται.
Pers. v. 1.
—or, even the—
ΑΥΤΟΣ ὧδ᾽ ἐληλυθα Ο ΠΑΣΙ ΚΛΕΙΝΟΣ ΟΙΔΙΠΟΥΣ ΚΑΛΟΥΜΕΝΟΣ
Oed. Tyr. v. 7.
—of Sophocles , I cannot help thinking of the single actor of Thespis , announcing his own name and family, and telling the simple tale of his achievements or misfortunes.
This sort of direct explanation was afterwards, with much more propriety, taken from the persons of the drama, and consigned to the actors in a detached prologue, such as those of Plautus and Terence : a practice, which, if we did not know the attachment of Ben Jonson to every thing antient, we might suspect he meant to ridicule, by the pleasant use he has made of it in the prologue to his puppet-shew of Hero and Leander, in the Bartholomew Fair. "Gentles, that no longer your expectations may wander, Behold our chief actor, amorous Leander, With a great deal of cloth lapp'd about him like a scarf, For he yet serves his father, a dyer at Puddle-wharf," &c.
The next, and the last step, in the history of Prologues, was again to leave the argument, as it had been left by Sophocles, to the oblique information and gradual development of the action itself, and to make the separate prologue subservient to other purposes, unconnected with the subject of the drama. The worst of these purposes, and the greatest possible abuse of the term, is to be found in what is called the Prologue of the French Opera ; which is wholly composed of two ingredients, almost equally disgusting to a just poetical, or moral taste—allegory and adulation.

41. mvp-aristotle-comment-41

NOTE 41.

5.5 P. 73. EPICHARMUS AND PHORMIS FIRST INVENTED COMIC FABLES.
Dacier , here, raises unnecessary difficulties. His positive assertion, that, in the old and middle Comedy,
"Il n'y avoit rien de feint,"
is surprising. The slightest inspection of Aristophanes will confute it. Was it, then, a fact, that Socrates used to be suspended in a basket for the benefit of aerial meditation? and that Æschylus and Euripides weighed their verses in a pair of scales, to decide, by that means, a contest or superiority, after they were dead? &c.. 110
Μυθες ποιειν
, is clearly to invent plots or subjects; and whatever is invented, or feigned, is, in Aristotle's language,
καθολε
, or general, as opposed to a strictly historical plot, which is
καθ ἐκαστον
, particular. 111 The expression, therefore, which Aristotle presently after uses, in speaking of Crates ,
ἀφεμενα της ιαμβικης ίδεας, καθολα ποιειν λογες μυθες
, I understand to be no more than the development of the shorter expression which preceded,
μυθες ποιειν
. He does not say, that Crates was the first Poet, but only the first Athenian Poet, who invented such comic subjects. The distinction seems clearly marked:
το μεν ἐν ἐξ ἀρχης ἐκ ΣΙΚΕΛΙΑΣ ἦλθε : ΤΩΝ ΔΕ ΑΘΗΝΗΣΙ, Κρατης πρωτο κ. τ. αλλ.
.

42. mvp-aristotle-comment-42

NOTE 42.

5.7 P. 74. EPIC POETRY AGREES SO FAR WITH TRAGIC, &C.
Of the corruption of this passage I have no doubt. It has been proposed to eject the words,
μετα λογε
. My suspicion rather falls upon the word
μετρε
; which, as it adds nothing but embarrassment to the sense, (
λογο
, speech, or words, being a general term, and including metre, as in ch. i. ) I have omitted. It appears to me, likewise, that the only meaning, which can reasonably be given to the expression,
μεχρι ΜΟΝΟΥ μετρα
, is—as far as metre alone; i. e.
"without considering the other means of imitation, melody and rhythm."
And, accordingly, some commentators, by
μετρον ῾ΑΠΛΟΥΝ
, understand verse alone, without music. But had this been Aristotle's meaning, he would probably have used the appropriated and clear word,
$\psi u\lambda ov$
. The proper and obvious sense of
μετρον άπλεν
, is, a simple, or single, kind of metre. 112 This sense seems also supported by what he says of the metrical difference of the Epic and Tragic Poems, cap. xxiv. where melody and rhythm are not taken into the comparison, but the different kinds of metre only, and their being one, or many:—
ἐι γαρ τις ἐν ἀλλῳ τινι μετρῳ διηγηματικην μιμησιν ποιοιτο, ἐν ΠΟΛΛΟΙΣ, ἀπρεπες ἂν φαινοιτο.
And farther, that Aristotle did not mean to express by
μετρον άπλεν
, the exclusion of melody and rhythm, appears the more probable, because he sufficiently expresses this presently afterwards, when he says, that some of the parts of Tragedy were peculiar to it. Now these parts are no other than the decoration, (
oψις
), and the Melopæia, which included melody and rhythm.
On the whole, it seems not improbable, that the passage originally stood in some such way as this:
Ἡ μεν ἐν Εποποϊία τη Τραγω δια μέχρι μονα ΤΟΥ μετα λογε μιμησιΝ ἐἶναι σπεδαιων ἠκολεθησεν.

43. mvp-aristotle-comment-43

NOTE 43.

5.9 P. 74. THIS, AT FIRST, WAS EQUALLY THE CASE WITH TRAGEDY ITSELF.
It seems to have been taken for granted, without any foundation, by Dacier , and other commentators, that the modern rule, (for an antient rule it certainly is not,) of what is called the unity of time, was strictly adhered to in every period of the Greek drama: and this has led them, in this passage, to confound the length of the action, or fable, with that of the representation ; for these, where a strict unity of time is observed, are indeed the same. But Aristotle here says plainly, that in the earliest state of Tragedy, no rule at all, with respect to the time of the action, was observed ; that it was not only allowed to exceed
"a single revolution of the sun,"
but was
"indefinite (
ἀορις
)"
like that of the Epic Poem. This evidently cannot be applied, without absurdity, to the time of representation. Yet so it is applied by Dacier in his note on this passage, p. 70.
But it appears farther, I think, from what is said, and plainly said, in this chapter, that, after all we have heard so often about this famous unity of time, the rule receives not the least support from Aristotle's authority. Every one, who knows how much stress has been laid by modern critics on the three dramatic unities, and happens not to be well acquainted with Aristotle's treatise on Poetry, would, I suppose, naturally take it for granted, that they are all explicitly laid down, and enforced by him, as essential and indispensable laws, in that famous code of dramatic criticism. But the fact is, that, of these three rules, the only one that can be called important—that of the unity of action—is, indeed, clearly laid down and explained, and, with great reason, considered by him as indispensable.
Of the two other unities, that of place is not once mentioned, or even hinted, in the whole book ; and all that is said, respecting the time of the action, is said in this chapter, and in these words:
"Tragedy endeavours, as far as possible, to confine its action within the limits of a single revolution of the sun, or nearly so."
113 Almost all the commentators seem agreed in understanding the expression,
μια περιοδου ήλιε
, to mean only an artificial day. But I own I could never yet perceive any good reason, why we should not permit Aristotle to mean what he seems, in plain terms, to say. If he meant only twelve hours, why did he prefer an expression so ambiguous, to say the least of it, as
μιαν περιοδον ήλιε
, to the clear and obvious expression of
μιαν ΗΜΕΡΑΝ
? —But, to wave this question, the utmost, which the most strenuous advocates for the unity of time can make of this passage, is this—that the Poet should endeavour, as far as possible, to confine the supposed time of the action to that of a single day, or nearly so. Now it seems allowed, that none of the Greek Tragedies extant could have taken up, in the representation, more than three or four hours. What Aristotle, therefore, here says, is so far from being a rule for the unity of time, that, on the contrary, it is saying as plainly as possible, that, in his view, it was no duty incumbent on the dramatic Poet even to aim at the observance of such a rule: for, had he thought otherwise, his mode of expression would, surely, have been very different. He would have proposed the strict unity of time—the exact coincidence of the actual time of representation with the supposed time of the action—as the point of perfection, at which the Poet was to aim: he would have said,
"Tragedy endeavours, as far as possible, to confine its action within the time of representation, or nearly so."
It is certain, indeed, that the nature of the drama, strictly and rigorously considered, would require, I will not say, to the perfection, but to the closeness, of its imitation, the exact coincidence here mentioned ; and it is on this foundation only, that any rule at all relative to time could be necessary, and that the dramatic Poet could, with any reason, be denied the privilege of the Epic. All I contend for is, that Aristotle has no where required such a coincidence ; that he has not even mentioned it; much less has he, either here, or in any other part of his work, enjoined it as a rule. His rule is, as generally understood,
"confine your action, as nearly as you can, to a single day;"
—or, as I think, in conformity to his plain words, it should be understood—
"to a single revolution of the sun, or twenty-four hours."
114
It may, perhaps, be objected, that Aristotle has not delivered this in the form of a rule ; that he only refers to fact, and to the usual practice of the dramatic Poets of his time.
"Tragedy endeavours,"
&c. But, surely, to mention the general practice of Poets with seeming approbation, or, at least, without a word to the contrary, is, in fact, to erect that practice, (as he has done on many other occasions throughout his treatise,) into a rule. It is sufficient for my purpose, that, at least, he has given no other rule. Moreover, what he here says of the practice of the Greek dramatists, seems somewhat adverse to the language of those modern critics, who so often appeal, if I mistake not, to that very practice, for the support of their rigorous unity of time. For, if his expression does not prove, that he thought the rule of a single revolution of the sun the only rule which the Poets ought to observe, it surely proves, because it actually says, that he thought it the only rule, which, in general, they did observe.
But what says Dacier ?
"Une Tragedie, pour être parfaite, ne doit occuper ni plus, ni moins de tems, pour l'action, que pour la representation; car elle est alors dans toute la vraisemblance. Les Tragiques Grecs L'ONT TOUJOURS PRATIQUE."
What he adds, it seems not very easy to comprehend:
"Et ils s'en font fait une loi si indispensable, que pour ne la pas violer, ils ont quelquefois violentè leurs incidens, d'une maniere que je ne conseillerois pas de suivre:"
i. e. in plain English, (for I can make nothing else of it,)
"they have so scrupulously adhered to the rule, that, sometimes, for the sake of observing it, they have been obliged to break it."
p. 118.
I believe, every reader, who, in perusing the Greek Tragedians, has taken the pains to examine this matter, must be sensible, that what Dacier so confidently asserts, of their constant adherence to this rule, is palpably false. I shall only mention one remarkable instance of the utter neglect of it, and that in SOPHOCLES ; who, in this, as in other respects, is usually regarded, I think, as the most correct and regular of the three Greek Poets whose Tragedies are in our hands. In his Trachiniae, v. 632, Lichas sets out to carry the poisoned garment to Hercules, whom he finds upon the Cenaean promontory, which is said to be about sixty Italian miles from the scene of the action. At v. 734, Hyllus, who was present when his father received the garment, arrives with the terrible relation of its effects. Thus, during the performance of about a hundred lines, a journey of about one hundred and twenty Italian miles is supposed to have been taken. For this, and other instances of the same kind, I must content myself with referring the reader to the sensible and well written Estratto della Poetica d'Aristotile , published among the posthumous works of Metastasio , and which did not fall into my hands till all my notes were written. It contains many ingenious and sagacious observations. The subject of the dramatic unities, in particular, is discussed at large, and, I think, in a very masterly and satisfactory way. And, with respect to the strict unities of time and place, he seems perfectly to have succeeded in shewing, that no such rules were imposed on the Greek Poets by the critics, or by themselves;—nor are imposed on any Poet, either by the nature, or the end, of the dramatic imitation itself. 115 It would be inexcusable to quit this subject without reminding the reader, that the unities of time and place, were long ago powerfully, and, in my opinion, unanswerably combated, as far as their principles are concerned, by Dr. Johnson, in his preface to Shakspeare, p. 20, &c.

44. mvp-aristotle-comment-44

NOTE 44. P. 75.

6.2 IN THE WAY, NOT OF NARRATION, BUT OF ACTION.
It is surprising, that so strange a phrase as
ειδων --- δρωντων
—
formis---agentibus
—should have passed as genuine with any Greek scholar. It is still more so, that the obvious opposition of
δρωντων
to
ἀπαγγελια
, and the no less obvious absurdity of opposing narration to pity and terror, (
δι' ἀπαγγελιας, ΑΛΛΑ δ᾽ ἐλεου και φοβου
) should have escaped the notice of any commentator.—I should write the passage thus; still considering it as imperfect:—
χωρις ἐκαστου των ειδων ἐν τοις μοριοις * * * [forte ΔΙΑ] δρωντων και ου δι' ἀπαγγελιας
116
* * * * ἀλλα δι' ἐλεου και φοβου, κ. τ. αλ.
Thus the word
δρωντων
will retain its proper sense, and the active imitation of the drama, which Aristotle every where makes its characteristic distinction, as opposed to the Epic, will be, as we might expect to find it, in a formal and exact definition of Tragedy, distinctly marked.
I will just observe, farther, that this mode of expression—
δρωντων ΚΑΙ ΟΥ δι' ἀπ.
is familiar to Aristotle. Here however it may be justified by the necessity of marking clearly the distinction between Dramatic and Epic Poetry. In other instances, as,
ἑτερως και μη τον αυτον τροπον.
cap. i.
ὡς τον αυτον και μη μεταβαλλοντα.
cap. iii.
ειδως και μη ἀγνοων.
Eth. Nic. v. 8. it seems hardly to admit of the same excuse. In the Poets we are less surprised to find it frequent. Victorius has pointed out Homer, Il. Z. 333.
ἐπει με κατ᾿ ἀισαν ἐνεικεσας, ἐδ᾽ ὑπερ αισαν.
—and Sophocles: Oed. Tyr. 58.
γνωτα, κ'ουκ ἀγνωτα μοι Προσηλθεθ' ίμειροντες.
If any man, in reading the ancients, can persuade himself to take such things for beauties, there is certainly no harm in it. The fact I take to be, that composition, even that of Poetry, was not yet so far improved and refined, as perfectly to exclude the inaccuracies and redundancies of popular and familiar speech.

45. mvp-aristotle-comment-45

NOTE 45. P. 75.

6.2 EFFECTING, THROUGH PITY AND TERROR, THE CORRECTION AND REFINEMENT OF SUCH PASSIONS.
Δι' ἐλεου και φοβου περαινουσα την των τοιουτων παθηματων καθαρσιν.
A history of the controversies which this obscure passage has excited among critics and commentators, and an exact statement and examination of the various explanations which have been given of it, would almost fill a volume. Among these, however, the opinions, that are worth regarding, or that can, with any show of probability, be deduced from Aristotle's expression, are, I think, reducible to two.
One is, that this purgation, or moderation, of the passions, is merely the effect of having them frequently excited, and of being familiarized with the occasions of them, in Tragic fiction; just as the passions of pity and terror are actually purged, or reduced to moderation, in a surgeon, a physician, or a soldier, by their being accustomed to those terrible or piteous objects that occasion them.
The other interpretation attributes the effect to the moral lesson and example of the drama: Tragedy purges the passions by the striking pictures it sets before us of the dreadful calamities occasioned by the unrestrained indulgence of them; by giving useful warnings, and preparing us to bear the ills of life with patience.
One, or the other, or both, of these meanings, have, I think, been attributed to Aristotle by the best commentators and critics. For the first, the reader may see Mr. Harris's Disc. on Music, Painting, &c. ch. v. note .— Heinf. De Trag. Const. cap. ii. p. 22, 23 . and Castelvetro, p. 117, 118 . For the second, Madius;— D'Alembert in his letter to Rousseau, Melanges, tom. ii. p. 414 .— Dryden, Obs. on the Æneid — Abbè Du Bos, Refl. sur la Poesie, tom. i. sect. 44, &c . For an explanation compounded of the two, Robortelli, Piccolomini, and Dacier, who, by the way, after declaring that all the explanations of former commentators
"servaient only to obscure the passage,"
and that the true sense was not to be found in any of them, proceeds to give us, as that true sense, and as his own discovery, exactly what had been said before him.
Let us first see what Aristotle says. He says, that Tragedy, by the means of pity and terror, effects the purgation (
καθαρσιν
) of such passions: i. e. of pity and terror and other passions of the same kind: for pity and terror seem clearly meant, by the expression, to be included in the effect. 117 And this, in my opinion, is sufficient to overturn the second of the explanations just mentioned; for, according to that, terror and pity are not both the means and the object of the purgation, as Aristotle, I think, asserts them to be, but they are the means only of purging other passions—those passions, whatever they may be, which are supposed to produce the calamitous events exhibited to our view. Indeed, according to this idea, the object is rather the vice that arises from passion, than the passion itself which is the cause of it. But, besides this objection, I do not see any reason to think, that the moral lesson of the drama, and the effects it might have in moderating our passions through the reflections it excites in us, were at all in Aristotle's thoughts 118 .
The first of the two explanations seems far more admissible. I believe it made a part of his idea, but I doubt whether it was the whole of it. What was precisely his meaning, and the whole of his meaning, will never, I fear, be the subject of a perfect, Stoical
καταληψις
to any man. There is, however, one passage in Aristotle's works, which throws some little light upon this; enough, at least, to keep us from false interpretations, if not to lead us to the true. It is in the seventh chapter of his eighth book De Republica . The Abbé Batteux is the only commentator I know of, who has paid a proper attention to this passage; but as I do not perfectly agree with him, either as to the translation he has given, or the use he makes of it, I shall produce so much of the original as appears to be of any importance to our present purpose, and subjoin a translation, with some necessary remarks.
The object of Aristotle, in the chapter referred to, is, to examine what kinds of Music (i. e. of melody and rhythm,) are proper to be used in the education of youth. He mentions and approves a division, made by some philosophical writers of that time, of the different kinds of melodies, into Moral, Active, and Enthusiastic:
τα μεν ΗΘΙΚΑ, τα δε ΠΡΑΚΤΙΚΑ, τα δ' ΕΝΘΟΥΣΙΑΣΤΙΚΑ.
By the first of these we are to understand a manly, grave, and simple melody. The sense of
πρακτικα
is less clear; but I suppose it means a more complicated and imitative sort of melody, adapted to express human actions; for, in the 49th of the Harmonic Problems [Sect. 19.] it is said of the Hypo-Phrygian mode, that it had
ἠθος πρακτικον
, and was, on that account, used only in the dialogue and action of the drama, never in the choral part. 119 And the same epithet,
πρακτικον
, is applied, in this treatise, to the Iambic measure. 120 As to enthusiastic, it wants no explanation. Aristotle then proceeds to observe, that "Music was to be used, not for one useful purpose only, but for several," which he enumerates; and one of them is—
ΚΑΘΑΡΣΕΩΣ ἐνεκα
: with respect to which he says—
τι δε λεγομεν την καθαρσιν, νυν μεν, άπλως παλιν δε, ΕΝ ΤΟΙΣ ΠΕΡΙ ΠΟΙΗΤΙΚΗΣ, ἐρουμεν σαφεστερον
: "What I mean by
Καθαρσις
, or purgation, I shall now explain only in a short and general way; but hereafter, in the books concerning Poetry, more explicitly and clearly."—And this, I suppose, he had done, in that part of this treatise which is lost.—He then proceeds thus:
Φανερον, ότι χρηστεον μεν πασαις ταις ἁρμονιαις, ου τον αυτον δε τροπον πασαις χρηστεον· άλλα προς μεν την παιδειαν, ταις ἠθικωταταις· προς δε ἀκροασιν [f. ΚΑΘΑΡΣΙΝ], ἐτερων χειρουργουντων, και ταις πρακτικαις, και ταις ἐνθουσιαστικαις. ὁ γαρ περι ἐνιας συμβαινει παθος ψυχας ἰσχυρως, τουτο ἐν πασαις ὑπαρχει, τῳ δε ήττον διαφερει και τῳ μαλλον. οἷον, ΕΛΕΟΣ ΚΑΙ ΦΟΒΟΣ. ἐτι δ᾽ ἐνθουσιασμος· και γαρ ὑπο ταυτης της κινησεως κατακωχιμοι τινες εισιν. ἐκ δε των ἱερων μελων ὁρωμεν τουτους, όταν χρησωνται τοις ἐξοργιαζουσι την ψυχην μελεσι, καθισταμενους, ώσπερ ΙΑΤΡΕΙΑΣ τυχοντας και ΚΑΘΑΡΣΕΩΣ. ταυτο δη τουτο ἀναγκαιον πασχειν και τας ἐλεημονας, και τους φοβητικους, και τους όλως παθητικους· τους δ᾽ ἄλλους, καθ᾽ όσον ἐπιβαλλει των τοιουτων ἐκαστῳ, και πασι γιγνεσθαι ΤΙΝΑ ΚΑΘΑΡΣΙΝ, και κουφιζεσθαι μεθ' ήδονης.
[ p. 458. Ed. Duval. ] 121
In this passage, for
ἀκροασιν
I have no doubt that we should read
καθαρσιν
. The similitude of the words is sufficient to account for the mistake of the transcriber; and the purport of the whole passage seems to require the correction. For Aristotle is here showing, in what manner the three different kinds of melody were to be applied to the different purposes, which he had just enumerated:
προς ΜΕΝ την ΠΑΙΔΕΙΑΝ, ταις ήθικ.
προς ΔΕ την ΚΑΘΑΡΣΙΝ,—ταις πρακτικαις,
&c. The opposition is clear. And so, afterwards, a third purpose is mentioned—
προς ΑΝΑΠΑΥΣΙΝ.
[p. 459.] The words immediately following,
ἐτερων χειρουργουντων
, probably contributed to this mistake. They allude to his doctrine, in the preceding chapter, that boys should not be allowed to practice or perform, themselves, any but the simplest kind of Music, and upon the sim- plest and easiest instruments, such as were not
δεομενα χειρουργικης ἐπιστημης.
[p. 457.] But this was not the character either of the active and enthusiastic melodies, of which he here speaks, or of the instrument used in the accompaniment of them 122 .
I shall now give what I think a fair and literal version of the passage.—
"It is manifest then, that all the different kinds of melodies are to be made use of; not all, however, for the same purpose. For education, the most moral kind should be used: for PURGATION, both the active, and the enthusiastic; performed, however, by others. For those passions, which in some minds are violent, exist, more or less, in all; such as PITY, for example, and TERROR: and, again, enthusiasm; for with this passion some men are subject to be possessed: but when the sacred melodies, intended to compose the mind after the celebration of the orgic rites, have been performed, we see those men become calm and sedate, as if they had undergone a kind of purgation, or cure. And the case must necessarily be the same with those who are particularly liable to be moved by PITY, or TERROR, or any other passion; and with other men, as far as they are under the influence of any such passion; all of them experiencing a sort of PURGATION, and PLEASURABLE RELIEF."
From this passage, though far enough, I am sensible, from being perfectly clear and explicit, two things, at least, may, I think, be confidently deduced. 1. That whatever be the meaning of the term
καθαρσις
, or purgation, here, must also be its meaning in the treatise on Poetry; since to that work Aristotle refers for a fuller explanation of it. The only difference is, that here, the term is applied to the effect of imitative Music; there, to that of imitative Poetry; of that species of it, however, which depended, we know, upon Music, for a very considerable part of its effect. 2. It is plain, that, according to Aristotle's idea, pity was to be purged by pity, terror by terror, &c.; contrary to the second of the two explanations above mentioned. For Aristotle is here expressly speaking of the use of enthusiastic Music applied
προς καθαρσιν
; and he says, that men, agitated by enthusiasm, were purged or relieved from that enthusiasm by the
ἱερα μελη
, which were plainly enthusiastic melodies; i. e. such as imitated, or expressed, that passion, and were intended to calm the mind, which had been violently agitated and inflamed; not, as M. Batteux understands, by the sudden opposition of Doric, grave, and moral strains, [p. 280, 1.] but by pleasurable indulgence of the same passion in imitative Music:
κουφιζεσθαι μεθ᾽ ἡδονης.
These melodies were, probably, such as those of Olympus, which had been mentioned just before [cap. 5.] and of which Aristotle says, that they,
Ὁμολογουμενως ΠΟΙΕΙ ΤΑΣ ΨΥΧΑΣ ΕΝΘΟΥΣΙΑΣΤΙΚΑΣ.
Indeed, from the manner, in which the Music of Olympus is spoken of by Plato, and Plutarch, there is great reason to suppose, that these "sacred melodies" were no other, than the very melodies of that musician 123 .
With respect to this
καθαρσις
itself, Aristotle by no means gives us in this passage, nor, indeed, professes to give us, a full and satisfactory explanation of it. Some light, however, he has flung upon it by the expressions,
ἰατρεια
, and
κουφιζεσθαι μεθ᾽ ἡδονης
, which he uses as synonymous to
καθαρσις
: "Purgation, cure, pleasurable relief." The Abbé Batteux understands Aristotle to mean no more by this, than that the passions of terror or pity, which, when excited by real objects, are simply painful, or, at least, have a predominant mixture of pain, are, by imitation, and the consciousness of fiction, purged or purified from this alloy of the disagreeable and painful, and converted, on the whole, into an emotion of delight. His meaning may be clearer in his own words. Aristotle, he says, had established it as a principle—
"Que les objets désagréables plaisent quand ils sont imités, même lorsqu'ils le font dans la plus grande verité. En appliquant ce principe à la Tragedie, il s'ensuit, que c'est l'imitation qui est la cause du plaisir qu'elle produit, et non la nature des objets imités, puisque ces objets sont par eux-mêmes désagréables. C'est donc l'imitation qui ôte à la terreur et à la pitié l'accessoire désagréable qu'elles ont dans la realité: c'est l'imitation qui opere la purgation Tragique, en mettant les malheurs imités à la place des malheurs réels, et en séparant par ce moyen ce que la pitié et la terreur ont d'agréable, comme emotions, d'avec ce qu'elles ont de désagréable, quand elles font jointes à l'idée de malheurs réels."
124 This account, which is exactly Fontenelle's solution of the pleasure arising from Tragic emotion 125 , is liable to a difficulty not easily, I think, surmounted. It confines Aristotle's meaning to the present pleasure of the emotion; it supposes all the purgation to consist merely in rendering the feeling of the passion pleasurable; not in any good effect which the habit of such emotion may produce, in correcting, refining, or moderating, such passions, when excited by real objects. Now, though it must be confessed, that Aristotle has not, in that short and professedly imperfect explanation given of the
καθαρσις
in the passage adduced, said any thing directly pointing to such effect, yet, I think, the whole turn and cast of his expression is such, as leads one naturally to conclude, that it was his meaning. The phrase,
κουφιζεσθαι μεθ' ήδονης
, does indeed appear to express the present effect only; but I can scarce conceive, that he would have used such a word as
καθαρσις
, and still less,
ΙΑΤΡΕΙΑ
, without a view to something beyond the pleasurable relief or vent of the moment; especially, in a chapter, where he is professedly enumerating and examining the uses of music 126 . Farther, the words,
ἐλεημονας, φοβητικους, παθητικους
, confirm this idea; being all words expressive of habitual excess, requiring correction and moderation 127 .
But, what still more strongly opposes the Abbé Batteux's idea, is, that Aristotle is here, as Heinsius and others have well observed, evidently combating the doctrine of Plato, whose great objection to Tragedy, was, that it feeds and inflames the passions 128 . It could be no answer to this, to allege, that the feeling of passion excited by Tragic imitation is pleasurable; for this is so far from being called in question by Plato, that it is the very foundation of his objection. The pleasure afforded by such Poetry is allowed by him in its utmost extent 129 . "Let its advocates," he says, "undertake to show us that it is not merely pleasurable, but USEFUL also, and we will lend a favourable ear to their apology; for we shall surely be gainers by the conviction." 130 Now Aristotle, if I understand him rightly, undertakes this apology, and points out the utility required. And no one, I think, can reasonably doubt, that such was his intention, who has attended to the following passage of Plato:—
ἀπολαυειν ἀναγκη ἀπο των ἀλλοτριων εις τα οικεια· ΘΡΕΨΑΝΤΑ γαρ ἐν ἐκεινοις ΙΣΧΥΡΟΝ ΤΟ ΕΛΕΕΙΝΟΝ, ου ραδιον ἐν τοις ΑΥΤΟΥ ΠΑΘΕΣΙ ΚΑΤΕΧΕΙΝ
131 . For, to this objection, there cannot well be a more direct and pointed answer, than Aristotle's assertion, as usually understood—that the habit of indulging the emotions of pity, or terror, in the fictitious representations of Tragedy, tends, on the contrary, to moderate and refine those passions, when they occur in real life.
But though the Abbé Batteux's idea of this purgation appears to me by no means to be the whole, it must, I think, be admitted as a part, and an essential part, of Aristotle's meaning. For the effect depends, not merely, as some commentators seem to suppose 132 , on the having our passions frequently and habitually excited, but, on the having them so excited by fictitious representation. Pity and terror frequently excited by such objects and such events in real life, as the imitations of the Tragic scene set before us, would rather tend to produce apathy than moderation. Nature would struggle against such violent and painful agitation, and the heart would become callous in its own defence. We must be insensible, that we might not be wretched. It is far otherwise with fictitious passion. There, the emotion, though often violent in spite of the consciousness of fiction, is always, more or less, delightful. We indulge it, as one of the first of pleasures; and the effect of that indulgence, frequently repeated, is perhaps, that, while it moderates real passion by the frequency of similar impressions, it, at the same time, cherishes such sympathetic emotions, in their proper and useful degree, by the delicious feelings which never fail to accompany the indulgence of them in imitative representation.
The passions of savages, or of men in the first rude stages of civilization, are ferocious and painful. They pity, or they fear, either violently, or not at all. With them, there is hardly any medium between ungovernable agitation, and absolute insensibility.—Suppose such a people to have access, like the Athenians, to theatrical representations, and to have their passions kept in frequent and pleasurable exercise by fictitious distress; the consequence, I think, would be, that, by degrees, they would come to have more feeling, and less perturbation. Instead of sympathetic emotions rarely excited, painfully felt, and soon extinguished, they would gradually acquire a calm, lasting, and useful habit of general tenderness and sensibility. In polished society, where the passions are accustomed to be indulged in fiction, either in the theatre, or by reading, and the pain is converted, on the whole, into one strong and delightful feeling, by the charms of imitation, Poetry, Music, aided by the indistinct consciousness of fiction—these passions, even when excited by real objects, seem to retain, (at least, in cases where we are not too closely touched,) some tincture of the same pleasurable emotion, which attended them, when raised by works of imagination; they are more moderately and agreeably felt, more easily governed, and more gentle and polished in their expressions.
Such appears to me, on the whole, to be the most probable explanation of Aristotle's meaning: I must, at least, confess it to be the only reasonable meaning, that I am able to discover. How far it is true, and founded on solid observation, is another question, which I willingly submit to the philosophical and thinking part of my readers.
I cannot omit to observe, that the short explanation given by MILTON, in the introduction to his Samson Agonistes , appears to coincide exactly, as far as it goes, with my idea of the passage.—"Tragedy, as it was anciently composed, hath been ever held the gravest, moraleft, and most profitable of all other Poems: therefore said by Aristotle to be of power, by raising pity, and fear or terror, to purge the mind of those and such like passions; that is, to temper and reduce them to just measure, with a kind of delight, stirred up by reading or seeing those passions well imitated." One thing should be added. Aristotle's assertion must be considered relatively to his own times, and nation. He speaks of the effects of Tragedy on the people of Athens, who, as reading was then no popular occupation, had scarce any opportunity of indulging fictitious emotion, but at the Theatre, and who, we know, were there accustomed to indulge it perpetually. With us, the case is widely different. The doctrine, therefore, of Aristotle, that "Tragedy purges the passions," translated, if I may so speak, into modern truth, would perhaps amount only to this—that the habitual exercise of the passions by works of imagination in general, of the serious and pathetic kind, (such as Tragedies, Novels, &c.) has a tendency to soften and refine those passions, when excited by real objects in common life.

46. mvp-aristotle-comment-46

NOTE 46. P. 75.

6.4 IN SOME PARTS METRE ALONE IS EMPLOYED, IN OTHERS MELODY.
A passage of very tantalizing brevity. By
δια μετρων ΜΟΝΟΝ
, are we to understand, according to the obvious and literal meaning of the expression, that in some parts of Tragedy the verse was merely recited, spoken, as in modern Tragedy? —This contradicts what, by many writers, has been considered as a fact thoroughly established, that the Greek Tragedy was accompanied by musical instruments, and was therefore strictly musical, throughout: —for as to the dreams of the Abbé Du Bos, Rousseau, and others, about a noted declamation, a declamation accompanied by Music, yet not sung—this is too manifest an absurdity to stand in need of confutation. If, as Rousseau says, it is
"impossible to understand what the ancients have said about their theatrical declamation, without supposing this,"
would it not be better to say, at once, that we do not understand it, than to explain it into impossibilities?
As for the systematic Abbé Du Bos, he was set upon proving his point; and he proves it like a man resolved to prove it, by wresting all sorts of authors to his purpose, and translating them as he pleased. 133 All we know clearly, is, that the ancient drama was accompanied, (in part, at least,) by musical instruments. I conclude, confidently, that since the instruments could not speak, the actors must sing—that their declamation must certainly have been, strictly speaking, musical, however simple; the chanting of the simplest plain chant, being as truly Music, i. e. as essentially distinct from speech, as the most refined melody of a modern opera.
If, then, the Greek Tragedy had a musical accompaniment throughout, it must have been sung throughout. But here, Aristotle says, as plainly as words can say it, that in some parts of Tragedy, "metre only" was employed: —
δια ΜΕΤΡΩΝ ἐνια ΜΟΝΟΝ
: that is, as it is necessarily implied, without the two other
ήδυσματα
, or seasonings, of Tragic language, just mentioned, melody and rhythm. 134
Some commentators, I know, endeavour to evade the force of this expression, by saying, that Aristotle means, by
δια μετρων μονον
, only the noted declamation, which, being a sort of recitative, was not regarded as strictly musical, nor denominated
μελος
. And in support of this, it is alleged, that the word
λέξις
, Speech, is applied by him afterwards in a similar manner; 135 as
λεγεσθαι
is also by Plutarch, who talks of "some of the Iambics being spoken with an accompaniment, and others, sung: 136 as we sometimes say of a singer, that he speaks recitative well. But all this, I confess, does not satisfy me. It is one thing, to apply occasionally the word
λεξις
or
λεγεσθαι
, in this comparative way, to such kind of singing as most resembles speech, and another, to say roundly, that some parts of Tragedy made use of metre, or verse, only; and that too, immediately after having fixed the exclusive sense of
μονον
, by enumerating the three
ήδυσματα
of Tragic diction, which he asserts to be separately used in different parts, i. e.
ῥυθμου, άρμονια, μετρον
, — RHYTHM, MELODY, and METRE. 137 They who dispute this meaning, must at least, I think, allow that if it had been the meaning, Aristotle could not well have expressed it with more precision. How can
μετρων
here be taken in the loose and comparative sense contended for, when, in the very words immediately preceding, it is carefully limited to its strict and proper sense, by being expressly discriminated from melody, as well as from rhythm?
But after all, the fact, that the Greek Tragedy was sung throughout, though often asserted, has not yet been proved; nor do I think that it can be proved; at least, by any passage of ancient authors, that I have seen adduced to prove it. The Abbé Vatry, in a dissertation, Sur la recitation des Tragedies anciennes, undertook to prove, in form, that the Greek Tragedies were sung,
"bout à l'autre,"
like our operas. But how does he prove this?—by proving, what indeed is easily proved, 138 that a part of the Iambics, or the dialogue, was sung, and then by taking it for granted, that the ancients could not possibly have endured so barbarous a custom, as the mixture of speech and singing in the same piece.
"Il ne paroit pas qu'on puisse douter que ces cantiques ne se chantassent; mais de cela même je crois pouvoir conclurre, que tout le reste se chantoit, quoique differemment: car le bon sens, et ce que les anciens nous disent, nous conduit à penser que leur recitation etoit partout de même nature, et qu'elle ne se bigarroit point, tantôt d'une simple declamation, et tantôt d'un chant musical."
By the same presumptive mode of arguing, the Abbé might also have proved, à priori, that the Greeks could not possibly have been guilty of the modern barbarous bigarrure of serious and ludicrous, in their Tragic drama. But the first Greek Tragedy he had opened would probably have overturned his reasoning.
A thorough discussion of all the passages of ancient authors, that throw any light upon this question, relative to the dramatic representations of the Greeks, would draw me much too far beyond my bounds. I must content myself with pointing out (for I think it has not been observed,) the stubborn difficulty which this passage of Aristotle appears to me to throw in the way of the common opinion upon this subject; and with hazarding a merely hypothetical conjecture, that, if, as Aristotle seems plainly to say, some part of the Greek Tragedy was spoken, like our Tragic declamation, without any musical accompaniment, it was, most probably, that part of the dialogue, which, as I have before observed, in NOTE 33 , is, in every Tragedy, easily distinguished from the rest, by its being carried on in a sort of quick repartee of verse to verse. As, in this part of the dialogue, we almost constantly find the Tragic tone lowered to a more colloquial pitch, and even approaching frequently to the jocular and burlesque, it seems reasonable to think, that here, if anywhere, the musical accompaniment, and the elevation of lengthened and chanting tones, were withdrawn, and common conversation left to common speech.
But what, again, are we to understand by—
και παλιν ἐτερα δια μελους
?—Are we to repeat
μονον
, and understand Melody alone, without the two other
ήδυσματα
, Rhythm and Metre? This cannot be. For though we may strip the Tragic language of melody and of rhythm, or, in other words, of Music, we cannot strip it of metre. The ancients most certainly did not admit prose into their Tragedies; and as little can we conceive them to have set prose to Music. Dacier, and some other commentators, understand by
μελους
here, Music, including rhythm. This sense of the word is certainly warrantable; but it can hardly be the sense here: for, surely, an instance, in which all the three
ήδυσματα
were used, (as they must be, if metre be indispensable, and
μελος
imply rhythm and melody,) would be but a strange illustration of the
ΧΩΡΙΣ ἐκαστου των ειδων
κ. τ. αλ.
I do not see what remains, but, that we take
μελος
here in its most restrained sense, as distinct from rhythm, or time, and synonymous to
άρμονια
; that sense, in which Aristotle had used it before, in his first chapter. 139 140 And if we do this, we must necessarily, I think, understand, that some parts of the dialogue were sung without rhythm: I mean, without musical rhythm, or time, though certainly not without that poetical or profodic rhythm, by which in reciting verse, and, indeed, even in the most familiar conversation, the syllabic quantity must have been relatively, at least, observed, though not, I presume, with the inflexibility of musical measure, nor with such a rigorous equality of long to long, and short to short, as is essential to the execution of what is properly called Music, and as I suppose to have been observed in the choral odes. 141 Thus the dialogue of the Greek Tragedy will appear to have been not improperly compared to our recitative; differing from the chorus, as our recitative differs from the airs, both in the absence of strict time, and in the kind of melody, which was also, as mere melody, less musical than the choral melody, and more imitative of speech, as well as of action. 142
Whether the monologues, or long speeches—the
μακραι ῥησεις
, as Plato calls them—were performed in the same way, as the rest of the dialogue, or, as it has been imagined, were distinguished by being more measured and musical, is a point not easily cleared up. 143 The passages commonly appealed to for this purpose, from the grammarians Diomedes and Donatus, about the Cantica of the Roman Comedy, I look upon as a very frail foundation of any conclusion with respect to the Greek Tragedy. 144 The passage of Plutarch above quoted, note, furnishes the strongest support I know of for such a distinction. For, if by "spoken or recited to an instrumental accompaniment," (
τα μεν [sc. των ἰαμβειων] ΛΕΓΕΣΘΑΙ παρα την κρουσιν
) Plutarch meant, as I think he must mean, sung in recitative, not literally spoken, (for how could that admit of a musical accompaniment?) then,
ᾳδεσθαι
, which is opposed to it, must of course imply, not mere singing as opposed to speech, but a more musical and measured melody.

47. mvp-aristotle-comment-47

NOTE 47. P. 76.

6.6 THE MEANING OF MELOPOEIA IS OBVIOUS.
I have ventured to depart from the common interpretation, by understanding the word
δυναμις
, here, to mean, not the power, and effect, of the Melopæia itself, but the power, i. e. the meaning, of the term. Aristotle is here, as usual, explaining the terms he had made use of. It was directly to his purpose to say, as a reason for omitting a definition in this instance, that the meaning of the word was well known; but not at all to his purpose, to say—"I need not explain the word, because the power and effect of the thing signified by it, (that is, of Music,) is well known."
Dacier is amusing here. He wonders what could induce the Greeks to make Music a part of their drama; and at last,
"après bien des recherches,"
he discovers one principal cause to have been this—that they had very musical ears; but he does not dis- cover the cause of his own wonder, which, in all probability, was, that he had not.

48. mvp-aristotle-comment-48

NOTE 48. P. 76.

6.8 OR DELIVERING A GENERAL SENTIMENT.
In the Rhetoric, Aristotle defines
γνωμη
by
καθολου ἀποφανσις
. [ Lib. ii. cap. xxi. p. 572. ] Thus below, in this chapter, for,
ἀποφαινονται γνωμην
, his first expression, we have,
καθολου ἀποφαινονται
. — This has been loosely and inaccurately rendered in all the translations I have seen, except those of Castelvetro and Goulston.

49. mvp-aristotle-comment-49

NOTE 49. P. 76.

6.11 THESE PARTS----HAVE BEEN EMPLOYED BY MOST POETS.
Locus, as the critics say, conclamatus. Time is too precious to be wasted in the support, or refutation, of random conjectures upon a passage of such desperate corruption. How can
οὐκ ὀλιγοι
, "not a few," be tortured into, "all," or, "almost all?" Yet so Dacier, Batteux, Goulston, &c. On the other hand, if fairly translated, "not a few Poets have made use of these parts," how strangely it will follow—"for EVERY Tragedy has them all!"—And how is the
ὡς εἰπειν
, to be applied? to
οὐκ ὀλιγοι
, or, to
ειδεσι
? In the midst of these difficulties, all I could do was to make my version consistent with itself; faithful to the original, I could not make it, without making it nonsensical. Those commentators, who apply the
ὡς εἰπειν
to the word
ειδεσι
, seem favoured by ch. xii. where, speaking of the same essential parts of Tragedy, Aristotle says—
οἷς μεν ΩΣ ΕΙΔΕΣΙ δει χρησθαι
.

50. mvp-aristotle-comment-50

NOTE 50. P. 77.

6.12 THE SUPREME GOOD ITSELF----IS ACTION, NOT QUALITY.
See Ethic. Nicom. I. 5, 7, 8. ed. Wilk. & Mag. Moral. I. 4, p. 149, 150, ed. Duval.

51. mvp-aristotle-comment-51

NOTE 51. P. 77.

6.15 THE TRAGEDIES OF MOST MODERN POETS HAVE THIS DEFECT.
This receives illustration from what Aristotle presently after says, of "the rhetorical manner prevailing in the Poets of his time:"
οἱ δε νυν, ῥητορικως.
cap. vi: and from his observation, at the close of cap. xxiv. [Transl. Part III. Sect. 6.] that "the manners and sentiments are only obscured by too splendid a diction."
What he has here said of the recent Tragedies of his time, may perhaps be said, in general, of our modern Tragedies, compared with those of Shakspeare. The truth, I believe, is, that the Tragedy of a refined and polished age will always have less manners than that of ruder times, because it will have more dignity; more of that uniform and level elevation, which excludes strong traits of character, and the simple, unvarnished delineation of the manners. Indeed, what the Greeks denominated
ἦθος
, is the peculiar province of Comedy, and is seldom to be found in Tragedy, except in that stage of its progress, when it is not yet thoroughly and distinctly separated from Comedy; from the imitation of common life, and natural manners. 145 Such are the Tragedies of Shakspeare; and such, as I have before ventured to suggest, are those of Euripides in particular, which, in proportion as they have less dignity, have more
ἦθος
, than the Tragedies of Sophocles. But in neither of them, nor, probably, even in those very Poets here censured by Aristotle, was the "language of Poets," substituted for "the language of men," as it is almost constantly in the French Tragedy, and too often, in our own Tragedies of the French School. 146

52. mvp-aristotle-comment-52

NOTE 52. P. 77.

6.15 POLYGNOTUS EXCELS IN THE EXPRESSION OF THE MANNERS.
I see not the smallest reason for the substitution of
ἀγαθων
, for
ἀγαθα
, which is the reading, we are told, of all the MSS. What Aristotle had said before of Polygnotus, cap. ii. —
ότι κρειττους εικαζε
—seems not to afford the slightest ground for alteration here. [See Mr. Winstanley's ed. p. 281. ] Painters are compared in very different points of view, in these two passages: there, as imitating good or bad, serious or ridiculous, elevated or low, objects: here, only as expressing, or not expressing, manners. It was directly to Aristotle's purpose to say, that Polygnotus was a "good manner-painter;" (
ἀγαθος ήθογραφος
)—not at all to his purpose, (besides the awkwardness of the expression itself,) to say, that he was a "manner-painter of good men:" (
ἀγαθων ήθογραφος
). 147

53. mvp-aristotle-comment-53

NOTE 53. P. 77.

6.16 JUST AS IN PAINTING, &c.
I hope I shall not much shock even the most conscientious adherents to the established inaccuracy and authentic blunders of ancient manuscripts, by having ventured to adopt here the transposition first proposed, I believe, by Castelvetro. 148 I can only desire those readers, who may be alarmed at my temerity, to read the passage—
παραπλησιον γαρ ἐστι—κ. τ. αλλ.—γραφεας, εικονα
,—first, where it stands in all the editions, and then, where I have placed it, immediately after the words—
ἐχουσα δε μυθον και συστασιν πραγματων
. 149 —If this experiment alone be not sufficient to convince them of the propriety, or, rather, the necessity, of the transposition, I despair of the success of any arguments I am able to produce in the support of it. To me, I confess, it is among those things that are too evident for proof.

54. mvp-aristotle-comment-54

NOTE 54. P. 77.

6.18 ADVENTURERS IN TRAGIC WRITING ARE SOONER ABLE, &C.
Aristotle argues here upon a principle rather rhetorical and popular, than philosophical—that, which infers superior worth from superior difficulty and rarity: —
το χαλεπώτερον και σπανιώτερον, μείζον
, (sc.
αγαθον
,) as he lays it down in his Rhetoric, lib. i. cap. vii. p. 529. Lord Bacon, in his Essay On Gardens, uses the same argument, and almost in Aristotle's words, with respect to the superiority of gardening to architecture:
"A man shall ever see, that when ages grow to civility and elegancy, men come to build stately SOONER than to garden finely; as if gardening were the greater perfection."
The truth, however, of the fact here asserted by Aristotle, appears, not only from the earlier dramatic Poets of every nation, but from the defects of plots in general, whether Dramatic or Epic; and from the rarity of those dramatic fables, for which the Poet has trusted entirely to his own invention, without recourse to history, or novels, or the productions of other dramatists. 150 —
"En general, il y a plus de pieces bien dialoguées, que de pieces bien conduites. Le Génie qui dispose les incidens, paroit plus rare que celui qui trouve les vrais discours. Combien de belles scènes dans Moliere!—On compte ses dénouemens heureux. On seroit tenté de croire qu'une drame devroit être l'ouvrage de deux hommes de génie, l'un qui arrangeât, et l'autre qui fit parler."
— Diderot, de la Poes. Dram. p. 288.

55. mvp-aristotle-comment-55

NOTE 55. P. 78.

6.22 TO THIS PART BELONGS, &c.-
Aristotle is not here defining
Διανοἰα
, as his expression,
τουτο δε ΕΣΤΙ
, seems, at first view, to imply: he is only explaining the subservience of the sentiments to the manners; he is shewing why they are next in rank and importance to the manners; namely, because manners or characters, are, in great part at least, manifested by the sentiments. Dacier's note here is good.
"Aristote suit ici l'ordre naturel. Les sentimens font pour les mœurs, ce que les mœurs font pour l'action. Comme un Poete tragique ne peut bien imiter une action, qu'en employant les mœurs, il ne peut non plus bien marquer les mœurs, que par le moyen des sentimens, & par consequent les sentimens tiennent le troisieme rang dans la Tragedie."

56. mvp-aristotle-comment-56

NOTE 56. P. 78.

6.22 WHICH, IN THE DIALOGUE, DEPENDS ON THE POLITICAL AND RHETORICAL ARTS.
Ὅπερ, ἐπι των λόγων, της πολιτικής και ῥητορικης ἔργον ἐστιν.
— I have not seen the words,
ἐπι των λογων
, satisfactorily explained. I cannot agree with those commentators, who by
λογοι
, here, understand, oratory, prose eloquence, as opposed to Poetry: a sense, indeed, very common, in Aristotle and other writers; but if we adopt it here, how follows—
ὁι ΓΑΡ ἀρχαιοι πολιτικώς ΕΠΟΙΟΥΝ λέγοντας
? for here, Aristotle evidently speaks of Poets; not of orators, as Dacier renders it. The passage, then, fairly translated, would stand thus:—"which, (i. e. the choice of proper sentiments,) in ORATORY, is the business of the political and rhetorical arts: FOR the antient Tragic Poets made their characters speak politically," &c. Nothing can well be more incoherent.
Επι των λόγων
, means, I think, in the speeches, discourse, or dialogue part of the drama, as distinguished from the choral or lyric part, which had nothing, or comparatively nothing, to do with
ηθος
or character, and in which the Poet was, of course, to draw his
διανοια
, or thoughts, principally at least, from different sources; not from the stores of civil wisdom, or rhetorical art, but from those of Religion, Ethics, Mythology, and Poetry. The word
λογοι
, is clearly used in the same sense, in a passage that presently follows:—
διοπερ ἐκ ἐχεσιν ήθη ἐνιοι των ΛΟΓΩΝ
—"some of the speeches, or the dialogue."

57. mvp-aristotle-comment-57

NOTE 57. P. 78.

6.23 FOR THE ANTIENTS MADE THEIR CHARACTERS SPEAK IN THE STYLE OF POLITICAL AND POPULAR ELOQUENCE; BUT NOW, THE RHETORICAL MANNER PREVAILS.
Οι μεν γαρ άρχαιοι ΠΟΛΙΤΙΚΩΣ ἐποιουν λεγοντας, οι δε νυν, ῥητορικως.
— So, Rhet. lib. ii. cap. xxii. p. 573 ,
ΠΟΛΙΤΙΚΩι συλλογισμῳ
—a Civil or Oratorical syllogism, as opposed to the strict dialectic syllogism: a distinction which he presently after expresses by,
ἀκριβεστερον
, and
ΜΑΛΑΚΩΤΕΡΟΝ, συλλογίζεσθαι
[ibid.] And thus, here, the same term,
πολιτικως
, is used, to distinguish the popular, and less laboured, though more solid, eloquence of the Senate or the Forum, from the studied and declamatory composition of the professed rhetoricians. A similar use of the word occurs in the passage quoted in NOTE 229, from the Euagoras of Isocrates , where,
ὀνομασι ΠΟΛΙΤΙΚΟΙΣ
, is plainly synonymous with
ὀνομασι ΚΥΡΙΟΙΣ
. See also Dion. Halicarn. De Struct. Orat. p. 4. ed. Upton , and Faber's note.
That Aristotle, however, by Politics (
ἡ πολιτικη
), means only, as Dacier asserts,
"l'usage commun, le langage ordinaire des peuples,"
cannot, surely, be admitted. The force and extent of the term is well known 151 .
"CIVILIS SCIENTIA,"
Quintilian
says,
"idem quod SAPIENTIA est."
It comprehended all the necessary knowledge of the
Πολιτικά
, the
vir civilis
, the public man. It included, of course, eloquence, or the faculty of public speaking, but that, of a kind very different from the
"umbratile genus,"
as Cicero calls it, of the rhetorical schools 152 . What Aristotle says of the old Tragic Poets, that they made their personages speak like such a man, not like a Rhetorician, cannot be better illustrated than by Quintilian's character of Euripides.
"Illud quidem nemo non fateatur necesse est, iis qui se ad agendum comparent, utiliorem longè Euripidem fore. Namque is, et in sermone—magis accedit oratorio generi, et sententiis densus; et in iis quæ à sapientibus tradita sunt, penè ipsis par, et in dicendo ac respondendo cuilibet eorum qui fuerunt IN FORO DISERTI comparandus."
[lib. x. cap. i.]
That Dacier, with so precise and clear an expression before his eyes, as,
ΕΠΟΙΟΥΝ λεγοντας
, should understand this of the antient orators, and roundly pronounce Victorius to be mistaken in applying it to the Poets, seems perfectly unaccountable. I do not see in this passage any foundation for the refinement of Castelvetro, Dacier, and other commentators, who refer the
ἐνοντα
to the political science, and the
ἁρμοττοντα
to rhetoric. The word
ἁρμοττοντα
, has, I think, the same sense as in cap. xv. and means, such sentiments, or thoughts, as, being adapted to the person speaking, are expressive of the manners: for it is in this view, as I before remarked, that Aristotle is here considering the Sentiments, or
Διανοια
.
Τα ἐνοντα
, as Victorius has observed, is equivalent to
τα ὑπαρχοντα
; and it was clearly the business of rhetoric (
ῥητορικης ἔργον
,) to teach both the
ὑπαρχοντα
and the
ἁρμοττοντα
. See Rhet. lib. ii. cap. xxii. p. 573, E. and lib. iii. cap. vii. p. 590, D. ed. Duval . 153

58. mvp-aristotle-comment-58

NOTE 58. P. 78.

6.24 THERE ARE SPEECHES, THEREFORE, WHICH ARE WITHOUT MANNERS----AS NOT CONTAINING, &C.
The reading I have followed is, I think, fully authorised, by MSS. and by common sense. See Mr. Winstanley's note, p. 282.—The Abbé Batteux has given the passage thus, from a MS. (No. 2117,) in the King of France's library.
Ἔστι δε ήθος μεν το τοιοῦτον, ὃ δηλοι την προαιρεσιν, ὁποια τις ἐσιν· διοπερ ἐκ ἐχεσιν ἠθη ἐνιοι των λογων, ἐν οἷς ἐκ ἐστι δηλον ὅτι προαιρειται η φευγει ὁ λεγων.
The common reading stands thus:—
Ἔστι δε ήθη μεν το τοιουτον, ὃ δηλοι την προαιρεσιν, ὁποια τις ἐσιν, ἐν οἷς ἐκ ἐστι δηλον, προαιρειται, η φευγει ὁ λέγων· διοπερ ἐκ ἐχεσιν ήθη ἐνιοι των λογων.
— Which is thus rendered by Mr. Harris:
"MANNERS OF CHARACTER is that which discovers WHAT THE DETERMINATION [of a speaker] will be, in matters, where IT IS NOT YET MANIFEST, whether he chuses to do a thing, or to avoid it."
Now if this were true, I do not see how there could be any
ηθος
, in any play, after the first discovery of the speaker's character. In the Avare of Moliere, for instance, it is sufficiently manifest from the very first scene in which Harpagon appears, what his avarice will lead him to chuse or to avoid, in any circumstance of the drama. Is there, for that reason, no
ηθος
, no sentiments that mark his character, in any thing he says during the rest of the play? 154 Nay, more; according to this reading, there can be no
ηθος
at all in any part of that drama: for the
προαιρεσις
or propensity of the Miser is completely known to every reader or spectator from the very title of the piece. I know, indeed, that Le Bossu , and others, have given a meaning to this passage, by making Aristotle say, what he certainly does not say—viz. when it is not yet manifest "ex indicio dicentis," what the will, or choice, of the speaker is. But if the common reading were right, we might, surely, expect to find the words,
ἐν οἷς ἐκ ἐστι δηλον
, &c. subjoined in other places where he defines the
ηθος
. Yet we have nothing like it in cap. xv. initio; nor in the second book of his Rhetoric , where he says only,
ηθος δ᾽ ἐχεσιν λογοι, ἐν ὁσοις δηλη ἡ προαιρεσις
: nor in other passages of the same work, relative to the same subject. Piccolomini's translation agrees with mine, and is expressed with his usual accuracy.
"—Ma il costume nel parlar' é quello, il quale mostra fuora, è apparir fà il volere, et l'elettion di chi parla. Peroche alcuni parlari si truovano, li quali non hanno costume; come ch' in essi non appaia, et non si manifesti, quello, che elegga, ò fugga, con la sua volontà, chi parla."

59. mvp-aristotle-comment-59

NOTE 59. P. 78

7.4 A BEGINNING, IS THAT, &C.
See Harris, Philol. Inq. Part II. ch. v. These definitions must be understood wholly to refer to the wants, and expectations, of the spectator. He must want nothing before the beginning, nor expect any thing after the end. Nothing, however, is more common than both these defects; than perplexed beginnings, and unsatisfactory conclusions. Henry Fielding, we are told, used
"to execrate the man who invented fifth acts."
The inventor of first acts has not given dramatic Poets much less trouble. Most modern plays have, I think, more or less of this intricacy in their beginnings; but it is especially the case with Comedy. It seems, indeed, by no means easy for a modern comic writer, of whom invention, novelty, variety of incidents, and ingenuity of contrivance, are required,
δουναι
, as Aristotle well expresses it,
ὥσπερ ἐις την χειρα, την ἀρχην
—"to put the beginning fairly into the spectator's hand." The spectator, and even the reader, of a new Comedy, is generally employed, during the first scenes, in guessing an ænigma; and when, at length, he comprehends what is going forward, his attention, interest, and sympathy, are disturbed and distracted, by looking back, to understand what he should have understood at first. Hence the advantage which the Tragic Poet, from the notoriety of his subjects, generally possesses over the Comic; and which is so pleasantly described in the fragment preserved by Athenæus from Antiphanes or Aristophanes:—
Μακαριον ἐστιν ἡ Τραγῳδια
Ποιημα κατα παντ· ἐιγε πρωτον οι λογοι
Υπο των θεατων εισιν ἐγνωρισμενοι
Πριν και τιν ἐιπειν, ὡς ὑπομνησαι μονον
Δει τον ποιητην. Οιδιπουν γαρ ἀν γε φω,
Τα δ άλλα παντ᾿ ἰσασιν· ὁ πατηρ Λαϊος,
Μητηρ Ιοκαστη· θυγατερες, παιδες, τινες –
Τι πεισεθ' ἐτω, τι πεποιηκεν—ἂν παλιν
Ειπη τις Αλκμαιωνα, και τα παιδια
Παντ᾽ ἐυθυς ἐιρηκεν ὅτι μανεις ἀπεκτονε
Την μητερα. —
Ἡμιν δε ταυτ᾿ ἐκ ἐστιν· άλλα παντα δει
Ευρειν, ὀνοματα καινα, τα διῳκημενα
Προτερον, τα νυν παροντα, την καταστροφην,
Την ἐσβολην· ἂν ἐν τι τετων παραλιπη
Χρεμης τις, ή Φειδων τις, ἐκσυριττεται,
ΠΗΛΕΙ δε ταυτ᾿ ἐξεστι και ΤΕΥΚΡΩΙ ποιον.
Athen. lib. vi. See Casaubon, in locum.
Thus rendered by Grotius—
Scilicet Tragedia
Felix poema est: nam principio cognitum
Argumentum omne spectatori est, antequam
Verbum hiscat aliquis: nomen tantum dicere
Poetræ satis est. Oedipum præscripsero,
Jam reliqua per se norunt; pater est Laïus,
Jocasta mater; tum qui nati et filiæ,
Quid fecit, quid patietur. Si promiserit
Alemæona alius, ipsi dicent pueruli,
"Hic ille est qui interfecit matrem insaniens."—
At nobis ista non licent, sed omnia
Sunt invenienda, nomina imprimis nova,
Res antegestæ, res præsentes, exitus,
Initia. Ex illis siqua pars defecerit,
Exsibilatur Phido, sive ille est Chremes;
Illa alia facere Peleo et Teucro licet.
Excerpta ex Trag. et Com. Græcis, p. 622.
When the middle of a drama is not sufficiently connected with what precedes, that is, in Aristotle's language, when it is not,
ἀυτο μετ᾿ άλλο
, a new plot seems to begin: a fault not uncommon in double and complicated fables. If, on the other hand, it wants the
μετ' ἐκεινο ἑτερον
, the piece seems finished before its time. The Sampson Agonistes of Milton, according to Dr. Johnson, is deficient in both requisites of a true, Aristotelic middle. Its
"intermediate parts have neither cause nor consequence, neither hasten nor retard the catastrophe."
Life of Milton.
The criticism appears to be just. It is seldom, however, that a beginning, a middle, or an end, is defective in both the conditions required. A beginning, which, strictly speaking, did not naturally require any thing to follow it, (
μετ' ἐκεινο ἑτερον πεφυκεν ἐιναι
,) would put even the most attentive spectator into the situation of Shakspeare's drowsy tinker:
Sly. A goodly matter, surely. Comes there any more of it?
Page. My Lord, 'tis but begun.
Taming of the Shrew.
The most usual defects, and which, I suppose, Aristotle had principally in view, are those of beginnings which do not properly, in his sense, begin, and of endings which do not end. The first perplex us, by supposing something to have preceded, without clearly telling us what; the other leave us dissatisfied, by disappointing our natural expectations of something more to follow. Of this last fault, instances may be found in abundance; particularly in the conclusions of Shakspeare 155 . In Plautus, and even in Terence, we find this imperfection supplied by a very simple and clumsy contrivance, that, of informing the audience that the play was over, and telling them in what manner they were to suppose the catastrophe completed.
Spectatores, Fabula hæc est acta: vos plausum date.
Plaut. Mostel.
Spectatores, quod futurum est intus, hic memorabimus.
Hæc Casina hujus reperietur filia esse è proxumo;
Eaque nubet Euthynico nostro herili filio.
Id. in fine Casinæ.
Ne expectetis dum exeant huc: intus despondebitur;
Intus transigetur, si quid est quod restat.
Ter. And.
The fault opposite to this—that, of prolonging the piece beyond the point of satisfactory conclusion—has been attributed to the Oedipus Tyrannus of Sophocles. The criticism is tasteless, on every account. The reader may see it well confuted by Brumoy. But one of his answers is alone sufficient, on the principles of Aristotle:
"Le spectateur en effet seroit-il content s'il ignoroit le sort de Jocaste, d'Oedipe, et de sa famille?"
Theatre des Grecs, i. 376.
&c.
"Oedipus,"
Voltaire
says,
"is fully acquainted with his fate at the end of the fourth act. Voila donc la piece finie."
Critique sur l'Oedipe de Sophocle.
—He might have learned better criticism from a writer of far inferior abilities.
"Il faut aussi prendre garde que la catastrophe achéve pleinement le Poeme dramatique; c'est à dire, qu'il ne reste rien aprés, ou de ce que les spectateurs doivent sçavoir, ou qu'ils vueillent entendre; car s'ils ont raison de demander, Qu'est devenu quelque personnage interessé dans les grandes intrigues du Theatre, ou s'ils ont juste sujet de sçavoir, Quels font les sentimens de quelq'un des principaux acteurs aprés le dernier evenement qui fait cette catastrophe, la piece n'est pas finie, il y manque encore un dernier trait'."
D'Aubignac, Pratique du Theatre, tom. i. p. 126.
That is to say, in Aristotle's language, a drama so concluded, (as the Oedipus Tyrannus would be, if it ended with the fourth act,) would want the true
τελευτη
, or end—that, after which,
άλλο οὐδεν ΠΕΦΥΚΕΝ ἐιναι
.

60. mvp-aristotle-comment-60

NOTE 60. P. 79.

7.8 WHETHER IT BE AN ANIMAL, &C.
Αλλα τοδε γε οιμαι σε φαναι ἀν δειν, παντα λογον ΩΣΠΕΡ ΖΩΟΝ συνεσταναι, σωμα τι ἐχοντα αυτον αὑτου ὡστε μητε ΑΚΕΦΑΛΟΝ ειναι μητε ΑΠΟΥΝ, άλλα ΜΕΣΑ τε εχειν, και ΑΚΡΑ, πρεποντα άλληλοις και τω ὍΛΩ.
Plato, in Phædro, p. 264, ed. Ser.

61. mvp-aristotle-comment-61

NOTE 61. P. 79.

7.8 BEAUTY CONSISTS IN MAGNITUDE AND ORDER.
There is something singular, something, at least, not quite consonant to modern ideas, in the great stress which the antients appear to have laid upon size, as a necessary constituent of beauty in the human form. They seem, indeed, to have despised every thing that was not large; and to have estimated beauty, not by measure only, but by weight also.
"Magnanimity,"
the Philosopher in his Ethics
says,
"consists in greatness of soul, as beauty also consists in greatness of body. Little men may be called
άστειοι
, and
συμμετροι
, pretty, and well-shaped, but not
ΚΑΛΟΙ
, handsome, or beautiful."
Ethic. Nicom. lib. iv. cap. 3.
That magnitude should have entered, as essential, into their idea of a handsome man, is not surprising. The utility of strength, and the connection between strength and size, is sufficient to account for this. But what appears most singular is, that they insist no less upon the importance of magnitude to female beauty.
—ΘΗΛΕΙΩΝ δε ἀρετη, σωματος μεν, καλλος και ΜΕΓΕΘΟΣ.
Rhet. i. cap. v. Homer seldom omits size in his descriptions of this kind.
Ἔσκε δε πατρος ἐμοιο γυνη Φοινίσσ᾽ ἐνι οικῳ,
Καλη τε ΜΕΓΑΛΗ τε, και ἀγλαα ἔργ᾽ ειδυῖα.
Od. O. 416.
Nor let it be objected, that this praise comes from a swine-herd; for Eurymachus, a suitor, and a courtier, compliments Penelope, by telling her, that she was more accomplished in mind, handsomer, and LARGER, than other women:
ἐπει περιεσσι γυναικων
Ειδός τε, ΜΕΓΕΘΟΣ τε, ἰδε φρενας ἔνδον ἐἴσας.
Od. Σ. 248.
And, indeed, when Minerva, that Penelope might fascinate the suitors, anointed her with the cosmetic wash of Venus, and gave a supernatural heightening to all her charms, at the same time that she made her skin "whiter than ivory," she made her also "taller and stouter."
Αμβροτα δωρα δίδου, ἱνα μιν θησαιατ᾿ Αχαιοἰ
Καλλει μεν οι πρωτα προσωπα τε καλα καθηρεν
Αμβροσιῳ, οἱῳ περ ἐϋστεφανος Κυθέρεια
Χριεται, ἐυτ᾿ ἂν ἴῃ Χαριτων χορον ἱμεροεντα·
Και μιν ΜΑΚΡΟΤΕΡΗΝ ΚΑΙ ΠΑΣΣΟΝΑ θηκεν ιδεσθαι.
Ibid. 190.
Thus, too, of the daughters of Pandarus:
Ἡρη δ αυτῃσιν περι πασεων δωκε γυναικων
Ειδος και πινυτην, ΜΗΚΟΣ δ᾽ ἐπορ᾿ Αρτεμις άγνη.
When Penelope, in the beginning of the twenty-first book, goes to fetch the key of the repository, where the bow of Ulysses was kept, Homer describes her as taking hold of the key with her "stout hand:"
Ἑιλετο δε κληιδ᾽ ἐυκαμπεα ΧΕΙΡΙ ΠΑΧΕΙΗ.
Od. Φ. 6. —which Ernestus, who allows, that,
"manu crassâ, non benè convenit feminæ pulchræ et reginæ,"
would fain soften down into the
main potelée
of the French. Quintilian observes of Zeuxis, who drew the heads and limbs of his figures very large, that, in this, he followed HOMER,
"cui validissima quæque forma, etiam in fæminis, placet;"
lib. xii. cap. 10.
and, that he did this,
"id amplius atque augustius ratus:"
and, indeed, these ideas of the antients relative to beauty, both male and female, seem to have been owing, in part, at least, to their ideas of that majesty and dignity, which they considered as essential attributes of their divinities, and which imply superior size and strength. To tell a lady that she was taller and stouter than most of her sex, was a great compliment: it was comparing her to a goddess. It seems, then, that Shakspeare, in the quarrel between Helena and Hermia in his Midsummer Night's Dream, has, without knowing it, made Hermia perfectly classical in her resentment, and Lysander, in his reproaches:
Her. Puppet! Why so?—Ay, that way goes the game.
Now I perceive that she hath made compare
Between our statures; she hath urged her height,
And with her personage, her tall personage,
Her height, forsooth, she hath prevail'd with him.
Her. Little again?—nothing but low and little?
Why will you suffer her to flout me thus?
Let me come to her.
Lys. Get you gone, you dwarf,
You minimus of hind'ring knot-grass made,
You bead, you acorn!
Act iii. Scene 8.

62. mvp-aristotle-comment-62

NOTE 62. P. 79.

7.9 NO VERY MINUTE ANIMAL CAN BE BEAUTIFUL— NOR ONE OF A PRODIGIOUS SIZE.
I am by no means perfectly satisfied of the integrity of this passage; but no better comment can, I think, be given upon it, as it stands, than that of Beni.
"Non priora [i. e. quæ valdè pusilla,] quia eorum spectatio [
θεωρια
] momento penè temporis fiat, ac propterea spectatio ipsa confundatur; quod est, tantâ celeritate comprehendantur ac veluti absorbeantur partes omnes, ut non liceat partem à parte, ut caput à thorace, internoscere, atque adeo partes conferre mutuò, symmetriamque et proportionem agnoscere et æstimare. Non posteriora, [i. e. valdè magna,] quia, è contrario, in tam ingenti mole ac magnitudine, partium multitudo cognitionem impediat, quæ non possit simul [
ἅμα
] haberi: dum enim spectatur una, propter distantiam deperit et evanescit [
οἴχεται
] cognitio alterius; ita ut unum et totum non appareat animal."
Benii Comm. in Aristot. Poet. p. 205.
The reader may, after this, be amused with seeing what strange work Lord Shaftesbury has made with this passage in his explanatory translation of it.

63. mvp-aristotle-comment-63

NOTE 63. P. 80.

7.9 EASILY COMPREHENDED BY THE EYE, &C.
ΕΥΣΥΝΟΠΤΟΝ
—No words furnish a more striking proof of the richness, compression, force, and convenience, of the Greek language, than those which Aristotle here uses;
ευσυνοπτον, ἐυμνημονευτον, συνδηλον
. The reader needs only see to what a feeble length of periphrastic wire-drawing a translator is reduced, if he would give their full value:
"Easily comprehended by the eye."
"Que l'œil puisse comprendre et mesurer aisement et tout d'un coup."
[Dacier.]
"Qui puisse être saisi d'un même coup d'œil."
[Batteux; the most compressed of all Aristotle's translators.]
"Un tout ensemble où la vue ne s'égare point."
[Marmontel, Poetique Fr. Pref.]
Of the same kind are the words,
ἐυεπακολουθητον
—"such as the understanding can easily follow and keep up with" 156 :
εὐανάπνευστος
, of a period, "that does not put one out of breath" 157 .

64. mvp-aristotle-comment-64

NOTE 64. P. 80.

7.11 IF A HUNDRED TRAGEDIES &C.
The supposition of a hundred Tragedies performed in concurrence seems merely to be a sort of hyperbolical fling at the known intemperance of the Athenian people with respect to theatrical exhibitions; and Dacier has rightly, I think, accounted for this
exuberantia orationis
, as Victorius calls it 158 . But Dacier, and the Abbé Batteux after him, make Aristotle's expression too hyperbolical for hyperbole itself, when they translate,
"S'il falloit jouer cent Tragedies en un jour."
For if the Tragedies were only half an hour long, and played without intermission, they would have required a day of fifty hours. We must understand, surely, with Beni,
"Si centum Tragœdiæ, verbi gratiâ, totis illis spectaculorum diebus recitandæ proponerentur;"
Comment. p. 211.
which will still leave hyperbole enough.
Dacier is also mistaken, I believe, in concluding, from what Aristotle says, that it was once an established custom with the Greeks to regulate the length of Tragedies by the clepsydra, or hour-glass. His expression seems to imply at least, that it had been rarely practised, if it does not, as M. Batteux thinks, imply some doubt, whether it had been done at all:—
ὥσπερ ποτε και άλλοτε ΦΑΣΙ
. Thus much, however, as to the limited length of these performances, we may easily conceive; that when, to gratify the immoderate fondness of the Athenians for the drama, an uncommon number of Tragedies were exhibited in concurrence, and the contending Poets were apt to encroach upon the patience of the audience, by lengthening out their pieces in order to shew off themselves, or their actors 159 , the Lord Chamberlain of these exhibitions might be obliged, in compliance with the clamours of the people, to confine the representation of each drama to some limited time.

Commentary on the Poetics (Henry James Pye, 1792) (OCR draft) (Henry James Pye's 1792 English commentary, aligned to the Kassel reference edition.) focus

2.1. mvp-aristotle-comment-4 2.1

THE PERSONS IMITATED MUST EITHER BE REPRESENTED AS BETTER THAN THOSE OF THE PRESENT TIME, OR WORSE, OR AS THEY ACTUALLY ARE.

BY better, in this place, as Mr. Twining justly observes, fuperiority in mental and bodily accomplishments is rather meant than in moral virtues; a distinction which will be confidered more at large hereafter, when poetical manners are investigated and distinguished [A]. Even Homer tells us his heroes were of a nature superior to the degenerate race of men in his time. With regard to modern compositions, this rule seems to be observed in the following manner. In tragedy and the regular epopee, the characters are drawn better, or beyond the life: in farce, in pantomime, and in the burlesque tragedy and epopee, they are drawn worse; and in the comic epopee or comedy, whether truly comic, like Tom Jones and the School for Scandal, or serious, like Grandifon and Clariffa, the School for Rakes, and the Gamester [B], as they actually are [A] See note I, chap. xv. See alfo Beattie's Essay on Poetry and Music, part i. chap. iv. page 69. [B] It may appear odd to class such imitations as Clarifsfa and the Gamester with Comedy; but so they must be, according to the definition given here by Aristotle. Even the Fatal Curiofity
ΙΟΙ POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. are at the time. Such characters as Grandison and Lovelace, though possessing virtues and vices beyond common life, and let me add, out of nature, are yet not drawn with manners different from those of the present day, which cannot be faid of Macbeth and of Pofthumus, of Hudibras, and of Pierrot. It must be observed, that many of our afterpieces, though called farces, are in reality short comedies. As a further illustration of this, it may be observed that there are few tragic fables, (taking tragic in its usual sense,) which may not be rendered comic or burlesque, by altering the station and manners of the persons. For to use the words of Dr. Beattie, ' in most human cha- ⚫racters there are blemishes moral, intellectual, or corporeal, by augmenting which to a certain degree you may form a comic character, or by • raifing the virtues, abilities, or external advantages of an individual, you • form epic, and tragic characters [c].' This subject is alluded to with some humour in Lloyd's Prologue to the Jealous Wife. Quarrels, upbraidings, jealoufies and spleen, • Grow too familiar in the comic scene; Curiosity of Lillo falls under the same circumstance, though given as a perfect mode of Tragedy, equal to the Edipus, by a most elegant Critic, whom Mr. Winstanley justly calls * vir fi quis alius ἀρισοζελικώταλος,' ، see Philological Enquiries. For a refutation of this eulogium on the Fatal Curiosity, see note III. chap. xiii, [c] Eflay on Poetry and Music, part i. chap. v. page 120. See also the Effay on the Dramatic Character of Falstaff, page 158, and Phil. Enquiries, page 159. Tinge !
، Tinge but the language with heroic chime, ''Tis paffion, pathos, character fublime. • What big round words had swell'd the pompous scene, • A king the husband, and the wife a queen!'

2.2. mvp-aristotle-comment-5 2.7

'PARODIES.'

THE prefent use of this word is strictly confonant with that of the ancients, who applied it to the giving a ridiculous turn to passages in Homer and the tragic poets. There are many in Ariftophanes. One of the happiest modern instances I know is the parody of the speech of Sarpedon to Glaucus, in the Rape of the Lock. See also the genealogy of Agamemnon's fceptre parodied in the fame poem, Canto v. ver. 87. CHAP.

3.1. mvp-aristotle-comment-6 3.7

THESE, AS WE SAID AT FIRST, ARE THE THREE DIFFERENCES OF IMITATION.

ARISTOTLE, having given examples of the different circumstances by which the varieties of imitations were diftinguished, proceeds now to shew that imitations, differing from each other in one of these circumstances, may be alike in another. It is remarkable that he gives no instance of this partial resemblance arifing from the means of imitation being the fame; which is the more to be regretted as fuch an inftance must have thrown more light on what is faid of the epopee in the first chapter, and shewn more particularly in what respect Homer's poems resembled the Mimes of Sophron and Xenarchus, the Dialogues of Socrates, and the Hippocentaur of Chæremon. CHAP.

4.1. mvp-aristotle-comment-7 4.2

THOSE THINGS WHICH WE VIEW WITH PAIN IN THEMSELVES, WE LIKE TO SEE REPRESENTED AS ACCURATELY AS POSSIBLE; SUCH AS THE FIGURES OF THE MOST SAVAGE WILD BEASTS, AND OF DEAD BODIES.

I CANNOT agree here with Mr. Twining in the reason he gives for prefering with Vittorio ἀτιμοθάτων, to ἀγριοζάτων,–' the sense of the passage • itself:-which (he says) seems to require instances of mean and dif- • gusting rather than of terrible objects;' since a dead body with which it is joined certainly comes under the last circumstance, and was a usual exhibition in ancient tragedy. For we should recollect that Aristotle, though he draws the allufion from painting, must still be supposed to keep his eye on the subject he is treating of, poetic, and more especially, tragic imitation; which could never be confidered in any light as an amusement, if the terrible scenes which it produces did not come under the cafe of the illustration here brought from painting, pleasing as an imitation though disagreeable in reality; disagreeable, not from producing mean and difgusting objects, but from awakening too strongly the pafsions by affecting and terrible ones. The author of the Essay on the Sublime and Beautiful, justly observes, when danger or pain press too nearly they are incapable of giving any delight, and are simply terrible, but at certain distances, and
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. ' and with certain modifications, they are delightful, as we every day experience [A]. It must, however, be confessed, that the following remark of the fame judicious critic, is strongly in favor of Mr. Twining and Vittorio. When the object represented in painting or poetry is such as we should • have no defire of seeing in reality, then I may be sure that its power * in poetry or painting is owing to the power of imitation, and to no 'cause operating in the thing itself. So it is with most of the pieces ' which the painters call still life. In these a cottage or a dunghill, the • meanest and most ordinary furniture of the kitchen are capable of giving us pleasure. But when the object of the painting or poem is • such as we should run to see if real, let it affect us with what odd fort ' of sense it will, we may rely upon it that the power of the poem or ، ، picture is more owing to the nature of the thing itself than to the mere effect of the imitation, or to a confideration of the skill of the imitator, however excellent [B].' In the letters of Mr. Jackson of Exeter, we find an observation something fimilar as to painting. ' A deep road, a puddle of water, a bank ' covered with docks and briars, and an old tree or two, are all the cir- ، * cumstances in many a fine landscape. As clowns and half-ftarved cattle are the figures a landscape-painter chuses for his pictures; fo rough-looking fellows, wrapped up in sheets and blankets, are chofen by the history painter to express the greatest personages, and in the ، [A] Part i, sect. vii. See also part iv. sect. vii. [B] Part i. sect. xvi. P ' most
• most dignified actions of their lives [c].' Nearly the same observa- ' tion is made by M. Marmontel [D]. From this circumstance in painting, however, I have often heard a false conclufion drawn; and because the various tints of autumnal decay afford a better subject to a painter than the luxuriant charms of summer, it is not uncommon to hear that season preferred as being really more beautiful. The poet knows better; for one poetical description of autumn, there are a thousand of spring (E). As well might a real [c] Letter VI. [D] See Encyclopedie, Art. Interêt. fituation [E] 'To the appearance of spring, the imagination joins that of the seasons which are to • follow; to the tender buds that are perceived by the eye, the imagination adds, flowers, • fruit, shades, and sometimes the mysteries they may conceal. It brings into one point of ⚫ view the scenes that are to fucceed, and sees things less as they are than as it wishes them to be. On the contrary, in autumn we can only contemplate the scene before us. If we › wish to anticipate the spring, our course is stopped by winter, and our frozen imagination • expires among snows, and fogs.' EMILIUS, Vol. I. 1. 1. • Yet in these presages rude, • 'Midst her pensive solitude, • Fancy with prophetic glance • Sees the teeming months advance; • The field, the forest, green, and gay, • The dappled flope, the tedded hay, • Sees the reddening orchard blow, • The harvest wave, the vintage flow: • Sees June unfold his gloffy robe • Of thousand hues o'er all the globe; • Sees Ceres grasp her crown of corn, And plenty load her ample horn.' WARTON. In
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. situation of distress be preferred to tranquility, because it excites the feeling more in imitation. In regard to imitation as effected by the fine arts in general, I perfectly agree with Metaftafio, that to render an imitation pleasing, (especially of a terrible object, or of an object that does not of itself interest us,) it is necessary that the means of imitation should be apparent [F]. This appears in painting from the [G] greater excellence allowed to a good picture, compared with those representations of letters, newspapers and deal boards, which sometimes really deceive the eye; and in fculpture, from the great fuperiority of a fine statue, to a piece of colored wax work. Even in personal mimicry, it seems that the resemblance In painting we confine ourselves to the individual scene; in poetry we go more to cause and effect. For as Mr. Gilpin observes, the business of the poet is only to excite ideas, ⚫ that of the painter to represent them. The pencil fixes the scene in the happy moment; and ' the fading tints of autumn become perennial; but the idea excited by the poet connects the falling leaf and the disagreeable impression of decay with it, and anticipates the dreary scenes ' of winter.' [F] That which is called an imitation has always something in it that is not in the original. If the prototype and transcript be exactly alike; if there be nothing in the one which is not ' in the other, we may call the latter a representation, a copy, a draught, or a picture of the * former, but not an imitation. BEATTIE ON POETRY AND MUSIC, Part i. chap. v. p. 94. [G] Deception, which is so often recommended by writers on the theory of painting, ⚫ instead of advancing the art, is, in reality, carrying it back to its infant state. The first essays of painting were certainly nothing but mere imitations of individual objects, and • when this amounted to a deception the artist had accomplished his purpose.' NOTE BY SIR JOSHUA REYNOLDS ON MR. MASON'S TRANSLATION OF FRESNOΥ. P2 may
may be too striking, as in the story of the person who was hissed for not imitating the squeaking of a pig, so naturally as his competitor, though it proved to be the animal itself, which he had concealed under his coat. The fame circumstance will be found in theatrical imitation [H]. An actor who has really a defect, will never represent such a defect well on the stage. In Hill's Actor [1] there is a very just observation on this. • There are some characters in which a representation of old age is necessary, but even in these it is better that it should be a pre- • tended than a real age we fee. The stage is the scene of reprefenta- ، ، tion, not realities. Mr. Foote pleases more in Fondlewife than an old man possibly could: and the reason is evident: we wish to fee the representation of a ridiculous, not of a pitiable old fellow. We expect to be entertained with the follies of age, not disgusted with its in- • firmities. The poet can feparate these perfectly in the character that ' he draws; and when a person of real judgment is to represent it, he ، also can feparate all that is contemptible, from what is the object [к] [H] This does not apply to excellence, as human nature is always inadequate to our idea of poetical perfection. [1] Chap. x. page 166. [K] See Ariftotle's idea of comedy, at the beginning of chapter v.. In the Dictionnaire d'Anecdotes, Art. ACTEUR, the following story is told, on what founda tion I know not. The authority quoted is a book entitled l'Anné. Litteraire. ' An actor, • after having for thirty years played with success, in several parts, had the misfortune to lame • himself, and ever afterwards limped. In spite of this misfortune, as his paffion was for tragedy, ⚫ he concluded that from this accident he was the fittest person in the world to play Richard the Third, whom Shakespear, the author of the tragedy, had represented as lame. Our actor • flattered himself with the most brilliant success. He presented himself to the audience with • the greatest confidence. But when he came to repeat these words, " the dogs bark at me « as I halt by them," there was a general laugh, and he was obliged to quit the stage.' of
POETRY OF ARISTOTLE. ' of compaffion, and shew it singly.' I remember an instance of a French gentleman, who spoke English with the accent of his country, performing the Frenchman in Lethe, on a private theatre, with very indifferent effect. Irish and Scotch characters, it is true, are often well represented by persons of those countries, but such actors are all able to speak good English in other parts, and know how far to carry the imitation. I conceive a Scotchman, or an Irishman, whose conversation was always strongly marked by their respective dialects, would succeed no better than the French gentleman I have mentioned. To apply this to the illustration of Aristotle. Certainly the picture of a dead body will in general give no disgust, or excite no painful horror, however well executed: but a dead body might be so formed in wax-work, as absolutely for a moment to deceive the eye, and then, even if the deception were declared before its exhibition, I doubt if the spectator would receive any other pleasure than what might arise from the accuracy of the workmanship. But even in a picture, if circumstances in themselves really disgusting are added, horror will rather be excited than pleasure, as in the (L) print of a robber entering a vault to plunder it, and some engravings from Holben's celebrated picture of Death's Dance, which I have seen. The fame thing is incident also to poetry, as in a little poem on the death of a lady, which begins, ' In yonder grave my Helen lies.' The effect produced on the mind, by the different degrees of exactness in picturesque imitation, may perhaps be illustrated by the common [L] See Beattie on Poetry and Music, Part i. chap. vi. page 124, note. looking-
looking-glass, the plano-convex mirror on a black foil, and the camera obfcura. The looking-glass is the exact representation, or rather reflection of nature, without any apparent alteration in the objects, (for the reverfing them is not observed ;) and a landscape seen in it, however fine, only gives the fame pleasure as when seen through a window, except from the frame, which, if the glass is not too large, both from its artificial boundary, and confining the eye to a part of the view, will give the landscape something more of a picturesque character, than when the objects are seen without it. (M) The plano-convex mirror pleases more, as having more the appearance of an imitation produced by art, and objects in themselves infignificant and mean, acquire a beauty from this, and afford delight. But the camera-obfcura gives by far the greatest pleasure, as having every property of a picture, except that it possesses the superior advantage of expreffing motion, as well as color and figure. And I am inclined to imagine, that even an affecting or terrific object seen in it, would in some measure partake of that alleviation which Aristotle ascribes to artificial imitation. As painting imitates entirely by natural means, (I mean as opposed to symbols) it is able to imitate the most exactly of any art except colored statuary; but as its means of imitation are always apparent, the imitation can never be too exact to please, except in objects that are in themselves loathsome and disgusting. The fame may be faid of statues in stone or [M] I have not the least doubt of this being the cause why we fee fome scenes in the planoconvex mirror with greater pleasure than in nature. I am surprised it did not occur to Mr. Gilpin, who is sensible of the effect, but is at a loss to account for it. REMARKS ON FOREST SCENERY, Vol. II. p. 224. If he had shewn it to the first countryman he met, in all probability he would have solved the doubt at once, by telling him it looked like a picture. metal, ง
III POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. metal, where the material, the mean of imitation is, I think, yet more apparent; but in coloured statuary, or wax-work, where the imitation may for a short time be concealed, that pleasure is not produced, which is the proper refult of imitative art, and objects of pity and terror may be so accurately represented as to be really painful. The collection of figures in wax-work coloured, dressed, and fitting down at card tables, exhibited some years ago by Mrs. Wright, on first entrance gave exactly the idea of a well dressed assembly, and the impression remained after the illusion ceased. Nothing of this fort is produced by painting or statuary, and yet how different and superior to this surprise is the pleasure we receive from a portrait of Sir Joshua Reynolds, or a statue of Banks. As to music I am very ill qualified to treat it scientifically, therefore I hope the musical reader will forgive me if my language is deficient in technical accuracy, provided I make myself understood. But I conceive where it is an imitative art, it imitates sometimes by natural means, and sometimes by compact. Its natural means are the imitation of certain sounds, as the noise of a battle, the finging of birds, the ringing or tolling of bells. Its imitation by compact consists in expreffing forrow by flow movements, anger by quick; high and low, by high and low notes: most of these imitations are rather fanciful than real [N]. The chief energy of music, (to those I mean who, in the words of Shakespear, really have it in their fouls, and with the want of which, many who possess it so as to be tremblingly alive to its effects are upbraided, [N] See Beattie on Poetry and Music, Part 1. Chap. vi. Sect. 1, paffim. because
because they take no delight in the dexterity of a performer's execution of difficult passages ;) I say to those who really feel the energy of mufic, it chiefly arises from the power it possesses of raifing, heightening, or foftening the passions. Nevertheless the influence it derives from the combination of ideas is often mistaken both for imitation and sympathy [o]. Mr. Twining, who I believe is a very good musician, observes that the • best instrumental music,' (and I prefume vocal music where the words are not heard, or not understood, comes under the fame predicament 'expref- ، fively performed,) leaves the hearer to the free operation of his emotions on his fancy, and as it were to the free choice of fuch ideas as are to him ' most adapted to re-act upon and heighten the emotion which occafions ' them.' [P]. That is, in other words, that the effect of musical expreffion depends much on the temper of our own minds, at the time. Now that temper must be greatly influenced by any ideas that a particular strain may raise in us from circumstances that have formerly attended our hearing it [Q]. Will the grenadier march have the fame effect on a warrior [o] 'Such is the secret union when we feel A fong, a flower, a name at once restore • Those long-connected scenes where first they mov'd 'The attention.' AKENSIDE. [P] Differtation on music as an imitative art, page 49. For an application of this to the different kinds of verfification, as confidered particularly congenial with different kinds of poetry, see note Iv. chap. xxiv. [Q] 'There is in fouls a sympathy with sounds; And as the mind is pitch'd, the ear is pleased • With melting sounds or martial, brifk or grave. ، Some
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. warrior whom it has led on to battle, and a man who was never at a review? But this is not peculiar to musical sounds. A nightingale fings very differently to the perfon who has only heard it in a cage in London, and the lover who has listened to its voice in the woods in the company of his mistress, or fighed to it in her abfence. The cry of a pack of fox hounds in a hollow cover, in which the sportsman hears the finest music, is the mere barking of dogs to the sober citizen. Neither is this fympathy confined to sound, it is equally active in the objects of the other senses. Roufseau says [R], 'I do not know whether to congratulate or pity the man of wisdom, but insensibility, whose bosom was never agi- • tated by the odour of the flowers that adorned the bosom of his • mistress.' From this association of ideas, however, music derives a power very much resembling imitation, and which has a very strong effect on the < Some chord in unison with what we hear ' Is touch'd within us, and the heart replies, • How foft the music of the evening bells < Falling at intervals upon the ear * In cadence sweet! Now dying all away, • Now pealing loud again, and louder still * Clear and fonorous as the gale comes on. * With easy force it opens all the cells Where memory flept; wherever I have heard • A kindred melody, the scene recurs, ' And with it all its pleasures.' COWPER. This kind of recollection resembles imitation in making pleasing objects afford additional pleasure, and in throwing some pleasure over melancholy objects, which last also will be equally destroyed in both if the sensation is too strong. [R] Emilius, Vol. 1. Part 1. paffions.
passions. The RANS DES VACHES, mentioned by Rousseau in his Dictionary of Mufic, though without any thing striking in the composition, has such a powerful influence over the Swiss, and impresses them with so violent a defire to return to their own country, that it is forbidden to be played in the Swiss regiments in the French service, on pain of death. There is also another circumftance relating to music, which makes it in some instances more than imitation. Certain musical instruments are from custom constantly attendant on certain actions, as the organ on religion, and the drum and fife on war and its preparations; therefore when these instruments are heard, our ideas are not raised by association only, but as far as the sense of hearing is concerned an actual deception takes place. If my other senses do not undeceive me when I hear a drum and fife play a march, I conclude soldiers are marching by; and if I hear a choir and an organ, I imagine myself in or near a place of religious worship. The absurd attempt to make the found an echo to the sense,' by mentioning the names of musical inftruments in language, and then accompanying that language with the found of the instruments that are named, is very justly censured by Mr. Jackson of Exeter [s]. There is a ridiculous instance of a musical pun of this kind in a fong of that agreeable compofer, Dibden, in the Padlock, where, while Don Diego is finging Horns! horns! I defy you,' he is accompanied by Frenchhorns. The effect of music when combined with poetry, is also principally eccafioned by association. The notion that the words of a fong and its [s] Preface to his Opera Iv. tune
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. tune are particularly adapted to each other, often arises from constantly hearing them together. I will not dispute that some movements are more suited to one kind of poetry than another, or deny that an elegy and a drinking song require a different kind of music to accompany them; but undoubtedly the words of a song often stamp a character on the tune which of itself it would never have acquired. Since the popular fong of Hosier's Ghost was written, how many fea songs have been put to the same tune? Would not a person be induced to think from this, that it was particularly adapted to maritime ideas? Yet it was originally composed for a fong on a very different subject, which began 'Welcome, ' welcome, brother debtor.' I am far, however, from meaning to assert that music has not strong powers of exciting our feelings, independent of the subject or the words it accompanies, or any kind of association whatever, and that there is no real difference between a jig and a dirge. A particular instance, something applicable to this, occurs to me. Dr. Armstrong, in his SKETCHES, asks • Who was it that threw out those dreadful wild expressions of • distraction and melancholy in LADY CULROSS'S DREAM, an old composition now I am afraid loft, perhaps because it was almost too • terrible for the ear?' A modern collector of old ballads has however found the WORDS, and tells us he can perceive nothing terrible in them. The natural means of imitation poffefsed by poetry are few and weak, and are solely confined to the versification. Most of the verses quoted as proofs of its power in this respect, make more impression on the imagination than the ear. I am astonished how Mr. Harris [T] could give [T] Discourse on Music, Poetry and Painting, page 73. poetry
poetry the preference to music in its ability to imitate found. I should very much doubt, should the strongest instance of verfification conveying the fenfe by the found, be repeated to a person of however good an ear, who was unacquainted with the language, if he would discover the imitation: but should the music of those two airs of Handel, which begin Hush, ye pretty warbling choir,' and 'Let the merry bells ring ' round,' be played to a person of the most irreligious ears, and the imitation would be instantly obvious. But the powers of imitation by means of compact, which are poffefsed by poetry, are infinite; they are applicable to actions and pafiions, which they can follow through all their various forms and modifications; they can comprehend every being in nature or in art, animate or inanimate; and their nobler objects and extensive field of imitation more than compensate for any inferiority in the particular means [u]. But there is one species of poetical imitation, nearer to nature, and in every respect superior to those effected by any other art; I mean the modern drama well acted. In comedy, and the private life tragedy in profe, the representation is exact, it ceafes to be imitation, it is the thing itself, and therefore, to judge by my own feelings, (I can have no other criterion to judge those of others,) such representations of scenes of terror and deep distress are dreadful, they press too nearly on the mind, the deception is for the time compleat, the horror [v] of the scene is not foftened by the apparent means of imitation so as to be pleasing. I rife from feeing fuch tragedies as George Barnwell, the Fatal Curiosity and [u] See Gerard on Taste, Part 1.. Sect. IV. [v] Encyclopedie, Art. Illusion, by Marmontel. See Note v, Chap. vI.. the
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. the Gamester, with nearly the same sensation as if I had been actually present at scenes of the fame kind in real life. In the higher tragedy, the blank verse, the [w] exalted perfonages, and the inadequacy of the theatrical [x] apparatus to the objects represented, fufficiently discover the means of imitation, and the most tragical catastrophe will not be always so affecting as to displease. I say not always, because there are, in my opinion, some cafes where the distress may be too forcibly worked up even in the higher tragedy, but this will be examined more at large when we come to confider Aristotle's idea of the proper effect of tragedy, and the most perfect construction of tragic fable [v]. It is however obvious that our theatrical language and apparatus is infinitely more natural than that of the Grecian stage. And perhaps it may admit a doubt, whether even Aristotle, if he had feen a Garrick in Lear, or a Siddons in Isabella, would have given the preference to the unhappy catastrophe, or afferted that a tragedy attained its end by reading as well as in representation [z]. W In [w] It is true, the Bishop of Worcester fays, 'Whatever be the unhappy incidents in the • story of private men, it is CERTAIN they must take faster hold of the imagination, and of < course impress the heart more forcibly when related of the higher characters in life.' Dis- SERTATION ON THE PROVINCES OF THE DRAMA, page 168; and this is corroborated by the quotation of the two concluding lines of the Hippolytus of Euripedes. I have the utmost deference for the opinion of fo elegant a critic and fo pathetic a poet, but the direct contrary is to me so CERTAIN from my own feelings and experience, that I cannot acquiefce in it. 'Amicus Plato, amicus Socrates, fed magis amica veritas.' [x] See note III. on Chap. XI, and note 1. on Chap. xxvI. (Y) See Note VII. Ch. XIII. [z] Chap. xxvI. The means of imitation are as much or more liable to err from being too defective, or too apparent, than from the oppofite quality; and this I take to have been the cafe with
[A] In comedy where the effect is chearful, the complete delufion rather encreases the pleasure; and even in the serious comedy the present anxiety is alleviated by the certainty of a happy catastrophe.

4.2. mvp-aristotle-comment-8 4.9

MARGITES.

FROM the account given of this fictitious personage by Suidas, and Eustathius, he must have been an absolute ideot, and therefore an improper object of ridicule even in the grossest and lowest kind of farce. But the fragments of the poem itself, which are quoted by Aristotle, Eth. L. vI. ch. viii. and by Plato, Alcibiad. 11. especially the last, give the outline of a character that would not be unfit for modern comedy. [B] • Nor skill to dig or plow, the gods impart; • Unwife in all, he fail'd in every art.'- • Much had he learn'd but all had learn'd amiss.' The character of Mrs. Baynard, in Smollet's novel Humphrey Clinker, is fomething like the hint in the last line, 'She could read, and write, and with the ancient Greek tragedy. In the passage here referred to, it is probable that Ariftotle means to compare the tragedy when read, with the epopee, and not with the fame tragedy acted. [A] Encyclopedie, Art. Illufion. [Β] Τόνδ᾽ ἔτ᾿ ἀρ σκαπλῆρα θεοὶ θέσαν ἔτ᾿ ἀροθῆρα Ουτ᾿ ἄλλως τι σοφόν, πάσης δ᾽ ἡμάρτανε τέχνης- Πολλ᾽ ἠπίςαλο ἔργα κακῶς δὲ ἠπίςαλο πάνια. fing,
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. 。 ، fing, and play on the harpsichord, and smatter French, and take a hand ' at whift, or ombre, but even these accomplishments she knew by halves, ' and excelled in nothing.* It must be remarked, that though Aristotle says the Margites was in iambics, all the fragments we have are hexameters. But Hephæstion and M. Victorinus, quoted by Mr. Winstanley in a note, both observe that the iambics were mixed with hexameters.

4.3. mvp-aristotle-comment-9 4.10

AS HOMER THEREFORE WAS THE GREATEST POET ON SERIOUS SUBJECTS, STANDING ALONE IN POINT OF EXCELLENCE, NOT ONLY FROM THE GENERAL MERIT OF HIS IMITATIONS, BUT FROM THE DRAMATIC FORM HE GAVE THEM, SO HE ALSO FIRST TAUGHT THE PROPER SYSTEM OF COMEDY.

SO Lord Shaftesbury, 'He (Homer) paints so as to need no infcription over his figures, to tell what they are or what he intends by them; a few words let fall on any flight occafion from any of the parties he introduces, are fufficient to denote their manners and distinct character. From a finger or a toe he can represent to our thoughts, the frame and • fashion of a whole body. He wants no other help of art to personate ⚫ his heroes, and make them living. There was no more left for tragedy to do after him than to erect a stage, and draw his dialogues and characters into scenes, turning in the fame manner upon one principal • action, or event, with that regard to place, and time, which was suit- • able to a real spectacle. Even comedy itself was adjudged to this great ' master,
master, it being derived from those parodies or mock humours of which ' he had given the specimen (c) in a concealed fort of raillery, inter- ' mixed with the fublime.' ADVICE TO AN AUTHOR, Part 1. Sect. 111.

4.4. mvp-aristotle-comment-10 4.18

OF ALL VERSE THE IAMBIC IS MOST CALCULATED FOR DISCOURSE.

THIS account of iambic verse, and its distinction from hexameter, is applicable to our rhymed and blank verse. All attempts to introduce rhyme into the drama, though aided by the melodious and flowing verfification of Dryden, have failed. For to use the expreffion of Ariftotle, nature herself had pointed out the proper measure. Dryden carried his predilection for rhyme so far as to make a tragedy in rhyme of Paradife Loft. Perhaps the best specimen we have of dramatic rhyme is in the dialogue of Henry and Emma. Prior is less scrupulous about confining his sense to the couplet than Pope, or even Dryden. Whether blank or rhymed verse is the best adapted to the epopee, will be enquired elsewhere [D]. But there is a difference between epic and dramatic blank verse, the latter afsuming a greater freedom of cadence, and the frequent use of one or two redundant syllables at the end of the line, of [c] Not only in his Margites, but even in his Iliad and Odyssey.' Euftathius observes, that Thersites in the Iliad, and Elpenor in the Odyssey, are kind of sketches of the character which he drew more at large in the Margites. [D] See Note Iv. Chap. xxiv. which
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. which the opening of the Fair Penitent is a good example. In this, as in every other province of the drama, Shakespear is unrivalled. Mr. Mason, in his Memoirs of the Life and Writings of Whitehead, (fee page 59, et seq.) has given a good criticism on the excellence of dramatic language; and in his poems of Elfrida and Caractacus, a compleat model for imitation. R CHAP.

5.1. mvp-aristotle-comment-11 5.1

RIDICULE IS PRODUCED BY ERRORS UNATTENDED BY DAN- GEROUS AND FATAL CONSEQUENCES; THUS DEFORMITY OF BODY IS RIDICULOUS, PROVIDED IT IS NOT OCCASIONED BY PAIN.

MISTAKES even in language, as blunders, and provincial and foreign dialects, are among the errors of this species, and are frequently used as a fource of the ridiculous in modern farce, and even comedy; ، So though I cannot agree with Lord Kaimes, as to the cause of this. ' quick-fighted' (he says) ' is pride in blemishes, and so willing to be ، ، gratified, that it takes up with the very flighteft improprieties; such as a blunder by a foreigner in speaking our language, especially if the blun- • der can bear a sense that reflects on the speaker.' ELEMENTS OF CRITICISM, Vol. 1. Ch. XII. As for deformity of body being an object of ridicule, it must be observed that Aristotle is here speaking of the old, or middle comedy, equivalent with our farce. Such as many of Foote's pieces were, who, like Ariftophanes, brought personal characters on the stage and marked them for public ridicule, not only by their habitual manners, but by bodily deformities, infirmities, and misfortunes; violating, without remorse, the latter part of the precept of the Stagirite. This liberty, or rather licentiousness of imitation, is justly reprobated by Churchill.
• Mimics
• Mimics draw humour out of nature's fault, • With perfonal defects their mirth adorn, • And hang misfortunes out to public fcorn.' This humane qualification, as to the objects of personal ridicule, is strictly observed by Shakespear. A very ingenious critic observes, • He has given him (Falstaff) every infirmity of body that is not likely to • awaken our compaffion, and which is most proper to render both his • better qualities and his vices ridiculous.' ESSAY ON THE DRAMA- TIC CHARACTER OF FALSTAFF, Page 149 [A]. The rule of not sporting with serious misfortunes should be equally observed in comic narration. Indeed it is pointed out by nature; for he must have a heart little sensible of the feelings of humanity, who can find any thing ludicrous in the real distresses and fufferings of others, with whatever ridiculous circumstances they may be related. It is wonderful, that a people who boast so much of their refinement as the French, and whose delicacy cannot bear the exhibition of spectacles of suffering on the tragic scene for the purpose of exciting pity and terror, should approve the narration of such facts, when introduced to occafion mirth. And yet not only Scarron and Rabelais, the last of whom has defcribed very minutely, a monk kicked to death by a vicious horse, as a laughable accident; but even the works of Le Sage, abound with instances of this kind. Savage as we have often been called by our politer neighbours, our comic writers are seldom guilty of this impropriety. We have, however, one flagrant instance of it in the works of an author of [A] See alfo Beattie on Laughter and Ludicrous Composition, Ch. iii. p. 431. R2 undoubted
undoubted comic excellence. I mean Arbuthnot's Journal of the fix days preceding the death of the Bishop of Salisbury.

5.2. mvp-aristotle-comment-12 5.6

AMONG THE ATHENIANS, CRATES WAS THE FIRST WHO FORSOOK PERSONAL SATIRE, AND INTRODUCED A GENERAL SUBJECT OR FABLE.

FROM this passage it is obvious that every kind of comedy, in the time of Aristotle, was not like those of Ariftophanes, generally founded on personal ridicule; (B) and not only from this but from his obfervation in the eleventh chapter, that comic poets first form the fable, and - then add names correfpondent with the manners of the characters; and still more particularly from his assertion, that a double catastrophe, like the Odyssey, where virtue is rewarded and vice punished, is better calculated for [c] comedy than tragedy. From these remarks, and especially the laft, one would be induced to think, that comedy had affumed a higher character in the days of Aristotle than is usually ascribed to the old and middle comedy. The same idea has occurred to M. Leffing, who makes the following observation on it. • The Stagirite had feen the origin of • the new comedy, and he mentions it expreffly in his treatise on ethics, • addressed to Nicomachus, where he speaks of what is decent and what indecent in humourous converfation, "which (he says) may be illuf- " lustrated by the example of the old, and new comedy, of which the [B] Though many of the comedies of Ariftophanes are not entirely perfonal; as the Plutus, the Lyfiftrata, and the Ecclefiazuze. Yet they can hardly be faid to have a general fable. [c] See Note VIII. on Chap. XII. " humour
" humour of one confifts in gross expressions, but that of the other arifes " rather from ambiguous language [D]." It might indeed be objected, ⚫ that the middle comedy is here defigned under the name of the new comedy [E]; for before the new comedy arose the middle comedy ⚫ would neceffarily have that appellation. It might farther be added, ⚫ that Aristotle died in the fame olympiad in which Menander produced ' his first piece, and even in the year before. (Eufebius in Chronico ad • Olymp. C. XIV. 4.) But we are wrong in dating the new comedy ' from Menander only; he was the first poet of that age of comedy as ' to poetical excellence, but not as to time. Philemon, who belonged ' to it, wrote some time before, and the tranfition from the middle to the new comedy, was so imperceptible, that it is impoffible Ariftotle could * have wanted models.' DRAMATURGIE, VOL. II, PAGE 173 NOTE. Mr. Cumberland in his account of the Greek comic theatre, for which the republic of letters is much indebted to him, obferves of Philemon, * that he was fome, years elder than Menander, and no unworthy rival of 'that poet.' (Observer, No. 138.) From the fragments of the middle comedy, frequently quoted in the fame work, it appears, that fo far from being devoted to indecency and buffoonry, that species of the drama abounded in passages inculcating the noblest precepts of morality. But the deduction of Mr. Cumberland from this (F), that Aristotle has not given a just character of comedy as it stood in his time, by saying it is ، [D] Ἰδοι δ᾽ ἂν τις κὰι ἐκ τῶν κωμωδιῶν τῶν παλαιών και τῶν καινῶν. Τοῖς μὲν γὰρ ἐν γελοῖον ἡ ἀισχρολογία, τοις δὲ μᾶλλον ἡ ὑπόνοια. ΕTHIC. L. IV. CAP. XIV. [E] The name appears of little consequence as the difference is so strongly marked in the quotation. [F] OBSERVER, No. 72. • a picture
، a picture of human nature worse and more deformed than the original, feems to arife from a mistake as to the idea intended to be conveyed by the word WORSE, confidered in a poetical light. As Aristotle does not require the persons of tragedy to be better in a moral view, but only in the sense explained in note 1. on chap. 11. so the characters in comedy, on which its poetical diftinction depends, are not, according to the obfervation at the beginning of this chapter, to be worse than those of the prefent time, as to depravity in general, but only to be more uniformly charged with those qualities calculated to excite laughter than is usually, or indeed ever met with in real life. That Achilles never faid an abfurd thing, or Thersites never acted wifely, or feriously, is out of common probability; but the poet who introduces these persons, or characters refembling them, on the tragic, or comic scene, would fruftrate his own purpose if he shewed an instance of ridiculous absurdity in Achilles, or serious reafoning in Thersites; and in this sense, one is drawn better, and the other worse than human nature in general (G). I believe this rule is observed by every tolerable dramatic poet, without any notion of acting according to the precepts of the Stagirite. But though this is the general diftinction of the two provinces of the drama, it does not follow but there may be some characters in comedy not deftitute of tragic dignity, as there were evidently parts of the Greek tragedy which had not only a comic but even a burlesque cast. Shakespear has not only blended tragédy and comedy in the fame piece, but he often introduces a stroke of humour in a grave, though never I believe in a pathetic scene; and a trait of dignity in a ridiculous scene. But he always preserves the propriety of character. In the field at Shrewsbury, when Worcester and Vernon come to the king's camp just before the battle, he introduces a ridiculous farcafm on Worcester's excusing his rebellion as involuntary, but he puts [G] See Note 1, Chap. xv. it
it in the mouth of Falstaff [H]. And in the tavern at Eastcheap the Prince of Wales recollects the impropriety of his conduct, at so critical a period, and [1] blames himself with great spirit and dignity; but no such reflection is uttered by any other of the party. Yet though Shakespear has avoided this confufion of character, it would be the abfurdest partiality to deny, that the mixing the ferious and the comic, in one piece, tends to destroy the efficacy of both, and is therefore a fault. That the neceffity of committing this fault was imposed on him by the taste of the public, is apparent, from the practice of all the cotemporary writers, and if he has contrived to do it with less impropriety than others, it furely is no small degree of merit. However faulty the practice of the age of Shakespear may have been in this respect, it was referved for the next, though proud of their encreasing refinement, to produce that monster of the drama, the regular tragi-comedy; where two distinct fables, the one distressful, the other ridiculous, were carried on together; not only violating the unity of action, but making so abfurd a mixture of forrow and mirth, that as Addison observes, a poet might as well think of weaving the adventures [H] Rebellion lay in his way and he found it.' Ist Part HEN. IV. Act v. Sc. r. See Note VII, Ch. xi. [1] By heaven, Poins, I feel me much to blame, • So idly to profane the precious time, • When tempeft of commotion like the North, Borne with black vapour, doth begin to melt And drop upon our bare unarmed heads. • Give me my sword and cloak.'.
Ild Part HEN. IV. Act II. SC. IV. of
of Æneas and [K] Hudibras into one poem. This comic under-plot, was not confined to the plays of Dryden which end happily, as the Spanish Friar, Love Triumphant, and Marriage Alamode; but it also mixed with the deep pathos of the Fatal Marriage, Venice Preferved, and Oroonoko. The error of Shakespear is like that of Homer, in introducing Thersites in a serious poem, but the tragi-comedy resembles the Iliad and Margites, mixed together. The following observation of Lord Kaims, in his Sketches of the Hiftory [L] of man, having fome relation to this subject, I shall cite it with a short remark. Nothing is more evident than the fuperiority of Terence • above Plautus in the art of writing; and confidering that Terence is a • later writer, nothing would appear more natural, if they did not copy • the fame originals. It may be owing to genius that Terence excelled • in purity of language, and propriety of dialogue; but how account for • his fuperiority over Plautus in the construction and conduct of a play? • It will not certainly be thought that Plautus would imitate the worst ، • constructed plays, leaving the best to those who should come after ⚫ him. This difficulty has not occurred to any of the commentators, fo ' far as I can recollect. Had the works of Menander and his cotemporaries been preserved, they probably would have explained the mystery; ' which for want of that light will probably remain a mystery for ever." I own I can perceive no mystery at all in this. It did not depend on the taste of Plautus, or Terence, but on the taste of the Roman people when they wrote. Plautus compofed for the public at large, who were best [K] Imoinda and the Widow Lackit, Jaffier and Antonio, are more discordant characters, both in manners and action, than Æneas and Hudibras.. [L] Book 1. Sketch v. Sect. 2. pleased کو
pleased with the broader humour of the earlier Greek comedy. Terence wrote at a later period and under the patronage of Scipio, and the [M] mild Lælius, whose more refined taste preferred the infipid elegance of Menander. Shakespear was guilty of the fame error in judgement, if it was one. It appears from the account of those claffic writers which were tranflated in his time, that the Menæchmi of Plautus, and the Andrian of Terence, were both before him, and we know which he chose for a model. As for the superiority of Terence over Plautus in any refpect except beauty of language, it remains to be proved, and perhaps is no more capable of proof, than the superior excellence of the modern fentimental comedy to those less regular dramas, Twelfth Night and As You Like It. Were the plays of the two Roman comic poets to be clothed in an English dress, and performed before an English audience, near the close of the eighteenth century, by no means surely an age or a country of barbarifm, I have little doubt of the judgement being in favor of the elder poet. To return more particularly to the difficulty suggested by Lord Kaims. It must be remembered that the poems of Homer were equally open to Ennius and Lucretius, as to Virgil; and yet the last is the first Roman poet who imitated, I had almost said translated, the works of the father of poetry. Of the comedies of Menander we can only judge through the medium of Terence, whose dramas, to me, have neither humour nor intereft, nor indeed any other merit than their style, which,' (to use words applied, perhaps with rather too much severity to Virgil, by a very ingenious though eccentric writer) ' is pure and exquisite, and is the pickle that has preserved his mummy from corruption [N].' [M] Mitis fapientia Lælî." [N] HERON'S LETTERS OF LITERATURE. HOR. S NOTE

5.3. mvp-aristotle-comment-13 5.8

TRAGEDY ENDEAVOURS AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE TO CONFINE ITSELF TO ONE REVOLUTION OF THE SUN, OR ONLY TO EXCEED IT A LITTLE.

FROM this plain direction, the critics of the French school, and especially Dacier, have deduced that the action should not exceed the exact time of reprefentation, and have found out that one [o] period or revolution of the fun comprises twelve hours, which would be, at least, four times that length. That people urged by superstition, or worfe motives, should wish to give the most absurd and contradictory sense to plain and obvious passages in writings of sacred authority, to support their own systems, when we consider the force of enthusiafm and ambition, is more to be lamented than wondered at. But such a strange perverfion of common sense, to justify a dramatic prejudice, is at once an object of furprize and ridicule. If the practice of the Greek tragedy had been always in strict conformity with this rule of the French critics, there would have been some shadow of reason for their trying to accommodate. this precept of Aristotle to the custom of the ancient stage; but on the contrary, the [P] Greek tragedians often afsume a greater latitude than [ο] Μίαν περίοδον ἠλίς.. See note II, chap. vii. for some further observations on Ariftotle's definition of the unity of time.. [P] For examples of the violation of the unities of time and place, (Ariftotle says nothing of the laft) by the Greek dramatic poets, the curious reader is referred to METASTASIO'S ES- TRATTO DELLA POETICA D'ARISTOTLE. See also ELEMENTS OF CRITICISM, Chap. xxiii.. paffim. the
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. ! the rule laid down by Aristotle, or even the nature of the thing itself will justify.
The words of Dacier, on the supposed invariable adherence of the ancients to this strict unity of time, are these. They have made it fo • indispensible a law, that to avoid violating it they have fometimes done violence to the incidents.' Which Mr. Twining observes is in fact saying, that they have so scrupulously adhered to the rule, that ' sometimes, for the fake of observing it, they have been obliged to • break it.' But they have done much more, there is a unity of time marked by nature, the breach of which destroys the probability of every fictitious tale whatever, either narrative or dramatic. I may conceive days, and months, and years, to have passed during an interval in a representation, which I know to be a representation, and not a reality; but every shadow of probability vanishes, and we are instantly disgusted, either, when without any interruption of the action during a dialogue of fix minutes, fix hours are supposed to have elapsed, or, (which is nearly the fame thing,) when the space of time occupied by the drama is exactly defined, and then incidents are crouded into it which could not poflibly have happened in that space [Q]. [Q] This absurdity is well described by M. Lessing. < Do not you admire the conduct of • the piece? it is in general fo complicated that it would be a miracle if so many things had • happened in so short a time. The ruin or preservation of an empire, the marriage of a prin- * cess, the deftruction of a prince, all this is executed in the twinkling of an eye. The affair ⚫ is opened in the first act, it is connected and strengthened in the second, every measure is ▲ taken, every obstacle removed, and the conspirators arranged in the third, then follows a re- ⚫ volt, a fight, perhaps a pitched battle, and this you call conduct, intereft, fire, and probability.' DRAMATURGIE, Vol. i. p. 139. S2 In
In the ancient drama, where the action was never interrupted, and the stage continually occupied by the chorus, I must think that probability is really in fome measure violated when the supposed time of action is at all extended beyond the actual time of representation. Of this the suppliants of Euripides afford us a striking instance. Theseus marches from Athens to Thebes, gains a complete victory, and a messenger returns to give an account of the battle, during a short lyric dialogue between his mother Æthra and the Chorus. I appeal to any unprejudiced judge if the conduct of Shakespear, who most likely would have transported us to Thebes, and made us spectators of the battle, has any thing so really contrary to probability as this, or if any thing can be more unreasonable than the rules of those critics, who, because Aristotle allowed the period of twenty-four hours, or a little longer, to a drama without intervals, would, on that very authority, confine a drama with intervals to three hours [s]. [s] Le Pere Brumoy, though a staunch advocate for the doctrine of the French school as to the rigid observance of the unity of time, has this mitigating sentence, ' As the resemblance be-- • tween the drama and nature cannot be always so exact as not to admit fome difference in favor of the beauties of art, even art, to avail itself of these beauties, may deceive the spectator, ⚫ and reprefent an action whose duration comprehends eight or ten hours, although the drama • employs only two or three.' Now though the Pere Brumoy mentions particular periods of time in which the dramatic fable, on certain great occafions, may exceed the dramatic representation, as we cannot suppose he mentions eight or ten hours in contradistinction to nine and eleven, his meaning must be, that this rule may be broken when the observation of it ceases to be necessary, and that truth and general probability are the only proper judges of this law, fince, as Horace allows, • Utor permiffo, caudæque pilos ut equinæ • Paulatim vello, et demo unum, demo etiam unum. But
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. But though the modern drama, from the breaks in the representation, by the division of acts and change of scene, has not its duration marked out by the nature of its composition, yet if the period of time is defined by any circumstance whatever, and events are supposed to happen in that period, which it is either physically or morally impoffible could have happened, the error is against truth and nature, and not only against the arbitrary or the reasonable laws of the drama; and, it must be confefsed, we sometimes find our own inimitable dramatic Bard erring in this respect. The tragedy of King Lear will furnish an inftance of this kind of error. In the second act, Lear comes in, with all his train, to Regan at Glocester's castle, having been recently affronted by Goneril. From the circumstance of the storm continuing, it is obvious that the interval between the second and third act, does not comprehend a period of time, much exceeding that which really passes, and the eyes of Glocefter are put out on the fame night, just as he had relieved the old king on the heath; yet in this time we hear, there is part of a power already footed ، ، to revenge the injuries the king now bears;' and Cornwall says, 'the army of France is now landed.' This rule of natural unity is equally essential to the drama, the epopee, the fable, and the tale; it has nothing to do with the most striking flights of improbability. If a writer puts his hero on a magic courser that can Put a girdle round about the earth • In forty minutes,' it is no offence against this rule; but it would be a great one to make an army march from London to Edinburgh in one night. I have fomewhere met with an observation, that the time of the representation and the fable, in the tragedy of Cato, might have been made exactly
exactly equal, and the strictest rule of dramatic unity observed, had not Addison chofen, wantonly, to violate it by opening the play with a description of the morning; and making Juba say of Cæfar's army, in the last act, • The setting fun Plays on their shining arms and burnish'd helmets.' Addison certainly was not obliged to mark the time in this manner; but whether he had or not, it must have been impoffible to conceive the business of the play could have been transacted in a shorter time, than between sun-rife and fun-set, in the longest day, at Utica. Of the unity of place, it has already been observed, Aristotle says nothing. However, it is strongly connected with the unity of time, and depends on it: 'I mean the natural unities; not that artificial rule of never altering the supposed spot of representation [T), because the Greek theatre never changed its scenes, which is about as reasonable as it would be not to wear shirts because the ancients had no linen. During the continuance of the action, or when the exact time is otherwise defined, no greater change of place can be supposed, than what might probably happen in fuch a period [u]. But it may possibly be asked, though the Muse of Shakespear has ventured to pass the bounds of time and space,' and therefore a change of scene is neceffary for the reprefentation of his dramas; yet as no [T] See note r, chap. xvii. [U] For a further illustration of this, see the application of the unities to the epopee, note 11, chap. xxiv. See also Philological Enquiries, page 218. modern
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. modern poet ventures to extend his length of time beyond the period prescribed by Ariftotle, why may not the strict unity of place be observed on the English stage, as well as on the French stage? Perhaps it might be a fufficient anfwer to this, to say, the [v] taste of the English demands this change of scenes, but I will not rest my defence of the practice of our stage on this, or on the fuperiority of the theatrical decoration from a variety of well painted [w] scenes, but from the fuperior probability of the play, and the removal of one great and unfurmountable, or, at least, as yet unfurmounted difficulty attending the strict observance of the unity of place, the bringing in and sending out the characters with propriety. And I chuse to do this, in the words of a writer, who cannot be influenced by national prejudices, in favour of either the French or English theatre [x]. • To confefs the truth, the English, [v] Of the taste of the English in this refpect, the following anecdote is a ftriking proof. • In the play of Phædra and Hippolytus, the author has observed the unity of place so well, ⚫ that all the scenes are exhibited in one spot, in an outer court of the palace. Mr. Garrick • faw this; he had a good scene prepared, and it stood the whole time of the play. The ma- ، nager was right; critics will say, the author was right, but the audience were disgufted." HILL'S Actor, page 255. However much the manager might think himself in the right, he found it prudent, on a subsequent occafion, to change his conduct. Mr. Whitehead, in his SCHOOL FOR LOVERS, observed the strict unity of place, and the whole action passes in a garden; but Mr. Garrick introduced a change of fcene in the representation, and he concludes his prologue to the comedy, after some humorous obfervations on the taste of the audience and the perfeverance of the poet, with these lines: • Still he persists-and let him-ENTRE NOUS • I know your tastes, and will indulge them too. • Change you shall have; so set your hearts at ease; WRITE AS HE will, we'll ACT it as you please.. [w] See note v, chap. vi. [x] Schlegel, a German dramatic poet, cited by M. Lessing in his Dramaturgie, vol. i. p. 215. who
• who do not pride themselves in observing the unity of place, obferve • it for the most part better than the French, who boast so much of • their strict adherence to the rules of Aristotle. It little imports, that • the decoration of the scene does not change, but it is of confequence ⚫ that the reason should be obvious why the perfons who enter should • find themselves exactly in that given spot, instead of remaining where they were. When a character behaves as the inhabitant and master • of an apartment, where, just before, another has been affuming the • fame appearance of authority, and talking with the greatest confiden- • tial freedom to his friend, without its being brought about by any ، probable means; in short, when the characters come into the room, or the garden, merely to appear on the stage, the author of the tragedy would do better, instead of writing, "the scene is in the chamber " of Climene," to say, "the scene is in the theatre." Or, to ، speak serioufly, it certainly would be more reasonable, if the author, according to the English custom, had changed the scene from one • house to another, and conducted the spectator to the hero, instead of obliging the hero to appear in a place where he has nothing at all to • do, for the purpose of amufing the spectator.' The false reasoning of the French critics, and their followers in this country, has arifen from the mistaken notion that dramatic imitation ever was, or ever could be a real deception. We are affected by the general probability of the incidents arranged by the poet, in such a manner as to render the impression of those he intends should work on the paffions, most forcible, by foftening, or fuppreffing, every circumstance which might at all interfere with the passions he wishes to excite; and this, when accompanied by the recitation and action of a good player, must have the strongest effect on the spectator; but as to real deception,
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. deception, in the most empassioned scene of Lear, acted by Garrick, it never for an instant existed. The means of imitation were always apparent, or, to speak in the language of a late commentator, • It is false ' that any representation is mistaken for reality; that any dramatic fable, ⚫ in its materiality, was ever credible, or, for a fingle moment, was ever ' credited [B].' [B] Dr. Johnson's preface to Shakespear. T CHAP.

6.1. mvp-aristotle-comment-14 6.1

TRAGEDY IS AN IMITATION, IN ORNAMENTED LANGUAGE, OF AN ACTION IMPORTANT AND COMPLETE, AND POSSESSING A CERTAIN DEGREE OF MAGNITUDE, HAVING ITS FORMS DIS- TINCT IN THEIR RESPECTIVE PARTS, AND BY THE REPRE- SENTATION OF PERSONS ACTING, AND NOT BY NARRATION, EFFECTING THROUGH THE MEANS OF PITY AND TERROR, THE PURGATION OF SUCH PASSIONS.

VARIOUS and contradictory have been the explanations given by different commentators of this celebrated definition of tragedy; and yet the grand object it proposes to have in view, the purgation of the paffions by the means of pity and terror, and how those means operate to attain that end, or whether, in fact, they have any fuch operation at all, has received little elucidation from their combined enquiries. To entertain any hope of success where so many persons of the highest literary reputation have failed, would be a great degree of presumption. I shall therefore only state, with all the diffidence due where so little is certainty, and fo much conjecture, what appears to me, from all that can be collected on the fubject, the real notion of Aristotle as to the means and the effect of purging the paffions; and enquire how far that notion is founded in nature and confirmed by experience; allowing for the lapfe of time, and the consequent alteration of manners and opinions. Any
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. Any obscurity in an author, especially if it relates to his particular judgment on any general subject [A], will be most likely to receive light from comparifon with his other works, of which our critic has left us an ample store. Indeed, these have been so long, and so univerfally, the objects of scholaftic disquisition, that one should have imagined every correfpondent, and every discordant passage, would have long fince been collated and examined. But as M. Leffing (who strongly [в] recommends this method of illustration,) observes, their pursuits were very different from the investigation of elegant literature. Those writings of the Stagirite which, at the present time, are the principal subjects of enquiry, and especially the Poetic, had little to engage the attention of men devoted to the study of logic and metaphyfics: and, perhaps, there are few of those whose turn of mind induces them to make the treatise before us the particular object of their attention, who would have the patience and perfeverance, to go through the various and voluminous works of Aristotle, which treat of matters so foreign to their taste. There is one treatife, however, on a congenial fubject, (the Rhetoric) which throws light on the imperfect and mutilated state of the Poetic in a hundred instances. But the present subject of our enquiry receives most elucidation from a work where we should less expect to find it. The philofopher [c], in his treatise on government, speaking of the power of music to foften and alleviate the passions, says; • Whatever paffions have a strong effect [A] In regard to verbal obfcurity, this will often be fallacious. Ariftotle has frequently employed the same word in different senses, even in this short sketch. SEE NOTE III. ch. 1. [B] DRAMATURGIE, Vol II. p. 11. [C] POLITIC, 1. vii. chap. vii. T2 ، on
، on any minds, will have some effect on all, and they will only differ in degree. Such passions, for example, as pity and terror, to which we may add enthusiasm, an affection of the mind with which fome men are violently possessed. Now we fee this last, when those sacred • melodies which accompany the celebration of the mystic rights are ،
، performed, is foothed and quieted, as if it were by medicine or purgation; and the fame thing will happen to those who are liable to the impreffions of pity or terror, or whose passions in general are eafily excited, and others indeed as far as they may be under the influence of • fuch paffions. They will all feel a kind of purgation, or unburthening of the mind, accompanied by fome degree of pleasure.' Ariftotle is treating here only of the purgation of the passions, as effected by mufic, and [D] which he professes to explain in a flight and superficial manner, with a promise to be more explicit in his writings on poetry: if this promise has ever been fulfilled, it is generally supposed it must have been in some of those parts of his criticism on poetry which are loft. But [E] M. Leffing is of opinion, that it is compleatly fulfilled in the Poetic, as we now have it. If this is the cafe, I have [D] Τὶ δὲ λέγομεν τὴν κάθαρσιν, νῦν μὲν ΑΠΛΩΣ, πάλιν δ᾽ ἐν τοις περὶ ΠΟΙΗΤΙΚΗΣ ἐροῦμεν ΣΑΦΕΣΤΕΡΟΝ. [E] 'Aristotle, at the conclufion of his Treatise on Government, where he speaks of the < purgation of the passions by mufic, promises to treat of this purgation with more perfpicuity in his Poetic. "But (Corneille says,) fince we fee nothing at all of this matter there, most of the " interpreters think that we have it not complete." Nothing at all? For my part I think that I find, even in what remains of the Poetic, every thing that he could confider, as ne- ⚫ ceffary to say on the fubject to any one who was not ignorant of the principles of his philo- ' fophy.' DRAMATURGIE, Vol. II. p. 28. only
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. only to lament my own ill fortune in not finding it; or my stupidity in not comprehending it. The above quotation, from the Treatise on Government, however, if it does not itself receive much illustration from this, or any other part of the Poetic now extant, seems to throw fome light on the paffage under confideration, and affords some clue for the discovery of what Aristotle means by purging the passions. His example of the enthusiast having his mind relieved by sounds congenial, though in a milder degree, with his own more violent feelings, leads us to fuppofe, that he conceives the exceffive, habitual effects of pity and terror, and other paffions of the fame kind [F], may also be alleviated by exciting them in a more moderate degree, through the apparently fictitious means of dramatic imitation. Mr. Harris [G], perhaps, carries the efficacy of tragic imitation a little too far, when he supposes it capable of blunting the feelings, by frequent representation of scenes of terror and distress, in the way the realities act on military men, physicians, and furgeons. Yet, however, much allowance must be made for the difference of manners, and habits. The drama might have had an effect on the people of Athens, who made an attendance on the theatre almost the business of their lives, [F] Ariftotle confines this effect to pity and terror, and affections of the fame kind (among which he includes enthusiasm,) in express words, using τῶν τοιέτων, in both places. Such paffions as love and anger, are enflamed instead of foftened by the fame means. [G] Difcourse on Music, Poetry, and Painting, chap. v. note c. which
which we can have no idea of. We know (says M. Leffing [H]) to • what a degree the Greeks and Romans carried their passion for public ، spectacles, and the first more especially for tragedy; and, on the contrary, how indifferent and cold our people are in regard to the theatre. • Whence arifes this difference, if not from the Greeks finding them- ، selves affected with such strong and extraordinary [1] feelings, during • the representation, that they waited with transport the moment of their return? On the contrary, the impressions we receive at the • theatre are so trivial, and so weak, that we scarcely esteem them worth ⚫ the time and expence it costs to procure them. We almost all, and • almost always go, either from curiosity, or because it is the fashion, or • for want of fomething else to do, or for the fake of company, or to • fee and be seen; very few go with other views, and those but feldom.' [H] Though M. Lessing speaks of the Germans, it is full as applicable to the people of this country. Indeed, he himself adds, 'I say WE, OUR PEOPLE, OUR THEATRE, but I do not ' mean to be understood as speaking only of the Germans. For we freely acknowledge that as yet we have no theatre.. [1] This must have arisen from the sensibility of the people, rather than the superior effect of the drama. The fatire of M. Leffing is directed against the infipidity of the French tragedy; for he puts the Greek and English stage together, and classes Shakespear with Euripides and Sophocles: and yet it is impossible for any people to be less interested in the amufements of the theatre than we are. The truth feems to be, that the conftant attendance of the Athenian people on the theatre, arose from the splendor of the exhibition, and its being at the public charge; and that the fuperior effect of the representation on their minds, was the confequence, not the cause, of their strong attachment to tragic imitation. The Romans were, as M. Leffing allows, equally attached to spectacles, though of another kind; and yet they have never been particularly characterized for strong and extraordinary feelings; nor were their favourite exhibitions calculated to excite them.
It
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. ! i It remains now to enquire how far our paffions are really blunted or softened, by being excited in a fainter degree, through the fictions of tragedy. Or whether, on the contrary, they are not, at least sometimes, rather heightened and enflamed by them. Indeed, this was a point at issue in the time of Aristotle, and had, before him, been decided contrary to his opinion, by Plato, who banished poets from his republic on this account. His expreffion on this head I shall give in the words of M. Twining's tranflation, together with his observation on it [k]. "The habit of indulging our paffions, in the concerns of others, will, " of neceffity, bring on the same habitual indulgence in those which " relate to ourselves: for he who has nourished and strengthened to "excess, the passion of pity for example, by habitual sympathy with "the misfortunes of others, will not find it easy to restrain the same "kind of feelings in his own." • To this objection there cannot be a more direct and pointed answer than Aristotle's affertion, as usually • understood, that the habit of indulging the emotions of pity or terror, in the fictitious representations of tragedy, tends, on the contrary, to moderate and refine those passions when they occur in real life.' TWINING'S NOTES ON ARISTOTLE, note 45, p. 240. That this doctrine of Aristotle is intended as an anfwer to the objection of Plato, is confirmed, if any confirmation were necessary, by its being first started in his own treatise on a republic. It may feem great arrogance even to attempt to decide, when such doctors as Plato and Ariftotle disagree. But as they are both defending [κ] ᾿Απολαύειν ἀνάγκη ἀπὸ τῶν ἀλλοτρίων ἐις τὰ ὀικῖια· Θρέψαντα γὰρ ἐν ἐκείνοις ἰσχυρὸν τὸ ἐλεεινὸν, ὀυ ρἅδιον ἐν τοις άντε πάθεσι κατέχειν. Plato de Rep. 1. x. Ed. Seran. 1602. p. 756. В. a favorite
a favorite hypothefis, they may possibly each be partly right, and partly wrong. Much must depend on the different feelings of individuals, as well as of nations, these depending on habits of mind and body, profeffion, or education, and those on the form of government, and degree of civilization, and refinement. The foldier will be affected differently from the mechanic, the polished from the rude, the indolent from the active. And the inhabitant of London, or Paris, will certainly have different sensations of pity and terror, from the inhabitant of the desarts of Arabia, or the woods of America. When the objects of pity or terror, whether real or imaginary, press so strongly on our fenfations as to exclude any fentiment of pleasure, they will, in my opinion, have rather a tendency to increase than diminish the natural force of those paffions, and this will often depend on the firmness of the mind, or the ductility of the imagination. But when the excitement of these passions is accompanied by any degree [L] of pleasure, however flight, the mind will acquire gradual strength to bear stronger representations by habitual exercise, till at length, as pofsibly was the cafe with the people of Athens, the sensations might attain such a state as to require encreasing force of terror and distress, to awaken the sensibility so as to cause that agitation, which is the fource [L] Hume, in one of his effays, observes, that the pleasure of being out of danger, and near it, (which he exemplifies by standing on the edge of a precipice, so as to be perfectly safe) is a species of terror so modified as to be perfectly pleasing. Now to a seaman, or a mountaineer, this would convey no idea at all of terror; and I know a person who would feel a greater dread from it, than if exposed to the most imminent danger in any other form whatever, and which, confequently, could not be attended with the flightest semblance. of pleasure. of
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. of the delight we receive from tragic imitation. And in this situation the mind may be something deadened to the fame impreffions, though occafioned by circumstances in real life. As we can only judge of the opinion of Aristotle, and how far it is really founded on nature, by our own sensations, or our observation of the sensations of others, we are much at a loss where to look for these means of decifion. Dramatic representation, we have already observed, neither occupies the time or attention enough to have any great, or permanent energy, on our paffions; and the perusal of tragedies, or other compofitions of a congenial cast, is confidered in general as the amusement of an idle hour, ready to be thrown aside in a moment on the arrival of the newspaper, or the summons to the card table. The only persons of the present day, who at all devote their attention with ardor and perfeverance to the reading compositions of fictitious distress, (and I believe their number, especially among the higher ranks, decreases every day,) are those usually called romantic young women, who dedicate much of their time to the study of the numerous tales, with which the press continually furnishes our circulating libraries. It is not my business here to enquire how this kind of application may influence their opinions, and conduct in life; but it certainly seems likely to throw some light on the influence a ferious attention to scenes of imitated paffion, may have on the force of real paffion. And here we must confefs, the first appearance is against the doctrine of the critic; the general effect of novel-reading on the gentler sex is too obvious to be doubted; it excites and enflames the paffion which is the principal subject of the tale, and the fufceptibility of the female votary of the circulating library, is proverbial. But we must, in the first place, recollect, that the passion of U love
love is very different in itself from terror and pity, though it may be the cause of circumftances replete with both [(M); and it is the tendency to this paffion, and not to those of pity and terror, which is encreased by this kind of reading. Befides, it is not perhaps so much the paffion itself that is enflamed, as the wish to feel it is created by this study. A defire of resembling the fictitious heroine of a novel, has often induced a young mind to enquire for those sensations, which, without fuch a search, might have continued for some time dormant in the bosom. So far, therefore, is love from being blunted by imitative fiction, that such fiction is often an efficient cause of its being first excited. But, in the next place, is it so clear that the paffion, of pity at least, (the terrible is seldom admitted in a novel,) is not purged and blunted in these very fufceptible minds? The reasoning of Aristotle seems to be this: the mind that has been awakened and agitated by the calamities of Edipus, Orestes, or Merope; that fees high rank and exalted character so far from exempting their possessors from pain and distress, only add accumulated weight to their sufferings, will be apt, from conftant attention to fuch scenes, to feel less from the contemplation of fimilar incidents in real life, which are seldom attended with those complicated and unallayed distresses which attend the fiction of the poet, whose business it is to select every circumstance proper to excite the paffions of pity and terror in the highest degree, and omit every event that might at all tend to alleviate or divert them. That such are the characters Ariftotle points out as proper for tragedy, appears from the thirteenth chapter.. [M] The advantage modern tragedy draws from love, confidered in this light, will be examined in another place. See Note IV. chap. хил. And
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. And Beni, in consequence of this, renders τῶν τοιέτων παθημάτων, ' the paffions of fuch perfons, i. e. σπουδαίων, as implied in σπουδαίας,' paraphrafing it thus. As it was the object of comedy to expose and cor- • rect the foibles of private perfons, so it was that of tragedy to inftance ⚫ those in persons of higher rank, and who were invested with authority.'
My opinion of the idea of Aristotle receives the strongest corroboration from the fragment of Timocles, an Athenian comic poet, quoted by Mr. Cumberland, in the Obferver, No. 106. Yet hear me fpeak. Man is, of living beings, By nature most unhappy. Life to him Then for your woes Brings many a bitter pang. • This confolation feek. He finds oblivion • Of his own griefs, whose fufceptible heart • Is gently drawn to feel another's suff'rings, • And finds instruction mingled with delight. ، ، Turn to the tragic muse, and meet relief In every scene. If " steep'd in poverty Up to the lips; there Telephus shall shew A monarch poorer, and confole your want. Say, Are you mad? Behold Alcmæon's frenzy. • Are your eyes dim? Lo the Phineidæ blind! Is your fon dead? The loss of Niobe • Shall lighten yours. Or, are you old and wretched ? • Learn from Oëneus. If unnumber'd ills • Worse than all these should press you, he who turns U2 His
• His thoughts on other's miseries, will know • With patience more refign'd, to bear his own [N].' On the fame principle with this mode of reasoning, (and I fee no cause to question the justness of it) may not the young woman, who is for ever weeping over the distresses of a Clarissa, or a Sydney Biddulph, and tracing the affecting scenes, and wonderful revolutions, to be found in the adventures of a Cecilia, or an Emmeline, have her feelings something deadened to the less interesting distresses of ordinary life; or, to use the words of Ariftotle, with some paraphrafe, may not the paffion of pity be purged of fome of its more violent effects in reality, from being frequently excited for amusement by fictitious tales [o] of woe. Much [N] I ought, perhaps, to apologize to the reader for substituting a version of my own, for the elegant tranflation of Mr. Cumberland. But my purpose required a closer copy of the original; especially in the 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th lines, which correspond so exactly with the opinion of Ariftotle. Παραψυχὰς ἐν φρόντιδων ἀνεῦρατον Τάυτας, ὁ γὰρ νοῦς τῶν ἰδίων λήθην λαβών Πρὸς ἄλλοτριῳ τε ψυχαγωγηθείς πάθει ΜΕΘ' ΗΔΟΝΗΣ ἀπῆλθε, παιδευθεὶς ἅμα. [o] May I be allowed to quote a former attempt of my own, to support this opinion? • Awake to each fictitious feeling grown, And moved by ills to real life unknown; The mind, with scenes of fabled woe possess'd, • Will shut to homely grief the senseless breaft, • And turn from want and pain the offended ear, • To pour for feign'd distress the barren tear." PROGRESS OF REFINEMENT. Perhaps the effect of comic imitation may, in some measure, illustrate this subject. Does not the representation of ridiculous characters and incidents, heightened beyond what we ever find in reality, blunt in some degree the force of ridicule on characters in life, which are never so truly laughable as the fictitious ones: for as Longinus observes, laughter is a paffion, though a pleasing one. Κὰι γὰρ ὁ γελὼς πάθος ἐν ἡδονῆ. Long. sect. xxxviii. See also Note XIV. on chap. xxv. has
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. has been faid of the tear of sensibility, and I own I should have little opinion of the head or heart of any person, and especially of a woman, that could laugh over Clariffa, or fit with dry eyes, while Mrs. Siddons was acting Isabella or Belvidera. But these tears are the means, and not the end; or, to pursue the medical metaphor of Aristotle, they are the operation of the medicine, and not its final effect; neither are these feelings always a test of real humanity. Rousseau observes somewhere, that the tears which we shed for fictitious forrow, are admirably ' adapted to make us proud of all the virtues we do not possess.' Some very humane and benevolent men are fond of being present at executions; and others will feel for distress on the stage, without having, in reality, any humanity at all. Plutarch, in his Life of Pelopidas, and in his treatise on the Fortune of Alexander, relates an anecdote of Alexander, king of Phærea, one of the most cruel tyrants of antiquity, who, on being moved to tears by the representation of a tragedy of Euripides, left the theatre with confufion, ashamed to discover, that he who was insensible to the fufferings of his people, should be so strongly affected by the distresses of [P] Hecuba and Andromache. [P] These are the characters Plutarch mentions in the Life of Pelopidas, where he names the Troades as the tragedy: but in the treatise on the Fortune of Alexander, he names Hecuba and Polyxena, which last character is not in the Troades, but in the tragedy of Hecuba. Mr. Upton, in his note on this line in Hamlet, ' What's Hecuba to him, or he to Hecuba,' observes, that it is plain Shakespear alludes to this anecdote, which, confidering how much Shakespear appears to be converfant with Plutarch, (all of whose works were translated in his time) seems highly probable. Though there is a confiderable difference in the application, as the emotion of a performer is mentioned by Shakespear, and Alexander was a spectator. If Hamlet himself had been moved by the recital, it would have been more germane to the allufion. Before
Before I conclude this part of my fubject, I will hazard a quotation from a very intelligent financier and statefman, (M. Pinto) on the effect of the universal prevalence of cards on modern manners, as I conceive it is by no means foreign to our present enquiry. It is part of a letter, printed at the end of his treatise on Circulation and Credit. • The magic of cards forms a common focus of almost all the passions in miniature. They all find there, if I may use the expreffion, their proper food. It is true that every thing there is microscopic, and more illufive than common illufions are; a confused idea of happiness ' and mifery is found there. The sphere of the paffions is reduced, concentred, and drawn into a narrower circle; all the paffions in a manner entangle themselves, evaporate and spend themselves at a diftance from their fource and their proper object; restlessness, leifure, idleness, avarice and ambition, devour in common an unsubstantial food, which enervates their force and their activity.' The ESSAY ON THE END OF TRAGEDY, ACCORDING TO ARIS- TOTLE, by profeffor Moore, of Glasgow, which is mentioned by Mr. Twining, is an ingenious, but unfuccefsful attempt to reconcile this passage with his own hypothefis, that the end of tragedy is the awakening the mind, to a sense of the evils attending errors of conduct in human life, and to cause, by the pity and terror they occafion, an exemption or removal of fuch calamities from themselves. I once had the book, but as it was at a time when I had no particular interest in its contents, it made but a flight impreffion on my mind, and having lost it, I have never been able to procure a fecond copy. His chief argument, I remember, rests on παθημάτα, being generally used not for passions, but actual misfortunes; and he cites various inftances from Ariftotle and other writers. But
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. But though there can be no reasonable doubt, I think, of the meaning of Aristotle, yet it by no means follows, but that the hypothesis of Dr. Moore, though not that of Aristotle, may be still more congenial with modern tragedy, whose end I cannot conceive to be the purging of the paffions of pity and fear. But this will be much more fully treated of, when we come to speak of Aristotle's opinion of the proper tragic catastrophe.

6.2. mvp-aristotle-comment-15 6.3

SOME PARTS ATTAIN THEIR END BY VERSE ALONE, AND OTHERS HAVE THE ASSISTANCE OF MUSIC.

IT seems impoffible for any thing to be more clearly expressed than this; for Ariftotle, contrary to his general custom, has been particularly careful in defining the precise meaning of the two words he uses, μέτρον and μέλος ; and he also expressly says, they are employed separately. Yet notwithstanding this, many critics are decidedly of opinion, that the Greek tragedies were fung throughout, and the distinction between the dialogue and the choral odes, was exactly the fame with that between the recitative and the airs in the Italian opera; and, in support of this opinion, they draw many arguments from the accounts given by ancient writers on the manner of performing the Greek tragedy. Being not very well acquainted with the technical language of the music of my own country, I cannot be supposed to be a critic in that of Greece. Under this disadvantage, it is with diffidence I attempt to reconcile this positive declaration of Ariftotle, with those passages in other writers, which appear to contradict it, and which the reader will find in Metaftafio's ESTRATTO DELLA POETICA. The
The ancient theatres (2) were of such a vast extent, besides being open at the top, that it was impoffible for the human voice to fill them in its natural pitch; in consequence of which, it was absolutely necessary to employ artificial means to encrease its force, and the dramatic [R] mask was invented, which, in some measure, acted as a speaking trumpet: but as this must destroy all natural modulation of the voice, it was found necessary to supply this defect by an [s] artificial notation of found, and to render this more distinct and loud, it was very probably attended by fome flight inftrumental accompaniment, but folely for the purpose of encreasing and regulating the found of the voice, and not to produce any musical effect; and this was equally applicable to the [T] quick repartee of the dialogue, as to the longer monologue. It must be observed, that Ariftotle does not fimply say, that tragedy EM- PLOYS music and verse separately, but that it ATTAINS ITS END by [Q] See Note VII. chap. XIII. [R] The mask had fomething very fingular. The immenfe aperture of the mouth was ' so contrived as to augment the found of the voice; it was in effect a real speaking trumpet, (porte voix) necessary to fill the wide extent of the place, as well as the brazen vases which ▲ were placed in the intervals of the theatre.' BRUMOY. [s] For a curious obfervation of Dr. Francklin on this practice of the ancients, fee note I. [T] ' If, as Ariftotle seems plainly to say, fome part of the Greek tragedy was spoken like ⚫ our tragic declamation, without any musical accompaniment, it was, most probably, that part of the dialogue which is in every tragedy easily diftinguished from the rest, by its being ' carried on in a fort of quick repartee of verse to verse.' TWINING, note 46, page 245- Whether the monologues, or long speeches, the μακραὶ ῥήσεις, as Plato calls them, were ' performed in the fame way as the rest of the dialogue, or, as has been imagined, were ' diftinguished by being more measured, or musical, is a point not easily cleared up.' IBID. page 247. them
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. them separately, in their respective parts; using the word περαίνεσθαι, which he has just before applied to the accomplishment of its final purpose, the refinement of the paffions. Therefore, in those parts, where verse only is used, though tragedy might be compelled, from fome incidental cause, to employ accompaniment, he does not confider it as effential to the performance and effect, as he does in those parts where the end of tragedy is attained by music [u]. What Metaftafio says on this subject, is well worth our attention. He is very fanguine in the notion, that the whole composition of the ancient tragedy was musical, following the opinion of his countryman Castelvetro, which he quotes. His reasoning on this subject is founded on the idea, that all recitation must adopt some kind of tune different from the common cadence of speech. A voice,' he says, to be • heard by a number of people to whom it is addressed, must be fo exceffively altered from its natural system, that it must necessarily be regulated differently, according to the different orders of its new proportions, (that is, I suppose, according to the extent it is necessary, from the fize of the place, or the number of the auditors, to give it,) * otherwise it will form a wild, dissonant, and ridiculous scream; this new regulation must be music, and this music is so necessary to whoever speaks in public, that if it is not supplied by art, nature herself suggests it. There is no orator that does not fing; no cryer, no public vender of any merchandize, that is not conftrained, for the purpose ' of making himself heard, either to adopt, or form, according to his own caprice, some kind of tune. Even those actors who pretend to [υ] Διὰ μέλος. X recite C
recite verfe without music, are obliged to invent one which they call • declamation: music, indeed, but very imperfect, since it is only regu- • lated by the uncertain judgement of the reciter's ear. This natural ، proof, which is as clear as it is true, joined to an infinite number of others which confirm it, discovers the error of those critics who have pofitively decided, that no part of the ancient drama was sung except the chorus.' ESTRATTO DELLA POETICA, page 52. Now after all, this only proves, or rather corroborates the truth of my conjecture, that, as when the voice is carried to an extent beyond its natural pitch, it will necessarily adopt some unnatural tone; so it is highly probable that recitation in the ancient theatres, whose size required an extraordinary extent of voice, and its consequence, an unnatural tone, might have that tone regulated by some instrumental accompaniment, which though so perfectly distinct from those parts, such as the choral odes, where mufic was employed, in the fullest sense of the word, as completely to justify the opposition in which they are placed to each other by Aristotle, might yet occafion those passages in the ancient writers, that are quoted. by Metaftafio in support of his hypothefis [x]. [x] The strongest argument of Metastasio is drawn from a passage of Ariftotle himself, Problem, Sect. xix. 49. where he describes the different kinds of music adapted to the actors, and the chorus. All the others are drawn from Roman writers, except one from Lucian de Saltatione, which is evidently intended to shew the absurdity of the musical accompaniment, in his time, which was, most probably, different from that of the Athenian stage in the time of Ariftotle; for while the blames this unnatural accompaniment, he expressly says, that the AN- CIENT POETS regulated the other decorations of the theatre as well as the mere words, a proof that the practice was changed; and Metastasio himself allows he is complaining of the effeminate music of the actors of his own time; therefore it not only invalidates the evidence of the Roman writers, but tends to overturn the general system of Metastafio, as to the merit of the musical drama.. The
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. The real motive of Metastasio's attachment to this hypothesis, it is sufficiently obvious, arose from his partiality to the opera, in which he was a most excellent writer, and which he wishes to shew was a lineal, and legitimate offspring, of the Greek tragedy, as most probably it was. The Roman theatre having turned the neceffary means of modulating the voice, in so large and open a room, into a real musical accompaniment, which the Italian theatre retained as an ornament after it ceased to be abfolutely requifite. But the fize of the modern theatre (v) is by no means such as to require any unnatural elevation of the voice. And as to the necessity of every person speaking in a tone, who addresses a public assembly, it certainly is not founded on fact. A member of parliament, who was to address the house of commons, or even his constituents, in any thing like a tone, or tune, would not be heard a moment. Indeed the substitution of modulated, for empassioned accent, or, in other words, the laying any emphafis of any kind, but what the sense, or rather the expreffion of the sense requires, is a certain unerring proof that the speaker is delivering what he has before committed to memory. I have heard many good preachers; but I never heard one who did not, in the course of a fermon, lay the [z] emphasis often on places contrary to the sense. I have heard (Y) I mean the theatres of this country, used for the representation of the regular drama. The theatres of Italy, especially those at Naples, Turin, and Milan, may require modulated recitation to fill them with propriety. [z] By emphasis here, I mean the distinction of words in a fentence, and not of fyllables in a word, which, I think, both Dr. Beattie and Mr. Nares have erroneoufly confounded with accent. For a further attempt to illustrate this subject, the reader is referred to note II. chap. xx. as
as many bad speakers in parliament; but I never heard one who was speaking on the subject in debate without premeditation, that ever placed the emphafis contrary to the sense he meant to convey; and in common conversation the emphasis was never yet laid improperly. As to the tone used by the venders of merchandize, we allow a kind of fong to the cryers of oysters and mackrel; but an auctioneer, who attempted to adopt one, would certainly be laughed at. And fince the days of Garrick [A], all unnatural declamation has been entirely banished from our theatres. The probability and excellence of the musical drama is also defended by Metastasio on another principle, with which, as a general rule, I perfectly agree, viz. That an imitator, who does not undertake to pro- • duce the exact truth, but only to give as great a likeness as possible to the • material that he employs, has perfectly fulfilled his promise, and attain- ' ed his end, when he has given it every thing of which his materials are 'capable-and that it is from ignorance of this nature of imitation, that' arises the contemptuous judgement of those, who treat the musical • drama as improbable, and absurd, because the actors die with a fong in ' their mouth; as if from its first origin, language measured and modu- •lated, was not the appropriated and indispensible material of every kind • of poetical imitation.' ESTRATTO DELLA POETICA, page 87, 88. [A] However much the public may be obliged to Mr. Garrick for this and other improvements of dramatic representation, we must lament his alteration of Drury-lane Theatre, which, from being the best calculated of any I was ever in to convey found, since the deepening of the front boxes, and first gallery, is so faulty in that respect, as almost to want the afsistance of the ancient mask. This defect is now radically removed by the pulling down the old theatre and I hope it will not exist in the magnificent one which is erecting on its fite. Now
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. Now though, as I have already faid, I perfectly allow the truth of this as a general principle; yet the last part of the quotation, taken in its strictest sense, is not true; neither does it follow, because in imitations made by the fine arts the material should appear, that every material is proper for every kind of imitation, or that some materials may not be fo inadequate, or so oppofite to the imitation of the object intended, as to be entirely incapable of producing any interest. For though difficulty overcome may, in some cafes, inhance the merit of imitation, as 'fculp- • ture in marble is more valuable than in wax, on account of the greater • difficulty of the execution (B);' yet no difficulty furmounted can ever compenfate for any radical inadequacy in the material to effect its proposed end. A statue of Glycon will excite the admiration of cultivated taste, even when well copied by the easiest process; but Atlas hewn into a statue, would only awake the wonder of the multitude. Even Metastafio could fee the force of this distinction when it favored an hypothefis of his own. For arguing against the ancient chorus, he blames the absurdity of a number of persons agreeing together in the same sentiments at once, and bursting forth in a general declaration of them. (Estratto, page 236.) Forgetting that this may also be solved, by saying these combined voices are only the means of imitation, and that there is no more real abfurdity in a [c] speech being accompanied by vocal than by instrumental performers. And again, in his note on this line of the epistle to the Pifos, Quæ canerent agerentque peruncti fæcibus ora.' [B] Estratto, page 344. [c] Many of the choral odes in the Greek tragedies are in the fingular number, as spoken by one person. As in the Edipus Tyrannus, v. 1105, beginning Είπερ ἐγὼ μάντις ἐιμί where
where he is defending against Sanadon the continued music of the Greek drama, he observes, that if the contrary were allowed, there would be found in the Greek tragedy, that disgustful medly [D] of speaking and ، ، finging, which is now hardly tolerated in the [E] comic opera, as being an extravagant deformity, invented by the mirth of scurrilous licentiousness, to excite the laugh of the vulgar.' In regard to the first instance, Metastafio, aware that what he urges against the fudden coincidence of sentiment and expreffion, in the perfons of the Greek chorus, might be urged with equal force against the chorus of the Italian opera, tries to qualify it by saying, it is natural for the stage to avail itself of the pleasure of a chorus, in a facrifice, or a triumph, where the people may be supposed to fing premeditated words, or, in a popular commotion, where they may naturally agree, on a fudden, in their thoughts and expression, as in calling for justice, vengeance, pity, war, or peace. Unluckily in this cafe the theory and the practice of Metastafio are at variance; for there is hardly a concluding chorus among his operas, that is not, to the full, as unlike the sudden coincidence of popular opinion, as the most moral ode of Sophocles. And as to the people's finging a premeditated chorus, what becomes then of the material of imitation? (F) From that instant, musical language ceases to be [D] See Mr. Twining's note 46, page 245, for a complete answer to the notion of this mixture being incompatible with the dignity of the Grecian tragic muse. [E] Metastasio does not mean the Italian comic opera which is accompanied throughout and is their regular comedy, but the French opera comique (which words he uses,) and which mode of compofition, copied from the French, has driven the scenes of Shakespear from our disgraced theatre, to found their fame on the inferior, though generous efforts of a fifter art. [F] There is a curious instance of this fort in LOVE IN A VILLAGE, when Justice Woodcock fings a fong, as a fong to his daughter's lover. There is an absurdity the reverse of this, though of
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. be the language of the characters, the deception is expressly disavowed, and the performer may as well, as Bottom advises the lion, 'come forward and fay, "I am no such thing, I am a man as other men are." And ' there indeed let him name his name, and tell them plainly, he is Snug ' the joiner.' What was the effect of the musical accompaniment on the ancient theatre, whether continued throughout the whole piece, or only used in parts of it, we can now hardly judge, as we scarcely know what it was. On the modern stage it feems to weaken the force of the interest, as I think no artificial modulation can ever equal the empaffioned notes of nature uttered by a good actor. In general, the pleasure we derive from the mufic, is rather our object in the Italian opera than the intereft of the scene. It appears, I confefs, to me, that blending music with empaffioned language [G], tends strongly to weaken the energy of both, and the only way to give each their full effect is to follow the precept of Ariftotle, and keep them ' diftinct in their respective parts [H].' of exactly the fame tendency, in Tancred and Sigismunda, where the letter from Tancred, which Sigifmunda reads, is in profe. In both these cafes the material of imitation is avowed. It is exactly as if the dialogue only of the Iliad, or the Paradife Loft, were in verse, and the connective parts, like the marginal directions of the drama, were in prose. If all the other characters of Love in a Village occafionally express their sentiments in musical airs, Justice Woodcock should not be an exception. If Tancred speaks in verse, he should not write in profe. [G] It must be remembered I am not speaking of lyric poetry, but confine my observations entirely to dramatic effect. [H] Aristotle, in his first chapter, make the diftinguishing character between the regular drama and the nomi and dithyrambic poetry, to confist in this circumstance, of the one species ufing music and poetry together throughout the piece, and the other in separate places. Thofe
Those writers who have particularly confidered the powers of mufic, its merit as an imitative art, and its influence over the passions [1], have been of opinion, that its principal force does not confist so much in exciting our feelings by imitation, as in the power it possesses of caufing fuch a temper of mind, as is fit to receive the impreffions intended to be made by the poet. If this is the cafe, the chorus [K] being an essential part of the ancient tragedy, could not poffibly have been disposed better than it was by the custom of the Grecian theatre, where the leading character of the group, or the Coryphæus, was confidered as one of the characters of the drama, and took a part in the action; while the whole body together were employed as a kind of musical ornament between the intervals of the action, keeping up, and heightening the force of the impreffion arifing from the incidents, by moral and pathetic reflections on their consequences, delivered in beautiful verse, and accompanied by mufic calculated to awaken congenial sensations in the mind. M. Leffing observes, [L] (Dramaturgie, vol. i. page 44,) that ' as the ' orchestre in our theatres, in fome degree, holds the fame place with ' the chorus of the ancients, the lovers of the drama have long wished, ' that the music which precedes the performance, and that which is ، played between the acts, should agree with the nature of the piece.' And he tells us, an attempt of this fort was made by a M. Scheibe, on the tragedies of Polyeucte, and Mithridate, and executed on several dif- [1] Particularly Mr. Harris, Dr. Beattie, and Mr. Twining. [K] See note IV. chap. XII. [L] Mr. Twining makes the fame observation. The performers,' he says, 'in the orchestra • of a modern theatre, are little, I believe, aware that they occupy the place, and may confider ' themselves as the lineal defcendants of the ancient chorus.' NOTE ON THE TRANSLATION, Part ii. Sect. xxi. page 103. ferent
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. ferent theatres in the year 1736. The fame attempt, he says, was also made by M. Agricola, at Berlin, on the tragedy of Semiramis, and with complete success. I fear this experiment would hardly succeed on our theatre. It is, sometimes, very difficult for the lover of the drama to prevail on his neighbours, to suppress their conversation in the most interesting scenes of a tragedy; and I believe no musical power, lefs than that of Orpheus, could charm an English audience from the pleasure of talking between the acts. We fee, every day, the same persons, who, in the country, would pay half a guinea, and travel twenty miles in the dark, to fit in raptures, real or affected, at a concert, performed by a band, in every respect inferior to those which fill our theatrical orchestres, appear perfectly inattentive to the music at the play-houses, and who would think a person out of his senses, who should request their attention to any piece of mufie that should be performed between the acts of a play. Only one attempt, that I know of, (I cannot say of this kind, fince its tendency was directly oppofite,) has been made here, to introduce any thing, during the intervals of the representation, at all allusive to the incidents of the piece. This was in the tragedy of Zara, where, in the intervals, a humourous dialogue was to be sung by Mr. Beard and Mrs. Clive, commenting on, and ridiculing the incidents and sentiments of the preceding act. Of the success of this curious attempt, or whether the dialogue was ever performed, I am ignorant; but it is generally printed with the tragedy. Y NOTE

6.3. mvp-aristotle-comment-16 6.17

THE FABLE THEN IS THE CHIEF PART, AND, AS IT WERE, THE SOUL OF TRAGEDY.

THIS observation of Aristotle is undoubtedly founded on nature, and is not only applicable to tragedy, but to every other kind of imitative composition, whether dramatic or narrative. Perhaps there is no circumstance in which the tragedies of the present day are so deficient, as in the want of interesting action. This is, in a great measure, owing to the strict adherence to the French rule, of not fuffering the supposed time of action to exceed the real time of reprefentation. Dramatic poetry is, by this regulation, almost confined to the boundary of painting, and can only represent a fsingle scene of any great event. And this is attended by another inconvenience; for the allotted space of five acts becomes as much too great for that single scene, as the confined period of three hours would be too small for the whole action; and hence the poet is obliged to spin out his tragedy by means of the dialogue, and falls under the same [M] inconvenience as would attend a proper and complete dramatic fable, without episodic parts, if swelled to the fize of the epopee. The great defect in that [N] truly fublime poem, the Paradife Loft, is a want of interest in the fable; every character, except two, being fuper- [M] Poetic, Chap. xxvI. [N] See Beattie on Poetry and Music, Part i. Chap. iv. natural;
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. natural; and we can never be greatly interested in the distress, or profperity, of a person, into whose situation it is impossible for us to [o] put ourselves. Addison, who was determined to find every possible excellence in the Paradife Loft, though he could not help [P] seeing this defect in the fable, nevertheless makes the following remark. After observing that the Iliad and Æneid, from [Q] their national subjects, must have been respectively very interesting to the Greeks and Romans, he proceeds, • Milton's poem is admirable in this respect, since it is impossible for any of its readers, whatever nation, country, or people he may belong to, not to be related to the persons who are the principal actors in it.' Spectator, No. 273. Now, befides the mistake Addison appears to have made as to the effect of national fable, which seems to be rather the foothing the vanity of the reader, than the encrease of his interest in the action, one should hardly have supposed, that Addison could have been ignorant of the obvious truth, that every affection is exactly weakened in proportion to its becoming general. There is no distinction so great in civil life as that between a man and any other animal, and yet I never knew a perfon proud of this last distinction, though there is no elevation of rank so inconfiderable, as not to have awakened pride in some bofoms. [ο] Θόβος δὲ περὶ τὸν ὅμοιον. Poet. Ch. xiii. [P] Spectator, No. 357. [Q] It seems a national hero, in Addison's opinion, was a fine qua non, in the epopee; for he says, in his critique on Chevy Chace, Virgil's hero was the founder of Rome,' (was he?) › Homer's a prince of Greece, and for this reason Valerius Flaccus, and Statius, who were * both Romans, might be justly derided for having chosen the expedition of the golden fleece, ← and the wars of Thebes, for the subjects of their epic writings. SPECT. No. 70. Y 2 The
The fame thing happens to the other paffions. We are strongly affected by a tale of private distress, even if not extending to danger or death; but we read, [R] without any emotion, of In one great day, on Hockstet's fatal plain, • French and Bavarians, twenty thousand flain, Push'd through the Danube to the shores of Styx; Squadrons eighteen, battalions twenty-fix. PRIOR. An error of the opposite side, but arifing from the fame cause, appears in the last book of the English Garden. By making an affecting tale the principal object, the subject of the poem is thrown entirely into the back ground. The mind is so much more influenced by the imitation of human actions and manners, than by any the most beautiful description of inanimate nature, that when they coincide, if the former is not very much kept down, it will entirely destroy all our interest in the latter. The story of Eurydice, in the fourth Georgic, is like the sketch of a mythological incident, such as Niobe, for inftance, introduced into a landscape. But the pathetic tale of Nerina, and especially in the peculiar form in which Mr. Mason has introduced it, takes up our whole attention, and the embellishment of the English Garden becomes the mere scenery of the action. Who will regard the ornament of a temple who is looking at the flaughter of the innocents, or examine the perspective of an apartment, which contains a Beaufort expiring in the agonies of guilt and despair ? [R] This is admirably well illustrated by a story told in one of the numbers of the Adventurer. See also the Encyclopedie, Art. Illusion. NOTE

6.4. mvp-aristotle-comment-17 6.19

THE PROFESSED END OF TRAGEDY IS TO IMITATE AN ACTION; AND, CHIEFLY BY MEANS OF THAT ACTION, TO SHEW THE QUALITIES OF THE PERSONS ACTING.

PERHAPS there is not a stronger instance of the difference between manners introduced as secondary to the action, though arifing immediately, and necessarily, from it; and their holding the first place, than the novel of Tom Jones compared with Triftram Shandy. The masterly contrivance of the fable in the former, at once aftonishes and delights us; but though we may be struck with the high coloring of the other, we foon perceive it is laid on promiscuously; we are amused, but we are not interested, except in those parts where our paffions are engaged by incident, as well as awakened by quality; such as the admirable story of Le Fevre. I have often thought the [s] censure passed by Longinus on the Odyssey, when compared with the Iliad, arose from his misapprehenfion of this and another passage of Ariftotle; for one of the reasons he gives for introducing his unfavourable criticism on the Odyssey, he himself tells us, is to shew, how the greatest writers and poets, when their genius wants strength for the pathetic, naturally fall into description of man- [s] See note 1. chap. xxiv. • ners.'
ners [T]. Now it is true, Aristotle does characterise the Iliad as being simple and pathetic, the Odyssey as complicated and defcriptive of manners. (Poetic, Chap. XXIV.) But he obviously uses pathetic, as applied to the Iliad in the same sense with his definition of tragic pathos in the eleventh chapter; 'the exhibition of deaths, tortures, and wounds;' and not of that pathos which Longinus confiders as a species of the füblime. And to confider the two poems with regard to the passage before us, furely the Odyssey strictly fulfils the idea of Aristotle, in painting the manners through the fable. And though the Iliad, to use the language of the drama, may be fuller of bustle, [u] I cannot think the fable either so well constructed, or so interesting, as that of the Odyssey; and surely if there is only equal excellence in the first requifite, it can, at least, be no fault, to have superior excellence in that which is allowed to hold the second place.

6.5. mvp-aristotle-comment-18 6.28

THE DECORATIONS OF THE STAGE, THOUGH VERY INTERESTING, HAVE THE LEAST CONNECTION WITH THE POETIC ART.

NOTWITHSTANDING the vast size, and superb decorations of the ancient theatres, which were looked upon as a national concern, and kept up at the national expence, they were neither so natural, or so interesting, as those of the moderns. They had no change of scene; for what some critics have urged from a passage in the third Georgic, and [Τ] Δευτέρα δὲ ἕνεκα προσισορείσθω τὰ καλὰ τὴν Οδύσσειαν, ὅπως ἢ σοι γνώριμον, ὡς ἡ ἀπακμὴ τὸ πάθους ἐν τῷις μεγάλοις συἱγραφεῦσι κὶ ποιητᾶις ἐις ἦθος ἐκλύεθαι. Sect. ix. [U] See note Iv. chap. xxvi. the
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. the observation of Servius on it, in support of the contrary opinion, is certainly ill founded. [x] ' Or as the turning scene its aspect shifts.'- The note of Servius explains how this was done, either by the turning of a machine, for a representation of which the reader is referred to Dr. Warton's Virgil; or by drawing up and letting down curtains. But it appears from Vitruvius, L. v. that this change of scene was according to the different kind of drama, to each of which a particular scene was appropriated, that continued through the whole performance, and was always the fame in every performance of the same kind. The scenery of tragedy represented palaces, whose fronts were ornamented with columns and statues; comedy had the common houses and streets of a city; and the satyric scene was adorned by trees, cottages, rocks, and caves. As tragedy, therefore, was always confined to an area before a palace, and comedy to a street, those actions only could be represented with propriety, which might happen in the open air: this, however, was little additional restraint to tragedy, confined, as it was, by the continual prefence of the chorus; and comedy often broke through it, as may be shewn from many scenes of Ariftophanes. Indeed, I am inclined to think the decoration of the theatre was rather meant to imitate the scene of representation, than of action; and that the area before a palace, or public building, was confidered as a proper place for the exhibition of tragedy, authorised by the magiftrate, while a common ftreet was a likely place for the assembly of the voluntary [Y] performers of comedy; and [x] ' Vel scena ut versis difcedat frontibus.'- [Y] See what Ariftotle says, of the origin and progress of these two species of the drama, in chapters Iv and v. the
the fatyric pieces being less improved, and of inferior estimation, were confidered like comedy in its origin, as performed by village strollers, (See Poetic, Chap. 111.) On any other principle than this, (the stability of the scene, during the performance, being proved by the concurring testimony of all writers on the subject ;) a manifest absurdity must have attended many of the Greek tragedies, where the scene of action is apparently not laid in a town. Sophocles, who is called by Ariftotle the inventor of painted scenery, affords two striking instances of this kind. One in the Ajax, where Minerva says to Ulyffes, [z]' Now on the camp's remotest verge I find you, • Where Ajax' tents the Grecian navy guard.' The other in the Philoctetes, which begins, [A] ' And now we tread the unfrequented sands • Of defart Lemnos' fea-encircled shore.' It has already been observed in a [B] note on the fourth chapter, that the modern drama represented, is the most exact of any of the imitations effected by the arts; if, therefore, according to the hypothefis we have adopted, the illufion, as to objects disagreeable in themselves, was kept up too strongly, they would cease to please, and the practice of our theatre juftifies the remark. The actor does not avail himself of circumstances which are made use of by the dramatic painter with success. Our stage [B] Note 1. [Ζ] Κὰι νῦν ἐπὶ σκηναῖς σε ναυτικᾶις ὁρῶ Αἴαντος, ἔνθα τάξιν ἐσχάτην ἔχει. [Α] Ακλὴ μὲν ἤ δε τῆς περιῤῥύτον χθονός Λήμνε βροζοις ἄσειπζους ἐδ᾽ ὀικαμένη. is
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. is never stained with blood flowing from the wounds of the dying characters; for, as a very elegant critic observes, 'We ought to exclude those means of imitation which render it too frightfully and horribly true, as when blood is concealed in a bladder under the dress of an actor who ' is to appear to kill himself, and it overflows the theatre.' ENCYCLO- PEDIE, ART. ILLUSION, by M. Marmontel. That our theatre formerly adopted this practice, appears from a stage direction in Dryden's King Arthur, relating to the single combat between Arthur and Ofwald. It begins, 'They fight with sponges in ' their hands, dipt in blood; after some equal passes and clofing, they • both appear wounded.' I cannot quit this subject without paying the tribute of gratitude to the memory of Mr. Garrick, for the improvement he made in the general probability of representation, and particularly in the characteristic dresses of the British theatre. Before his time, or, rather, before his reformation of the stage, which was long subsequent to his being the chief ornament of it, all tragedies were performed in the modern dress, and even Cato used to strut over the stage in a tye wig; and, in fome instances, when this infringement of the coftumi was only partial, the abfurdity was only rendered more glaring. While Brutus and Caffius were in full trimmed coats, and tyes, Cæfar had a robe, a bob wig, and a laurel crown; and Falstaff was as much distinguished by his dress as by his humour, from the other persons of the drama. The reformation of this impropriety is become universal, and extends even to the provincial theatre. Z CHAP.

7.1. mvp-aristotle-comment-19 7.2

WHAT I MEAN BY ENTIRE IS, COMPREHENDING IN ITSELF A BEGINNING, A MIDDLE, AND AN END.

INNUMERABLE are the instances of errors as to all these points, in our dramatic writers. We have beginnings that require something to precede them, endings that do not conclude the story, and middles neither connected with one or the other. As to the beginning of a dramatic fable, it is almost impoffible that it can be included within the drama itself: as an event fufficiently great and interesting [A] to form a proper dramatic fable, can hardly be supposed to begin, and be completely finished, in the largest space of time allowed for the length of a tragic action. The greatest difficulty, therefore, that the poet labors under in this cafe, is to [B] open the fable to the audience by probable means; indeed [A] See note II, chap. VI. [B] I hear a sudden noife in the street, and run to fee what is the matter. An infurrec- ⚫tion has happened; a great multitude is brought together, and something very important is < going forward. The scene before me is the first thing that engages my attention, and is, in • itself, so interesting, that, for a moment or two, I look at it in filence and wonder. By and • by, when I get time for reflection, I begin to enquire into the cause of all this tumult, and ، what
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. deed I hardly know of any circumstance in which dramatic writers are so generally blameable. The (c) mode usually adopted by the ancients was very little better than the scheme of Bayes, to infinuate his plot into the boxes. The modern fashion is, either for the hero or heroine, to tell a long story to a confidential friend, which we can only be furprized was never done before, or else a company of statesmen, or officers, are difcovered as astonished at some particular event, or unusual order, which they are utterly unable to account for, till one of them, better informed and more communicative than the rest, discloses the whole fecret for the common edification of his friends and the audience. The advantage tragedy is supposed to have, and, indeed, certainly had among the ancients, over comedy, in this respect, is humorously defcribed in a fragment, either of Ariftophanes or Ariphanes, preserved by Athenæus, and quoted both by Mr. Twining and Mr. Winstanley, of which the following paraphraftic translation is attempted : [D] Happy the tragic bard, whose graver muse, Cautious, some tale of ancient fame pursues; Whofe < what it is the people would be at; and one, who is better informed than I, explains the af- < fair from the beginning, or, perhaps, I make this out for myself from the words and actions ' of the perfons concerned. This is a fort of picture of poetical arrangement both in epic and • dramatic compofition.' BEATTIE ON POETRY AND MUSIC, Part 1. Chap. v. [C] See note L. chapter XII. [D] -Μακάριον ἐσιν ἡ τραγωδιά Πόιημα καλὰ πανί. ἔιγε πρῶτον δι λόγοι Ὑπὸ τῶν θεαζῶν ἐίσιν ἐγνωρισμένοι Πρὶν καὶ τιν᾿ ἐιπῖιν, ὡς ὑπομνῆσαι μόνον Z2
。 Whose conduct to the listening audience known, Demands the aid of memory alone. Name Edipus, no farther we enquire; We know his crime, his offspring, and his fire. Pronounce Alcmæon, boys can tell the rest, How the fad maniac pierc'd a mother's breast. Not so, the vot'ries of the comic stage, New names, new facts, the wond'ring ear engage. All that precedes the opening of the scene, The various incidents that intervene The bard's creative fancy must supply, And clearly picture to the public eye.- His own the action, persons, manners, all, From the first opening, to the curtain's fall. In this, if Chremes, or if Pheido fail, A hiss of scorn rewards th' imperfect tale. Δει τὸν ποιηλὴν. Οιδίπεν γὰρ ἂν γε φῶ Τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα παν᾽ ἴσασιν. ὁ παλὴρ Λάϊος, Μήτηρ Ἰοκάση, θυγατέρες, πᾶιδες, τίνες, Τὶ πείσεθ᾽ δυλος, τὶ πεποίηκεν· ἂν πάλικ Ἔιπη τις Αλκμαίωνα, καὶ τὰ παιδία Παλ᾽ ἐυθὺς ἕυρηκεν, ὅτι μανῖις ἀπέκζονε Τὴν μητέρα. Ἡμῖν δὲ ταῦτ᾽ ἐκ ἕσιν, ἀλλὰ πάντα δεῖ Ευρεῖν ὀνόμαζα καινα, τὰ διωκημένα, Πρότερον, τὰ νῦν παρόνια, τὴν καζασροφῆν Τῆν ἐσβολήν. ἂν ἕν τι τέτων παραλίπη, Χρέμης τις, ἤ Φείδων τις ἐκσυρίτζεται, Πηλει δὲ ταῦτ᾽ ἔξεςι κς Τεύκρῳ ποιεῖν. While
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. While unreftrain'd by fuch coercive laws, Peleus and Teucer, win at once applaufe. The English reader, if he pleases, may substitute Richard and Henry, for Peleus and Teucer; and Belcour and Surface, for Chremes and Pheido. It must be acknowledged, there is not the same difference between tragedy and comedy on the modern stage, as few of our tragedies are now founded on known stories; and where the action and characters are the invention of the poet, they are exactly in the fame predicament with comedy. Even in those that are drawn, either from our own annals, or from popular tales, it is a very inartificial conduct in the poet to truft to the previous information of the spectators for their understanding the piece, fince every fable that is not perfect in itself must be faulty. Befides, it is very possible, as Ariftotle observes elfewhere, (ch. 1x.) that the most popular tale may not be familiar to all the audience. A defective middle, which requires nothing else either to precede or follow it, can only be applicable to fuch pieces, if any fuch there are, where the body of the incidents are episodic, and are not either the consequences of the opening, or the causes of the catastrophe of the fable. Perhaps, however, in those plays that are spun out after the solution of the plot is complete, such solution may properly be called a middle, that requires nothing to follow it. I must own, Edipus, notwithstanding the ingenious defence of [E] M. D'Aubignac, feems, to me, faulty in this respect. For if Aristotle's definition of an end, that, it requires nothing to follow it, be understood strictly, and not with relation to [E] See Mr. Twining's note. the
the particular fable only, there can be no such thing as a complete catastrophe, fince the completion [F] of one action may be a very proper and necessary beginning of another: and which is, indeed, the cafe of the Edipus Tyrannus, and Edipus Coloneus of Sophocles. But of this more presently. I think we find this premature catastrophe in the Merchant of Venice. The delivery of Antonio, and the punishment of Shylock, in the fourth act, completely end the interest of the play; and the last act can be confidered only as a kind of after-piece. Of abrupt conclusions, or catastrophes that require other subsequent circumstances to render them complete, Shakespear, like most of his contemporaries, can furnish several instances. For, as Dr. Johnfon remarks, in many of his plays, ' the latter part is evidently neglected. He remits his efforts where he should most vigorously exert them; ' and his catastrophe is improbably introduced, or imperfectly repre- ' fented.' I cannot, however, agree with the doctor, in imputing the fuppreffion of the dialogue between the ufurping duke and the hermit, in As You Like It, to any defire of the poet, to bring his piece to a hasty conclufion. Shakespear was too good a judge of human nature, to exert < his highest powers in exhibiting a moral lesson,' when his audience were in anxious expectation of an interesting catastrophe; and if he chose to bring this about by a circumstance so little probable as the conversion of a tyrant, we furely cannot blame him for throwing it as much as possible into the shade. I must, however, with Mr. Twining and Mr. Stevens, regret his forgetfulness of poor old Adam. I think [P] See Note IV. Chap. xxvi. the
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. i the fame thing has happened with regard to Poins, in the conclusion of the second part of Henry the Fourth. I shall not defend his moral character against the ingenious author of the Essay on the Dramatic Character of Falstaff; but he is certainly drawn as more of a gentleman than any of the other companions of the prince, with whom he is apparently a particular favorite, as well as I think he is with the poet. In [G] The Merry Wives of Windfor, the chief objection stated by Page to Fenton, (the fine gentleman of the play, and a man of honor,) is his having kept company with the wild prince and Poins, who does not appear in the play, though the other loofe companions of the prince are introduced, with ridicule and difgrace. The Iliad may be faid to fall under the error abovementioned, of being spun out after the catastrophe is compleated (H). Perhaps the Æneid, on the other hand, should have included the marriage of Æneas and Lavinia; for as it is now, it has all the appearance of being unfinished. No ending can be complete that does not entirely fatisfy us as to the final fituation of the principal characters, as far as it arifes from, or is connected with the incidents of the action. The Odyssey would be perfect in this respect if it ended with the twenty-third book. The last book seems superfluous; [G] I am furprized, that in the essay abovementioned, no notice is taken of this comedy. I allow the character of Falstaff is there greatly inferior to the original draught, in the two parts of Henry IV. but though it is a copy, it is still a copy done by the hand of the master himself, and from which his own opinion, as to the character he himself defigned, might be best afcertained; and I think that opinion would be in favor of the hypothefis there supported. In the important business of intriguing, many a brave man has taken a drubbing in disguife. See Note 1. Chap. xv. [H] See Note 1V. Chap. xxvI.
and has been, by many critics, supposed not genuine, but an addition by fome other hand, to make the number of books equal to those of the Iliad. An historical fable has, in this respect, a disadvantage, which is not incident to one entirely invented by the poet. For we are acquainted with fucceeding incidents which may counteract the pleasure we receive from the winding up of the action. This is not found in the unhappy catastrophe, which is generally fatal to the principal characters; but in an action which ends happily, our pleasure must be greatly abated when we know fome terrible disaster is to fucceed the temporary good fortune of the perfons, in whose actions we have been strongly interested. The catastrophe of the battle of Hexham has this defect; and I much doubt if an Athenian, that had just come from the representation of the Ulyffes wounded [1], would receive the fame pleasure that another perfon would, from the conclufion of the Odyffey. M. Leffing, in his Dramaturgie, makes a distinction between the apologue and the epic or dramatic fable, as to the conclufion. In the first, he says, the end is attained as foon as fome moral is enforced, and we trouble ourselves little about the characters afterwards. He applies this to the conclufion of one of Marmontel's tales, and a comedy taken from it, where he mentions the absurdity of calling those compofitions moral tales, and adds, ' unhappily I have never been able to discover their morality. But Les Contes Moreaux have no such pretenfion. They are not meant for tales, illustrating some moral truth, but tales, defcrip- [1] A tragedy, mentioned by Ariftotle, in Chap. XIV. founded, I imagine, on the story of his death from an accidental wound given him by his fon Telegonus. tive
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. tive of manners; and (K) are very improperly translated moral tales. Unluckily we have no adjective equivalent with the French word moral, unless we use [L] ethic; and I suppose the German has the fame deficiency; but, surely, the mistake might have been noticed in the French tranflation of M. Leffing, through the medium of which alone I am acquainted with that original and penetrating critic. What should we say of the absurdity of a poet, who, after finishing a fable completely, were to add a supplement, destroying the effect of the whole; and yet this M. Rousseau has done, in the sequel to Emilius, published among his posthumous works. As the Emilius is a kind of apologue, to inculcate a peculiar mode of education, such a conduct is like a child's taking great pains to build a house with cards, and then throwing it down again.

7.2. mvp-aristotle-comment-20 7.7

BEAUTY DEPENDS ON SIZE AS WELL AS SYMMETRY.

ARISTOTLE having, in his definition of tragedy, mentioned [M] the possessing a certain degree of magnitude as one of its essential requifites, now proceeds to explain what he means by magnitude. He first [K] See Andrews's anecdotes. I must acknowledge an error in this point, in my first edition of the Poetic, and my obligation to the Critical Review for remarking it. [L] Those works of Mr. Pope, which, in the earlier editions, were styled ethic epistles, have had their titles fince changed to moral epistles, though they certainly have more relation to manners than morals. [Μ] Μεγέθος ἐχούσης. Aa informs
informs us, that not only a just proportion of parts, but fize also, sufficient to give the eye a power of readily observing that proportion, is essential to beauty: and, as an illustration of this, he mentions a very small animal, (such, I suppose, as an infect,) where the parts are too minute to be observed. After this, left the hypothefis should be carried too far, and beauty should be fuppofsed to encrease always according to fize, he shews, that the fame defect will also arife from extreme magnitude, and the proportion of the parts will equally escape our observation. He then proceeds to apply this to dramatic action, which, he says, will encrease in beauty, according to its magnitude, provided it is not so large, but that the whole may easily be comprehended by the memory; that is, I conceive, that the connexion of the beginning, the middle, and the end, with each other, may be readily perceived and retained. And, left he should be misunderstood, and supposed to be speaking of the actual bulk of the tragedy, he says, in direct terms, that it is nothing to the purpose; for if from the practice of the theatre, the time of reprefentation, and, consequently, the bulk of the piece, should be exactly limited, it has nothing to do with the length of the dramatic fable, whose excellence encreases in proportion to its magnitude, provided it is not too large to be perfpicuous. After this explicit distinction between the time of representation, and the extent of the fable, and which seems to have been made, from a notion that they might be confounded, shall we still be told that Ariftotle directs they ought to be exactly regulated by each other? The general fondness of the Greeks for magnitude in their objects of beauty, is very striking in the examples here brought by Aristotle to illustrate his position. He can find in nature objects too small, but none too large; and he is obliged to have recourse
to
POETIC OF ARISTOTLE. to an imaginary animal, several miles in length. As for the Greeks esteeming size, and even strength, as requisites to female beauty, the cause is not of very difficult investigation. In the ancient commonwealths, where there was no distinction between the foldier and the citizen; where civil authority could not be enjoyed without military service, nor military service performed without strength of body, the having a strong and vigorous offspring was the first, and, indeed, almost the only object in marriage; for wealth and rank were feldom attainable by matrimonial connections. Among modern nations, in general, these last are the only objects confidered in marriage [N]; and even in this country, where matches of inclination are more frequent, from our great intercourse with women, and their fuperior information and accomplishments, we are attached by a thousand means, which were perfectly unknown to the secluded beauties of Greece. A very elegant critic, it is true [o], says, that beautiful objects are • small.' But though under the word beauty here, (τὸ καλὸν) Ariftotle, undoubtedly, comprehends fublimity as well as beauty, I can by no means entirely agree with the hypothefis of Mr. Burke. Surely a woman of the largest size, justly and elegantly proportioned, with softness and delicacy of countenance, mildness of manner, and eyes ' expressive,' (to use Mr. Burke's own words) ‘of fuch gentle and amiable qualities, as correspond with the softness, smoothness, and delicacy of the outward [N] Anxious to match the generous steed, ، Where strength and swiftness mark the breed, • Regardless of his heir.' Marriage an Ode, anon. [o] Mr. Burke's Enquiry into the Origin of the Sublime and Beautiful, Part 111. fect. 111. Aa 2 ' form,'
' form,' may be more strictly called beautiful, even in the sense of Mr. Burke, than a little piquante brunette, whose lively eyes partake fomething of the δεινὸν, which he confiders as a cause of the fublime [P]. I do not mean that the fize should be extraordinary, any thing unnatural, whether large or small; any tendency to the dwarf, or the giant, can have no pretenfions to the merit (Q) of female beauty. Mr. Burke, indeed, makes the exception as to the dwarf. He says, ' should a per- • fon be found not above two or three feet high, supposing such a person to have all the parts of his (her) body of a delicacy suitable to fuch a size, and otherwife endued with the common qualities of other beau- • tiful bodies, I am pretty well convinced that a person of such a stature might be confidered as beautiful, MIGHT BE THE OBJECT OF LOVE.' It is to be remarked, that the example is a male; if it had been a female, or, being a male, if Mr. Burke had confulted the ladies, perhaps his conviction might not have been quite so strong, especially as to the last position. He adds, however; 'the only thing which could inter- ، pose to check our pleasure is, that such creatures, however formed, are unusual, and are often confidered as fomething monstrous.' ESSAY ON THE SUBLIME AND BEAUTIFUL, Part IV. SECT. XXIV. [P] In this cafe, however, it would not partake of the fublime; for though beauty may be compatible with large objects, fublimity is perfectly incompatible with small ones. [Q] See Note v. Chap. xxvI. CHAP.

Commentarius in Aristotelis Poeticam (Franciscus Ritter, 1839) (OCR draft) (Ritter's Latin commentary, extracted from the 1839 volume, divided by Ritter's chapters and sections, and linked to the corresponding Perseus reference subsections.) focus

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-11

Ritter, cap. 2 § 1

Quid sit ἕτερα μιμείσθat, quomodo singulae artes imitentur homines diversis moribus praeditos. ἐπεὶ δὲ μιμοῦνται οἱ μιμούμενοι πράττοντας: haec dicit de cuiusvis generis imitatione; quod incommune manifestum sit, idem valere in singulis artibus imitationem peragentibus paulo post (§. 2.) monet. ceterum non obliviscendum est πράττειν a Graecis diei non solum eos qui aliquid negotii peragant, sed eos etiam quorum mentis animive vires quocumque modo declarentur. σπουδαίους ἢ φαύλους: nomen σπουδαῖος h. Ι. significatione passiva accipiendum est; gravis est et honestus, proprie qui in magno pretio habetur, ὃν σπουδῆς ἄξιον οἴον. ται ἢ σπουδάζουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι. φαῦλος est nullius pretii ideoque pravus et abiectus. ἢ καὶ τοιούτους: aut eos qui vulgo reperiuntur; structura abrumpitur, quod incommodum corrector quidam removere studuit scribens ἢ καὶ τοιούτους ἀνάγκη μιμεῖσθαι. haec ex editione Aldina per subsequentes propagata sunt, ut iam a Victorio "in plurimis excusis," ut ait ille, invenirentur. sed additum illud ἀνάγκη μιμεῖσθαι deest AcBcNa et Mediceis omnibus et Burgesii codicibus; deerant quoque Victorianis: nam quod Buhlius ait Victorium ex tribus libris scriptis restituisse ἢ καὶ τοιούτους ἀνάγκη μιμεῖσθαι, id ille Victorii commentario negligenter inspecto scripsit. itaque in nullo cadice voces ἀνάγκη μιμεῖ σθαι videntur inesse, absunt certe ab optimis plurimisque. num forte abesse plane non possunt? immo possunt: nam illa orationis pars ἤτοι βελτίονας - τοιούτους non in apodosi collocata est, sed protasis accuratius per eam definitur. ipsa autem apodosis deest, si formam spectamus, sin sententiam, sequitur inde a §. 2. δῆλον δὲ ὅτι κτλ. conf. Comment. ad c. 7, 4. abruptam structuram posita lineola indicavi, hacc constructionis licentia multo magis placet quam scriptura ista sine ulla solertia interpolata, secundum quam post ἀνάγκη εἶναι continuo sequitur ἀνάγκη μιμεῖσθαι. Πολύγνωτος - εἴκαζεν: Polygnotus Thasius, arte sua eximius circa Olympiadem 80., in pingendis figuris ad speciem animo inhaerentem cum omnia referret, cas humanis celsiores delineavit, Dionysius naturam ducem et normam secutus est, Pauso humilia anquirens homines quam vulgo sunt deteriores pinxit. de Polygnote videndi suntpraecipue Pausanias X, 25-32, Plinius Nat. Hist. XXXV, 9, 35. Harpocratio s. v. Boettiger in Archaeolog. pictur. I. p. 274-369. Sillig in Catalogo artif. p. 372-378. Odofr. Müller in Historia art. §. 134. ed. secund, Pausonem Polygnoto aetate supparem fuisse nonnullis indiciis colligitur. Aristophanes enim in Acharnensihus (h. e. Olymp. 88, 4) v. 854. Pausonem exagitat τὸν παμπόνηρον, atque in eiusdem Thesmophoriazusis (h. e. Olymp. 92, 3) v. 949 (958.) idem Pauso celebrare Thesmophoria ciboque abstinere, scilicet ob paupertatem, dicitur, tandem Olymp. 97, 4. (vel potius 98, 1) in Pluto altero v. 602. pictori Aristophanes illusit, eo quod Paupertas expostulatur ad invocandum auxilium Pausonis τοῦ ξυσσίτου. ad eum locum scholiasta scribit ὁ Παύσων δὲ ἐπὶ πενίᾳ κωμῳδεῖται ζωγράφος ὧν. innotuit igitur et malis artibus et singulari pingendi ratione et domesticis difficultatibus circa Olympiadem 90., cum in vivis etiam tum Polygnotus esset. tabulis ab eo pictis adspiciendis corrumpi iuvenum mores, contra emendari Polygnotis Aristoteles pronuntiat in Politicis VIII, 5. p. 1340 a 36. δεῖ μὴ τὰ Παύσωνος Θεωρεῖν τοὺς νέους, ἀλλὰ τὰ Πολυγνώτου, κἂν εἴ τις ἄλλος τῶν γραφέων ἢ τῶν ἀγαλματοποιῶν ἐστὶν ἠθικός. moralis pictor prae ceteris Polygnotus erat, cf. e. 6, 11. Themist. Or. XXXIV, 11. p. 456. ed. Dindorf. Dionysius Colophonius, Polygnoto fere aequalis, cum nonnisi hominum figuras quae vulgo agnoscuntur, exprimere posset aut vellet, a pingendis heroibus atque dis abstinuit et inde ἀνθρωπογράφος cognominatus est. Plin. N. H. XXXV, 10, 37. hic (Serapio) scenas optime pinxit, sed hominem pingere non potuit: contra Dionysius nihil aliud quam homines pinxit, ob id ἀνθρωπογράφος cognominatus. conf. Aelianus Var. Histor. IV, 3.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-12

Ritter, cap. 2 § 2

δῆλον δὲ-διαφοράς : μιμήσεις illae ante dictae (c. 1,4-6) sunt saltatio ( ὄρχησις) et musica ars ( αὔλησις καὶ κιθάρισις cet.) et epopoeia, h. e. tam ea pedestris orationis pars quae τὸ μιμητικὸν habet quam eae pocsis species quae sermonem numeris adstrictum probant, sed cantum et saltationem et musicam aspernantur, relicuas artis poeticae formas, drama et lyricum genus, mox (§. 4) respexit.

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-13

Ritter, cap. 2 § 3

καὶ περὶ τοὺς λόγους δὲ καὶ τὴν ψιλο μετρίαν: quod paulo ante (c. 1, 6) nove ἐποποιίαν dixit, idem nunc λόγους καὶ ψιλομετρίαν appellat. λόγοι h. 1. sunt sermones pedestri oratione ( λογάδην) conscripti sed simul μι μητικῶς compositi, ut Sophronis mimi Xenarchique et dialogi Platonici: per ψιλομετρίαν alteram ἐποποιίας partem comprehendit, imitationem numeris quidem decurrentem sed musica et saltatione destitutam, quam c. 1, 6. per μέτρα signi ficavit, talis est epica poesis quae vulgo vocatur, praeterea elegiaca, denique parodiae iambique. aliter hunc locum intellexit Augustus Matthiae in diurnis Ienens. a. 1805. n. 222. p. 549. quippe καὶ τὴν ψιλομετρίαν explicationis gratia ad τοὺς λόγους ab Aristotele addita esse opinatur. hoc vero et per sese non verisimile videtur et ex repetito ante ψιλο μετρίαν articulo falsum esse liquet. quod dicit ille censor, exempla statim afferri nonnisi ex poesi sumpta, id cur factum sit prompte explicaveris. prosae enim imitationis exempla allata iam erant c. 1, 7., ubi imitationes numeris instructae et cantu carentes nonnisi universe et breviter significabantur per εἴ τις διὰ τριμέτρων ἢ ἐλεγείων ἢ τῶν ἄλλων τινῶν τῶν τοιούτων ποιοῖιο τὴν μίμησιν. lyrica quidem ars et ipsa imitatur, sed eam paulo post, ubi nomes et dithyrambos memorat, designavit ita ut duabus formis totum genus complecteretur. οἷον Ὅμηρος μὲν βελτίους : quos Homerus in medium produxit viros, ii superant homines qui vulgo sunt, praecipue corporis viribus et animi fortitudine, saepius etiam morum ingeniique praestantia. valentiores et fortiores a se describi ipse significavit Il. E, 302, ὁ δὲ χερμάδιον λάβε χειρὶ Τυδείδης, μέγα ἔργον ὃ οὐ δύο γ᾽ ἄνδρε φέρθιεν, οἷοι νῦν βροτοί εἰσ᾽· ὁ δέ μιν ῥέα πάλλε καὶ οἷος. similia protulit idem duobus aliis Iliadis locis, M. 383. Y. 287. Κλεοφῶν δὲ ὁμοίους: an hic poeta idem sit atque is cuius decem tragoedias Suidas et Eudocia enumerant, dubitari potest, sed hoc dubitari non posse videtur, non tragoedias Cleophontis sed aliud eius poema ab Aristotele intelligi, nam h. I. ψιλομετρίας exempla ponuntur, tragoedia comoediaque paulo post alio in genere nominantur. sed haud dubie hic homo non diversus est ab eo, quem aliis locis Aristoteles commemoravit. primum ille in Soph. Elench. c. 15. p. 174 b 27. Cleophontis Μανδρόβουλον citavit a Suida in tragoediis eius non relatum, tum eiusdem in Critiam reprehensionem ex Solonis elegis petitam exposuit in Rhetoricis I, 15. p. 1375 b 32. in codem opere (III, 7. p. 1408 a 15.) Cleaphontem epitheta ornantia vilibus nominibus adiunxisse tradit: μηδ' ἐπὶ τῷ εὐτε λεῖ ὀνόματι ἐπῇ κόσμος· εἰ δὲ μή, κωμῳδία φαίνεται, οἷον ποιεῖ Κλεοφῶν· ὁμοίως γὰρ ἔνια ἔλεγε καὶ εἰ εἴπειεν ἂν “ ὦ πότνια συκῆ.” eius humilem elocutionem notavit infra c. 22, 1. quae omnia cum considero, verisimile mihi videtur hune Cleophontem poema conscripsisse nomine Μανδροβού 20v, quod mediam quasi viam teneret inter epicae poesis dignitatem et parodiarum humilitatem. Ἡγήμων - πρῶτος: Aristoteles Hegemonem facit inventorem paesis parodicae, florentem illum ingenii laude tempore belli Peloponnesiaci (vid. Athen. IX. p. 407 A), alii autem eiusdem inventionis gloriam in Hipponactem circa Olympiadem 60. viventem contulerunt, ut Polemo apud Athenaeum XV. p. 698 Β. εὑρέτην τοῦ γένους ( παρῳδιῶν) Ἱππώνακτα φατέον τὸν ἰαμβοποιόν. nimirum Aristoteles parodias Hipponactis, quamvis herois versibus conscriptas, in iambis sive maledictis numeravit, τὴν ἰαμβικὴν ἰδέαν 1) potius respiciens quam Homerici sermonis similitudinem. ipsa Polemonis verba ostendunt Hipponactem pro parodiarum scriptore habitum non 1) Nobilem irrisorem etiam in parodiis more suo singulos perstringendi delectatum esse non solum per se probabile videtur, sed etiam insigni fragmento constat. vid. Athen. XV. p. 698. C.esse: scribit enim εὑρέτην - φατέον, neque ipse illa carmina παρῳδίας sed εξάμετρα designat: λέγει γὰρ οὗτος ἐν τοῖς ἑξαμέτροις κτλ. minus recte, ut mihi videtur, nonnulli * existimant Hegemonem ob eam causam parodiarum inventorem ab Aristotele perhiberi, quod ille parodiis ex scena recitatis de praemio certare coeperit, ut docet Athenaeus XV. p. 699 A. eam sententiam probaverunt Floegelius in Comicae poesis histor. I. p. 383., Tyrwhittus ad h. 1., Weland de Parodiarum Homer. scriptoribus apud Graecos p. 26. de Hegemone lege Athen. IX. p. 406 Е - 407 В. Νικοχάρης ὁ τὴν Δηλιάδα χείρους: Nicocharis Deliadem compositam fuisse ad irridendos Delios, quos propter vitam deliciis diffluentem famosos fuisse docuit Apollodorus apud Athenaeum IV. p. 172 F- 173 C., acute vidit Tyrwhittus, sed idem nomen χείρους non recte accepit, cum scripsit Deli incolas magnam partem χείρους fuisse, coquos scilicet et caupones. nam ipsos coquos et caupones aliquis et βελτίους et χείρους et ὁμοίους potest imitari. immo Nicochares Delios tales ostendit, ut aliquanto peiores ( χείρους) quam re vera essent apparerent. hunc Nicocharem comoediis docendis certasse cum Aristophane scimus. vid. Argumentum Pluti et Meinekii Quaest. scen. II. p. 58. sed hoc eius poema comoediam non fuisse vel inde liquet, quod in ψιλομετρίας exemplis refertur. parodiam fuisse vel parodiae similem speciem prae se tulisse suspicor. neque sane mirandum est ab eodem homine (nihil est cur hunc Aristotelium Nicocharem a poeta comico diversum fuisse statuamus) et comoedias et parodias editas esse, siquidem etiam Hermippus antiquae comoediae poeta parodias fecit, et rursus Hegemo parodiarum scriptor comoediam nomine Philinnae evulgavit. vid. Athen. XV. p. 699 A. ....

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-14

Ritter, cap. 2 § 4

ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ περὶ τοὺς διθυράμβους καὶ τοὺς νόμους μιμήσαιτο ἄν τις: imitandi differentiam modo expositam exemplisque illustratam etiam in lyrico genere (pro ipso genere duas species ponit) adhiberi posse dicit, exempla tamen nulla producit, sive de-... erant sive hoc lam sponte liquere existimabat. sic omnia se satis bene habent: sed ecce, post τοὺς νόμους interturbant ὡς Πέρσας καὶ Κύκλωπας Τιμόθεος καὶ Φιλόξενος, in quibus Aristotelem ego agnoscere non possum. Πέρσας Timotheus inscripsit carmen quoddam ( νόμον, non διθύραμβον) ad celebrandam Graecorum de Persis victoriam a se ad citharam compositum. testis est Pausanias VIII, 50, 3. μετὰ δὲ οὐ πολὺ ἀγόντων Νέμεια ᾿Αργείων, ἔτυχε μὲν τῶν κιθαρῳδῶν τῷ ἀγῶνι ὁ Φιλοποίμην παρών. Πυλάδου τότε δὲ ᾄδοντος Τιμοθέου νόμον τοῦ Μιλησίου Πέρσας καὶ καταρξαμένου τῆς ᾠδῆς “ κλεινὸν ἐλευθερίας τεύχων μέγαν Ἑλλάδι κόσμον,” ἀπεῖδεν ἐς τὸν Φιλοποίμενα τὸ Ἑλληνικόν, καὶ ἐπε σημήναντο τὸ κρότῳ φέρειν εἰς ἐκεῖνον τὸ ᾄσμα, conf. Plutarch. Philopoет. с. 11. Cyclopis nomine Philoxenus nobilem dithyrambum conscripserat. vid. Athen. I. p. 6 F. - p. 7 A. XIII. p. 564 E. Aelian. V. H. XII, 44. Plutarch. Quaestion. conviv. I, 5. scholiastae ad Plutum Aristophanis v. 290. 298. ad Theocrit. VI, 7. XI, 1. Tzetzes Chiliad. X, 841. etiam Timothei Cyclops memoratur ab Athenaeo XI. p. 465 C. et ab Eustathio p. 1631, 61. iam quaero quid sibi velint verba illa interposita ? nimirum ut discant lectores quid sint nomi et dithyrambi, iis unum aliquem ex nomis et unum aliquem ex dithyrambis 2) in memoriam revocant, sed quid inde ad illustrandam lucramur triplicem illam imitandi differentiam? nihil, prorsus nihil. inepta sunt igitur et ab aliena manu inserta. sed quaeritur, num forte emendandi quodam periculo verba illa sustentari possint, eo magis quod ὡς Πέρα σας a codicibus non satis tutum videtur esse. ad hoc proxime accedit ὡς περγᾶς ut in Ac, paulo minus ὥσπερ γᾶς ut in Be et Na. quod ex Mediceis XIV et 14 ὡς περσᾶς affertur, id vitium typographi videtur esse pro ὡς περγᾶς. in libro Veneto et Guelpherbytano ὡς Πέρσας inesse Burgesius 2) Qui illa interposuit, is Timothei Cyclopem non respexisse vel omnino non cognitum videtur habuisse, sed ut Timothei nomen ad Πέρσας sic Philoxeni ad Κύκλωπας rettulit.apud Tyrwhittum p. 240. narrat, sed hunc falli de Guelpherbytano Buhlius testatur. Victorius Πέρσας se debere conie cturae Francisci Medices professus est. ceteri codices cum Bekkerianis illis consentiunt aut paululum ab iis discedunt. sed utcumque est, ὡς Πέρσας veram esse scripturam dubitare vix licet, sive codicum vestigia sive Pausaniae verba supra a nobis transcripta consideramus, certe Tyrwhitti coniectura multum posthabenda videatur. ille enim scribendum suasit ὥσπερ ᾿Αργᾶς Κύκλωπας καὶ Τιμόθεος καὶ Φιλόξενος, ut Argas Cyclopem deteriorem, Philoxenus parem, Timotheus celsiorem effinxisse dicantur. quae contra moneam haec habeo. 1. Argas quidem ab Athenaeo XIV. p. 638 B. (cf. IV. p. 131 B) et a Plutarcho in vita Demosthenis c. 4. poeta pravorum nomorum ( ποιητής μοχθηρῶν νόμων) nominatur, sed nemo veterum Cyclopem ab eo scriptum esse tradit. 2. cum Cyclops quem composuit Philoxenus et is quem Timotheus, dithyrambus fuerit, Argam quoque dithyramborum poetam fuisse ex hoc loco consequeretur: sed Argas erat νομοποιός, non διθυραμβοποιός. 3. qui imitatur peiores, eum pravos facere nomos nihil est quod cogat, immo in suo genere optimus esse poeta potest, ut Athenaei et Plutarchi verba nullum illi coniecturae praesidium praebeant. 4. Philoxenus Cyclopem suum non parem fecit sed infra mythi dignitatem quam maxime deiectum, quod partim ex fragmentis partim ex veterum testimoniis apparet: contra ex uno frustulo Cyclopis a Timotheo editi non liquet eum celsiorem et ad dignitatem carminis Homerici expressum fuisse, quod credidit statuitque Tyrwhittus. Hermannus coniecturam Tyrwhitti ita adoptavit ut ab illa transpositione particulae καὶ abstinens scriberet ὥσπερ ᾿Αργᾶς, καὶ Κύκλωπας Τιμόθεος καὶ Φιλόξενος. sic ex difficultatibus modo enumeratis prima et secunda removetur, sed ad duas relicuas nova accedit ex verborum constructione nimium impedita. postremo, ut redeam ad vulgatam, huc attendi velim, quam ex levi recordatione interpolator scripserit ὡς Πέρσας καὶ Κύκλωπας Τιμόθεος καὶ Φιλόξενος: scilicet quemadmodum Timotheus Persas devictos car-COMMEMTARIVS mine suo ( νόμῳ) cecinit, sic non item Philoxenus Cyclopum catervam sed unum Polyphemum dithyrambo suo descripsit. itaque non Κύκλωπας scribere debuit, sed Κύκλωπα. hoc ipsum qui reponere cum Reizio audebit, is insanabile ulcus in hunc locum non librarii oscitantia sed hominis male docti diligentia illatum lippis oculis paulum obscurabit, sed Aristoteli sua non restituet.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-15

Ritter, cap. 3 § 1

9. Tertia artium poeticarum differentia ex vario imitandi modo et ratione nascitur. ὑτὲ μὲν ἀπαγγέλλοντα - ἢ πάντας ὡς πράττοντας καὶ ἐνεργοῦντας τοὺς μιμουμένους: omnis poeticae imitationis modus in duo genera dividitur, unum narrandi, agendi alterum. prius, h. e. genus narrativum, duas habet species, sive narrantem inducit poeta alterum sive ipse narrandi partes in se suscipit. secundi generis ea natura est, ut qui imitantur ipsi agant ipsique personas eorum quos imitantur sustineant. huius alterius generis explicatio incipit a verbis ἢ πάντας ὡς πράττοντας, ubi ἢ particula licenter admissa est, cum ὁτὲ δὲ post ὑτὸ μὲν lectores exspectarent. structurae facilitas insuper impeditur illatis illis ὥσπερ Ὅμηρος ποιεῖ post ἕτερόν τι γιγνόμενον. Homerus imitationem ita instituit, ut dum plurima per alios enarrantur, multa tamen etiam ab ipso referantur, ut c. 24, 7. agnoscit laudatque Aristoteles. falso igitur Homerum omnia per alios enuntiare h. 1. monetur. porro vide mihi neque alterius ex priore genere speciei neque ipsius secundi generis exemplum afferri, sed exempla reservari donec tota res in universum satis exposita videretur; considera paucis interiectis versibus iterum provocari ad Homerum, ut idem poeta brevissimo intervallo bis in auxilium adhibeatur, quod saneabhorret a more veri Aristotelis. dicendum restat unde importunum additamentum venerit. interpolator cuius tot per hunc librum vestigia deprehenduntur, cum ex c. 24. didicisset Homerum per alios plurima referre, ille temperare sibi non potuit, quo minus iam hic quamvis loco non apto illam Homeri prae ceteris poetis epicis praestantiam significaret. - ceterum monendum puto, ne quis hoc loco abuti velit ad poesis in tria genera (epicum et lyricum et dramaticum) divisionem ab Aristotele profectam hinc eruendam et commonstrandam. non enim hoc nunc agit ut poesin universam in genera sua dividat, sed in duobus poesis generibus (epico et dramatico) diversam imitandi rationem explicare voluit, sane triplex illa poesis divisio in nonnullis huius libri locis Aristoteli obversata est ante animum (conf. Commentar. ad c. 1, 2), sed nullo loco eam aperte proposuit.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-16

Ritter, cap. 3 § 2

et 3. πράττοντας - δρῶντας ἄμφω: expositis tribus illis quibus diversitates artium nituntur, iam post haec argumentum hactenus pertractatum apte concludit verbis illis (§. 4) περὶ μὲν οὖν τῶν διαφορῶν, καὶ πόσαι καὶ τίνες τῆς μιμήσεως, εἰρήσθω ταῦτα. quae media inseruntur (§. 3), ea ab argumento adhuc explicato alienissima, per se levissima, ex parte absurda simul et falsa, damnanda et Aristoteli abiudicanda existimavi. videamus. primum ab eo loco qui modo pertractatus est aliena haec esse, ultro mihi concedent qui intellexerint afferri iam nihil nisi inutiles et inanes etymologias, quae a verbo δρῶντας profectae fuse proferuntur, ipsum autem Aristotelem inde ab operis initio usque ad c. 4, 12. non modo ab huiusmodi nugis sed etiam ab enarrandis rebus, qualis est ista Doriensium tragoediam comoediamque sibi vindicantium commemoratio, religiose abstinere adeoque in afferendis exemplis parcissimum esse. absurda sunt ὅθεν καὶ δράματα καλεῖσθαί τινες αὐτά φασιν, ὅτι μιμοῦνται δρῶντας. vide, auctor incertus haerebat an re vera δρᾶμα dictum sit a δρᾶν, et rem scilicet tam dubiam in medio relinquens aliorum hominum sententiam protulisse contentus est. quae absurda simul et falsa dixi, ea suntP ἐκεῖθεν γὰρ ἦν Ἐπίχαρμος ὁ ποιητής, πολλῷ πρότερος ὢν Χωνίδου καὶ Μάγνητος. primum inepta haec sunt, cum qui paulo ante δράματος nomine confisi sibi vindicare comoediam tragoediamque dicuntur, iidem statim argumenta ex historia sumpta proferunt quae, si vera essent, comoediae inventionem Siculis Doriensibus certissime vindicarent. scilicet Epicharmum, antiquissimum apud Dorienses comoediae hoc nomine dignae auctorem, multo prius vixisse quam Chonidem (Chionidem), antiquissimum apud Athenienses comoediarum scriptorem ¹), hic edocemur. sed de Chionide Suidas (cf. Eudocia p. 436) haec rettulit: Χιωνίδης ᾿Αθηναῖος, τῆς ἀρχαίας κωμῳδίας, ὃν καὶ λέγουσι πρωταγωνίστην γενέσθαι τῆς ἀρχαίας κωμῳδίας, διδάσκειν δὲ ἔτεσιν ὀκτὼ πρὸ τῶν Περσικῶν, hoc est Olympiad. 73, 1. idem Suidas accurate indicavit quando Epicharmus comoedias docere adgressus sit s. v. Ἐπίχαρμος : ἦν δὲ πρὸ τῶν Περσικῶν ἔτη ἕξ, διδάσκων ἐν Συρακούσαις· ἐν δὲ ᾿Αθήναις Εὐέτης καὶ Εὐξενίδης καὶ Μύλος ἐπεδείκνυντο, h. e. Olympiad. 73, 3. quae testimonia, quamvis ab auctore parum locuplete prolata, tantae sunt auctoritatis, quantae essent si apud fidissimum scriptorem legerentur. nam ipsa eorum condicio ac forma probat puro ex fonte (ex didascaliis ut videtur) profecta esse. neque illud quisquam infitiabitur, utriusque poetae, Chionidis et Epicharmi, primum certamen vel tempus quo fere coeperunt comoedias docere, illis in locis significari 2). quo tempore Epicharmus Syracusanos arte sua delectabat, tunc Athenis comoediis certabant Euetes et Euxenides et Mylus, et 1) Neque nos ipsi neque ignotus ille qui haec interposuit de antiqua illa comoedia lyrica hic loquimur, sed de fabula ad quendam perfectionis gradum perducta. illud quoque nemo infitiabitur, Epicharmum et Chionidem cum Magnete tamquam an- *tiquissimos verae comoediae auctores ab hoc scriptore perhiberi. 2) Scriptor de comoedia anonymus (ap. Kusterum p. XII) cum scribit γέγονε (Epicharmus) κατὰ τὴν οἱ Ὀλυμπιάδα, tempus quo ille comoedias docere Syracusis coepit designat planequecertabant quidem post 3) Chionidem, cum is πρωταγωνίστης τῆς ἀρχαίας perhibeatur 4). itaque semidoctus hic interpolator immane quantum decipit lectores magni nominis specie praefulgens, cum scribit Epicharmum fuisse multo ante Chionidem : nam illud πολλῷ πρότερος ὢν hoc vult significare, Epicharmum saltem quinquaginta amplius annis Chionide priorem vixisse. neque illud statuere tuto licet, Epicharmum, antequam Syracusas commigraret, Megaris in Sicilia ubi per aliquot temporis fuit comoedias spectandas praebuisse, propterea quod nemo veterum scriptorum id tradidit, immo omnes hanc eius gloriae sedem Syracusas agnoscunt. at vero hic ipse locus, sive Aristotelius sive ab interpolatore insertus, nonne ostendere videtur quod tu negas? non est ita, sed is nihil narrat nisi Epicharmum Megaris oriundum fuisse. novus hic est et turpis error Aristotele plane indignus. nam si Epicharmum Megarensem fuisse cum aliqua veri specie narrari potest et a nonnullis narratur, quod Megaris aliquamdiu versatus et fortasse in civium numerum receptus est, tamen nonnisi negligentissimus vel indoctus auctor scribere potest Megaris oriundum fuisse ( ἐκεῖθεν ἦν) eum, quem natum esse in insula Co et plurimum vitae tempus Syracusis degisse constet. conf. Müller Doriens. II. p. 352. Grysarius de Doriens. comoed. p. 87 sqq. si vera essent quae semidoctus interpolator effutivit, verae comoediae inven- Suidae consentit. ribus usum esse. eo minus dubium est utrumque bonis aucto- 3) Meinekius hisce falsi Aristotelis verbis a vero seductus Euetem et Euxenidem et Mylum s. Myllum Chionide priores aetate posuit in Quaestion. scen. specim. I. sub initium: non debebat. 4) Nihil moror quod vir eruditissimus, Grysarius de Doriensium comoedia p. 145 sqq., Odofredum Müllerum (Doriens. II. p. 352) secutus, ratione subducta coniecit, Epicharmum Syracusas venisse demum Olymp. 74, 2., cum Gelo Megarensium urbe deleta incolas transferret Syracusas: nam luculenta testimonia incerta ratione a nobis instituenda everti non possunt.tor Epicharmus celebrandus esset, sed Aristoteles ipse tantum abest ut Epicharmum pro inventore comoediae venditet, ut nonnisi mythica argumenta ( μύθους) ab illo primum adhibita esse rettulerit c. 5, 3. vitiis quae adhuc exposuimus cetera consimilia sunt. vide quaeso quomodo celeberrimus comoediarum scriptor designetur, Ἐπίχαρμος ὁ ποιητής, quasi alii Epicharmi tam illustres exstiterint, ut poeta ab iis distinguendus esset, aut ipse tam obscurus fuerit, ut poetam eum fuisse lectoribus in memoriam revocandum esset. ac si ille nimis dilucide Epicharmum designare voluit, cur scripsit ὁ ποιητής, non ὁ κωμωδιοποιός ? porro ne id quidem mirabimur, a tali scriptore Chionidem et Magnetem tamquam aequales proponi, quamquam Magnetem Epicharmo (magisque adeo Chionide) aliquanto iuniorem, Cratino autem priorem fuisse veteres testantur. vid. Suid. s. v. Μάγνης: ἐπιβάλ λει δ' Ἐπιχάρμῳ νέος πρεσβύτῃ. conf. Aristophanes Equit. 517 sqq. Meinekius Quaestion. scen. I. p. 9 sqq. postremo interpolator ne nomen quidem Chionidis, nisi codices h. 1. omnes peccarunt, recte scribere potuit: libri enim fluctuant inter Χωνίδου et Χωνύδου et Χονύδου, quod nomen unde deductum sit dici nequit. rectius haud dubie Suidae codices et Athenaei (III. p. 119 E. IV. p. 137 E. XIV. p. 638 D) et grammaticus ab Hermanno editus in libro de Emendanda ratione Gr. gr. p. 324. hunc poetam Χιωνίδην vel Χιονίδην appellant. conf. Meinekius 1. ind. p. 8. not. iam quaedam ad singulos paragraphi 3. locos adnotabimus. ὅθεν καὶ δράματα: vinculum quo prioribus haec adnectantur laxum sane est ac paene nullum. forte praecesserat μιμοῦνται δρῶντας: eo interpolator excitatus est ut doctrinam suam grammaticam ostentaret adiectis illis ὅθεν καὶ δράματα cet. neque vero memoratu indignum videatur quod et haec enuntiatio et quae paulo post subsequitur eodem fere modo adiungitur: ὅθεν καὶ δράματα καλεῖσθαι.. φασιν, et statim διὸ καὶ ἀντιποιοῦνται cet. nonne haec woher auch et daher auch mediocrem grammaticum et sua alienis importune inserentem coarguere videntur? scilicet interpolatorem fere semper pluribus vestigtis deprehendimus, quorum haec obscure relicta, illa solide expressa sunt. οἵ τε ἐνταῦθα ὡς ἐπὶ τῆς παρ' αὐτοῖς δημοκρατίας γενομένης: Megarenses qui hic, Graeciae sunt interioris Atticisque finitimi, quibus cognomentum οἱ Νυσαῖοι, de tempore, quo illa popularis dominatio apud Megarenses exstiterit, erudite disputavit Meinekius in Quaest. scen. I. p. 3 sq., etiam Grysarius de Doriensium comoed. I. p. 4 sqq. quippe Meinekius ex Plutarchi Quaest. Gr. 18. p. 295 D. et, 49. p. 304 E (vol II. p. I. pag 210 et 247 apud Wyttenb.) docuit brevi post expulsum Megaris Theagenem tyrannum, h. e. circa Olymp. 45 vel 46., effrenatam populi dominationem ibi exortam esse. illius temporis comoediam lyricam fuisse hic verbo monere sufficiat. de Susarione comico, qui Tripodisci Megarensium vico natus et sub Olymp. 50. Icariam Atticorum transgressus comoedias fecit egitque, hic noster nihil videtur inaudisse. de illo conferendus est Müller in Doriens. II. p. 350. Meinekius Quaest. scen. I. 3 sqq. καὶ τῆς τραγῳδίας ἔνιοι τῶν ἐν Πελοποννή σῳ: Sicyonii Epigenem tragicum Thespide sive sedecim sive duabus aetatibus priorem celebrabant. vid. Suidas s. v. Θέσπις. conf. Mülleri Dorienses II. p. 367. sed de Epigene hic noster certe non cogitavit: quippe statim narrat Peloponnesios ad dicta sua probanda nominibus uti. ὡς κωμῳδοὺς - ἐκ τοῦ ἄστεως : interpolator ipse magis inclinavit ut κωμῳδοὺς a verbo κωμάζειν dictos esse crederet: Dorienses contra a κώμαις nomen deduxisse tradit. neutra etymologia vera est. conf. nota ad c. 4, 12. illud quoque verum non est, pro κώμαις ab Atheniensibus dici δήμους: immo κῶμαι sunt vici (urbis partes), δῆμοι pagi (ruris partes), quamquam hoc discrimen non semper observatur. vid. Phot. v. κώμη et κωμήτης. Aristophan. Nub. 965. Lysistr. 5.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-17

Ritter, cap. 4 § 1

Quae causae genuisse poesin videantur, quaeque eandem in diversas formas sive species ( εἴδη) discreverint. orta est poesis ex conaminibus extemporalibus, cumque alii honestos imitarentur, alii pravos, partim encomia hymnique partim vituperationes exstiterunt, ex quibus initiis paulatim et poemata heroica et iambi prodierunt. interiecto deinde tempore cum ars poetica altius coleretur, pro iambis comoedia successit, pro epicis carminibus tragoedia. haec multas passa mutationes, quarum potissimae Aeschylo auctore et Sophocle invaluerunt, substitit, postquam suam naturam assecuta est. ἐοίκασι δὲ - φυσικαί: quoniam duae causae ubique ad poesin procreandam, h. e. ad opera artis poeticae excitanda, valuerunt, eas in hominum natura sitas esse ( φυ σικὰς εἶναι vel φύσει εἶναι) manifestum est.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-18

Ritter, cap. 4 § 2

τό τε γάρ μιμεῖσθαι-χαίρειν τοῖς μιμήμασι πάντας: duae illae causae sunt imitandi facultas humano generi innata et voluptas quam ex imitamentis omnes percipiunt. primaria enuntiationis membra duo sunt, prius τὸ τε γὰρ μιμεῖσθαι σύμφυτον τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἐκ παίδων ἐστί', alterum τὸ χαίρειν τοῖς μιμήμασι πάντας. quae parenthesis signo circumdata, ea ad pronuntiatum prius explicandum et adprobandum accesserunt. μιμήματα opera sunt imitatione quacumque expressa, quae imitamenta a Latinis argenteae aetatis scriptoribus aliquoties appellantur.

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-19

Ritter, cap. 4 § 3

σημεῖον δὲ τούτου τὸ συμβαῖνον ἐπὶ τῶν ἔργων: signum h. 1. memoratum eiusmodi est quo quid verisimile fiat, non unde antecedens pronuntiatum necessario consequatur. vid. Analyt. prior. II, 27. p. 70 a 7. σημεῖον δὲ βούλεται εἶναι πρότασις ἀποδεικτικὴλ ἀναγκαία ἢ ἔνδοξος. Rhetor. I, 2. p. 1357 b 1. τῶν δὲ σημείων τὸ μὲν οὕτως ἔχει ὡς τῶν καθ᾽ ἕκαστόν τι πρὸς τὸ καθόλου, τὸ δὲ ὡς τῶν καθόλου τι πρὸς τὸ κατὰ μέρος. τούτων δὲ τὸ μὲν ἀναγκαῖον τεκμήριον, τὸ δὲ μὴ ἀναγκαῖον ἀνώνυμόν ἐστι κατὰ τὴν διαφοράν. ἀναγκαῖα μὲν οὖν λέγω ἐξ ὧν γίνεται συλλογισμός. aliud σημεῖον eiusdem generis recurrit infra §. 14. cf. c. 13. §. 5 et 7. - ἐπὶ τῶν ἔργων: ἔργα h. 1. vocantur opera imitatione effecta oculisque consideranda. etiam numeri quod efficiunt et concentus eo nomine designatur in Politicis VIII, 5. p. 1340 a 21 et b 7. δῆλον δὲ ἐκ τῶν ἔρ γων. – λαμβάνουσι γὰρ τὰ μαρτύρια τῶν λόγων ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων. quae hoc Poeticae loco ἐπὶ τῶν ἔργων, eadem Plutarchus ἐπὶ τῶν θεαμάτων designavit. lege locum statim transcribendum. τούτων τὰς εἰκόνας-θεωροῦντες: similia Plutarchus protulit in Quaestion. conviv. V, 1. p. 674 A (vol. III. p. II. pag. 757 ed. Wyttenb.): καὶ γὰρ ἐπὶ τῶν θεαμάτων ὅμοια πεπόνθαμεν· ἀνθρώπους μὲν γὰρ ἀποθνήσκοντας καὶ νοσοῦντας ἀνιαρῶς ὁρῶμεν, τὸν δὲ γεγραμμένον Φιλοκτήτην καὶ τὴν πεπλασμένην Ἰοκάστην... ἡδόμεθα καὶ θαυμάζομεν.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-20

Ritter, cap. 4 § 4

αἴτιον δὲ καὶ τούτου: causa autem huius ipsius rei ( τοῦ χαίρειν τοῖς μιμήμασι) est quod cet. postquam duas esse artis poeticae causas dixit, imitandi studium et delectationem ex imitamentis consecutam, pergit etiam huius delectationis causam explicare. particula xai indicat eius rei causam iam exponi, quae ipsa alius rei causa modo posita erat. hanc loci sententiam non intellexit qui scripturam a libris M 14 et 16 exhibitam αἴτιον δὲ καὶ τοῦτο dedit, quasi tertia poeticae artis causa succederet, quas duas esse paulo ante pronuntiatum est. conf. Augustus Matthiae in diurnis Ienens. a. 1805. n. 224. ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ βραχύ κοινωνοῦσιν αὐτοῦ: sed breve tempus commercium eius (discendi) continuant. omnes quidem homines ducuntur cupiditate discendi et sciendi (vid. Metaphysica A. 1), sed longe plurimi vulgari contenti eruditione alia negotia gerenda suscipiunt, philosophi totam vitam in discendo consumunt. hac: : de re cum aliis locis Plato disputavit, tum in Gorgia p. 483- 486. conf. Cicer. Tuscul. II, 1.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-21

Ritter, cap. 4 § 5

ὅτι συμβαίνει θεωροῦντας μανθάνειν καὶ συλλογίζεσθαι τί ἕκαστον: uberius eandem sententiam prompsit in Rhetoricis I, 11. p. 1371 b 4. ἐπεὶ δὲ τὸ μανθάνειν τε ἡδὺ καὶ τὸ θαυμάζειν, καὶ τὰ τοιάδε ἀνάγκη ἡδέα εἶναι οἷον το τε μεμιμημένον, ὥσπερ γραφικὴ καὶ ἀνδριαντοποιία καὶ ποιητική, καὶ πᾶν ὃ ἂν εὖ μεμιμημένον ᾖ, κἂν ᾖ μὴ ἡδὺ αὐτό τε τὸ μεμιμημένον· οὐ γὰρ ἐπὶ τούτῳ χαίρει, ἀλλὰ συλλογισμός ἐστιν ὅτι τοῦτο ἐκεῖνο, ὥστε μαν θάνειν τι συμβαίνει. neque tam bene neque tam accurate voluptatis ex imitamentis quae percipitur causam explicuit Plutarchus Quaestion. conviv. V, 1. p. 673 D (III. pag. 756 ap. Wyttenb.): ὅτι φύσει λογικοὶ καὶ φιλότεχνοι γεγονότες πρὸς τὸ λογικῶς καὶ τεχνικῶς πραττόμενον οἰκείως διακείμεθα καὶ θαυμάζομεν ἂν ἐπιτυγχάνηται. οὐχὶ μίμημα: haec est constans librorum scriptura quos inspexit Victorius et Bekkerus, eorum quoque quorum notitiam Burgesio (vid. Tyrwhitti ed. p. 241) debemus, neque ab his discedere codices Mediceos equidem quovis pignore contendam, quamquam Winstanleius οὐ διὰ μίμημα exhibendo et de suis codicibus tacendo Buhlio et Graefenhanio fidem fecit, hoc sumptum esse ex quattuor illis codicibus Mediceis. οὐ διὰ μίμημα in "quodam excuso" Victorius invenit idemque bene intellexit hoc ad correctorem referendum esse, quamquam et alii editores et ipse Bekkerus eo adquieverunt. sed ita locum legi non posse vel inde manifestum est quod verbum ποιήσει subiecto suo caret, cui etiamsi μιμητής vel aliud nomen ultro concedere cogitandoque supplere velis, Graecae tamen linguae ratio postulabit οὐ διὰ μίμησιν, ut recte monuit Hermannus. sed id quoque quod nititur librorum auctoritate, οὐχὶ μίμημα, ipsum non sufficit, propterea quod iam subsequentia illa ἀλλὰ διὰ τὴν ἀπεργασίαν non habent quo referantur. huic quidem incommodo occurrit coniectura Hermanni ουχ, ᾗ μίμημα, non, quatenus imitamentum; sed vel sic frustra quaerimus quo ποιήσει referamus. quae cumreputo, crediderim post οὐχὶ μίμημα quoddam enuntiationis membrum intercidisse, ac locum sic supplere tentaverim : οὐχὶ μίμημα, ᾗ μίμημα, ποιήσει τὴν ἡδονὴν ἀλλὰ διὰ τὴν ἀπεργασίαν, h. e. non imitamentum faciet delectationem, quatenus est imitamentum, sed per artificium cet.

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-22

Ritter, cap. 4 § 6

κατὰ φύσιν δὲ ὄντος: quod modo σύμφυτον dixit, id iam κατὰ φύσιν ὂν designavit. quod enim natura insitum nobis, idem naturae nostrae consentaneum est. καὶ τῆς ἁρμονίας καὶ τοῦ ῥυθμοῦ: concentum numerumque hominibus natura insitum esse nondum quidem demonstravit, sed id tum a legentibus ultro sibi concedi sperare potuit, tum alius esse disputationis vidit. τὰ γὰρ μέτρα ὅτι μόρια τῶν ῥυθμῶν ἐστί, φανερόν: metra materiam numero suggerunt, quam dum ille moderatur certaeque legi subiungit, eius materiae partes (metra) numeri partes videntur, eaedemque procreari quasi a numero videntur, unde illud πατήρ μέτρου ῥυθμός. lege quae docte disputavit Boeckhius de Metris Pindari I, p. 5. 18 sqq. conf. Aristot. Rhetor. III, 8. p. 1408 b 28. ὁ δὲ τοῦ σχήματος τῆς λέξεως ἀριθμὸς ῥυθμός ἐστιν, ο ὗ καὶ τὰ μέτρα τμητά. ἐξ ἀρχῆς πεφυκότες - ἐκ τῶν αὐτοσχεδιασμά των: a principio aevum agentes et illa (imitandi studium et numerum atque concentum) potissimum promoventes pое- sin procreaverunt ex subitis conaminibus, h. e. imitandi illam facultatem numeroque et concentui obsequendi studium hominibus insitum cum nonnulli ex primis mortalibus prae ceteris sensim sensimque promoverent, poesis exorta et subitis conaminibus excitata est. ἐξ ἀρχῆς πεφυκότες sunt homines quidam qui inter primos mortales fuere, οἱ ἐξ ἀρχῆς πεφυκότες vel ἐξ ἀρχῆς οἱ πεφ. sunt primi mortales. articulus igitur recte abest a libris AcNa et M 14 XIV 21 et GLQ, neque nominatim ex ullo codice affertur. sed vide quo eventu recentior interpolator (Italus quidam) in hoc loco concinnando grassatus sit, ut editores tantum non omnes ¹) illum 1) Libenter memoramus et laudamus quod Graefenhanius unus ex novis editoribus ab interpolatore sibi h. 1. cavit.sequerentur, nonnulli alias emendandi vias circumspicerent. nam primum pro καὶ αὐτὰ (quod inest AcBcNa et M omnibus et GLPQ) edunt Aldinum exemplar secuti πρὸς αὐτὰ. hoc πρὸς cum illatum esset, πεφυκότες consistere per sese non potuit, cum iam non de incertis quibusdam hominibus, sed de certo hominum genere sermo esset; articulo igitur opus erat, ut tandem prodiret quod apud Aldum et plerosque editores legitur, οἱ πεφυκότες πρὸς αὐτὰ μάλιστα, h. e. qui ad illa instructi potissimum erant.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-23

Ritter, cap. 4 § 7

διεσπάσθη δὲ κατὰ τὰ οἰκεῖα ἤθη ἡ ποίησις: secundum proprios mores tam eorum qui imitabantur quam eorum qui imitando exprimerentur duo poesis genera nata sunt, quorum alterum maledicta in viles homines et improbos iecit, alterum laudibus honestos prosecutum est. haec a philosopho probabiliter disputari, non ab rerum scriptore ut rem in facto positam narrari, id ex iis quae continuo (§. 8) sequuntur apparet. πρῶτον ψόγους, ὥσπερ ἕτεροι ὕμνους καὶ ἐγκώμια: alii maledictis pravos homines insectabantur, alii laudibus celebrabant viros fortes ( ἐγκώμια) et deos deorumque prolem ( ὕμνους). sane notabile videtur et grave quod Aristoteles agnoscit poesin lyricae similem iam ante Homerum florentem, sed encomia illa antiquissima hymnosque epicae poesi cognata ab eodem cogitari liquet ex iis quae mox (§. 9) proferuntur, καὶ ἐγένοντο τῶν παλαιῶν οἱ μὲν ἡρωϊκῶν οἱ δὲ ἰάμβων ποιηταί. itaque secundum Aristotelis sententiam haec fuerunt Graecae poesis primordia et incrementa et vicissitudines: ex primis illis et priscis poetis alii maledicta iecerunt, alii laudes decantaverunt, utrique ex tempore; illi interiecto temporis spatio iambos, h. e. ma- Jedicta arte quadam composita nec ex tempore fusa, hi iusta carmina ad claros viros laudandos accommodata, h. e. epopoeias, facere adgressi sunt. tertia tandem artis poeticae immutatio paulo post (§. 10) describitur: quippe illi qui iambos ante confecerant, comoedias scribere, qui carmina epica condiderant, tragoedias docere coeperunt.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-24

Ritter, cap. 4 § 8

οἷον ἐκείνου ὁ Μαργίτης, καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐν οἷς καὶ τὸ ἁρμόττον ἰαμβεῖον ἦλθε μέ τρον: haec postrema ἐν οἷς – μέτρον non ad Homeri Margitam sed ad similia poemata illud subsequentia et vituperationes fundentia pertinent, quod ut facilius in oculos incurrat, comma post Μαργίτης positum est. nam etiamsi in eo Margita, de cuius versibus grammatici inde a saeculo post Christum altero (primus est Hephaestio) loquuntur, aliquot iambos hexametris immixtos fuisse certum videatur, hos ta men Aristoteles aut nondum vidit aut raro dispersos non curavit hoc loco, cum scripsit ἐν οἷς καὶ τὸ ἁρμόττον ἰαμβεῖον ἦλθε μέτρον, h. e. in quibus etiam metrum iambicum apte prodiit: nam haec non de versibus nonnullis interpositis sed de versuum genere in illis carminibus constanter admisso intelligenda sunt. ipsa verba ἐν οἷς καὶ τὸ ἁρμόττον ἦλθε östendunt novum illud versuum genus (iambos) post Homerum esse inventum: haec enim scripsit respiciens versus heroos Homeri proprios. dabo aliud quo idem adprobabitur. dicit Aristoteles iambicum metrum inde duxisse nomen, quod eo utentes maledictis sese in vicem proscinderent ( ὅτι ἐν τῷ μέτρῳ τούτῳ ἰάμβίζον ἀλλήλους): sed cum in Margita nulla inessent maledicta ( οὐ ψόγον ἀλλὰ τὸ γελοῖον δραματοποιήσας), ad hoc carmen non possunt pertinere illa ἐν οἷς καὶ τὸ ἁρμόττον ἰαμβεῖον ἦλθε μέτρον. itaque post Homerum versus iambicos prodisse Aristoteles existimavit. inde consequitur iambos illos, qui herois versibus immixti erant, ab Aristotele in suo Margitae exemplari aut non inventos aut pro interpolatis habitos esse. de versibus iambicis Margitae admixtis veterum testimonia haec ad nos pervenerunt. Hephaestio de Metris p. 112 ed. Gaisford. μετρικὰ δὲ ἄτακτα ὅσα ἐκ μέτρων μὲν ὁμολογουμένων συνέστηκε τάξιν δὲ καὶ ἀνακύκλησιν οὐκ ἔχει, οὔτε κατὰ στίχον οὔτε κατὰ συστήματα, οἷός ἐστιν ὁ Μαργίτης ὁ εἰς Ὅμηρον ἀναφερόμενος, ἐν ᾧ παρἐσπαρται τοῖς ἔπεσιν (hexametris) ἰαμβικά, καὶ ταῦτα οὐ κατ᾽ ἴσον σύστημα. idem p. 120. τοιοῦτός ἐστι ( ἐκ μέτρων ἀτάκτων) καὶ ὁ Μαργίτης Ὁμήρου· οὐ γὰρ τεταγμένῳ ἀριθ- μῷ ἐπῶν τὸ ἰαμβικὸν ἐπιφέρεται. ad haec scholiasta scripsit μετὰ γὰρ δέκα στίχους ἐπιφέρει ἴαμβον, καὶ πάλιν μετὰ πέντε καὶ ὀκτώ. Marius Victorinus p. 2572. ed. Putsch. hoc (iambico) genere versuum, ut supra (p. 2512) diximus, primus usus est Homerus in Margite suo, nec tamen totum carmen ita digestum perfecit: nam duobus pluribusve hexametris ante positis istum subiiciens copulavit. conf. idem p. 2524. et Atilius Fortunatianus p. 2692. exemplum eiusmodi copulationis ex Margita protulit Lindemannus in Lyra I. p. 82. sumptum ex grammatico quodam Latino bibliothecae Berolinensis ἦλθέ τις εἰς Κολοφῶνα γέρων καὶ θεῖος ἀοιδός, Μουσάων θεράπων καὶ ἑκηβόλου ᾿Απόλλωνος, φίλῃς ἔχων ἐν χερσὶν εὔφθογγον λύρην. cetera quae ex Margita afferuntur fragmenta versibus herois inclusa leguntur. Aristot. Ethic. Nicom. VI, 7. p. 1141 a 14. εἶναι δέ τινας σοφοὺς οἰόμεθα οὐ κατὰ μέρος οὐδ᾽ ἄλλο᾿ τι σοφούς, ὥσπερ Ὅμηρός φησιν ἐν τῷ Μαργίτῃ τὸν δ᾽ οὔτ᾽ ἂρ σκαπτῆρα θεοὶ θέσαν οὔτ᾽ ἀροτῆρα οὔτ᾽ ἄλλως τε σοφόν, πάσης δ᾽ ἡμάρτανε τέχνης. secundi versus alterum hemistichium ab Aristotele non transcriptum cum ceteris servavit Clemens Alexandrinus Strom. I. pag. 281 A. ed. Sylb. (I. p. 329. ed. Potter). falsus Plato in Alcibiade altero p. 147 Β. οὐ γὰρ δήπου Ὅμηρον ἀγνοεῖν δοκεῖς ὅτι οὐχ οἷόντε ἦν ἐπίστασθαι κακῶς. ἐκεῖνος γάρ ἐστιν ὁ λέγων τὸν Μαργίτην πολλὰ μὲν ἐπίστασθαι, κακῶς δέ, φησι, πάντα ἠπίστατο. inde Buttmannus hunc versum elicuit πόλλ' ἠπίστατο ἔργα, κακῶς δ' ἠπίστατο πάντα. Iam pauca de recta loci scriptura dicenda restant. κατὰ τὸ ἁρμόττον inest AcBcNa et GLPQ, idemque inesse Mediceis, quamvis tacente Winstanleio et zai pro κατά exhibente, non est quod dubitemus. καὶ τὸ ἁρμόττον ab Aldo profectum recte dextreque correctum videtur. nam cum in lectione librorum scriptorum articulus ante ἰαμβεῖον μέτρον desideretur, aut καὶ τὸ ἁρμόττον aut κατὰ τὸ ἁρμόττον τὸpro κατὰ τὸ ἁρμόττον scribi potest. nitate praestat. prior ratio remedii le- ὅτι ἐν τῷ μέτρῳ τούτῳ ἰάμβιζον ἀλλήλους: a verbo ἰάπ - τειν (iac - ere) factum est nomen ἴαμβος, id quod iacitur, h. e. maledictum; inde rursus descendit verbum ἰαμβίζειν, maledictis incessere. cf. Marius Victorinus p. 2525. appellatur autem iambicum ἀπὸ τοῦ ἰαμβίζειν, quod Graece significat maledicere et carpere..

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-25

Ritter, cap. 4 § 9

μόνος γὰρ οὐχ ὅτι εὖ, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι καὶ μιμήσεις δραματικὰς ἐποίησεν : cum in versu praecedente virtutis praestantiaeque Homeri mentio facta esset, ea hisce interiectis breviter vindicatur: quippe ille epicam imitationem non modo bene instituit, sed etiam dramaticam eius formam unus recte adhibuit, quatenus ipse perpauca exsequitur narrando sed alios enarrantes et loquentes inducit. accuratius hoc exposuit c. 24, 7. aptum vero erat eam Homeri virtutem h. 1. memorare, cum paulo post idem poeta tragoediae comoediaeque formam ostendisse dicatur. οὐ ψόγον ἀλλὰ τὸ γελοῖον δραματοποιήσας: duo sunt quae hic edocemur; eorum unum ad argumentum Margitae, alterum ad formam eiusdem pertinet. Margitam qui fecit, is non unum aliquem maledictis lacessivit, sed exemplar stulti hominis et multa inepte molientis proposuit; non τὸ καθ' ἕκαστον pangere voluit, sed missa singulos carpendi consuetudine ( ἀφέμενος τῆς ἰαμβικῆς ἰδέας) secutus est τὸ καθόλου 2). praeter hoc discimus Margitae non defuisse for- 2) Quam vere hoc ab Aristotele traditum sit, cum ex aliis veterum scriptorum locis tum ex Eustathii commentariis ad Odyss. K. p. 1669, 49. cognoscere licet: οὕτως ἔγνωμεν καὶ τὸν ἄφρονα Μαργίτην, τὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ μαργαίνειν ὅ ἐστι μωραίνειν· ὃν ὁ ποιήσας τὸν ἐπιγραφόμενον Ὁμήρου Μαργίτην ὑποτίθεται εὐπόρων μὲν εἰς ὑπερβολὴν γονέων φῦναι· γήμαντα δὲ μὴ συμπεσεῖν τῇ νύμφῃ, ἕως ἀναπεισθεῖσα ἐκείνη τετραυματίσθαι τὰ κάτω ἐσκήψατο, φαρμακόν τε μηδὲν ὠφελήσειν ἔφη, πλὴν εἰ τὸ ἀνδρεῖον αἰδοῖον ἐκεῖ ἐφαρμοσθείη. καὶ οὕτως θεραπείαςmam illam dramaticam, qua Homeri Ilias et Odyssea tantopere excellunt. nimirum stultus iste et ineptus cum uxore et matre sua et patre aliisque hominibus colloquendo stultitiae documenta edidit. ceterum Margites pro Homeri carmine habetur a scriptoribus Graecis antiquis, non solum ab Aristotele et ignoto illo Alcibiadis secundi auctore sed etiam a Zenone Stoico. vid. Dio Chrysost. Orat. 53. tom. II. p. 275 ed. Reisk. γέγραφε δὲ καὶ Ζήνων ὁ φιλόσοφος εἴς τε τὴν Ἰλιάδα καὶ τὴν Ὀδυσσείαν καὶ περὶ τοῦ Μαργίτου. sed grammatici Alexandrini nonnisi duo magna illa poemata vel unam Iliadem Homero relinquentes cum ceteris Margitam quoque ei abiudicaverunt 3), unde factum ut scriptores posterioris aetatis ab illorum iudicio pendentes de huius poematis auctore dubitanter loquerentur, veluti scholiasta Aristophanis ad Aves v. 914. ἐπεπίστευτο δὲ καὶ ὁ Μαργίτης τοῦ Ὁμήρου εἶναι, Eustathius ad Odyss. K. ρ. 1669, 50. ὁ ποιήσας τὸν ἐπιγραφόμενον Ὁμήρου Μαργίτην, alii. Callimachus tamen Homerum carminis auctorem videtur existimasse, quod coniicere forsitan liceat ex iis quae refert Harpocratio s. V. Μαργίτης: ἐκάλουν δὲ τοὺς ἀνοήτους οὕτω διὰ τὸν εἰς Ὅμηρον ἀναφερόμενον Μαργίτην, ὅπερ ποίημα Καλλίχάριν ἐκεῖνος ἐπλησίασεν. conf. Dio Chrysost. Orat. 67. tom. II. p. 362. ed. Reisk. Suidas s. v. Μαργίτης. Tzetzes Chiliad. IV, 869-871. Histor. VI, 62. 595. ipso Μαργίτου nomine quoddam hominum genus denotari vix est cur moneamus. ex radice MP vel stirpe MAPI (ea motum quendam inaequabilem videtur significare) nomen μάργος et μάργης (insanus vel stultus) nascitur, item verbum μαργᾶν et μαργαίνειν (insanire) atque μαργοῦν (et insanum esse et insanum facere aliquem). a μάργος fit μαργίτης, ut ab ἁγνὸς ἁγνίτης, λευκός λευκίτης, μάκαρ μακαρίτης, πεζὸς πεζίτης, ψαφαρὸς ψαφαρίτης. μάργος insanus est, sed μαργίτης qui insanus vel stultus esse perseverat, h. e. qui omnibus factis dictisque insaniam ostendit. 3) Eustathius ad. II. p. 4, 30. εἰ δὲ καὶ ἕτερα ποιήματά εἰσιν Ὁμήρου, οἷον καὶ ὁ Μαργίτης καὶ ἡ τῶν μυῶν καὶ βατράχων μάχη, ἄλλοι καὶ αὐτὸ ἐξήτασαν πρὸς ἀκρίβειαν. μάχος θαυμάζειν ἔοικεν. ex ceteris illis grammaticis nonnulli Margitae auctorem in incerto reliquerunt, alii coniectura utique incerta eundem assequi voluerunt. horum fidem sequitur Suidas dum scribit Πίγρης: Κάρ, ἀπὸ ῾Αλικαρνασσοῦ, ἀδελφὸς ᾿Αρτεμισίας ... ὃς τῇ Ἰλιάδι παρενέβαλε κατὰ στίχον ἐλεγεῖον οὕτω γράψας μῆνιν ἄειδε θεά Πηληϊάδεω Αχιλῆος, Μοῦσα, σὺ γὰρ πάσης πείρατ' ἔχεις σοφίης. ἔγραψε καὶ τὸν εἰς Ὅμηρον φερόμενον Μαργίτην καὶ Βατραχομυομαχίαν. hanc illi coniecturam ita conceperunt, ut quem in Batrachomyomachia ridiculum tractasse argumentum cognossent, eidem Margitam humane concederent. vere igitur vir ingeniosus Fr. Welckerus huic opinioni nihil tribuendum esse putat in Cyclo epico p. 415., ubi aliam etiam illius coniecturae causam exponit sibi probatam ac Nitzschio in Histor. Hom. I. p. 106. scilicet cum critici illi Pigretem elegos Iliadi inseruisse cognitum haberent, eos propter iambos Margitae intextos huius carminis eundem auctorem esse statuisse. conferenda sunt quae Welckerus in eodem libro p. 184. perdocte, ut solet, de Margita exposuit. coniecturam valde incertam de hoc poemate protulit Wassenberghius ad Vitas Homeri p. 11 sqq..

10. mvp-aristotle-comment-26

Ritter, cap. 4 § 10

οἱ μὲν ἀντὶ τῶν ἰάμβων κωμῳδοποιοί ἐγένοντο, οἱ δὲ ἀντὶ τῶν ἐπῶν τραγῳδοδιδάσκαλοι : loquendi brevitatem ita excusare licet et explicare, ut Aristoteli, scribenti ἀντὶ τῶν ἰάμβων et ἀντὶ τῶν ἐπῶν, non tam ante animum obversaretur quod re vera posuit, κωμῳδοποιοί et τραγῳδοδιδάσκαλοι, quam ποιηταὶ κωμῳδιῶν et διδάσκαλοι τραγῳδιῶν. vid. ad c. 1, 7. 8, 3.

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-27

Ritter, cap. 4 § 11

τὸ μὲν οὖν ἐπισκοπεῖν εἰ ἄρ᾽ ἔχει κτλ. paulo ante (§. 7-10) docuit tum quomodo nata sit et epica poesis et iambica, tum qua ratione pro his ipsis tragoedia invaluerit et comoedia. iam dicit hoc, quaerere utrum tragoedia omnino respondeat ( ἔχει ἱκανῶς) necne formis illis poeticis ( τοῖς εἴδεσιν), h. e. formis quae in poesi adhiberi possunt, ita ut tragoedia omnium poeticae artis generum sit perfectis-.: sima, an species poetica magis perfecta ab ullo mortalium possit excogitari, id alius esse disputationis. non ea est (hoc vulgo existimant) loci sententia, alius esse disputationis, num tragoedia, qua est tragoedia, satis culta sit an non sit: hoc enim certum fuisse Aristoteli ex §. 12. apparet: καὶ πολλὰς μεταβολὰς μεταβαλοῦσα ἡ τραγῳδία ἐπαύσατο, ἐπεὶ ἔσχε τὴν αὑτῆς φύσιν. declarat igitur se anquirere iam nolle an nova quadem poesis immutatione novisque εἴδεσι pro comoedia et tragoedia prolatis perfectius quidquam fieri et excogitari possit quam tragoedia, sed haec ipsa quomodo paulatim culta sit explicaturum se esse. αὐτό τε καθ' αὑτὸ κρινόμενον καὶ πρὸς τὰ θέατρα: ubi quaeritur utrum tragoedia cultissima sit et perfectissima ex omnibus quot esse possunt poesis genera an alia species magis instructa et perculta proferri possit, quid ibi theatra sibi velint vix intelligas. eiusmodi quaestio nonnisi ita explicari posse videtur, ut illud poesis genus per sese spectetur. frigere igitur illud additamentum videatur. accedit aliud: nam κρινόμενον ab Aldo propagatum adhuc in nullo codice repertum est, sed pro illo participio κρίνεται ἢ ναὶ inest in libris AcBc et Get M XIV, κρίνεται ἦναι Μ 21 et Parisiensi 2938, κρίνεται εἶναι Na et LQ et M 14 16. codicum vestigia κρίνεται ἢ ναὶ aperte commendant, quod quo casu ex κρινόμενον corrumpi potuerit assequi vix licet. donec igitur et iusta auctoritas pro forma κρινόμενον afferatur et apta huic loco explicatio promatur, hanc meam suspicionem producere locumque nove constituere non temerarium erit: τὸ μὲν οὖν ἐπισκοπεῖν εἰ ἄρ᾽ ἔχει ἤδη ἡ τραγωδία τοῖς εἴδεσιν ἱκανῶς ἢ οὔ [ αὐτό τε καθ' αὑτὸ κρίνεται; ἢ καὶ 4) πρὸς τὰ θέατρα;], ἄλλος λόγος. vides, mi lector, quo haec tendant. curiosus quidam quae in margine interrogavit, ea in verborum contextum recepta ac deinde ab Italo quodam interpolata videntur. sed dico videntur, ideoque in ipsis ver- 4) Istud vai ante καὶ per διττογραφίαν natum conieceris.bis nihil mutandum putavi, sed hanc meam coniecturam lectori expendendam commendo.

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-28

Ritter, cap. 4 § 12

καὶ ἡ μὲν ἀπὸ τῶν ἐξαρχόντων τὸν διθύραμβον: antiquissimam tragoediae formam non diversam fuisse significat a prisco illo dithyramborum genere, cum chorus satyrorum circa Bacchi aram caprumque ei numini immolatum τραγωδίαν sive τραγικὴν ἀοιδὴν (Bocks - gesang) decantando saltaret. haec est enim nativa ac prima τραγῳδίας significatio. nimirum τραγωδίας nomen decompositum ( παρασύνθετον) est ex τραγωδός, unde etiam τραγῳδέω, plane ut κωμῳδέω et κωμῳδία ex κωμῳδός, ἀρνῳδέω et ἀρνῳδία ex ἀρνῳδός. τραγωδία est igitur id quod canit tragoedus ( ἀοιδὴ τοῦ τραγῳδοῦ): ipse tragoedus est ὃς τράγον ἀείδει. quamvis enim prisci illi tragoedi non ipsum caprum sed deum cui caper mactabatur canerent, ab hominibus tamen nomen eis inditum est ab ea re quae oculis potissimum exposita esset 4). ἐξάρχειν τὸν διθύραμβον hic dictum est de iis qui dithyramborum et canendorum et saltandorum auctores erant et magistri. quoniam αὐτοσχεδιαστικῶς dithyrambum 4) Varias nominis τραγωδίας etymologias collectas proposuit vir pereximius Fr. Welckerus in Appendice operis de trilogia Aeschylia editi p. 240. quam ipse ceteris praetulit ab Etymol. Magno acceptam τραγῳδία ὅτι τὰ πολλὰ οἱ χοροὶ ἐκ σατύρων συνίσταντο, οὓς ἐκάλουν τράγους –, ea mihi non probatur, propterea quod τραγωδία non est nomen compositum ( σύνθετον) ex τράγος et ᾠδή, sed decompositum ( παρασύνθετον) est ex τραγωδός. tertia eiusdem nominis explicandi ratio ὅτι τράγος τῇ ᾠδῇ ἄθλον ἐτίθετο —, ab antiquis auctoribus certatim tradita et magni Bentleii assensu (Opusc. p. 315 sqq.) comprobata, nuper merito repudiata est a Iacobo in Quaestionibus Sophocl. p. 85 et 104., a Welckero l. indic., aliis. id tamen dubitari vix poterit, quin dithyrambi cantores sacris illis peractis hoc laboris praemium tulerint, ut una cum sacerdotibus sacrificii ministris capri mactati carne vescerentur. forsitan inde orta sit fabula ista de hirco in praemium certaminis ( ὡς ἄθλον) proposito.inchoabant, eis neque γράφειν neque ποιεῖν neque συνιστάναι tribui potuit. ὁ ἐξάρχων et laudes dei et cantandi modos saltandique figuras ita inchoavit, ut ceteri praeeuntem circa Bacchi aram sequerentur. haec ad intellectum verborum Aristotelis dixisse sufficiat: rem illam ipsam ex omnibus quot ad nos venerunt testimoniis veterum scriptorum explicare alius est disputationis, quae nostra aetate acerrime et agitata est et agitatur. ἡ δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν τὰ φαλλικά: ut φαλλός signum est potentiae genitalis masculi generis animantibus concessae, ita τὰ φαλλικά carmina sunt ad φαλλόν in pompa decantata eademque ad Bacchum hanc vim iuvantem celebrandum accommodata. a priscis illis dithyrambis ita diversa fuerunt, ut primum vim genitricem praedicarent, tum ut in pompa, non circa aram, recitarentur. haec comissantium turba (cui nomen κῶμος) habebat quem τὰ φαλλικά ex tempore canere atque saltare incipientem ( ἐξάρχοντα) sequeretur. duci ceterisque cantoribus nomen erat κωμῳδοί, h. e. τοῦ κώμου ἀοιδοί, Sänger des (schwärmenden) Aufzuges. inde per παρασύνθεσιν factum est verbum κωμῳδέω et nomen κωμῳδία. grassari in tali comissantium turba est κωμάζειν. – ἃ ἔτι καὶ νῦν - νομιζόμενα: hos serioris aetatis φαλλοφόρους vel ἰθυφάλλους descripsit Semus Delius apud Athenaeum XIV. p. 622 C. κατὰ μικρὸν ηυξήθη ὅσον ἐγίγνετο φανερὸν αὐτῆς : Thespin aliosque ante Aeschylum tragoediarum scriptores significat. accuratius haec quae ad historiam artis poeticae pertinerent in opere περὶ ποιητῶν exsecutus videtur.

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-29

Ritter, cap. 4 § 13

ex multis tragicae artis vicissitudinibus et incrementis quinque commemorasse contentus est, quorum tria Aeschylo inventori, duo Sophocli debentur. primum et alterum, dico numerum actorum usque ad duos auctum et partes chori imminutas, arcte inter se cohaerent alterumque ex priore pendet. nam cum in tragoedia Thespidis unus actor esset, is nonnisi cum choro colloqui aut sua choro narrare poterat: sed cum alterum Aeschylus actorem produxisset,iam unus cum altero sermones conferre atque ambo inter se agere coeperunt; iam aptum et necessarium visum est tragicis poetis, ut quod alteri parti accessisset alteri detraherent, h. e. ut chori carmina partesque paulum contraherent. tertium Aeschyli inventum est illud καὶ τὸν λόγον πρωταγωνιστὴν παρεσκεύασεν : per nomen abstractum quod vocamus actorem primarum partium designavit 5). ex duabus personis in scena agentibus cum una adeo excelleret ut ad eam actio potissimum referretur, unitas actionis sustineri facilius potuit. itaque etiam huius rei inventio gravissima erat. τρεῖς δὲ καὶ σκηνογραφίαν Σοφοκλῆς: tertium actorem in eadem ἐπεισοδίου parte cum duobus aliis colloquentem agentemque a Sophocle inventum esse consentientes Aristoteli tradunt et Dicaearchus in Auctario vitae Aeschyliae Robortelliano laudatus et Diogenes Laertius III, 34. et auctor vitae Sophocliae et Suidas s. ν. Σοφοκλῆς. Aeschylo huius inventionis laudem tribuit scriptor incertus Auctarii illius a Robortello editi, facta tamen Dicaearchi dissentientis mentione. ex levi sane recordatione Themistius (in Orat. XXVI. p. 382. ed. Dindorf.) haec scripsit : ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡ σεμνή τραγωδία μετὰ πάσης ὁμοῦ τῆς σκευῆς καὶ τοῦ χοροῦ καὶ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν παρελήλυθεν εἰς τὸ θέατρον; καὶ οὐ προσέχομεν ᾿Αριστοτέλει ὅτι τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ὁ χορὸς εἰσιὼν 6) ᾔδεν εἰς τοὺς θεούς, Θέσπις δὲ πρόλογόν τε καὶ ῥῆσιν ἐξεῦρεν, Αἰσχύλος δὲ τρίτον ὑποκριτὴν καὶ ὀκρίβαντας, τὰ δὲ 5) Similiter iustus orator, quem Aristophanes in Nubibus v. 887. producit, in libro illo optimo Ravennate δίκαιος λόγος appellatur, et iniustus iusto quaerenti quis sit respondet sese λό yov esse. 6) Ad εἰσιών ex praecedentibus εἰς τὸ θέατρον intellectu trahendum est. vide ut orator antiquissimae illi τραγῳδίᾳ theatrum largiatur, in quod chorus ingressus deos (debuit Bacchum) се- cinerit; vide ut alterum actorem Thespidi concedat, cum post huius commemorationem ad Aeschylum transgressus narret tertium ab hoc actorem adhibitum esse. πλείω τούτων Σοφοκλέους ἀπελαύσαμεν καὶ Εὐριπίδου; hic homo tertium actorem ad Aeschylum refert, Aristoteles ad Sophoclem, hic duos actores in Thespidis fabula deprehendit, Aristoteles secundum actorem ab Aeschylo inventum tradit, hic plura etiam ab Euripide reperta agnoscit, Aristoteles de Euripidis inventis nihil inaudivit. tam incredibilia et iis quae in Poetica legimus contraria Aristoteles aliis in libris enarrare non potuit: immo hic quarti post Christum saeculi scriptor ex hoc nostro loco sapientiam suam omnem videtur hausisse. hoc certum est, illum leviter scripsisse et dormitantem. itaque non maiorem eius verbis fidem tribuerim, quam iis quae nostra aetate quendam memini effutire: die Gymnasien sind, was sie bei den Griechen und Römern schon waren, Anstalten für höhere wissenschaftliche Bildung 7). unus igitur qui laude illa Sophoclem privare voluit restat scriptor qui in Auctario a Robortello evulgato pronuntiat αὐτὸς ( Αἰσχύλος) τὸν τρίτον ὑποκριτὴν ἐξεῦρεν. nimirum ille sive eius auctores (si quos habuit) tertium actorem in nonnullis Aeschyli fabulis, ut in Eumenidibus et Choephoris, invenientes atque eam rem non satis pensitantes, contra unice id spectantes, Aeschylum natu maiorem esse Sophocle, illi continuo inventionis gloriam concesserunt. vide quae de hac re disputavit Lessingius in Vita Sophoclia p. 104 sqq. tom. 10. ed. Berolin. Welckerus in Trilogia Aeschylia p. 515. Schultzius de Vita Sophoclis p. 70 sqq. Alterum Sophoclis inventum ad colendam tragicae demonstrationis magnificentiam aptum σκηνογραφία fuit, h. e. ea pingendi ratio qua imagines ex longinquo visae perfectam quandam et pulchram formam praebent. bene Passovius in Lexico interpretatur perspectivische Mah- 7) Dum haec scribo, liber novus in oculos incidit in quo viris doctis offeruntur haece: Wenn es eine richtige Bemerkung ist, dass Socrates die Ethik in die Philosophie eingeführt habe, wie Sophocles die zweite Person in den dramatischen Dialog, cet.lerey. hanc Sophocles ad scenam exornandam primus adhibuit, cum solita illa pingendi ars haud dubie iam ante ipsum circa scenas versata esset. aliud est de quo loquitur Vitruvius in praefatione libri VII.

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-30

Ritter, cap. 4 § 14

ἔτι δὲ τὸ μέγεθος ἐκ μικρῶν μύθων καὶ λέξεως γελοίας - ὀψὲ ἀπεσεμνύνθη: ἀποσεμνύνειν est ea magnificentiae specie circumdare, ut quidquid contrarium est amoveatur. sero id factum vere dicit Aristoteles, cum etiam in fabulis Aeschyli et Sophoclis nonnulla ridiculae dictionis vestigia compareant. plura haud dubie apud Thespin (eum enim potissimum hic videtur respicere) supererant, sed illud noli colligere ex his verbis, totam Thespidis dictionem ridiculam sive γελοίαν fuisse et omnes eius tragoedias ex fabulis perexiguis compositas esse. componitur enim h. 1. tragoedia plane exculta ( ἡ ἀποσεμνυνθεῖσα) et perfecta cum ea quae ex satyrorum ludicris mutaverat 8), et parvae fabulae ( μικροὶ μῦθοι) prae complexionibus rerum, quales in perfectis exhibentur tragoediis, dicuntur. haec igitur si de Thespide eiusque aequalibus intelligenda sunt, quod negari vix poterit, verba illa interiecta διὰ τὸ ἐκ σατυρικοῦ μεταβαλεῖν magni momenti sunt ad artis tragicae apud Athenienses primordia et incrementa accuratius definienda. inde enim cum appareat Thespidis fabulam ex satyrico genere ( ἐκ τοῦ σατυρικοῦ) iam mutasse ( μεταβαλεῖν), indidem censequitur ab eodem poeta satyrorum chorum ex tragoedia amandatum aliumque novo tragoediae generi magis convenientem substitutum esse, id quod aliis indiciis egregie confirmatur. conf. quae docte disputata sunt a Welckero in Appendice ad trilog. Aeschyl. p. 257-273. τό τε μέτρον ἐκ τετραμέτρου ἰαμβεῖον ἐγένετο: pergit tragoediam dramaticam inventore Thespide recens natam componere cum ea quam Aeschylus et Sophocles a se mire cultam praestiterunt. nimirum cum Thespis et qui 8) Id ipsum Thespide auctore factum esse ex aliis veterum locis colligitur. mutare οὐδετέρως positum esse neminem fugiet.aetate suppares plerumque in partibus cantu carentibus tetrametro trochaico uterentur, inde ab Aeschyli invento in eius locum senarius plerumque successit. si quis ex his verbis concludere vellet Thespidis aequaliumque tragoediis senarium omnino defuisse, is non minus erraret quam si quis hoc loco fretus diceret Aeschylum et Sophoclem tetrametrum e dialogo omnino removisse. neque vero id dicere vult philosophus, antiquissimam illam τραγικὴν ἀοιδὴν actore carentem tetrametris inclusam fuisse, a Thespidis autem aetate senarium successisse : nam si prisca τραγικὴ ἀοιδὴ tetrametris constaret et pro iis senarii succederent, ecce aderat tragoedia meris senariis composita, qualem nunquam exstitisse certum est. inde manifestum est non componi h. 1. tragoediam istam dithyrambicam et eam quam Thespis invenit, sed eam quae iam non tota canendo et saltando sed colloquiis etiam peragebatur (Thespidis), cum ea quae ad summum culturae gradum pervenerat. hoc ita se habere certius etiam collato ex Rhetoricis loco III, 1. pag. 1404 a 29. intelligitur: οὐδὲ γὰρ οἱ τὰς τραγῳδίας 9) ποιοῦντες ἔτι χρῶνται τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον, ἀλλ᾽ ὥσπερ καὶ ἐκ τῶν τετραμέτρων εἰς τὸ ἰαμβεῖον μετέβησαν διὰ τὸ τῷ λόγῳ τοῦτο τῶν μέτρων ὁμοιότατον εἶναι, οὕτω καὶ τῶν ὀνομάτων ἀφείκασιν ὅσα παρὰ τὴν διάλεκτόν ἐστιν. quae igitur ab uno Thespidis actore in narrationibus et in colloquiis cum choro habitis plerumque tetrametris adstricta pronuntiabantur, ea ab Aeschyli aetate duo illi actores versibus iambicis inclusa loquebantur, 9) Οἱ τὰς τραγῳδίας ποιοῦντες sunt earum tragoediarum scriptores quae vulgo vocantur, ut et tota sententia et ipsum verbum ποιεῖν monstrat. non recte me iudice Welckerus in Appendice ad trilog. Aeschyl. p. 239. statuit dithyrambum et iustam tragoediam uno τραγῳδίας nomine ab Aristotele comprehensam esse. locum ex Rhetoricis allatum cum ego aliter ac Welckerus intelligendum et pro certo duce habendum existimem, iis quoque quae idem vir ingeniosus in libro laudato p. 262 et 263. de hoc Poeticae loco exposuit, omni ex parte assentiri non possum.ita tamen ut hoc paulatim in consuetudinem converteretur : nam et in Aeschyli Persis (ea omnium quas etiamnum legimus tragoediarum antiquissima est) tetrametri sat multi in colloquiis admissi leguntur (vid. 155-245.703-758), neque a ceteris principum tragoediae scriptorum fabulis prorsus relegati sunt. verba igitur το τε μέτρον ἐκ τετραμέτρου ἰαμβεῖον ἐγένετο, item quae subsequuntur λέξεως δὲ γενομένης αὐτὴ ἡ φύσις τὸ οἰκεῖον μέτρον εὗρεν, non de mutatione subito facta accipere licet, sed de ea quae sensim sensimque et longo temporis intervallo invaluit. nam τὸ μὲν γὰρ πρῶτον τετραμέτρῳ ἐχρῶντο - τὴν ποίησιν: haec usque ad λεκτικῆς ἁρμονίας per parenthesin inseruntur, quod cum non vidissent priores editores, illi in subsequentibus ἔτι δὲ ἐπεισοδίων πλήθη verbum unde haec pendeant frustra circumspexerunt. dum scribit Aristoteles τὸ μὲν γὰρ πρῶτον - ποίησιν, non respicit priscam illam τραγικὴν ἀοιδὴν ex tempore fusam, cuius numerum fortasse ne ipse quidem satis cognitum habuit, sed eam dramaticae tragoediae formam quae non multo ante Aeschylum fuit. si totius loci habitum diligenter consideramus, hoc intelligimus, inde a §. 13. nonnisi de tragoedia dramatica (non etiam de lyrica ἀοιδῇ τραγικῇ quae fuit ante Thespin) loqui Aristotelem apparet, ita ut eam formam quae erat ante Aeschylum componat cum ea quae Aeschylo auctore et Sophocle effloruit. sed rursus cavendum ne illis διὰ τὸ σατυρικὴν εἶναι τὴν ποίησιν tantum tribuamus ut, aliis locis indiciisque quamvis repugnantibus, Thespidi et Choerilo Phrynichoque satyrorum chorum tribuamus: nam σατυρικὴν (motoriam levemque) quomodo intelligi velit adiecto καὶ ὀρχηστικωτέραν satis declaravit. de numero trochaico levioribus argumentis et saltatoriae poesi apto Aristoteles in Rhetoricis III, 8. p. 1408 b 36. haec exponit: ὁ δὲ τροχαῖος κορδακικώτερος· δηλοῖ δὲ τὰ τετράμετρα· ἔστι γὰρ τροχερός ῥυθμὸς τὰ τετράμετρα. λέξεως δὲ γενομένης: quamquam Thespidis tragoediae aliqua λέξις denegari nequit, unus tamen eius actor quasipro supplemento chori canentis saltantisque accipi potuit. id Aristoteles videtur fecisse, cum λέξιν eo nomine dignam Aeschyliae demum tragoediae duos actores inter sese colloquentes producenti concesserit. sed si quis λέξεως δὲ γενομένης de ipso Thespide dictum existimet, ego quidem non vehementer refragabor, sed vel sic non sequetur Thespidem illum esse qui tetrametris senarios substituerit: nam illa αὐτὴ ἡ φύσις τὸ οἰκεῖον μέτρον εὗρεν non ita intelligi necesse est, ut statim post λέξιν inductam numerus iambicus successerit, sed de hoc numero sensim sensimque in prisci locum recepto accipi possunt. - μάλιστα γὰρ λεκτικὸν -τὸ ἰαμβεῖόν ἐστιν: conf. Rhetor. III, 8. p. 1408 b 33. ὁ δὲ ἴαμβος αὐτὴ ἐστιν ἡ λέξις τῶν πολλῶν· διὸ μάλιστα πάντων τῶν μέτρων ἰαμβεῖα φθέγγονται λέγοντες. – καὶ ἐκβαίνοντες τῆς λεκτικῆς ἁρμονίας: nove sed apte communis sermonis habitum λεκτικὴν ἁρμονίαν appellavit. his repugnantia tradere videtur in Rhetoricis III, 8. p. 1408 b 32. ὁ μὲν ἠρῷος ( ῥυθμός) σεμνὸς καὶ λεκτικὸς καὶ ἁρμονίας δεόμενος, sed videtur tantum. nam eo loco ἁρμovía concentus est instrumentorum musicorum, quo carere hexameter ideoque nudo sermoni convenire ( λεκτικός) recte dicitur. itaque coniectura a Tyrwhitto ad Poeticam p. 136. proposita ( καὶ λεκτικῆς ἁρμονίας δεόμενος) et sane solerter excogitata carere poterimus. ἔτι δὲ ἐπεισοδίων πλήθη καὶ τὰ ἄλλα: verbum ἐγένετο ex initio §. 14. vel aliud cognatae significationis assumptum intelligendum est.

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-31

Ritter, cap. 4 § 15

περί μὲν οὖν τούτων τοσαῦτα desunt AcBcNa et Mediceis omnibus et GQ; in P (Parisiensi 2040) adscripta margini reperiuntur, et Vallae Pacciique versiones Latinae itemque exemplar Aldinum eadem agnoscunt. omissa videntur a correctore qui ἔτι δὲ ἐπεισοδίων πλήθη quo referret cum non inveniret, deletis nonnullis scripsit ἔτι δὲ ἐπεισοδίων πλήθη καὶ τὰ ἄλλα, ὡς ἕκαστα κοσμηθῆναι λέγεται, ἔστω ἡμῖν εἰρημένα. iam structuram iste sustentavit, sententiam pessum dedit: nihil enim eiusmodi adhuc dictum est.5. §. 1. 121

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-32

Ritter, cap. 5 § 1

De fine comoediae proposito. initia comoediae in obscuro versantur. epopoeia tragoediam ita secuta est ut graves imitari pergeret, differt ab eadem eo quod narratio est, etiam metro et temporis spatio. partes aliae eaedem, aliae tragoediae peculiares. Tragoediae initiis et incrementis breviter expositis, accedit ad comoediam, non eo consilio ut ipsius naturam accurate definiat (id alii huius operis loco exsequendum reservavit), sed ut proposita comicae poesis a tragoedia diversitate atque explicata tragoediae et epopoeiae partim similitudine partim differentia dilucidetur, quomodo poesis in varias species diffusa sit, quasque immutationes earum quaeque subierit. ἡ δὲ κωμῳδία-τὸ γελοῖον μόριον: tragoediam imitari quam vulgo reperiantur meliores, comoediam autem peiores, id dictum erat cap. 2, 4. iam accuratius definitur quatenus peiores comoedia imitetur. comoedia enim non pingit homines omni pravitatis genere corruptos, sed qui ea dedecoris specie qua continetur ridiculum turpes compareant, paulo licentius post οὐ μέντοι κατὰ πᾶσαν κακίαν posuit quod contrarium ἀλλὰ τοῦ αἰσχροῦ ἐστὶ τὸ γελοῖον μόριον. scilicet haec scripsit ita, ut ridiculum ( τὸ γελοῖον) a comicis poetis exprimi notum certumque esse legentibus acciperet praesumeretque. plenius ac planius dixisset ἀλλὰ τῶν γε λοίων οἱ κοινωνοῦσι τοῦ αἰσχροῦ. ceterum haec scripsisse Aristotelem respicientem potissimum antiquam Graecorum comoediam, cui τὸ αἰσχρὸν raro deerat, verbo monuisse sufficiat. conf. Ethic. Nicom. IV, 14 med. τὸ γὰρ γελοῖόν ἐστιν ἁμάρτημά τι κα καὶ αἶσχος ἀνώδυνον καὶ οὐ φθαρτικόν : qui aliquid negotii agunt, ii risum excitant ubi ratione perperam inita a fine proposito aberrant ( ἁμαρτάνουσιν). quod initae rationi non respondet eventus, ridiculum est, si ex ea aberratione neque dolor neque pernicies sed nonnisi turpe quoddam nascitur. exemplum quod subsequitur, sumptum a comica persona, co non totam suam τοῦ γελοίου definitionem voluit illustrare, sed id unum declarare quo intellectu posuerit ἀνώδυνον καὶ οὐ φθαρτικόν. comoediae ingenio externus agentium habitus et figura convenire debet. Quod de natura τοῦ γελοίου accuratius in Poetica se dixisse eiusque genera pertractasse profitetur in Rhetoricis I, 11. p. 1372 a 1. et III, 18. p. 1419 b5., id haud dubie fecit in operis parte nobis perdita, ubi separatim de comoedia exposuit. conf. Praefatio.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-33

Ritter, cap. 5 § 2

χορόν κωμῳδῶν ὀψέ ποτε ὁ ἄρχων ἔδωκεν: primo non magni aestimatam esse comoediam inde docet, quod archon ad chorum comicum et conducendum et omni apparatu ornandum poetis comoedias in certamen commissuris sero demum choragum impensas praebentem ex civibus ditissimis 1) assignaverit. hoc est χορὸν διδόναι, poeta ipse χορὸν λαβεῖν dicitur, si fabula eius archonti probata in certamen admittitur, atque chorus ad eam docendam decernitur. vid. Aristophanes Ran. 94. Hesychius (correctus a Bergkio in Commentat. de reliquiis comoediae Atticae p. 30.) πῦρ πυρὶ ἔγχει· Κρατῖνος ἀπὸ διθυράμβου ἐν Βουκόλοις ἀρξάμενος, ἐπειδὴ χορὸν οὐκ ἔλαβε παρὰ τοῦ ἄρχοντος, παρ' οὗ ᾐτήκει. qui fabulam docendam archonti offert αἰτεῖν χορὸν dicitur. lege Cratini fragmentum ex Βουκόλοις servatum ab Athenaeo XIV. p. 638 F. ὃς οὐκ ἔδωκ᾽ αὐτοῦντι Σοφοκλέει χορόν, κτλ. Aristophan. Equit. 513. ἀλλ' ἐθελονταὶ ἦσαν: comoediarum scriptores aut ipsi aut eorum amici sumptus ad chorum docendum et instruendum diu fecerunt: publice sero tandem choragis datis adiuti sunt. Cra- 1) De choragia choragique officiis diligenter et accurate expositum est a Boeckhio in Oeconomia Atheniensium t. I. p. 487 sqq. conf. Schoemanni Antiquitates iuris publici Graecorum p. 324.tinus primus videtur fuisse qui fere chorum ab archonte acciperet, quamquam etiam huic interdum denegatum esse comperimus ex Hesychii verbis modo allatis. illa ipsa Βουκόλων comoedia cum daretur, κωμῳδοὺς ἐθελοντὰς fuisse iudico dissentiens hac in re a Bergkio 1. 1., qui Cratinum putat proximis Dionysiis, cum non multo ante repulsam tulisset, chorum impetravisse et hac opportunitate usum esse, ut omne irae virus in priorem istum archontem evomeret. ceterum nomen ἐθελονταi hoc loco propter praegressum χορὸν κωμῳδῶν non de ipsis poetis sed de κωμῳδοῖς sive χορευταῖς dictum intelligi debet, quamquam et ipsi poetae qui suis impensis chorum exornabant eo nomine designabantur. conf. Aelius Dionysius apud Eustathium p. 800, 30 (locum Tyrwhittus attulit) : ἐθελοντής ὁ αὐθαιρέτως τι ποιῶν. ἐκαλοῦντο δὲ καὶ ἐθελονταὶ διδάσκαλοι δραμάτων δηλαδή, ὅτε τις μὴ λαβών χορὸν μηδὲ χορηγητὴν ἔχων ἑαυτῷ τὰ πάντα παρεῖχε. οἱ λεγόμενοι αὐτῆς ποιηταί, h. e. qui a comoedia nomen invenerunt sive o ἱ κωμῳδοποιοί. pro rudibus prisci temporis comoedis iam comoediarum poetae exstiterunt. ipsum nomen κωμῳδοποιός ς. κωμωδιοποιός artem indicat.

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-34

Ritter, cap. 5 § 3

τίς δὲ πρόσωπα ἀπέδωκεν ἢ λόγους ἢ πλήθη ὑποκριτῶν: personarum inventio magni sane momenti erat, propterea quod et ridiculum ( τὸ γελοῖον) per eas facilius provocabatur et eorum qui notabantur vultus exprimi quodammodo poterant. porro quod codices offerunt προλόγους, id haud dubie corruptum est. una enim eius nominis explicatio, quae quidem cum aliqua probabilitatis specie proferri potest et prolata est (ex cap. 12, 2), – μέρος ὅλον τραγῳδίας τὸ πρὸ χοροῦ παρόδου -, ea, ut alia quae contra moneri possunt omittam 2), omni auctoritate destituta 2) Cordatissimus quisque quaerere necessario cogitur, cur prologorum potius inventionem quam exodorum vel episodiorum posuerit.est, cum ista tragici prologi definitio ab interpolatore profecta sit. cuius igitur nominis notio toto opere non explicatur neque commemoratur, id quomodo sine obscuritatis vitio tam nude poni h. 1. potuit? accedit quod et πρόσωπα et πλήθη ὑποκριτῶν ad externum comoediae habitum pertinent, πρόλογος autem ipsam partem comoediae efficit: cur is igitur medius intercedit? quae cum ita sint, ego non dubitavi λόγους ab Hermanno gratus accipere, sed idem ego in explicando eo nomine a viro ingenioso in alia discedo. ipse λόγους argumenta intelligit, sed contra hanc interpretationem potest moneri quod modo ad προλόγους exturbandos protulimus, inter notas externas medium interponi quod ad internam artem comicam pertineat. ego igitur λόγους intelligo sermones, puta illa quae unus actor coram choro de scena aut narrando aut cum choreutis colloquendo itemque ea quae non multo post plures actores inter sese loquentes exsecuti sunt, ut λόγοι ὑποκριτῶν opponantur ᾄσμασι κωμῳδῶν sive χορευτῶν. iam omnes res quae commemorantur externae sunt, personae et colloquia et numeri histrionum; deinde hic locus in comoedia respondet iis quae c. 4, 13. de tragoedia narrantur. πλήθη ὑποκριτῶν est numerus duorum et numerus trium histrionum; denique πλήθη ὑποκριτῶν apte post λόγους succedunt: actores enim λόγους exsequuntur. τὸ δὲ μύθους ποιεῖν Ἐπίχαρμος καὶ Φόρμις: ex praegresso ἀπέδωκεν verbum ad μύθους ποιεῖν aptum cogitatione supplendum est, quod quo facilius fiat, semicolon pro puncto posui post ἠγνόηται. Itali interpolatores mancum esse sermonem opinantes post Φόρμις addiderunt ἦρξαν, idque a nullo codice oblatum in Aldinum exemplar receptum et inde late propagatum est; quo cum soloeca facta esset oratio, Reizius interpolatam scripturam iterum interpolando dedit τοῦ δὲ μύθους - Φόρμις ἦρξαν. μύθους ποιεῖν est fabulas ex historia mythica petitas comoediis subiicere, quod persaepe ab Epicharmo factum esse et multa comoediarum eius nomina et ipsa fragmenta ostendunt. in nomine μύθους, a vulgari loquendi usu hic quidem discessisse Aristotelem,tantum abest ut quidquam indicet, ut certum subsequatur indicium, id illum non fecisse, dico quae de Cratete Epicharmi imitatore subsequuntur, τῶν δὲ ᾿Αθήνησιν Κράτης ήρξε και θόλου ποιεῖν λόγους καὶ μύθους, de quibus mox disputabimus. novo significatu nomen μύθος positum est c. 6, 6., ubi tragoediae partes definiuntur, sed auctor ipse significavit a vulgari dicendi usu ibi sese recedere: λέγω γὰρ μύθον τοῦτον τὴν σύνθεσιν τῶν πραγμάτων. a vero igitur aberrat Grysarius (de Doriensium comoedia quaest. p. 75), cum illo altero Aristotelis loco (c. 6, 6) fretus pronuntiat in hoc nostro (5,3) μύθους ποιεῖν esse fabulam argumento serere, i. e. iustam comoediam facere. haec explicatio si vera esset, ex Aristotelis iudicio Cratini nobilissimi comici fabulis argumenta sive συστάσεις πραγμάτων defuissent: nam ex Atheniensibus Crates primus Epicharmi consuetudinem secutus est. de Epicharmo et Phormide diligenter disseruit Grysarius in libro quem inscripsit de Doriensium comoedia quaestiones. - τῶν δὲ ᾿Αθήνησιν Κράτης- λόγους καὶ μύθους. Cratetem Cratino natu minorem sed Aristophane paulo maiorem fuisse veterum scriptorum testimoniis constat docuitque Meinekius in Quaestionum scen. specim. I. p. 25 sqq. Crates a singulorum hominum irrisione abstinuit ( ἀφέμενος τῆς ἰαμβικῆς ἰδέας) et generales morum notationes rerumque descriptiones proposuit, quarum alias ex mythorum cyclo ( μύθους, Fabeln), alias ex vita communi vel ex libris τῶν λογοποιῶν ( λόγους, Erzählungen) petivit. hanc explicationem praeivit Meinekiuş in libro laudato p. 26., nisi quod λόγους ille paulo aliter accipere videtur, et ex aliqua parte Victorius in Commentariis p. 51.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-35

Ritter, cap. 5 § 4

ἡ μὲν οὖν ἐποποιία τῇ τραγῳδίᾳ μίμη - σις εἶναι σπουδαίων ἠκολούθησεν: epopoeia iuxta tragoediam ita incessit aequo gradu ( ἠκολούθησεν) ut hominum gravium imitatio esse permaneret. utrumque poesis genus temporis intervallo plures mutationes ( μεταβολάς) subiit, sed ita alteri alterum simile esse accidit, ut utrumque graves imitaretur. quibus rebus discrepet epopoeia a tragoediacontinuo explicatur. sed quid fiet de illis μέχρι μόνου μέτρου μεγάλου ? scilicet differre a tragoedia epopociam nonnisi versibus longis 3) edocemur. falsissimum esse et pugnare cum ceteris Aristotelis verbis primo adspectu in oculos incurrit: ipse enim non unum quoddam sed tria continuo affert, quibus epopoeia diversa sit a tragoedia. ineptissimum sane emblema non usque ad hunc diem tolerassent editores, nisi pro omnium codicum scriptura μεγάλου novi interpolatores (aut Aldus ipse aut qui eius codicem correxerant) substituissent μετὰ λόγου, quod idem valere ac καὶ λόγου 4) videntur credidisse. sed et repugnat usus Graeci sermonis neque, si addiceret, vel sic sana sententia prodiret: sermone enim differre utrumque genus tam universe ac simpliciter pronuntiari nequit. sed sic ut μετὰ λόγου post μέρχι μόνου μέτρου additum legitur, id vix aliud potest esse nisi cum ratione, quod alienissimum est. inepto hoc additamento inepto auctori restituto, facilis est loci explanandi ratio. nam primum affertur qua in re tragoedia et epopoeia consentiant, deinde epopoeiam et metro differre et enarrandi ratione et temporis ambitu recte monetur. a narrando poesis τῷ μήκει, h. e. μέτρον ἁπλοῦν est quam compositionem κατὰ στίχον grammatici appellant. - καὶ ἀπαγγελίαν εἶναι : duae ἀπαγγελίας species c. 3, 1. definiuntur, una quae simpliciter narrat, altera quae inducit narrantes. epica διηγηματική vocatur c. 23, 1. teraporis spatio quo res gestae a poeta sive epico sive tragico propositae comprehenduntur. μάλιστα πειρᾶται: hoc dicit, quoniam plures tragicorum poetarum hanc legem egressos esse non ignorabat. - ἡ δὲ ἐποποιία ἀόρι- 3) Quaesitum est num voci μέχρι insit vis excludendi. non inest praepositioni potestas excludendi, sed inest nomini negativo μόνου. 4) Hermannus cum καὶ λόγου scriberet pro μετὰ λόγου, Graecitati sermonis opem tulit, sed non cogitavit se interpolare scripturam iam interpolatam. στος τῷ χρόνῳ: dicit temporis ambitum epopoeiae convenientem definiri certo dierum vel annorum numero non posse. noli credere hoc Aristotelem docere, poetae epico licere vel longissimi temporis res gestas enarrare: veriora enim ipse docuit c. 8 et praecipue c. 23.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-36

Ritter, cap. 6 § 1

De tragoediae forma et fine. partes eius esse sex et gravissimam quidem fabulam sive τὸν μύθον. Poeticae causas postquam universe declaravit et praecipuas eius formas demonstravit, genera poesis singillatim pertractare eorumque formam et vim explicare pergit. incipit a tragoedia, deinceps descendit ad epopoeiam, denique ad comoediam pervenit, sed in operis parte nobis deperdita. rectius ille haud dubie poesin epicam primo loco expediendam sibi sumpsisset: ea enim non solum simplicissima est ex omnibus generibus et antiquissima, sed etiam ita subiecta tragoediae, ut haec ipsa tamquam filia pulchrior ex decora matre in luminis auras prodierit, sed quia tragoedia magis culta et perfecta ei videbatur, ab hac disputationis initium capere maluit, ut de epopoeia brevius posset absolvere, via interim ad illam disputationem praemunita. vid. c. 5 extr. sed si opus integrum ad nos pervenisset, maius videremus, credo, incommodum huic poeticae artis explicationi inde accidisse, quod non utramque dramatici generis speciem, tragoediam dico comoediamque, deinceps tractavit, sed alteram a priore illata epopoeiae explicatione discrevit. περὶ μὲν οὖν τῆς ἐν ἑξαμέτροις μιμητικῆς - ἐροῦμεν : quam vulgo ἐποποιίαν vocant, eam h. 1. τὴν ἐν ἑξαμέτροις μιμητικὴν appellavit. infra (c. 23, 1) epopoeiam quam vulgo intelligunt, nomen ipsum evitaturus,nam designavit τὴν διηγηματικὴν καὶ ἐν μέτρῳ μιμητικήν. cum ἐποποιίας nomine in operis principio (c. 1, 6) nove usus esset, telam pertexens modo ad vulgarem dicendi usum revolvitur modo ab ipso nomine abstinere voluit. ἀπολαβόντες αὐτῆς - ὅρον τῆς οὐσίας: tragoediae forma et habitus in antecedentibus iam exposita, originesque et incrementa breviter enarrata erant. inde igitur sumi ( ἀπολαμβάνεσθαι) poterat definitio ( ὅρος), ita tamen ut finis tragoediae nunc demum indicetur. dictum enim ante erat (c. 2 et 3) tragoediam esse eam agentium imitationem ut agentes ipsi producerentur narratioque excluderetur, esse porro imitationem meliorum ( βελτιόνων) hominum graviumque ( σπουδαίων); dictum erat praeterea c. 5, 4. eandem certo temporis ambitu fere includi, nec saltationem cantumque et dictionem coniuncta in illa reperiri (c. 1, 10). ea iam in unum collecta ita augentur, ut simul quem finem tragoedia propositum habeat declaretur.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-37

Ritter, cap. 6 § 2

πράξεως σπουδαίας καὶ τελείας: σπουδαίαν intelligit actionem cui magnus quidam finis propositus est, ad quem consequendum omnes eorum qui agunt vires ita intenduntur, ut ipsi aut concidant. aut post varios casus voti compotes fiant. τελεία est actio cui nihil deest, cuius est principium et medium et finis. conf. c. 7, 3. eandem aliis in locis modo τελείαν καὶ ὅλην (c. 7,2) modo simpliciter ὅλην (c. 8, 4) vocavit. μέγεθος ἔχουσης: ut tragoediae vim et finem spectatores percipiant, actio tragica ambitum quendam rerumque complexionem habeat oportet, accuratius non multo post (c. 7, 2) dixit τι μέγεθος: non enim quaevis magnitudo intelligitur, sed quae vulgo vocatur. χωρὶς ἑκάστου τῶν εἰδῶν ἐν τοῖς μορίοις: ita ut non quaeque formarum in partibus (tragoediae) assit. haec breviter significavit c. 1 extr., ubi dithyrambos nomosque et tragoediam comoediamque consentire dixit quod numero (saltatione) uterentur et cantu et metro, differre quod dithyrambi nomique illis coniunctis ( ἅμα πᾶσιν), comoediatragoediaque eisdem separatis ( κατά μέρος) imitationem peragerent. quae si contulerimus iis quae de eadem re paulo post dicuntur, - §. 3. τὸ δὲ χωρὶς τοῖς εἶδεσι τὸ διὰ μέτρων ἔνια μόνον περαίνεσθαι καὶ πάλιν ἕτερα διὰ μέλους-, a vera huius loci interpretatione non aberrabimus. εἴδη sive imitandi formae (Darstellungsweisen) tres sunt in tragoedia, dictio numero adstricta ( τὰ μέτρα), cantus ( μέλος), saltatio ( ὄρχησις). hae formae non omnes in singulis partibus tragoediae coniunctae reperiuntur, sed ubi metrica est oratio, ibi non etiam cantica 1) et saltatio: nam nonnulla (§. 3) solis metris absolvuntur et rursus alia per cantum. alii aliter explicant, quos neque reprehendere neque laudare attinet: sed unum moneo, non licere immutata codicum scriptura in eiusmodi locis verae certaeque interpretationi fundamenta subtrahere. μόρια quae h. 1. memorantur, non sunt eae tragoediae partes quae mox enumerantur, sed indefinite partes tragoediae deinceps positas intellexit. δρώντων καὶ οὐ δι' ἀπαγγελίας: tragoedia agentes ipsos producit, epopoeia quamvis δραματικῶς composita aut ipsa narrat aut nonnisi quasi agentes introducit, ut proprium eius negotium sit ἀπαγγελία. conf. c. 5, 4. caute hic noster scripsit δρώντων καὶ οὐ δι᾽ ἀπαγγελίας, non δρώντων καὶ οὐκ ἀπαγγελλόντων, propterea quod etiam in tragoediis ῥήσεις ἀγγελικαὶ inveniuntur, sed ipsae eiusmodi narrationes agentes nuntios ( δρῶντας) requirunt. tragoedia igitur dum ἀπαγγελίαν (epicam narrationem) excludit, ἀπαγγέλ λοντας tamen admittit. post ἀπαγγελίας particulam ἀλλὰ ! Aldo auctore plerique editores, praecipue antiquiores, infarserunt, sed vocula inepta a nullo codice agnosci videtur: abest saltem ab AcBcNa (id ex Bekkeri silentio aliisque indiciis certe consequitur), a Mediceis omnibus et a G.Q. mire 1) Dixerit aliquis "nonne canticis choricis subiecta est metrica oratio?" est sane; sed Aristoteles τὰ μέτρα appellat quae cantu destituta sunt, μέλος et μελοποιίαν lyricam tragoediae partem.illa torsit cum alios tum Lessingium. vid. Dramaturg. Hamb. c. 74. δι' ἐλέου καὶ φόβου περαίνουσα τὴν τῶν τομ ούτων παθημάτων κάθαρσιν : quid tragoedia efficiat vel efficere debeat, nondum significatum est; hoc igitur novum in definitione accedit neque ex antegressis colligitur. de sententia his verbis subiecta copiose disputavit Lessingius in libro laudato t. II. c. 74-78. conf. Raumerus de Aristotelis Poetica in Commentationibus academiae regiae Berolinensis a. 1828 (Berolini 1831) p. 125 sqq. illud recte Lessingius probe tenendum praecepit c. 75., tam έλεον quam φόβον communis notionis vinculo contineri, quatenus quod in aliis hominibus miseratione nos afficit, idem ne nobis accidat timemus. miseratio enim metusque in nobis oriuntur, ubi calamitatem aliis ex propinquo incumbentem vel impendentem videmus, et miseratio quidem excitatur, si miseram condicionem eorum qui eam non commeruerunt spectamus, metus, si eandem calamitatem nobis accidere posse credimus, hoc est illud quod τὰ φοβερὰ καὶ τὰ ἐλεεινὰ δι' ἄλληλα esse c. 9, 11. pronuntiatur. utramque animi perturbationem Aristoteles accurate definivit in Rhetoricis II, 5 init. et 8 init. illic de metu haec afferuntur: ἔστω δὴ φόβος λύπη τις ἢ ταραχή ἐκ φαντασίας μέλλοντος κακοῦ φθαρτικοῦ ἢ λυπηροῦ· οὐ γὰρ πάντα τὰ κακὰ φοβοῦνται, οἷον εἰ ἔσται ἄδικος ἢ βραδύς, ἀλλ' ὅσα λύπας μεγάλας ἢ φθοράς δύναται, καὶ ταῦτ᾽ ἐὰν μὴ πόρρω ἀλλὰ σύνεγγυς φαίνηται ὥστε μέλλειν. altero loco miseratio sic definitur: ἔστω δὴ ἔλεος λύπη τις ἐπὶ φαινομένῳ κακῷ φθαρτικῷ καὶ λυπηρῷ τοῦ ἀναξίου τυγχάνειν, ὃ κἂν αὐτὸς προσδοκήσειεν ἂν παθεῖν ἢ τῶν αὐτοῦ τινά, καὶ τοῦτο, ὅταν πλησίον φαίνηται. iam tragoediae eum finem propositum esse audimus, ut ea per miserationem et metum tales animi perturbationes purget. sed quae sunt illae tales perturbationes ( τοιαῦτα παθήματα)? num ipsa miseratio metusque? et nego et aio. nego, quia non τοιούτων scriptum oportuit sed τούτων, si miseratio et metus simpliciter denotarentur, nego quia non quamcumque miserationém neque quemcumque metum πάθημα esse scio: sed idem aio per τοιούτων παθημάτων affectiones miserationis et metus significari, quia scriptum lego διὰ ἐλέου καὶ φύ βου περαίνουσα τὴν κάθαρσιν τῶν τοιούτων παθημάτων, sed eas intelligo affectiones quae sua vi hominis mentem turbant et animum commotum quam maxime reddunt, eas quarum purgationem in rebus utilissimis referri decet. itaque philosophus ne potuit quidem τούτων scribere sed τοιούτων debuit, cum nollet hoc pronuntiari, per tragoediam purgari quamcumque miserationem metumque, sed illam miserationem metumque, quorum vi animus et mens perturbarentur, h. e. miserationis metusque affectiones ita vehementes, ut in numero παθημάτων reponendae sint 2). deinceps dicendum est quomodo tragoedia eas perturbationes purget. id ut efficere possit, necesse videtur esse, ut miserationem et metum excitet: nam per haec illa miserationis et metus παθήματα purgari dicuntur. excitantur ergo in spectatoribus miseratio et timor, dum tragoedia insignem calamitatem magnosque labo- 'res aut uni dramatis personae aut pluribus etiam incumbentem vel impendentem ostendit oculisque sive spectantium sive legentium quasi explicatam subiicit. nam dum ipsi agunt illi quibus mala accidunt, haec ex propinquo et imminent et 2) Lessingius in Dramaturgia Hamburg. c. 77. dicit Aristotelem τοιούτων eo consilio scripsisse, ut metum misericordiamque et omnes similes affectiones, v. c. τὸ φιλάνθρωπον, purgari per tragoediam significaret. sed illud φιλάνθρωπον (conf c. 13,2) neque πάθημα est neque purgatione eget. verba viri peracuti haec respicio: "Er sagt aber τοιούτων und nicht τούτων; er sagt dieser und dergleichen, und nicht bloss dieser: um anzuzeigen, dass er unter dem Mitleid nicht bloss das eigentlich sogenannte Mitleid, sondern überhaupt alle philanthropische Empfindungen, so wie unter der Furcht nicht bloss die Unlust über ein uns bevorstehendes Uebel, sondern auch jede damit verwandte Unlust verstehe.” πάθημα est perturbatio, Leidenschaft, πάθος quamcumque animi affectionem denotat.incumbunt. etiam illud a poeta tragico, si quid deceat haud ignorat, prospicitur, ut calamitas non tam flagitio vel scelere adducatur quam errore quodam vel leviore peccato paretur. vid. c. 13. §. 2 et 3. etenim ad miserationem requiritur ut calamitatem quam quis perpetitur non omnino commeruerit is cuius miseremur. itaque actio tragica omnia continet quibus opus est ad miserationem in nobis excitandam. porro si homines in tragoediis qui producuntur propter peccata non admodum gravia et propter humanae infirmitatis errores acerbis adversae fortunae plagis affligi videmus, dumque recordamur et nos homines esse humanique generis vitiis et erroribus obnoxios, tum ne nobis idem quod oculis expositum est vel simile quoddam infortunium accidat, timere incipimus. itaque tragicam actionem spectantes et ob nostri et totius humani generis sortem metu quodam tangimur. adhuc diximus quomodo per tragoediam miseratio et metus excitetur: explicandum restat, qua ratione eiusmodi perturbationes purgentur. primum quaeritur quid sit κάθαρσις παθημάτων, non esse eandem ac καθαίρεσιν vel ἀναίρεσιν per se patet: immo κάθαρσις est ea affectuum animi conformatio, ut omne nimium et omne quod perturbat animum mentemque humanam inde removeatur. hanc esse veram nominis significationem et huius loci ratio et alius in Aristotelis Politicis (VIII, 7. p. 1342 a 11 et 14) ostendit. itaque non id agit tragoedia, ut miseratio et metus ex animis nostris tollantur, sed ut nimia perturbantis cuiusdam miserationis metusque vis et impetus frangatur 3). id quomodo a tragoedia perficiatur videamus. si talis est miseratio nostra metusque, ut propter calamitatem immerito alicui accidentem nonnisi gravem et acerbum dolorem sentiamus simulque humiliter et vehementer metuamus ne nobis 3) Bene Raumerus 1. 1. pag. 134.: "Die Reinigung ist keineswegs, wie einige gedeutet haben, eine Vernichtung der Leidenschaften, sondern ..eine Hinführung auf das Mittlere, mit Ausschliessung des zu viel und zu wenig.idem accidat, eiusmodi affectus animi nos deprimit et diffundit ( ποιεῖ κατακωχίμους. v. Aristoteles loco ex Politicis indicato); contrahit idem animi magnitudinem ( τὸ σεμνὸν συστέλλει) atque omnino intelligendi facultatem minuit et ratiocinandi considerandique negotium impedit; quid multa? ita integra et animi et mentis sanitas corrumpitur. iam si tragoedia hanc vim haberet, ut eiusmodi perturbationes excitaret et libere soluteque grassari sineret, ea sane legibus quam severissimis interdicenda et ex omnibus civitatibus bene constitutis expellenda esset. sed inde demum divina tragoediae vis se ostendit, quod miserationis et metus nimias affectiones purgat. purgat vero duobus modis. 1. qui insigni calamitate conflictatur in tragoedia, is contra necessitatem 4) summa virium contentione nititur et post varios casus aut concidit nobili leto aut superior discedit laeto eventu. ea consideratio, quantae sint hominum vires, spectatorem evehit eique virium humano generi concessarum scientiam largitur. ita et miseratio et metus iustis finibus continentur, ut omne nimium vel perturbatorium eis ademptum videatur. pro vehementibus animi motibus quieta cogitatio, pro perturbationibus sana rerum humanarum consideratio invalescit. 2. tragoedia miserationem metumque purgat, dum illum qui gravia perpetitur saltem ex aliqua parte ipsum suae calamitatis auctorem fuisse ostendit. vera enim tragoedia quamvis obscure monstrare non negligit, quomodo miseriis sese qui premitur subtrahere potuisset, si is ab initio iustoque etiam tempore omnes animi nervos intendisset totamque mentis considerationem adhibuisset. eiusmodi autem consideratione miseratio metusque rursus purgantur, et conscientia intellectusque praestantiae humanae excitatur. duobus hisce modis rudes illae et deprimentes sive contrahentes affectiones animi cohibentur et ad sanae mentis considerationem relatae castigantur, ut inde 4) Necessitatem dico eam rerum humanarum implicationem quae ipsis hominum erroribus vitiisque paratur.amoveatur quidquid nocere possit. quod ut fieri possit facilius, Graeca tragoedia chori sive recta suadentis et praecipientis sive prava et vitiosa severe diiudicantis interventu curavit. sed iam uberrimae disputationis, quae sane de xa- θάρσει a choro Graecorum tragicorum effecta institui posset, occasionem praecido,. ne ab ipsa interpretatione verborum Aristoteliorum deficiam: ipsos Graecos quid sit chori officium docuit summus tragicorum poetarum in disputatione de choro a se edita, vid. Suid. s. v. Σοφοκλῆς.

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-38

Ritter, cap. 6 § 3

λέγω δὲ ἡδυσμένον μὲν λόγον τὸν ἔχον τα ῥυθμὸν καὶ ἁρμονίαν καὶ μέλος: λόγος ὁ ἔχων ῥυθμὸν est λόγος ἔμμετρος : numero enim condiri sive suavem reddi sermonem liquet ; numerumque metri patrem esse veteres dicere solebant. conf. ad c. 4, 6. quod c. 1, 10. ῥυθ μός pro saltatione ponitur, id nihil impedit quo minus hunc ῥυθμὸν pro numero sermonis accipiamus: numerus enim non magis sermoni quam saltationi competit. saltationem vero h. 1. intelligere non possumus, quoniam haec tragoediae quidem, sed non sermonis, est condimentum. ἁρμονίαν καὶ μέλος est ἁρμονικὸν μέλος, cantum harmoniae legibus aс- commodatum, quemadmodum λόγοι καὶ μιμήσεις sunt λόγοι μιμητικοὶ in fragmento operis περὶ Ποιητῶν, quod transcripsimus pag. 84. quod Victorius μέτρον pro μέλος ex coniectura sua scripsit, id loci ratione non satis perspecta fecit. διὰ μέτρων ἔνια μόνον περαίνεσθαι – διὰ μέλους: nonnulla metrica tantum oratione ( διὰ μέτρων) alia cantu absolvuntur sive peraguntur. saltationem non memoravit, quia saltatio non sine canticis, cantica autem multa sine saltatione peraguntur. de significatione μέτρων diximus ad c. 1,6.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-39

Ritter, cap. 6 § 4

ὁ τῆς ὄψεως κόσμος: quia personae agentes ipsae producuntur, et quidem homines gravitate conspicui ac fere claris natalibus orti, non solum scena opus est, sed co etiam apparatu quo viri graves et illustres instructi solent itaque non solum ὄψις sed ὄψεως κόσμος requiritur. etiam illud notandum est, ipsi Aristoteli ὄψιν vel ὄψεως κόσμον esse.videri necessariam tragoediae partem ( ἐξ ἀνάγκης τι μόριον τραγωδίας). aliter iudicavit huius operis interpolator infra §. 19 et c. 26, 3. vide quae ad illos locos monentur et ad c. 14, 1. εἶτα μελοποιία καὶ λέξις: postquam agentes in conspectum spectatorum venerunt, eos aut loqui aut canere oportet: eo enim imitationem peragunt. λέγω δὲ λέξιν μὲν αὐτὴν τὴν τῶν μέτρων σύνθεσιν: λέξις vulgo quamcumque dictionem denotat, sed hoc loco Aristoteles orationem modis musicis cantuque carentem sed numeris tamen adstrictam λέξιν nove vocavit. discrepat quod infra (§. 18) scripsit auctor personatus λέγω δέ, ὥσπερ πρότερον εἴρηται, λέξιν εἶναι τὴν διὰ τῆς ὀνομασίας ἑρμηνείαν. – μελοποιίαν δὲ ὃ τὴν δύναμιν φανερὰν ἔχει πᾶσαν: vocis μελοποιίας in aperto esse omnem potestatem sive significationem dicit: λέξιν enim modo posuit discedens a vulgari loquendi usu, μελοποιίαν autem intelligit eam quam vulgo dicere solent. πᾶσιν, non πᾶσαν, legendum esse Madius putavit.

5. mvp-aristotle-comment-40

Ritter, cap. 6 § 5

καὶ κατὰ ταύτας καὶ τυγχάνουσι καὶ ἀποτυγχάνουσι πάντες: omnes qui agunt finem propositum pro moribus suis et sentiendi ratione feliciter consequuntur aut inceptis suis excidunt. sapiens enim et temperatus nonnisi ea sectatur quae assequi potest : immoderatus contra et stultus nimis alta et iniqua et incredibilia cupere solet, ut a fine fere aberret.

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-41

Ritter, cap. 6 § 6

ἔστι δὲ τῆς μὲν πράξεως ὁ μῦθος ἡ μίμησις : multi editores codicibus invitis articulum ante μί μησις expungunt, sed frustra: hoc enim Aristoteles dicere vult, actionis imitationem de qua modo (§. 5) locutus erat contineri fabula ( τῷ μύθῳ) tragoediae subiecta. ipsum μῦθον hisce definire non intendit, sed eius definitionem statim subiunxit. λέγω γὰρ μῦθον τοῦτον τὴν σύνθεσιν τῶν πραγμάτων: dicit μῦθον τοῦτον eum quem modo cogitabat, cum tragicae actionis imitationem contineri τῷ μύθῳ pronuntiabat, h. e. nove et aliter ac vulgo μύθου nomine h. 1.usus est. hoc si bene tenuerimus, errores nonnullos ab aliis viris doctis commissos cavere poterimus. vid. Comment. ad c. 5, 3 et c. 17, 3. ubi μύθον ponit pro parte tragoediae vel epopoeiae, ibi hic novus et technicus vocis significatus valet: alioqui etiam in hoc libro μύθοι sunt fabulae (h. e. fabulosae narrationes). · τὰ δὲ ἤθη, καθ' ἃ ποιούς τινας εἶναί φαμεν: recte scripsit ποιούς τινας εἶναί φαμεν, non ποιοί τινες εἰσί: nam etiam secundum διάνοιαν sunt ποιοί τινες, sed si ποιό τητος hominum mentionem facimus, mores fere respicimus.

7. mvp-aristotle-comment-42

Ritter, cap. 6 § 7

καθ' ἃ ποιά τις ἐστὶν ἡ τραγῳδία : partes illae formam tragoediae et qualitatem efficiunt. infra eaedem (c. 24, 1) nullo additamento μέρη vocantur. interpolator huius operis μέρη οἷς ὡς εἴδεσι χρῆται ἡ τραγωδία c. 12, 1. has partes designavit, idemque alteras tragoediae partes quantitatis habita ratione ( μέρη κατὰ τὸ ποσόν) constituit c. 12, 1., easque c. 18, 2. μέρη simpliciter appellavit. οἷς μὲν γὰρ μιμοῦνται, δύο μέρη ἐστίν: sunt λέξις et μελοποιία. vid. §. 4. ὡς δὲ μιμοῦνται, ἓν : est ὄψις. v. §. 4. ἃ δὲ μιμοῦνται, τρία: sunt μῦθος et ἤθη et διάνοια.

8. mvp-aristotle-comment-43

Ritter, cap. 6 § 8

τούτοις μὲν οὖν - ὡσαύτως: vide possisne vel minimum ingenii Aristotelii vestigium in his agnoscere: ego non potui. cuivis tragoediae inesse sex illas partes dicit auctor personatus: verus autem (§. 11) pronuntiat non solum fieri posse tragoediam moribus carentem sed etiam a novis poetis fere ` ἀήθεις τραγῳδίας fieri. porro ne sibimet ipsa quidem haec consentiunt. nam si οὐκ ὀλίγοι αὐτῶν νίχ aliter atque de poetis tragicis accipi potest, primo non paucos eorum illis partibus (iste εἶδεσι, non μορίοις, posuit) usos esse et statim omnes isdem usos esse audimus. vel sic οὐκ ὀλίγοι αὐτῶν mire et obscure dictum est. tertium interpolationis signum est quod eadem sex nomina frigide et inepte, h. e. sine ullo consilio, recurrunt. accedunt tria indicia secundaria quibus idem probatur. corum primum est mira illa tragicorum poetarum vel generatim poetarum designatio, οὐκ ὀλίγοι αὐτῶν. alterum est πᾶν nude positum, quod quo referatur non habet: interpolator πᾶν δρᾶμα dicere videtur voluisse. tertium est additum ὡς εἰπεῖν, quod homo iste dormitans sine ratione et consilio chartae illevit. quartum adeo accedit. codices enim a Bekkero et Burgesio et aliis collati aut ὄψεις aut ὄψις exhibent, ubi ὄψις a librariis leviter a vero detortum est. quod Victorius in uno vetustissimo exemplari ὄψιν invenit, id correctori vitium ὄψις emendare temere festinanti tribuendum est, eo magis quod Madius ὄψιν in margine trium librorum ab alia manu scriptum repperit. itaque ὄψεις haud dubie vera scriptura est. sed Aristoteles ubi ὄψιν pro parte tragoediae ponit, ibi constanter et recte singularem admisit, non pluralem. vid. c. 6, 4 et 7. c. 24, 1. interpolator igitur nomen ὄψιν a se modo lectum ne repetere quidem recte potuit. conf. Comment. ad c. 6, 19.

9. mvp-aristotle-comment-44

Ritter, cap. 6 § 9

ἡ γὰρ τραγῳδία μίμησίς ἐστιν οὐκ ἀνθρώπων: tragoedia non ipsos homines, h. e. totam eorum qualitatem exprimit, sed singula quaedam eorum facinora imitatur. qualitatem ita tantum pingit, quatenus ea ex actis intelligitur. ἀλλὰ πράξεως [ καὶ βίου- οὐ ποιότης]: sic exhibemus hunc locum restitutum ex librorum scriptorum fide et purgatum additamentis, quae sive Aldus sive alii correctores Itali intulerunt. tragoediam esse imitationem vitae cuiusdam ( βίου) et felicitatis ( εὐδαιμονίας) pronuntiari utique nequit, ne de illis quidem tragoediis quae laeto eventu concluduntur. quid igitur fecerunt Itali ad hoc incommodum sublevandum vel tollendum? post εὐδαιμονίας continuo inseruerunt καὶ κακοδαιμονίας, ut iam tragoedia dicatur esse imitatio felicitatis et infelicitatis. restant alia. statim enim codices praebent καὶ ἡ κακοδαιμονία ἐν πράξει ἐστι. haec cum vel correctis illis καὶ εὐδαιμονίας καὶ κακοδαιμονίας male convenirent, iidem Itali scripserunt καὶ γὰρ ἡ εὐδαιμονία ἐν πράξει ἐστι. antiqua igitur scriptura ex scriptis libris restituta, videamus quid ea faciendum sit. interpolator aliquis antiquus apud Aristotelem paulo post cum legeret εἰσὶ.. κατὰ δὲ τὰς πράξεις εὐδαίμονες ἢ τουναντίον, inde sumpsit primum illud suum καὶ βίου καὶ εὐδαιμονίας, et hoc post πράξεως inseruit; tum propter illud τούναντίον adiecit explicationis gratia καὶ ἡ κακοδαιμονία ἐν πράξει ἐστί. porro cum legeret εἰσὶ δὲ κατὰ μὲν τὰ ἤθη ποιοί τινες, et paulo post ὥστε τὰ πράγματα καὶ ὁ μῦθος τέλος τῆς τραγωδίας, iste iam hic posuit καὶ τὸ τέλος πρᾶξίς τις ἐστίν, οὐ ποιότης. sed finem esse actionem, non qualitatem, monere h. 1. nihil attinebat. finis enim ( τὸ τέλος) per sese est quod homines omnibus factis suis consequi student (v. Ethica Nicom. 1, 5. Magna Mor. I, 4. Eudem. II, 1), tragoediae autem finis singulari quadam actione continetur. de fine igitur generatim dici quidquam h. 1. non aptum erat. quid, quod tragoediae finem esse τὸν μῦθον (h. e. πρᾶξιν sive πράγματα) non multo post ex praecedentibus demum colligitur? sic: ὥστε τὰ πράγματα καὶ ὁ μῦθος τέλος τῆς τραγῳδίας. itaque falsus scriptor verum praecurrens fini generatim vindicat 4) quae ille de tragoediae fine praedicat. insiticiis eiectis, Aristotelis ratiocinatio bene procedit, id quod manifestissimum est interpolationis indicium. propositio maior est ἡ γὰρ τραγῳδία μίμησίς ἐστιν οὐκ ἀνθρώπων (h. e. ποιότητος ἀνθρώπων) ἀλλὰ πράξεως. sequitur minor εἰσὶ δὲ (h. e. atqui sunt cet.) κατὰ μὲν τὰ ἤθη ποιοί τινες, κατὰ δὲ τὰς πράξεις εὐδαίμονες ἢ τουναντίον. inde hoc consectatarium est, οὔκουν (non igitur) ὅπως τὰ ἤθη (sive τὴν ποιότητα) μιμήσωνται πράττουσιν, ἀλλὰ τὰ ἤθη συμπεριλαμβάνουσι διὰ τὰς πράξεις. ex his tribus pronuntiatis consequitur iam altera et primaria conclusio ὥστε τὰ πράγματα καὶ ὁ μῦθος τέλος τῆς τραγῳδίας, cui cum successisset τὸ δὲ τέλος μέγιστον ἁπάντων, nunc ostensum est quod demon- 4) Quae interpolator de fine ( τῷ τέλει) profert, ea Aristotelis doctrinae alibi expositae non quidem repugnant, sed Aristoteles ipse placita sua neque loco non apto neque nisi aliis libris allegatis afferre solet.13) strandum ante proposuerat (§.9 init.), dico μέγιστον δὲ τούτων ἐστὶν ἡ τῶν πραγμάτων σύστασις. ex illo enim additamento τὸ δὲ τέλος μέγιστον ἁπάντων apparet fabulam non solum potiorem esse moribus sed potiorem etiam ceteris tragoediae partibus.

11. mvp-aristotle-comment-45

Ritter, cap. 6 § 11

post absolutam illam ratiocinationem (§. 9-10) hinc iam sequuntur quattuor σημεῖα, quibus quae ante demonstrata sunt firmari auctor voluit. primum est, sine moribus fieri tragoediam posse, sine fabula non posse. a

12. mvp-aristotle-comment-46

Ritter, cap. 6 § 12

ἔτι ἐάν τις ἐφεξῆς – καὶ σύστασιν πραγμάτων: est alterum σημεῖον. particulam negantem ante ποιήσει ex Aldina recepi cum ceteris editoribus. codicibus omittitur, et quidem ab omnibus ut videtur; Buhlius certe ex Winstanleii silentio nimis festinanter collegit οὐ inesse libris Mediceis. etiamsi concedere ultro velis, eum quoque qui deinceqs ponet sermones moratos et locutiones sententiasque bene factas, quodammodo facere quod sit tragici poetae officium, tum saltem scribi oportuit ποιήσει μὲν ὅ ἐστι τῆς τραγῳδίας ἔργον. ut nunc est, particula negante carere non possumus.

13. mvp-aristotle-comment-47

Ritter, cap. 6 § 13

tertium signum ad fabulae praestantiam et dignitatem declarandam ex partibus eius ducitur: nam cum eae valde graves sint, totum non minus grave esse sequitur. ceterum partes illae, περιπέτεια et ἀναγνώρισις, non in omnibus fabulis reperiuntur sed in unis implexis. haec igitur minus accurate scripta sunt.

14. mvp-aristotle-comment-48

Ritter, cap. 6 § 14

ἔτι σημεῖον κτλ. accedit quartum σημεῖον ad obtinendam sententiam §. 9. pronuntiatam. - οἷον καὶ οἱ πρῶτοι ποιηταὶ σχεδὸν ἅπαντες : non solum tragoediarum scriptores qui certare primum incipiunt in operis summa solent deficere, sed ceteri quoque poetae fere omnes, cum carmina pangere primum adgrediuntur.

15. mvp-aristotle-comment-49

Ritter, cap. 6 § 15

-19. quae iam sequuntur ab aliena manu Aristotelis operi inserta esse dico, et inserta quidem ab antiquo interpolatore qui hanc disputationem mancam esse ratus, cum unius fabulae dignitatis explicatio ei sufficere non videretur,ceterarum etiam partium ordinem et gradus exponendos sibi sumpsit, sed efficere quod operae pretium esset tamen non potuit, ut haec pro insiticiis habeam, quinque mihi suadent argumenta. 1. ordo singulis sententiis et nexus deest. 2. quae iam dicta sunt inepte repetuntur. 3. definitiones partim falsae partim inanes proponuntur. 4. nonnulla prioribus repugnant. 5. exposita fabulae prae ceteris partibus praestantia, post §. 14. apte pergere Aristoteles potest ut pergit capitis 7. initio. mores autem post fabulam gravissimam tragoediae partem esse, hoc sibi a legentibus concedi sperare ille poterat. singula ordine persequar. · παραπλήσιον - εἰκόνα: rerum complexionem primum tragoediae negotium esse, proximum autem descriptionem morum, id pessime hoc exemplo illustrari amantissimus quisque veritatis libenter mihi concesserit. scilicet φάρμακα pulcherrima et fuse illita comparavit iste cum moribus, imaginem albam delineatam cum fabula. utrisque delectari homines statuit, sed coloribus istis fuse illitis non aeque ( οὐχ ὁμοίως) atque imagine alba delineata. itaque (sic ille ratiocinatus est) fabula magis delectat quam mores, ideoque mores post fabulam collocandi sunt. hem hominem acutum. praeterea ἐναλείφειν τοῖς καλλίστοις φαρμάκοις est illinere pulcherrimis coloribus, ubi deest quid coloribus inducatur : quippe debuit ἐναλείψειε τὰ κάλλιστα φάρμακα. sed quaeritur possitne vitari offensio, si hic locus in fine §. 12. post ἔχουσα δὲ μῦθον καὶ σύστασιν πραγμάτων inseratur, id quod fecerunt et Buhlius et Hermannus. ego non sequar; primum quia transpositio ipsa violentum est remedium, tum quia non esse Aristotelis scio in re manifesta post minimum intervallum ex eadem arte exemplum petere, quod fit si haec post §. 12. inseruntur, deinde quod comparatio vel sic male instituta est: nam tum colores nullo ordine ( χύδην) illiti conferuntur moralibus sermonibus deinceps positis, cet. aliud indicium, quo transpositionem perperam fieri liquet, ex sequentibus (§. 15 extr.) se offert: nam transpositione facta, iam illa ἔστι τε μίμησις πράξεως, καὶ διὰ ταύτην μάλιστα τῶν πραττόντων sic legi non possunt, sed pro τε cum Hermanno γὰρ substituendum est. sed quis tandem pro γὰρ ponere τε animum induxisset, si id ab initio fuisset? immo τε non mutandum: interpolator enim iam alterum affert σημεῖον, unde mores post fabulam proximum locum occupare iste prò- bare intendit, idque imperite adnectit ἔστι τε μίμησις κτλ., imperite quidem sed tam bene quam ab isto exspectari potest. ipsam suam sapientiam hausit ex Aristoteliis illis (§. 10) οὔκουν ὅπως τὰ ἤθη μιμήσωνται πράττουσιν, ἀλλὰ τὰ ἤθη συμπεριλαμβάνουσι διὰ τὰς πράξεις. cum scribit τῶν πραττόντων, cogitavit iste τῆς ποιότητος (vel ἤθων) τῶν πραττόντων. fortasse respexit etiam illa (§. 9) ἡ γὰρ τραγῳδία μίμησίς ἐστιν οὐκ ἀνθρώπων ἀλλὰ πράξεως.

16. mvp-aristotle-comment-50

Ritter, cap. 6 § 16

τρίτον δὲ διάνοια. τοῦτο κτλ. διάνοιαν Aristoteles definivit §. 6., interpolator definitionem h. 1. promit ab Aristotelia multum diversam et paulo post (§. 17) aliam etiam cum Aristotelia convenientem. num haec Aristostoteli tribuemus ? num Aristolelem eodem capite ter ad idem revolvi putabimus? sed vide mihi priorem hanc interpolatoris definitionem διανοίας: esse facultatem dicendi ( τὸ λέγειν δύνασθαι) quae in re sint quaeque apta sint. nimirum Aristoteles διάνοιαν partem tragoediae intelligit (den Gedankengehalt), interpolator eandem pro facultate humana accipit (die Fähigkeit das Richtige und Passende zu sagen.) - ὅπερ ἐπὶ τῶν λόγων κτλ. technicus noster digreditur ad orationes. conf. Commentar. ad c. 25,3. quod sequitur οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἀρχαῖοι πολιτικῶς ἐποίουν λέγοντας, οἱ δὲ νῦν ῥητορικῶς, perperam de poetis tragicis antiquis et novis dictum esse multi crediderunt: immo tota illa digressio ὅπερ ἐπὶ τῶν λόγων - ῥητορικῶς aperte oratores spectat, non poetas. distinguit interpolator inter oratores politicos, h. e. qui de veris causis dicebant, et scholasticos qui fictas componebant.

17. mvp-aristotle-comment-51

Ritter, cap. 6 § 17

ὃ δηλοῖ τὴν προαίρεσιν ὁποία τις: haec hausta sunt ex Rhetoricis III, 16. p. 1417 a 15. statim autem discurrit iterum ad orationes, διόπερ οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἦθος τῶν λόγων ἐν οἷς cet., et mire scribit τῶν λόγων ἐν οἷς cet. pro τῶν λόγων ὅσοις μηδ' ὅλως ἔνεστι, quam insolentiam in Latina interpretatione servavi. iam tertium revolvitur homo inconstantissimus ad διάνοιαν, et nunc quidem eius definitionem promit Aristoteli consentientem, sed suae modo prolatae repugnantem.

18. mvp-aristotle-comment-52

Ritter, cap. 6 § 18

τέταρτον - δύναμιν: haec omnia inania sunt et inepta et Aristoteliis male convenientia. Aristoteles enim λέξιν partem tragoediae constituit, et quidem eam partem quae numeris inclusa est sed cantu et saltatione caret, senarios, etiam tetrametros et anapaestos plerosque, hic homo orationum elocutionem intelligit et paulo post non recte Aristotelis definitione percepta addit λέξιν esse τὴν διὰ τῆς ὀνομασίας ἑρμηνείαν. scilicet interpolator explicat quam λέξιν vulgo intelligant homines, Aristoteles eodem nomine nove usus est ad designandam tragoediae partem. ἐπὶ τῶν λόγων: in orationibus prosa sermone conscriptis.

19. mvp-aristotle-comment-53

Ritter, cap. 6 § 19

quae a §. 15 usque ad hunc locum tractavi, ea non esse Aristotelis in posterum omnes credituros esse spero : sed quae iam sequuntur fortasse defendi possunt, si quis in fine §. 14. verba δεύτερον δὲ τὰ ἤθη a me Aristoteli relicta etiam interpolatori tribuat, ut finis §. 14. et initium §. 19. in hunc modum connectantur ἀρχὴ μὲν οὖν καὶ οἷον ψυχὴ ὁ μύθος τῆς τραγῳδίας· τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν πέντε ἡ μελοποιία μέγιστον τῶν ἡδυσμάτων. sed haec quoque defensio consistere nequit. nam cum adhuc, ex medio sublatis illis §. 15-18., de duobus (de moribus et fabula) dictum esset, pergere debuit τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν τεττάρων, non πέντε. neque ratio est, cur διάνοιαν et λέξιν silentio transmitti, ὄψιν autem et μελοποιίαν rursus memorari vellet. accedunt alia quae statim afferentur. τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν πέντε: quomodo quinque partes supersunt, cum post quattuor ante commemoratas duae restent, μελοποιία et ὄψις ? dixerit aliquis, postremo disputatum esse de dictione ( λέξει), quam respiciens Aristoteles scripserit τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν πέντε. sed haec vana sunt. sic enim )haec prodit sententia, μελοποιίαν excepta dictione ( λέξει) omnium partium summum esse condimentorum tragoediae, sed quis λέξιν condimentum tragoediae appellaverit? immo tragoediae ne sunt quidem condimenta, sed sunt dictionis ( λέξεως), numeri videlicet et cantus. vid. c. 6, 3. hoc πέντε igitur dormitanti homini tribuendum erit. ἡ δὲ ὄψις-ποιητικῆς: haec per se non falsa videntur, sed vix conciliari poterunt cum illa Aristotelis sententia (§. 4) quae ὄψιν necessariam tragoediae partem constituit. neque id verum omnino videtur, ὄψιν esse ἀτεχνότατον καὶ ἥκιστα οἰκεῖον τῆς ποιητικῆς: immo in excogitandis rerum et casuum formis in scena repraesentandis magna poе- tae solertia versari potest. interpolator de rebus quibusdam externis cogitasse videtur. id apparet ex additis ἡ γὰρ τῆς τραγῳδίας δύναμις καὶ ἄνευ ἀγῶνος καὶ ὑποκριτῶν ἐστίν. est sane, sed tamen sine ὄψει tragoedia consistere non potest: nam si legitur tantum, ὄψις illa suppleri a legentibus vel audientibus debet, ut ne sic quidem deesse possit. - ἔτι δὲ κυριωτέρα- τῶν ποιητῶν ἐστίν: etiam haec argumento sunt, interpolatorem quid ὄψιν Aristoteles intellexerit non satis percepisse. numerum pluralem apud verum Aristotelem in hoc opere non invenio. vid. c. 6, 8., ubi ὄψεις in loco ab aliena manuinserta. numeri insolentiam tenui in Latina interpretatione.

1. mvp-aristotle-comment-54

Ritter, cap. 7 § 1

Actio tragoediae subiecta tota sit oportet. eius quod est totum definitio. iusta actionis tragicae mensura. Postquam tragoediae definitionem proposuit et partes enumeravit, fabulamque sive rerum complexionem esse sum- *mum et primum tragoediae negotium monstravit, iam ad hanc partem accuratius declarandam accedit, idque argumentumpertractavit. c. 7-11 et c. 13-14. quae inter utrumque locum interposita sunt (c. 12), ea pro falsis habenda esse ostendere suo loco conabor. διωρισμένων- τῆς τραγῳδίας ἐστίν: haec perbene succedunt post illa c. 6, 14., quae insertis falsis ab hisce seiuncta et divulsa sunt. particula ἐπειδὴ (quandoquidem) certis argumentis id niti significat quod h. 1. enuntiatur.

2. mvp-aristotle-comment-55

Ritter, cap. 7 § 2

κεῖται δ᾽ ἡμῖν: quod certum est nullis moveri vel ferri dubitationis fluctibus cogitatur sed eodem loco permanere et iacere. contrarium, est κινεῖσθαι et ἀμφισβητεῖσθαι. de quibus inter omnes convenit, ea τὰ κείμενα sunt in Metaphysicis O. 4. p. 1047 b 10. ἔστι γὰρ ὅλον καὶ μηδὲν ἔχον μέγεθος: haec fortasse ex glossa nata sunt. admonitio enim supervacanea est et inutilis. incipit eodem fere modo atque subsequens τοῦ ὅλου definitio: ἔστι γὰρ ὅλον cet. et ὅλον δ' ἐστὶ cet.; itemque structura καὶ μηδὲν ἔχον μέγεθος statim redit τὸ ἔχον ἀρχὴν cet.

3. mvp-aristotle-comment-56

Ritter, cap. 7 § 3

ὅλον δ' ἐστὶ - τελευτήν: totum esse cuius sit principium et finis et medium cum definitur, haec definitio tum erit manifesta, si quid sit principium et finis et medium non ignoraveris. tres igitur definitionis notiones statim explanantur. ἀρχὴ δ' ἐστὶν κτλ. quot modis ἀρχὴ diceretur, in Metaphysicis 1. 1. explicatur, huc pertinet quarta illa ratio: ἡ δὲ ὅθεν πρῶτον ἡ κίνησις πέφυκεν ἄρχεσθαι καὶ μεταβολή. ἢ ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἢ ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ: aut necessario aut probabiliter. ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ idem est atque κατὰ τὸ εἰκός. vid. infra §. 7. κατὰ τὸ εἰκὸς ἢ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον. c. 10, 3. ἢ ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἢ κατὰ τὸ εἰκός. nimirum quod plerumque fit, id probabiliter fieri dicimus, quod semper, necessario id fieri colligimus. finis ex principio et medio ita procedere potest, ut aut praeter hunc alius esse non possit, aut talis consequatur qualis plerumque ex illo principio et medio nascitur. μήθ' ὁπόθεν ἔτυχεν ἄρχεσθαι μήθ' ὅπου ἔτυχε τελευτᾶν: tragoediae fabula ita constituenda est, ut actionis principium non desit, h. e. ut actio tragica ex aliaextra tragoediam sita non necessario consequatur. non negligendum est quod in definitione τῆς ἀρχῆς additur μετ' ἀνάγκης. nam quo minus quidquam praecesserit quo actio in tragoedia magnopere afficiatur, nihil est quod impediat, dummodo ne tale quid praegressum sit, unde nihil nisi actio illa tragica posset oriri: ita enim fabula principio suo orbata erit. idem dici de fine potest. ea enim fabula vere finita est, cuius actio ita exit, ut nova actio inde necessario consequi non videatur. mirum sane est, quod h. 1. nihil de trilogiis tragoediarum expositum invenimus. sane hic locus erat, si de illa compositione tragoediarum quidquam dicere voluisset.

4. mvp-aristotle-comment-57

Ritter, cap. 7 § 4

τὸ γὰρ καλόν ἐν μεγέθει καὶ τάξει ἐστί: pulchrum ( τὸ καλόν) oritur, ubi varium quoddam forma vel idea comprehenditur et in unum collectum a nobis percipitur. conf. Polit. VII, 4. p. 1326 a 32. θείας γὰρ δὴ τοῦτο δυνάμεως ἔργον, ἥτις καὶ τόδε συνέχει τὸ πᾶν, ἐπεὶ τό γε καλὸν ἐν πλήθει καὶ μεγέθει εἴωθε γίνεσθαι. de pulchri definitione ab Aristotele passim significata potius quam explicata disputavit Eduardus Müller in Historia doctrinae artis apud veteres vol. II. p. 95 sqq. ceterum structura verborum, coepta ab illis (§. 4 init.) ἔτι δ᾽ ἐπεὶ τὸ καλὸν cet., interiecta hac sententia τὸ γὰρ καλὸν ἐν μεγέθει cet. abrumpitur et demum §. 5. iterum inchoatur. quae secum comparantur haec sunt: ἔτι δ' ἐπεὶ τὸ καλὸν καὶ ζῷον καὶ ἅπαν πρᾶγμα ὃ συνέστηκεν ἔκ τίνων, οὐ μόνον ταῦτα τεταγμένα δεῖ ἔχειν, ἀλλὰ καὶ μέγεθος ὑπάρχειν μὴ τὸ τυχόν ..., οὕτω (§. 5) καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν μύθων ἔχειν μὲν μῆκος, τοῦτο δ᾽ εὐμνημόνευτον εἶναι. conf. Comment. ad c. 2, 1. ... διὸ οὔτε πάμμικρον ἄν τι γένοιτο καλόκ ζῷον .. οὔτε παμμέγεθες: hisce similia exposita legimus in Politicis VII, 4. – συγχεῖται γὰρ ἡ θεωρία κτλ. ubi contemplatio confunditur, unum illud ac varium simul percipere ideoque ipsum pulchrum agnoscere non pot- οἷον εἰ μυρίων σταδίων εἴη ζῷον: similiter sed minus ὑπερβολικῶς loquitur in Politicis VII, 4. p. 1326 a est.40. οἷον πλοῖον σπιθαμιαῖον μὲν οὐκ ἔσται πλοῖον ὅλως, οὐδὲ δυοῖν σταδίοιν. ::

6. mvp-aristotle-comment-58

Ritter, cap. 7 § 6

ὥσπερ ποτὲ καὶ ἄλλοτε φασίν: quid sibi velit hoc inane additamentum, nemo demonstrare potuit. si explicamus quomodo olim et alias factum esse dicunt, primum additur quod non inest in Graecis (factum esse), tum ἄλλοτε inepte post ποτέ et frigide adiungitur. nam si ποτέ et ἄλλοτε sibi respondent, varia tempora indicantur ¹). quapropter eae voces per xa ὶ connecti non possunt, non magis quam Latinis modo et modo dicere licet pro modo - modo. :